68p02902w66 A Uk

CATEGORY 323 CATEGORY 423 CATEGORY 523 CATEGORY 623 INDEX
TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE PARTS INFORMATION

CONFIGURATION INFORMATION
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor
Including:
68P02902W67-A
Service Manual
68P02902W68-A
68P02902W69-A
GSM-208-020
68P02902W70-A
68P02902W66-A
GSM-208-020
Service Manual
outdoor
Horizonmacro 12 carrier
Horizonmacro 12
carrier outdoor
Including:
68P02902W67-A
68P02902W68-A
68P02902W69-A
68P02902W70-A
Service
Manual
Positin mark for TED spine
68P02902W66-A
GSM-208-020
Service Manual
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor
E Motorola 2000-2002
All Rights Reserved
Printed in the U.K.
Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A i
GSM-208-020
Copyrights, notices and trademarks
Copyrights
The Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computer
programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other
countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyright computer programs, including the
exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyright computer program. Accordingly, any
copyright Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this document
may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola.
Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by
implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of
Motorola, except for the rights that arise by operation of law in the sale of a product.
Restrictions
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola. It is furnished under a license
agreement and may be used and/or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of the agreement.
Software and documentation are copyright materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by
law. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored
in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any
means, without prior written permission of Motorola.
Accuracy
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola
assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from the use
of the information obtained herein. Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products
described herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this
document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any
person of revisions or changes. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the application
or use of any product or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent
rights of others.
Trademarks
and MOTOROLA are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc.

Aspira, Intelligence Everywhere, M-Cell and Taskfinder are trademarks of Motorola Inc.
All other brands and corporate names are trademarks of their respective owners.

ii 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-020
Contents
Issue status of this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
First aid in case of electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Reporting safety issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Warnings and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
General warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
General cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Devices sensitive to static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Motorola GSM manual set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
GMR amendment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
GMR amendment record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Category 323
Technical Description (Tech.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Chapter 1
Overview and specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Equipment introduction and manual definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–1
Overview of Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–1
Names and acronyms for enclosure equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–2
View of the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–3
Names and acronyms for Horizonmacro indoor equipment . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–4
View of the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–5
Functional diagram of Horizonmacro indoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–6
Ancillary enclosure (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–7
View of the ancillary enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–7
Finding information in this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–8
Specifications – Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–9
Introduction to specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–9
Approval and safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–9
Environmental limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–9
Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–10
Power specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–10
RF power output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–11
Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–11
Battery backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–12
Network transmission options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–12
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–12
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–12
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–12
Frequency capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–13
Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–14
Structural requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–15
Enclosure site dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–16

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A iii
GSM-208-020
Specifications – ancillary enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–17

Introduction to ancillary enclosure specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–17
Specification compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–17
Battery specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–17
Battery backup duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–18
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–18
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–18
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–18
Ancillary enclosure enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–19
Site layout plan – ancillary enclosure with main enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–20
Chapter 2
Enclosure structure and components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–1
Introduction to the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–1
Enclosure description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–1
View of the components within the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–2
Alarm interface module (AIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–3
Functional description of the AIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–3
AIM block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–3
AIM connector locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–4
AIM connector pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–5
DIP switch settings on the AIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–13
Surge arrester holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–14
Primary ac terminal box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–15
Primary ac terminal box location and function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–15
View of the primary ac terminal box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–15
Fan tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–16
Introduction to the fan tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–16
Fan tray description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–16
View of the fan tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–16
Smoke detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–17
Operation of the smoke detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–17
Enclosure lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–18
Enclosure lighting description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–18
Doors and hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–19
Door function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–19
Operation of the door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–19
Hood function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–20
Hood operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–20
Hood view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–20
Cable entry to the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–21
Cable entry overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–21
Low level cable entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–21
Cable entry from beneath the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–22
Optional high level cable entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–23
Optional cable shroud and cable termination bracket kits . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–24

iv 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-020
Chapter 3
Enclosure power distribution equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Overview of the power distribution equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–1
Introduction to the power distribution equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–1
Operation of the power distribution equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–1
View of the power distribution equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–2
AC power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–3
AC distribution description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–3
View of the ac power distribution unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–3
AC circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–4
AC distribution circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–4
DC power distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–5
DC distribution description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–5
View of the dc power distribution unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–5
DC circuit breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–6
DC distribution circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–6
DC fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–7
The power control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–8
Overview of the power control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–8
Front panel view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–8
Front panel controls and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–9
Alarm management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–10
Alarm inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–10
Alarm output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–11
The rectifier module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–12
Rectifier module overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–12
View of the rectifier module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–12
Rectifier functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–13
Front panel LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–13
Rectifier functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–14
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–14
Protection circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–15
Thermal protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–15
Control and alarm signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–16
Rectifier module pinout connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–17
The dc connector panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–18
Description of the dc connector panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–18
View of the dc connector panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–18
Internal battery backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–19
Overview of the internal battery backup system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–19
View of the internal battery backup compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–19
Battery thermal charge compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–20
Battery connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–20

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A v
GSM-208-020
Chapter 4
Heat management system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Overview of the heat management system (HMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 4–1
Introduction to the HMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 4–1
Operation of the HMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 4–1
HMS control board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 4–2
View of the HMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 4–2
Airflow through the HMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 4–3
Operation of the heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 4–3
HMS specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 4–4
Introduction to HMS specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 4–4
Power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 4–4
Protection rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 4–4
Physical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 4–4
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 4–4
Temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 4–4
Fan setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 4–5
Chapter 5
Horizonmacro indoor cabinet structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Cabinet structure of Horizonmacro indoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–1
External cabinet view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–1
Overview of structure description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–2
Filled cabinet view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–3
Empty cabinet and SURF harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–4
SURF harness and cabinet attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–4
Cabinet view with installed SURF harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–4
SURF harness view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–5
Top panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–6
Top panel description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–6
Top panel view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–6
Cage backplane interface panel harness assembly (CBIA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–7
CBIA overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–7
CBIA and interface panel schematic view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–7
Backplane and harness view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–8
CBIA cage function and diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–9
CBIA harness function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–9
CBIA backplane function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–10
Attachment of cage to cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–10
Interface panel function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–11
Interface panel diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–11
Interface panel pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–11
Cabinet door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–12
Door external and internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–12
Chapter 6
Horizonmacro indoor temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Indoor temperature control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 6–1
Overview of indoor temperature control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 6–1
Temperature shutdown sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 6–1
Cabinet restart after shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 6–1

vi 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-020
Indoor fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 6–2

Indoor fan overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 6–2
Fan operation and reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 6–2
Filter sheet option and effect on fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 6–2
Chapter 7
Horizonmacro indoor power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Power supply modules (PSMs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 7–1
Overview of PSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 7–1
PSM location and redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 7–1
PSM alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 7–2
PSM module view and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 7–2
PSM backplane protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 7–2
MicroBCU power supply module (BPSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 7–3
Introduction to the BPSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 7–3
BPSM diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 7–3
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 7–4
Circuit breaker module (CBM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 7–5
CBM overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 7–5
View of the CBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 7–5
Operation of the CBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 7–6
Chapter 8
RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
RF equipment detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–1
RF equipment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–1
RF specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–1
Receive (Rx) RF hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–1
Transmit (Tx) RF hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–2
Rx/Tx single antenna duplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–2
RF overview and RF test function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–3
RF overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–3
RF main component explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–3
RF loopback purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–4
RF loopback hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–4
RF loopback software operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–4
Functional diagram of RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–5
Description of RF test modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–6
Compact transceiver unit (CTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–7
Overview of the CTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–7
CTU internal boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–7
Alarm reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–8
View of the CTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–9
CTU connectors and reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–10
CTU input/output diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–11
CTU Tx connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–12
CTU Rx function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–12
CTU Tx function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–13
CTU digital processing and control functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–15
CTU uplink/downlink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–18

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A vii
GSM-208-020
CTU frequency hopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–19

Overview of CTU frequency hopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–19
Synthesizer Frequency Hopping (SFH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–19
SFH example not through BCCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–20
SFH example hopping through BCCH carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–20
Baseband frequency hopping (BBH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–21
BBH example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–21
SURF module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–23
SURF module overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–23
Single band SURF module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–24
Single band SURF functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–26
Single band SURF functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–27
Dual band SURF module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–28
Dual band SURF functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–29
Tx blocks overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–31
Introduction to Tx blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–31
Screw retention in Tx block locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–31
View of basket for Tx blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–32
Transmit block connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–32
View of Tx block connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–33
Blanking plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–34
Purpose of blanking plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–34
View of blanking plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–34
Feedthrough plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–35
Purpose of feedthrough plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–35
View of feedthrough plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–35
Feedthrough plate connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–35
HCU plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–36
HCU overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–36
HCU view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–36
HCU functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–36
HCU connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–37
TDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–38
Overview of TDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–38
TDF view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–38
TDF functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–39
TDF connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–39
Dual band TDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–40
Overview of dual band TDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–40
Dual band TDF view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–40
Dual band TDF functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–41
Dual band TDF connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–41
DCF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–42
DCF overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–42
DCF view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–42
DCF functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–43
DCF connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–43

viii 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-020
DDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–44

Overview of DDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–44
DDF view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–44
DDF functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–45
DDF connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–45
Chapter 9
Digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Overview of digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–1
Overview, locations and redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–1
Digital module and BPSM locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–1
MCUF and NIU redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–2
Full size and half size modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–2
Digital module and CTU connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–3
Diagram of digital module and CTU connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–3
MCUF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–4
MCUF overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–4
Capability to replace MCU of M-Cell6 and M-Cell2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–4
GPROC, TSW and GLCK functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–5
MCUF module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–5
MCUF functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–6
Link to redundant MCUF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–7
Front panel interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–7
Front panel switches and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–8
PIX interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–9
DRAM, flash EPROM and code loading functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–9
ASIC functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–10
Sync block functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–11
Integral MCUF FMUX functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–13
NIU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–14
Overview of NIU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–14
NIU locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–14
NIU command identity number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–14
NIU view and LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–15
NIU functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–15
NIU diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–16
Control processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–17
NIU/MCUF framing and clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–17
Distance measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–18
Radio signalling links (RSLs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–18
T1 NIU need to set link type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–18
T43/BIB-NIU - E1/T1 mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–19
Overview of T43/BIB-NIU connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–19
NIU to T43 mapping and command ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–19
Diagram of T43 connection to NIUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–20
FMUX module and function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–21
Overview of FMUX module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–21
FMUX module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–21
FMUX functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–22
FMUX functional explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–22

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A ix
GSM-208-020
Alarm module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–23

Alarm module overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–23
Alarm module view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–23
Alarm module functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–24
Alarm module replacement – effect on alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–24
Alarm collection from extension cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–24
Alarm module display presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–25
Chapter 10
Ancillary enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Ancillary enclosure structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 10–1
Introduction to the ancillary enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 10–1
Mechanical design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 10–1
Ancillary enclosure layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 10–2
Ancillary enclosure technical description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 10–3
Circuit diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 10–3
The battery management module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 10–4
BMM connector pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 10–6
The battery strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 10–9
The heater unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 10–9
AC isolator switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 10–9
Smoke detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 10–9
Enclosure lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 10–10
Category 423
Installation & Configuration (Inst.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Chapter 1
Introduction to installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Introduction to installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 1–1
Installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 1–1
Manual scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 1–1
Software requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 1–2
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 1–2
Contact information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 1–2
Tool kit requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 1–3
Overview for tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 1–3
Tool kit list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 1–3
Chapter 2
Site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Preparation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–1
Overview to site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–1
Pre-installation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–1

x 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-020
Site requirements and considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–2

Overview of requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–2
Equipment dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–2
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–2
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–3
Power specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–3
RF power output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–4
Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–5
Battery backup (internal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–5
Battery backup (external) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–5
Network transmission options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–5
Environmental requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–6
Structural requirements (main enclosure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–6
Structural requirements (ancillary enclosure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–7
Enclosure site plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–7
Ancillary enclosure site plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–8
Visiting the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–9
Overview of site visit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–9
Before departure to site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–9
Arrival at all sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–9
Arriving at occupied sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–9
Arriving at unoccupied sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–10
Leaving site during installation and optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–10
Rubbish on site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–10
Rural sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–10
On site safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–11
Preparing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–12
Introduction to site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–12
Base site structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–12
Site requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–12
Site access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–12
Site layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–12
Earthing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–13
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–13
Earthing requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–13
Earth electrode system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–13
Cross bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–14
Earthing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–14
Earth electrode testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–15
Preparing the foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–17
Overview of foundation preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–17
Enclosure foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–18
Preparing the foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–18
Chapter 3
Installing the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Installation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–1
Introduction to installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–1
Installation sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–1
E1/T1 line testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–1
Enclosure components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–2
Equipment package units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–3

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A xi
GSM-208-020
Equipment delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–4

Delivery and packaging overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–4
Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–4
Weather conditions affecting unpacking/installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–5
Overview of weather considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–5
Weather conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–5
Maintenance cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–5
Unpacking and preparing the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–7
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–7
Avoiding condensation build up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–7
Safety considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–8
Enclosure access procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–9
Enclosure unpacking and preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–10
Safe disposal of packing material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–10
Installing mounting bolt anchors using the template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–11
Introduction to mounting bolt anchor installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–11
View of template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–11
Procedure for marking bolt hole positions using the template . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–12
Procedure for installing enclosure bolt anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–13
Fitting the enclosure onto its base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–14
Procedure for fitting an enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–14
Earthing and transient protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–15
Site earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–15
Transient and lightning protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–15
Installing the rectifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–16
Introduction to rectifier installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–16
Rectifier installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–17
Installing the internal batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–18
Introduction to installing the internal batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–18
Procedure for installing the internal batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–18
Battery installation diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–19
Installing cables and connecting power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–20
Overview of power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–20
Cable routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–20
Enclosure earthing points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–21
Preparing for connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–21
Cable entry to the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–21
Supply cable identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–31
Connecting 230 V 3-phase (star) ac power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–32
Configuring the primary ac terminal box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–32
Connecting 230 V ac 3-phase (star) mains input cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–32
230 V ac 3-phase (star) wiring diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–33
Connecting 230 V single phase ac power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–34
Connecting 230 V ac single phase mains input cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–34
230 V ac single phase wiring diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–35

xii 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-020
Checking default settings on the AIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–36

AIM DIP switch settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–36
Chapter 4
Installing the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Cabinet identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–2
Cabinet view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–3
Equipment delivery and unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–5
Packaging crate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–6
Equipment module packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–6
Unpacking the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–7
CTU allotted slot retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–8
Installing the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–9
Overview of the installation procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–9
Eyebolt lifting positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–10
Procedure for installing indoor cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–11
Cabinet securing plates and brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–12
Illustration of completed installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–13
Connecting RF cables and antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–14
Overview of RF connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–14
Types of RF connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–15
SURF/Tx block interconnecting cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–15
Unused SMA connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–15
Torque of RF connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–15
RF connection principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–16
Rx/Tx duplexing on a single antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–16
Suggested RF configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–17
Overview of configuration diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–17
Single cabinet configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–18
Configuration for omni 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–18
Omni 1 or 2 (with non-diversity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–18
Configuration for omni 3 or 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–19
Configuration for sector 1/1 or 2/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–21
Configuration for sector 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–22
Configuration for single cabinet sector 3/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–22
Configuration for single cabinet sector 1/1/1, 1/1/2, 1/2/2 or 2/2/2 . . . . . Inst. 4–23

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A xiii
GSM-208-020
Dual cabinet configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–24

Configuration for 2 cabinet sector 3/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–24
Configuration for 2 cabinet sector 5/5 or 6/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–25
Configuration for 2 cabinet sector 2/2/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–26
Configuration for 2 cabinet sector 3/3/3 or 4/4/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–27
Configuration for dual band 1/1/1-3/3/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–29
Configuration for dual band 3/3/3–1/1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–30
Connecting fibre optic cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–31
Location of fibre optic connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–31
Care of fibres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–32
Connecting fibre optic link between BTS 0 and BTS 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–33
Interface panel cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–34
Interface panel diagram and pinout overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–34
Interface panel pinouts table list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–35
GPS pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–35
RTC pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–36
BIB connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–37
T43 connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–38
PIX inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–39
ICS pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–40
External alarm pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–41
Connecting power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–42
Overview to power and earth cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–42
Cabinet and ESP earthing points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–42
Cabinet dc connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–43
DC power cable connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–44
Chapter 5
Installing the ancillary enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Introduction to ancillary enclosure installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–1
Installation scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–1
Ancillary enclosure layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–2
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–3
Tools required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–3
Structural requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–3
Drilling mounting holes prior to equipment arrival . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–3
Unpacking and preparing the ancillary enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–4
Enclosure access procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–5
Procedures for unpacking and preparing the ancillary enclosure . . . . . . Inst. 5–6
View of ancillary enclosure template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–8
Procedure for marking ancillary enclosure bolt hole positions . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–9
Procedure for installing ancillary enclosure bolt anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–10

xiv 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-020
Fitting the ancillary enclosure onto its base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–11

Procedure for fitting an ancillary enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–11
Existing RF cable re-routeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–13
Installing the ancillary enclosure on the left of the main enclosure . . . . . Inst. 5–14
Wiring the ancillary enclosure to the main enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–15
Introduction to wiring the ancillary enclosure to the main enclosure . . . . Inst. 5–15
Preparing the main enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–15
AC supply connection to the main enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–16
Connecting the dc supply and alarm cables to the main enclosure . . . . Inst. 5–17
DIP switch settings on the AIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–19
Installing the battery strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–20
Introduction to battery string installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–20
Battery installation safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–21
Procedure for installing the monoblocs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–22
Chapter 6
Horizonmacro interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Introduction to interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 6–1
Mixed product sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 6–1
Architectural constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 6–1
BTS architectures and interoperability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 6–2
M-Cell6 and Horizonmacro architectures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 6–2
Example mixed site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 6–3
Technical issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 6–4
Receive path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 6–4
Transmit path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 6–7
M-Cell6 and Horizonmacro hardware equivalents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 6–10
Further configuration information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 6–10
Example configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 6–11
Special hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 6–14
Chapter 7
Site commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Commissioning overview and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–1
Overview of commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–1
PC to MCUF cable pin connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–1
Test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–2
Pre-power up checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–3
Overview of pre-power up checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–3
Visual inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–4
Request for connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–4
Earth continuity check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–9
AC power system insulation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–10
Powering up the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–11
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–11
AC power up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–11
DC power up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–12

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A xv
GSM-208-020
Testing the HMS units and the heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–13

HMS unit test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–13
Testing the heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–13
Powering up the Horizonmacro cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–14
Power up procedure without code load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–14
Power down of cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–15
Power up procedure with code load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–16
Cabinet and CBM views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–19
Commissioning the ancillary enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–20
Pre-power up checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–20
Power up sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–20
Power down sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–21
Chapter 8
Site decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Overview of decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 8–1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 8–1
Outline of the procedure to decommission the equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 8–1
Decommissioning the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 8–2
Before starting to decommission the indoor cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 8–2
Procedure to decommission an indoor cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 8–2
Horizonmacro indoor cabinet checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 8–4
Decommissioning the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 8–5
Before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 8–5
Procedure to decommission the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 8–5
Lifting the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 8–6
Enclosure checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 8–7
Decommissioning the ancillary enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 8–8
Procedure to decommission the ancillary enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 8–8
Lifting the ancillary enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 8–10
Restoring the main enclosure to operational state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 8–11
Ancillary enclosure checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 8–12
Category 523
Maintenance Information (Maint.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Chapter 1
Introduction to maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Maintenance information introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 1–1
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 1–1
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 1–1
Torque values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 1–1
Reporting faulty devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 1–1
Contact information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 1–1

xvi 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-020
Weather conditions affecting access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 1–2

Overview of weather considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 1–2
Weather conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 1–2
Maintenance cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 1–2
Chapter 2
General maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
General maintenance overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–1
Introduction to general maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–1
Cleaning agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–1
Maintenance support procedures for the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–2
Introduction to procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–2
Door opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–2
Hood opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–2
General maintenance procedures for the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–3
Type of procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–3
Procedures - door and hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–3
Cleaning inlet and outlet grilles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–3
Checking normal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–3
Inspection of cabinet, locks and hinges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–5
Periodic check of the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–6
Return to service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–6
Routine maintenance for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–7
Routine maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–7
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–7
Door opening and closing procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–7
Indoor cabinet 6-monthly maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–9
Cleaning air inlets and filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–9
Checking earth connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–9
Indoor cabinet 12-monthly maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–10
Summary of 12-monthly procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–10
Checking and cleaning fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–10
Cabinet modules in operational positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–11
Annual check of the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–12
Mechanical inspection of cabinet, locks and hinges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–14
Routine maintenance for the ancillary enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–15
Routine mainenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–15
Assumptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–15
Opening and closing the ancillary enclosure door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–15
Ancillary enclosure 12-monthly maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–16
Checking cable integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–16
Checking the operation of the heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–16
Partial discharge test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–17

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A xvii
GSM-208-020

Mechanical inspection of the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–18
Chapter 3
Enclosure FRU replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Overview of replacement procedures for enclosure FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–1
Introduction to enclosure FRU replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–1
Isolating the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–1
FRU list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–1
FRU view of the enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–2
Replacing non-FRU parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–2
Replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–3
Introduction to fuse replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–3
Fuse replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–3
Replacing a battery pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–4
Introduction to battery pack replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–4
Battery pack replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–5
Replacing a rectifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–6
Introduction to rectifier replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–6
Replacement procedure for a rectifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–7
Replacing the power control module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–8
Introduction to power control module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–8
Power control module replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–9
Battery float charge adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–9
Replacing the heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–10
Introduction to heater replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–10
Heater replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–11
Replacing a fan tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–12
Introduction to fan tray replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–12
Fan tray replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–13
Replacing a HMS unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–14
Introduction to HMS replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–14
HMS replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–15
Replacing the alarm interface module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–16
Introduction to AIM replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–16
AIM replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–16
Chapter 4
Indoor cabinet FRU replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Overview of replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–1
Field replaceable units (FRUs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–1
Isolating the indoor cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–1
FRU list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–1
FRU view of cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–2

xviii 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-020
Additional replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–3

Policy on non-FRU parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–3
List of non-FRU parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–3
CBIA attachment screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–3
Replacing a circuit breaker module (CBM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–4
Preconditions for CBM replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–4
Views of CBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–4
Replacement procedure for CBM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–5
Replacing a power supply module (PSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–6
Preconditions for PSM replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–6
View of PSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–6
Replacement procedure for non-redundant PSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–7
Replacement procedure for redundant PSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–7
Replacing a fan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–8
Preconditions for fan replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–8
Views of 2-fan and 4-fan units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–8
Identifying fan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–9
Replacement procedure for fan units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–9
Replacing a CTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–10
Preconditions for CTU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–10
View of the CTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–10
Replacement procedure for a CTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–11
Preserving CTU calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–13
Introduction to preserving CTU calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–13
Calibration data overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–13
Test equipment required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–17
Commands used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–17
CINDY commissioning tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–17
Enabling the preserve CTU calibration data feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–18
Introduction to the preserve CTU calibration data feature . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–18
Enabling the preserve feature at the OMC-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–18
Enabling the preserve feature at the BSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–18
CTU calibration data exchange procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–19
Introduction to CTU calibration data exchange procedures . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–19
Preserve CTU calibration data procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–10
CTU calibration procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–20
CTU recalibration procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–22

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A xix
GSM-208-020
Calibrating CTU bay level offset tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–24

Introduction to bay level offset tables calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–24
Preparation for bay level calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–26
Branch 1 RX0A bay level calibration procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–28
Test frequency tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–30
900 (dual band) SURF Rx1800 1A bay level calibration procedure . . . . Maint. 4–35
Branch completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–36
Branch 2 procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–36
Calibration check procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–37
Site restoration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–40
Replacing a Tx block module or plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–41
Preconditions for Tx block replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–41
Views of Tx blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–41
Replacement procedure for Tx blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–42
Blanking plate, feedthrough plate or HCU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–43
Replacing a SURF module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–44
Preconditions for SURF replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–44
View of the SURF module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–44
Replacement of a SURF module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–45
Digital module replacement (MCUF, NIU, FMUX, BPSM, alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–47
Introduction to digital module replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–47
Diagram of digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–47
Replacement procedures for digital modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–48
Redundant MCUF firmware compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–50
Overview of MCUF firmware compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–50
Checking MCUF firmware compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–50
Updating redundant MCUF firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–50
Testing MCUF redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–53
Calibrating the MCUF (GCLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–54
Introduction to MCUF (GLCK) calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–54
When to calibrate the GCLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–54
Preparation for GCLK calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–55
GCLK calibration procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–56
Replacing a door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–59
Introduction to door replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–59
Views of the door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–59
Replacing a door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–60
Replacing a cabinet heat sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–61
Overview of heat sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–61
Procedure for heat sensor replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–61
Chapter 5
Ancillary enclosure FRU replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Overview of ancillary enclosure FRU replacement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 5–1
Introduction to FRU replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 5–1
FRU list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 5–1
FRU view of the ancillary enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 5–2

xx 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-020
Replacing a battery string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 5–3

Introduction to battery string replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 5–3
Internal battery replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 5–3
Replacing the heater unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 5–9
Replacement procedure for the heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 5–9
Replacing a voltage sense board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 5–11
Introduction to voltage sense board replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 5–11
Replacement procedure for a voltage sense board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 5–11
Replacing a voltage sense cable set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 5–13
Introduction to replacing voltage sense cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 5–13
Replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 5–13
Replacing a fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 5–14
Chapter 6
Site verification procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Introduction to Horizonmacro verification procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–1
Purpose of this chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–1
Test equipment, leads and plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–2
Introduction to test equipment, leads and plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–2
Test leads required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–3
CTU VSWR and cell site offset information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–5
Introduction to output power calibration and VSWR check . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–5
Test stages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–7
Preparation for output power calibration and VSWR check . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–7
Normal CTU VSWR and cell site power calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–9
Introduction to normal VSWR and cell site power calibration . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–9
Automatic VSWR test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–10
Manual VSWR test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–11
VSWR reverse power test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–12
Tx output power calibration procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–13
RF output power check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–14
Returning the CTUs to call processing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–15
Checking the database equipage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–16
Introduction to checking the database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–16
Preparation for database checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–16
Database equipage check procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–17

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A xxi
GSM-208-020
Checking the E1/T1 link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–18

Introduction to checking the E1/T1 link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–18
Preparation for the E1/T1 link check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–18
E1/T1 link test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–19
Checking PIX connections and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–20
Introduction to checking the PIX connections and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–20
Preparing for the PIX connections and alarms test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–21
PIX connection test procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–21
Category 623
Parts Information (Parts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Chapter 1
Enclosure parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Parts information introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts 1–1
Parts list general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts 1–1
Enclosure parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts 1–1
Indoor cabinet parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts 1–1
Ancillary enclosure parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts 1–1
FRU items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts 1–1
Ordering method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts 1–1
Diagram of Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure FRUs . . . . . . . . Parts 1–2
Parts for the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts 1–3
Enclosure standard equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts 1–3
Spares table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts 1–4
Optional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts 1–4
Chapter 2
Horizonmacro indoor cabinet parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Parts for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts 2–1
Diagram of Horizonmacro indoor cabinet FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts 2–1
Chapter 3
Ancillary enclosure parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Parts for the ancillary enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts 3–1
Diagram of the ancillary enclosure FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts 3–1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I–1

xxii 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-020 Issue status of this manual
Issue status of this manual
Introduction
The following shows the issue status of this manual since it was first released.
Version
information
The following lists the versions of this manual in order of manual issue:
Manual Date of Remarks

issue issue
O 14th Sep 00 Original issue.
A 29th May 02 Includes redesigned component information (e.g.
SURF, indoor cabinet internal fans and
packaging). Optimization information added.
Resolution of
Service
Requests
The following Service Requests are now resolved in this manual:
Service GMR Remarks

Request Number
N/A N/A

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A 1
General information GSM-208-020
General information
Important
notice
If this manual was obtained when attending a Motorola training course, it will not
be updated or amended by Motorola. It is intended for TRAINING PURPOSES
ONLY. If it was supplied under normal operational circumstances, to support a
major software release, then corrections will be supplied automatically by
Motorola in the form of General Manual Revisions (GMRs).
Purpose
Motorola cellular communications manuals are intended to instruct and assist
personnel in the operation, installation and maintenance of the Motorola cellular
infrastructure equipment and ancillary devices. It is recommended that all
personnel engaged in such activities be properly trained by Motorola.
WARNING Failure to comply with Motorola’s operation, installation

and maintenance instructions may, in exceptional
circumstances, lead to serious injury or death.
These manuals are not intended to replace the system and equipment training
offered by Motorola, although they can be used to supplement and enhance the
knowledge gained through such training.
About this
manual
The manual contains: technical description of the hardware elements,
installation and configuration information, repair procedures and parts lists for
the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure (including the Horizonmacro
indoor cabinet) and the optional ancillary enclosure.
The objectives are to help the reader:
S Gain an overview of the equipment and interconnection of components.
S Understand the function and operation of all components.
S Recognize equipment configurations.
S Be aware of the warnings (potential for harm to people) and cautions
(potential for harm to equipment) to be observed when working on the
equipment.
S Understand how to install and commission the equipment.
S Understand how to inspect, maintain and repair the equipment.
S Have a clear, ready reference for all dedicated information in one manual.

2 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-020 General information
Cross
references
Throughout this manual, cross references are made to the chapter numbers and
section names. The section name cross references are printed bold in text.
This manual is divided into uniquely identified and numbered chapters that, in
turn, are divided into sections. Sections are not numbered, but are individually
named at the top of each page, and are listed in the table of contents.
Text
conventions
The following conventions are used in the Motorola cellular infrastructure
manuals to represent keyboard input text, screen output text and special key
sequences.
Input
Characters typed in at the keyboard are shown like
this.
Output
Messages, prompts, file listings, directories, utilities, and
environmental variables that appear on the screen are shown like
this.
Special key sequences

Special key sequences are represented as follows:
CTRL–c Press the Control and c keys at the same time.

ALT–f Press the Alt and f keys at the same time.
| Press the pipe symbol key.
CR or RETURN Press the Return (Enter) key. The Return key is
identified with the ↵ symbol on both the PC and
the Sun keyboards. The keyboard Return key
may also be identified with the word Return.

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A 3
First aid in case of electric shock GSM-208-020
First aid in case of electric shock
Warning
WARNING Do not touch the victim with your bare hands until the
electric circuit is broken.
Switch off. If this is not possible, protect yourself with
dry insulating material and pull or push the victim clear of
the conductor.
Artificial
respiration
In the event of an electric shock it may be necessary to carry out artificial
respiration. Send for medical assistance immediately.
Burns treatment
If the patient is also suffering from burns, then, without hindrance to artificial
respiration, carry out the following:
1. Do not attempt to remove clothing adhering to the burn.
2. If help is available, or as soon as artificial respiration is no longer required,
cover the wound with a dry dressing.
3. Do not apply oil or grease in any form.

4 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-020 Reporting safety issues
Reporting safety issues
Introduction
Whenever a safety issue arises, carry out the following procedure in all
instances. Ensure that all site personnel are familiar with this procedure.
Procedure
Whenever a safety issue arises:
1. Make the equipment concerned safe, for example, by removing power.
2. Make no further attempt to tamper with the equipment.
3. Report the problem directly to the Customer Network Resolution Centre,
Swindon +44 (0)1793 565444 or China +86 10 68437733 (telephone) and
follow up with a written report by fax, Swindon +44 (0)1793 430987 or
China +86 10 68423633 (fax).
4. Collect evidence from the equipment under the guidance of the Customer
Network Resolution Centre.

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A 5
Warnings and cautions GSM-208-020
Warnings and cautions
Introduction
The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this manual and
in all manuals of this Motorola manual set.
Warnings
Definition of Warning
A warning is used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss
of life, physical injury, or ill health. This includes hazards introduced during
maintenance, for example, the use of adhesives and solvents, as well as those
inherent in the equipment.
Example and format

WARNING Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or data in/out
connectors. Laser radiation can come from either the data
in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables
connected to data in/out connectors.
Cautions
Definition of Warning
A caution means that there is a possibility of damage to systems, software or
individual items of equipment within a system. However, this presents no danger
to personnel.
Example and format

CAUTION Do not use test equipment that is beyond its calibration
due date when testing Motorola base stations.

6 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-020 General warnings
General warnings
Introduction
Observe the following warnings during all phases of operation, installation and
maintenance of the equipment described in the Motorola manuals. Failure to
comply with these warnings, or with specific warnings elsewhere in the Motorola
manuals, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of
the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply
with these requirements.
Warning labels
Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any
warning labels fitted to the equipment. Warning labels must not be removed,
painted over or obscured in any way.
Specific
warnings
Warnings particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned on the
equipment and within the text of this manual. These must be observed by all
personnel at all times when working with the equipment, as must any other
warnings given in text, on the illustrations and on the equipment.
High voltage
Certain Motorola equipment operates from a dangerous high voltage of 230 V
ac single phase or 415 V ac three phase supply which is potentially lethal.
Therefore, the areas where the ac supply power is present must not be
approached until the warnings and cautions in the text and on the equipment
have been complied with.
To achieve isolation of the equipment from the ac supply, the ac input isolator
must be set to off and locked.
Within the United Kingdom (UK) regard must be paid to the requirements of the
Electricity at Work Regulations 1989. There may also be specific country
legislation which need to be complied with, depending on where the equipment
is used.
RF radiation
High RF potentials and electromagnetic fields are present in the base station
equipment when in operation. Ensure that all transmitters are switched off when
any antenna connections have to be changed. Do not key transmitters
connected to unterminated cavities or feeders.
Refer to the following standards:
S ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to
Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to
300 GHz.
S CENELEC 95 ENV 50166-2, Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields
High Frequency (10 kHz to 300 GHz).

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A 7
General warnings GSM-208-020
Laser radiation
Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or optical data in/out connectors.
Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated
fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.
Lifting
equipment
When dismantling heavy assemblies, or removing or replacing equipment, the
competent responsible person must ensure that adequate lifting facilities are
available. Where provided, lifting frames must be used for these operations.
When equipments have to be manhandled, reference must be made to the
Manual Handling of Loads Regulations 1992 (UK) or to the relevant manual
handling of loads legislation for the country in which the equipment is used.
Do not ...
... substitute parts or modify equipment.
Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute
parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment. Contact Motorola
if in doubt to ensure that safety features are maintained.
Battery supplies
Do not wear earth straps when working with standby battery supplies.
Toxic material
Certain equipment may incorporate components containing the highly toxic
material Beryllium or its oxide Beryllia or both. These materials are especially
hazardous if:
S Beryllium materials are absorbed into the body tissues through the skin,
mouth, or a wound.
S The dust created by breakage of Beryllia is inhaled.
S Toxic fumes are inhaled from Beryllium or Beryllia involved in a fire.
Beryllium warning labels are fitted to equipment incorporating Beryllium or
Beryllium Oxide. Observe all safety instructions given on warning labels.
Beryllium Oxide is used within some components as an electrical insulator.
Captive within the component it presents no health risk whatsoever. However, if
the component should be broken open or burnt, the Beryllium Oxide, in the form
of dust or fumes, could be released, with the potential for harm.
Lithium
batteries
Lithium batteries, if subjected to mistreatment, may burst and ignite. Defective
lithium batteries must not be removed or replaced. Any boards containing
defective lithium batteries must be returned to Motorola for repair.

8 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-020 General cautions
General cautions
Introduction
Observe the following cautions during operation, installation and maintenance of
the equipment described in the Motorola manuals. Failure to comply with these
cautions or with specific cautions elsewhere in the Motorola manuals may result
in damage to the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customer’s
failure to comply with these requirements.
Caution labels
Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any
caution labels fitted to the equipment. Caution labels must not be removed,
painted over or obscured in any way.
Specific
cautions
Cautions particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned within the text
of this manual. These must be observed by all personnel at all times when
working with the equipment, as must any other cautions given in text, on the
illustrations and on the equipment.
Fibre optics
The bending radius of all fibre optic cables must not be less than 30 mm.
Static discharge
Motorola equipment contains CMOS devices that are vulnerable to static
discharge. Although the damage caused by static discharge may not be
immediately apparent, CMOS devices may be damaged in the long term due to
static discharge caused by mishandling. Wear an approved earth strap when
adjusting or handling digital boards.
See Devices sensitive to static for further information.

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A 9
Devices sensitive to static GSM-208-020
Devices sensitive to static
Introduction
Certain metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) devices embody in their design a thin
layer of insulation that is susceptible to damage from electrostatic charge. Such
a charge applied to the leads of the device could cause irreparable damage.
These charges can be built up on nylon overalls, by friction, by pushing the
hands into high insulation packing material or by use of unearthed soldering
irons.
MOS devices are normally despatched from the manufacturers with the leads
shorted together, for example, by metal foil eyelets, wire strapping, or by
inserting the leads into conductive plastic foam. Provided the leads are shorted
it is safe to handle the device.
Special
handling
techniques
In the event of one of these devices having to be replaced, observe the
following precautions when handling the replacement:
S Always wear an earth strap which must be connected to the electrostatic
point (ESP) on the equipment.
S Leave the short circuit on the leads until the last moment. It may be
necessary to replace the conductive foam by a piece of wire to enable the
device to be fitted.
S Do not wear outer clothing made of nylon or similar man made material. A
cotton overall is preferable.
S If possible work on an earthed metal surface. Wipe insulated plastic work
surfaces with an anti-static cloth before starting the operation.
S All metal tools should be used and when not in use they should be placed
on an earthed surface.
S Take care when removing components connected to electrostatic sensitive
devices. These components may be providing protection to the device.
When mounted onto printed circuit boards (PCBs), MOS devices are normally
less susceptible to electrostatic damage. However PCBs should be handled with
care, preferably by their edges and not by their tracks and pins, they should be
transferred directly from their packing to the equipment (or the other way
around) and never left exposed on the workbench.

10 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-020 Motorola GSM manual set
Motorola GSM manual set
Introduction
The following manuals provide the information needed to operate, install and
maintain the Motorola equipment.
Generic GSM
manuals
The following are the generic manuals in the GSM manual set, these manuals
are release dependent:
Classification
number Name Order number
GSM-100-101 System Information: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W01
GSM-100-201 Operating Information: GSM System Operation . . . 68P02901W14
GSM-100-202 Operating Information: OMC-R System
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W19
GSM-100-313 Technical Description: OMC-R Database Schema . 68P02901W34
GSM-100-320 Technical Description: BSS Implementation . . . . . . . 68P02901W36
GSM-100-321 Technical Description: BSS Command Reference . 68P02901W23
GSM-100-403 Installation & Configuration: GSM System
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W17
GSM-100-423 Installation & Configuration: BSS Optimization . . . . 68P02901W43
GSM-100-413 Installation & Configuration: OMC-R Clean Install . . 68P02901W47
GSM-100-501 Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at
the OMC-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W26
GSM-100-520 Maintenance Information: BSS Timers . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W58
GSM-100-521 Maintenance Information: Device State Transitions 68P02901W57
GSM-100-523 Maintenance Information: BSS Field
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W51
GSM-100-503 Maintenance Information: GSM Statistics
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W56
GSM-100-721 Software Release Notes: BSS/RXCDR . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W72
GSM-100-712 Software Release Notes: OMC-R System . . . . . . . . 68P02901W74

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A 11
Motorola GSM manual set GSM-208-020
Related GSM
manuals
The following are related Motorola GSM manuals:
Classification
GSM-001-103 System Information: BSS Equipment Planning . . . . 68P02900W21
GSM-002-103 System Information: DataGen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02900W22
GSM-002-703 Software Release Notes: DataGen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02900W76
GSM-005-103 System Information: GSM Advance Operational
Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02900W25
GSM-008-103 System Information: Network Health Analyst . . . . . . 68P02900W36
GSM-008-703 Software Release Notes: Network Health Analyst . 68P02900W77
GSM-TOOLS-001 System Information: Cell Optimization (COP) . . . . . 68P02900W90
GSM-TOOLS-002 System Information: Motorola Analysis and
Reporting System (MARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02900W94
GSM-TOOLS-701 Software Release Notes: Cell Optimization (COP) . 68P02900W69
GSM-TOOLS-702 Software Release Notes: Motorola Analysis and
Reporting System (MARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02900W68
GSM-006-202 Operating Information: OMC-R System
Administration (OSI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W10
GSM-006-413 Installation & Configuration: OSI Clean Install . . . . . 68P02901W39
GSM-006-712 Software Release Notes: OMC-R OSI System . . . . 68P02901W70
Generic GPRS
manuals
The following are the generic manuals in the GPRS manual set, these manuals
are release dependent:
Classification
GPRS-300-101 System Information: GPRS Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02903W01
GPRS-300-202 Operating Information: OMC-G System
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02903W03
GPRS-300-222 Operating Information: GSN System Administration 68P02903W37
GPRS-300-313 Technical Description: OMC-G Database Schema . 68P02903W46
GPRS-300-321 Technical Description: GSN Command Reference . 68P02903W18
GPRS-300-423 Installation & Configuration: GSN Clean Install . . . . 68P02903W47
GPRS-300-413 Installation & Configuration: OMC-G Clean Install . 68P02903W04
GPRS-300-501 Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at
the OMC-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02903W19
GPRS-300-503 Maintenance Information: GSN Statistics
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02903W20
GPRS-300-722 Software Release Notes: GSN System . . . . . . . . . . 68P02903W76
GPRS-300-712 Software Release Notes: OMC-G System . . . . . . . . 68P02903W70
Related GPRS
manuals
The following are related Motorola GPRS manuals:
Classification
GPRS-001-103 System Information: GPRS Equipment Planning . . 68P02903W02
GPRS-005-103 System Information: GSN Advance Operational
Impact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02903W38

12 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-020 Motorola GSM manual set
BSS service
manuals
The following are the Motorola Base Station service manuals, these manuals
are not release dependent. The internal organization and makeup of service
manual sets may vary, they may consist of from one to four separate manuals,
but they can all be ordered using the overall catalogue number shown below:
Classification
GSM-100-020 Service Manual: BTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W37
GSM-100-030 Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W38
GSM-105-020 Service Manual: M-Cell2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W75
GSM-106-020 Service Manual: M-Cell6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W85
GSM-201-020 Service Manual: M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ . . . . . . . 68P02901W95
GSM-202-020 Service Manual: M-Cellaccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02901W65
GSM-203-020 Service Manual: Horizonmicro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02902W36
GSM-206-020 Service Manual: Horizoncompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02902W15
GSM-205-020 Service Manual: Horizonmacro Indoor . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02902W06
GSM-204-020 Service Manual: Horizonmacro Outdoor . . . . . . . . . . 68P02902W12
GSM-207-020 Service Manual: Horizonoffice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68P02902W46
GSM-209-020 Service Manual: Horizonmicro2 Horizoncompact2 . 68P02902W61
GSM-208-020 Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 Carrier Outdoor 68P02902W66
GPRS service
manuals
The following are the Motorola GPRS service manuals, these manuals include
the Packet Control Unit (PCU) service manual which becomes part of the BSS
for GPRS:
GPRS-301-020 Service Manual:GPRS Support Nodes (GSN) . . . . . 68P02903W05
GPRS-302-020 Service Manual: Packet Control Unit (PCU) . . . . . . . 68P02903W10
Classification
number
The classification number is used to identify the type and level of a manual. For
example, manuals with the classification number GSM-100-2xx contain
operating information.
Order number
The Motorola 68P order (catalogue) number is used to order manuals.
Ordering
manuals
All orders for Motorola manuals must be placed with your Motorola Local Office
or Representative. Manuals are ordered using the order (catalogue) number.
Motorola manual sets may also be ordered on CD-ROM.

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A 13
GMR amendment GSM-208-020
GMR amendment
Introduction to
GMRs
Changes to a manual that occur after the printing date are incorporated into the
manual using General Manual Revisions (GMRs). GMRs are issued to correct
Motorola manuals as and when required. A GMR has the same identity as the
target manual. Each GMR is identified by a number in a sequence that starts at
01 for each manual at each issue. GMRs are issued in the form of loose leaf
pages, with a pink instruction sheet on the front.
GMR procedure
When a GMR is received, remove and replace pages in this manual, as detailed
on the GMR pink instruction sheet.

14 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-020 GMR amendment record
GMR amendment record
GMR
instructions
When a GMR is inserted in this manual, the amendment record below is
completed to record the GMR. Retain the pink instruction sheet that
accompanies each GMR and insert it in a suitable place in this manual for future
reference.
Amendment
record
Record the insertion of GMRs in this manual in the following table:
GMR number Incorporated by (signature) Date
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A 15
GMR amendment record GSM-208-020

16 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02
CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 3 CHAPTER 4 CHAPTER 5
OVERVIEW AND ENCLOSURE STRUCTURE ENCLOSURE POWER HEAT MANAGEMENT HORIZONMACRO INDOOR
SPECIFICATIONS AND COMPONENTS DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT SYSTEM CABINET STRUCTURE
HORIZONMACRO INDOOR HORIZONMACRO INDOOR RF MODULES DIGITAL MODULES ANCILLARY ENCLOSURE
TEMPERATURE CONTROL POWER SUPPLY
Category 323
Technical Description (Tech.)
Technical Description: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A i
GSM-208-323

ii 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323
Category 323
Technical Description (Tech.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Chapter 1
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–12
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–12
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–18
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–18
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–18
Chapter 2

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A iii
GSM-208-323

Fan tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–16
Hood view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–20
Chapter 3
DC fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–7

iv 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323

Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–14
Chapter 4
Chapter 5

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A v
GSM-208-323

Top panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–6
Chapter 6
Indoor fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 6–2
Chapter 7
PSM alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 7–2

vi 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323
Chapter 8
RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
RF overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–3
BBH example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–21
SURF module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–23

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A vii
GSM-208-323

HCU plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–36
HCU view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–36
TDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–38
TDF view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–38
DCF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–42
DCF view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–42
DDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–44
DDF view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–44
Chapter 9

GSM-208-323
MCUF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–4

NIU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–14
NIU diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–16
Chapter 10

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A ix
GSM-208-323


x 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Chapter 1
Overview and specifications

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A i
GSM-208-323

ii 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323
Chapter 1
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–12
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–12
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–18
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–18
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–18

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A iii
GSM-208-323

iv 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Equipment introduction and manual definition
Equipment introduction and manual definition

Overview of
Horizonmacro
12 carrier
outdoor
This section is designed to give the reader a basic understanding of the
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor equipment and optional ancillary enclosure.
The Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor is a one to twelve carrier Base Transceiver
Station (BTS). The enclosure can contain either one (for six carrier) or two (for
twelve carrier) Horizonmacro indoor BTS cabinets that have variants that
operate in the following frequency bands: GSM850, GSM/EGSM900, DCS1800,
and PCS1900.
The enclosure operates from a nominal 230 V, single phase or three phase ac
supply. Temperature control within the enclosure is provided by two heat
management systems (HMS), one located on the inside of each enclosure door.
Figure 1-1 shows an external view of a standard Horizonmacro 12 carrier
outdoor enclosure.
Figure 1-1 External view of the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 1–1
Equipment introduction and manual definition GSM-208-323
Names and
acronyms for
enclosure
equipment
The 12 carrier outdoor BTS consists of an enclosure (see Figure 1-2), which
contains the following equipment:
S Heat Management System (HMS) – one mounted on the inside of each
door.
S Primary ac terminal box – mounted on the left side of the enclosure rear
wall.
S Power Distribution Unit (PDU) racks for ac and dc power distribution –
mounted in the lower part of the enclosure, one on the left (PDU B) and
one on the right (PDU A).
S Power control module – mounted in PDU B.
S Rectifier module – these are mounted in PDU A, or both PDU A and
PDU B. Two rectifier modules may be fitted in PDU A for a 1 to 6 carrier
site and two additional modules may be fitted in PDU B for a 7 to 12
carrier site. An additional rectifier may be fitted in PDU B to provide
redundancy for the system.
S –48 V dc connector panel – mounted in PDU A, to the right of the
rectifiers.
S Horizonmacro indoor – one or two cabinets may be mounted in the
enclosure, above the PDU racks. These take up the bulk of the space in
the enclosure.
S Alarm Interface Module (AIM) – mounted on the left side of the enclosure,
above the backup battery compartment.
S Backup batteries – mounted on two shelves in a compartment on the left
side of the enclosure.
S Heater – one heater is mounted in PDU A, to the left of the rectifiers.
S Fan trays – one fan tray is mounted in the base of each side of the
enclosure, below the rectifier modules.

Tech. 1–2 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
View of the
enclosure
Figure 1-2 shows the location of components in the Horizonmacro 12 carrier
outdoor.
HORIZONMACRO PRIMARY AC
INDOOR CABINET TERMINAL BOX
(BTS 1)
HORIZONMACRO
INDOOR CABINET
ALARM INTERFACE (BTS 0)
MODULE
LAPTOP COMPUTER RECTIFIERS
SUPPORT BRACKET (HIDDEN)
BACKUP
BATTERIES
RECTIFIERS
HMS 1
FAN
POWER DC CONNECTOR
TRAY HEATER
CONTROL PANEL
MODULE 6 U SPACE FOR (HIDDEN)
CUSTOMER
EQUIPMENT
AC AND DC FAN
POWER TRAY
DISTRIBUTION (HIDDEN)
UNITS
Figure 1-2 Enclosure with major components identified

(hood and right door removed)

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 1–3
Names and
acronyms for
Horizonmacro
indoor
equipment
One or two –48 V Horizonmacro indoor cabinets (see Figure 1-3) can be
installed in the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure, on a shelf above the PDU racks. If
only one cabinet is installed (BTS 0), it must be fitted on the right side of the
enclosure, above PDU A. A second cabinet (BTS 1) is installed on the left side
of the enclosure, above PDU B.
Each Horizonmacro indoor cabinet can contain the following equipment:
S A digital module shelf, located in the lower right side of the cabinet. This
contains master and optional redundant digital modules:
– Fibre optic Multiplexer (FMUX), master in BTS 0 and slave in BTS 1.
A second FMUX can be fitted in each BTS to provide redundancy.
– Main Control Unit with dual FMUX (MCUF). A second MCUF can be
fitted in each BTS to provide redundancy.
– Network Interface Units (NIUs), four in total.
– An alarm board (no redundancy option).
– One or two (for redundancy) mBCU Power Supply Modules (BPSMs).
S Up to three –48 V Power Supply Modules (PSMs) and one Circuit Breaker
Module (CBM) in the upper right side of the cabinet. The PSMs are load
sharing, with the third PSM providing optional redundancy.
NOTE The PSMs fitted in the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet must
be of the –48 V type if the cabinet is to be installed in the
12 carrier outdoor enclosure.
S Up to six Compact Transceiver Units (CTUs), located in the left side of the
cabinet.
S Fan modules mounted in the bottom of the unit, two 2-fan modules and
one 4-fan module.
S RF modules, mounted in the top panel, comprising transmit (Tx) blocks,
and a receive (Rx) module, the Sectorized Universal Receiver Front-end
(SURF).
S Interface panel, mounted in the top panel, for customer power and
communications connectors.

Tech. 1–4 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
View of the
Horizonmacro
indoor cabinet
Figure 1-3 shows the structure of an Horizonmacro indoor cabinet, with major
components identified.
RF MODULES POWER SUPPLIES AND

ONE SURF (Rx)
CIRCUIT BREAKER
THREE Tx BLOCKS THREE PSMs

(DCFs SHOWN AS EXAMPLE) CIRCUIT T43/BIB
BREAKER
MODULE (CBM)
SIX TRANSCEIVERS DC POWER IN
(CTUs)
INTERFACE
PANEL
CONNECTORS
TWO 2-FAN UNITS

ONE 4-FAN UNIT
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SYSTEM
ALARM MODULE
DIGITAL MCUF
MODULES ig.128.rh
FMUX/NIU/BPSM
(NOT VISIBLE)
Figure 1-3 Structure of the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet (door removed)

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 1–5
Functional
diagram of
Horizonmacro
indoor
Figure 1-4 shows the functional modules of a Horizonmacro indoor. Only one
transceiver and one Tx block have been shown, and the thermal management
system and power supplies are omitted for clarity.
ANTENNAS (Tx and Rx

TO SURF OF SEPARATE OR COMBINED)
SECOND INDOOR
CABINET
(Rx 0A / 0B ONLY)
Rx Rx Rx Rx FILTER
Tx FILTER
SWITCH (CONTROLLED BY CTU)
UP TO THREE
SURF Tx BLOCKS
Rx A Rx B RF
LOOPBACK
Tx
UP TO SIX TRANSCEIVERS
(CTUs)
RF
MODULES
DIGITAL
MODULES
6 TO TRANSCEIVERS OF
/ 1/
FMUX ANOTHER CABINET
1 TO TRANSCEIVERS OF
FMUX /
ANOTHER CABINET
MCUF
FMUX 1 TO TRANSCEIVERS OF
/
ANOTHER CABINET
NIU NIU NIU NIU
TO NETWORK
Figure 1-4 Functional diagram of Horizonmacro indoor cabinet components

Tech. 1–6 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Ancillary
enclosure
(optional)
The ancillary enclosure is a customer option which is specifically designed to
extend the battery backup capability of the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor
enclosure (the main enclosure).
The ancillary enclosure can accommodate one, two, or three additional battery
strings, thus enabling battery backup time to be extended from 0.7 hours
(available using the main enclosure internal battery string only) up to a
maximum of 4.0 hours.
View of the
ancillary
enclosure
Figure 1-5 shows the ancillary enclosure with major components identified.
LIGHT (NOT VISIBLE)
BATTERY MANAGEMENT
MODULE
BATTERY STRING 3
BATTERY STRING 2
BATTERY STRING 1
HEATER TEST BUTTON
AC SUPPLY
ISOLATOR SWITCH
HEATER UNIT
ADJUSTABLE SHELVING
Figure 1-5 Structure of the ancillary enclosure (door removed)

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 1–7
Finding
information in
this manual
This service manual comprises the four categories below:
S Category 323
Provides an introduction, specification, and technical description.
S Category 423
Provides information for installation and commissioning.
S Category 523
Provides information on maintenance and repair, with procedures to
change Field Replaceable Units (FRUs).
S Category 623
Provides the range of options and spares.
The Category 323 technical description is divided into chapters, based on
functionality:
S Overview and specifications (this chapter).
S Enclosure structure, including:
The alarm interface module, primary ac terminal box, fan trays, lights,
smoke detector, doors and hood, and cable entry methods.
S Enclosure power distribution, describing:
The ac and dc PDUs, the rectifier modules, power control module, dc
connector panel, and battery backup.
S Heat management system (HMS), describing:
HMS units mounted on the doors and the separate heater.
S Horizonmacro indoor cabinet structure, describing:
The internal structure and layout of the indoor cabinet.
S Horizonmacro indoor temperature control, describing:
The temperature control system, including sensors and fans.
S Horizonmacro indoor power supply, describing:
DC power distribution, including the PSM, BPSM, and CBM.
S Horizonmacro indoor RF modules, including:
CTU, SURF and Tx blocks.
S Horizonmacro indoor digital modules, including:
MCUF, NIU, T43/BIB connections, FMUX and alarm module.
S Ancillary enclosure (optional), describing:
The technical features of the optional ancillary enclosure.
Each category and chapter has a table of contents (TOC). Headings are
designed to convey contents accurately, to enable manual search.
The index provides an alternative method of finding subsections of information.
This chapter provides a summary of the equipment to enable the reader to
understand terminology, and thus locate information via the TOCs and index.

Tech. 1–8 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Specifications – Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor
Specifications – Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor
Introduction to
specifications
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor specifications are provided in this section.
Approval and
safety
The specification compliance for the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor is shown
in Table 1-1.
Table 1-1 Specification compliance

GSM/EGSM900 & DCS1800 GSM850 & PCS1900
Type ETS 301 502
approval
CFR47 Part 2
CFR47 Part 22 (850 only)
EMC EN301 489-8
CFR 47 Part 2 and 15
Safety EN 60215, IEC 60215, EN 60950, IEC 950,
CSA 22.2 No. 950, UL 1950
The Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor is designed to comply with BS7671 (16th
edition).
Environmental
limits
The environmental limits for the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor equipment is
shown in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 Environmental limits

Environment Temperature Relative Humidity
Operating –33 _C to +45 _C 5% to 100% relative humidity, not to
plus a solar gain of exceed 30 g water / m3 air.
1.2 kW/m2
Storage –45 _C to +70 _C 8% to 100% relative humidity, not to
exceed 30 g water / m3 air.
NOTE This specification is valid up to 3 km altitude,
corresponding to an atmospheric pressure range of 648 to
1048 millibars. The maximum ambient temperature
corresponding to an atmospheric pressure of 648 millibars
is 40 _C.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 1–9
Specifications – Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor GSM-208-323
Software
requirements
The GSM/EGSM900 and DCS1800 BTSs require BSS and OMC-R software
release GSR4 (or higher) in the network.
The GSM850 and PCS1900 BTSs require BSS and OMC-R software release
GSR5.1 (or higher) in the network.
Power
specifications
Enclosure input power supply requirements

The power requirements for the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure are
shown in Table 1-3.
Table 1-3 Main outdoor enclosure power requirements

Nominal Voltage Supply voltage Current supply
and frequency maximum
range
230 V ac three phase 20 A per phase
and neutral (star) 150 to 264 V ac
or at 45 to 65 Hz
230 V ac single phase 60 A
Power consumption
The Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor power consumption figures are shown in
Table 1-4.
Table 1-4 Power consumption of full enclosure (12 carriers)

Typical measured consumption Maximum power consumption
4054 W 6080 W
NOTE The maximum power consumption figures apply to

extreme operating conditions (minimum operating ambient
temperature, heaters on, maximum RF output power,
charging batteries and lowest module efficiencies, for
example).
Typical power consumption is for the equipment running at
full RF output power, trickle battery charge and nominal
module efficiencies.

Tech. 1–10 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Maximum thermal dissipation

Thermal dissipation has to remove the energy of maximum power consumption,
less RF power output of the 12 transceivers.
Maximum power consumption: 6080 W.

12 DCS1800 CTUs at full power at antenna: (12 x 16 = 192) approx. 200 W.
12 EGSM900 CTUs at full power at antenna: (12 x 20 = 240) approx. 250 W.
Maximum thermal dissipation, DCS1800: 6080 – 200 = 5880 W.
Maximum thermal dissipation, EGSM900: 6080 – 250 = 5830 W.
NOTE Thermal dissipation figures are not currently available for

when 850 MHz or 1900 MHz CTUs are used.
RF power
output
The RF power output figures are shown in Table 1-5 and Table 1-6.
Table 1-5 RF power output at CTU Tx connector

GSM850 and EGSM900 DCS1800 and PCS1900
60 W (47.8 dBm) +/– 1.0 dB 50 W (47.0 dBm) +/–1.0 dB
Table 1-6 RF power output at indoor cabinet after Tx blocks

Tx block GSM850 EGSM900 DCS1800 PCS1900
TDF 40 W 32 W
(46.0 dBm) (45.1 dBm)
DCF 20 W 16 W
(43.0 dBm) (42.1 dBm)
DDF 8.5 W 7W
(39.3 dBm) (38.5 dBm)
Sensitivity
The receive sensitivity of the equipment is shown in Table 1-7.
Table 1-7 Rx sensitivity *

Frequency Band Without Duplexer With Duplexer
850 MHz –107 dBm –106 dBm
900 MHz –107 dBm –106 dBm
1800 MHz –108.5 dBm –107.5 dBm
1900 MHz –107 dBm –106 dBm
* Guaranteed over all channel types, fading profiles, RF frequencies
and operating conditions.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 1–11
Battery backup
The Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure is fitted with limited battery
backup capability, as shown in Table 1-8.
Table 1-8 Backup power specifications

Location Capacity Typical power
(per battery) duration
(12 carriers)
Internal batteries 100 Ah 40 minutes
Battery backup times can be extended by installing the optional ancillary
enclosure (see Table 1-15).
Network
transmission
options
Options exist for E1, T1 and HDSL (star and daisy chain) transmission.
Dimensions
The dimensions of the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure equipment are shown in
Table 1-9. The shroud is optional and must be ordered separately.
Table 1-9 Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor dimensions (in mm)

Cabinet type Height Width Depth
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor 1400 1900 (no shroud) 800
enclosure 2150 (inc. shroud)
Horizonmacro indoor cabinet 750 700 430
Weights
The weights of cabinets are shown in Table 1-10.
Table 1-10 Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor weights

Fully loaded enclosure Horizonmacro indoor cabinet
(6 CTUs)
710 kg 110 kg (approx.)
Torque values
The torque values for Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor are listed in Table 1-11.
Table 1-11 Torque values for all cabinet screws/bolts and RF connectors
Size of M4 M6 M8 M10 SMA N-type 7/16
screw/bolt
Torque value 2.2 Nm 3.4 Nm 5 Nm 10 Nm 1 Nm 3.4 Nm 25 Nm

Tech. 1–12 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Frequency
capability
Frequency hopping
The Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor supports baseband frequency hopping
(BBH) and synthesizer frequency hopping (SFH).
NOTE Baseband frequency hopping is not supported in the
GSM850 and PCS1900 Horizonmacro variants.
Frequency band characteristics

BTS radio channels (RF carriers) are full duplex (transmit and receive) with the
characteristics listed in Table 1-12 for GSM/EGSM900 and DCS1800 BTSs and
in Table 1-13 for GSM850 and PCS1900 BTSs.
Table 1-12 Frequency band characteristics – GSM/EGSM900 and DCS1800

GSM EGSM DCS1800
Transmit frequency band (MHz) 935 to 960 925 to 960 1805 to 1880
Receive frequency band (MHz) 890 to 915 880 to 915 1710 to 1785
Transmit/receive duplex 45 45 95
separation (MHz)
Channel width (kHz) 200 200 200
Number of channels 124 174 374
Transmit frequency guard 935.0 to 925.0 to 1805.0 to
bands (MHz) 935.1 925.1 1805.1
959.9 to 959.9 to 1879.9 to
960.0 960.0 1880.0
Receive frequency guard 890.0 to 880.0 to 1710.0 to
bands (MHz) 890.1 880.1 1710.1
914.9 to 914.9 to 1784.9 to
915.0 915.0 1785.0
Transmit channel centre Even 10ths Even 10ths Even 10ths of
frequency (MHz) of a MHz of a MHz a MHz from
from 935.2 from 925.2 1805.2 to
to 959.8 to 959.8 1879.8
Receive channel centre Even 10ths Even 10ths Even 10ths of
frequency (MHz) of a MHz of a MHz a MHz from
from 890.2 from 880.2 1710.2 to
to 914.8 to 914.8 1784.8

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 1–13
Table 1-13 Frequency band characteristics – GSM850 and PCS1900

GSM850 PCS1900
Transmit frequency band (MHz) 869 to 894 1930 to 1990
Receive frequency band (MHz) 824 to 849 1850 to 1910
Transmit/receive duplex 45 80
separation (MHz)
Channel width (kHz) 200 200
Number of channels 124 299
Transmit frequency guard 869.0 to 869.1 1930.0 to 1930.1

bands (MHz) 893.9 to 894.0 1989.9 to 1990.0
Receive frequency guard bands 824.0 to 824.1 1850.0 to 1850.1

(MHz) 848.9 to 849.0 1909.9 to 1910.0
Transmit channel centre Even 10ths of a Even 10ths of a

frequency (MHz) MHz from MHz from
869.2 to 893.8 1930.2 to 1989.8
Receive channel centre Even 10ths of a Even 10ths of a

frequency (MHz) MHz from MHz from
824.2 to 848.8 1850.2 to 1909.8
Enhancements
Colours
The enclosure and the optional shroud are painted in one of the following
colours:
2-tone dark grey, NCS6010/NCS4010.
M-Cell match, RAL7044/RAL9002.
Dark brown, RAL8028.
Dark green, RAL6028.
Brick red, RAL2001.

Tech. 1–14 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Structural
requirements
There must be adequate clearance at the front of, and above, the enclosure for
operation and maintenance purposes. It is also recommended that there is
adequate side clearance to open the doors to 120° (see Figure 1-6), and rear
clearance of 150 mm is required to open the hood.
Enclosure ventilation entry is through vent panels in the doors, allowing a
cabinet to be placed close to a wall. However, a clearance of 150 mm is
required for side cable entry (if used), between the cabinet and obstructions,
such as a wall or another cabinet.
If an optional shroud is to be fitted, an additional 250 mm clearance is required
on the left side of the enclosure.
Allow adequate clearance at the front and sides to allow for installation and
maintenance.
NOTE In seismically active areas, Motorola suggest using a
qualified structural engineer to assess frame mounting
requirements, such as floor construction, mounting
anchors and cell site construction.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 1–15
Enclosure site
dimensions
Figure 1-6 shows the site layout plan for a single enclosure.
NOTE The minimum clearance for side cable entry is not
required if cable entry is through the base of the
enclosure.
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ 1900 mm 150 mm
FOR HOOD
OPTIONAL
SHROUD
800 mm ENCLOSURE
1975 mm
1025 mm
MINIMUM
FRONT
CLEARANCE
150 mm
250 mm
Figure 1-6 12 carrier outdoor enclosure site layout plan view

Tech. 1–16 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Specifications – ancillary enclosure
Specifications – ancillary enclosure

Introduction to
ancillary
enclosure
specifications
The specifications for the optional ancillary enclosure are included in this
section.
Specification
compliance
The ancillary enclosure is designed to comply with BS7671 (16th edition), and
meet the following specification requirements:
S EMC: ETS 300 342.
S Safety: EN 60950.
S Acoustic noise: ETS 300 753, class 4.1E.
S Environment: ETS 300 019–1–1, –1–2, –1–4 (–33 _C low air temp.), –2–4.
Power
specifications
The power specifications for the ancillary enclosure are as follows:
Input voltage requirements

230 V ac (nominal) single phase, 5 A, 45 to 66 Hz. This is derived from the ac
power distribution unit in the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure.
Output voltage
–48 V dc, via Battery Management Module (BMM) to main enclosure.
Battery
specifications
The specifications for the different monobloc types that can be used in the
ancillary enclosure are listed in Table 1-14.
Table 1-14 Ancillary enclosure monobloc types
Manufacturer Type Model No. Dimensions Weight
(H x W x D) (kg)
Hawker – SBS C11 255 x 105 x 395 30
Hawker Chloride Powersafe 6VF11 227 x 125 x 558 48
Yuasa Independence PL–110 238 x 127 x 542 48
GNB Marathon MV 12V100FT 238 x 110 x 511 37.5
All the above monobloc types are 100 Ah capacity, except for the Yuasa
(110 Ah).

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 1–17
Specifications – ancillary enclosure GSM-208-323
Battery backup
duration
Typical extended battery backup nominal times available for the main enclosure
when additional battery strings are installed in the ancillary enclosure are listed
in Table 1-15. These times assume that 12 carriers are in use in the main
enclosure and the battery strings are fully charged.
Table 1-15 Battery backup times (nominal)

No. of battery strings Backup time
1 (in main enclosure) 0.7 hr
2 1.9 hr
3 2.8 hr
4 4.0 hr
NOTE Battery backup times are affected by the equipment

operating temperature.
Fuses
Table 1-16 shows the fuses fitted in the BMM to protect individual circuits.
Table 1-16 Fuses

Designation Rating Circuit protected
FS1 8A BMM internal supply
FS2 2A Fan (not used)
FS3 100 mA Smoke alarm detector
FS4 2A LVD contactor
FS5 4A Customer equipment
Dimensions
The dimensions of the ancillary enclosure are as follows:
Height: 1400 mm
Width: 750 mm
Depth: 850 mm
NOTE For the footprint measurements (width and depth), deduct
50 mm from each.
Weight
The weight of the empty ancillary enclosure is 150 kg. When three battery
strings (12 monoblocs) are installed, the maximum weight is 750 kg.

Tech. 1–18 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Specifications – ancillary enclosure
Environmental
limits
Table 1-17 shows the environmental limits for the ancillary enclosure.

Operating –33 _C to +45 _C 5% to 100% relative humidity, not to
plus a solar gain exceed 30 g water / m3 air.
of 1.2 kW/m2
Storage –45 _C to +70 _C 8% to 100% relative humidity, not to

is 40 _C.
Ancillary
enclosure
enhancements
The ancillary enclosure is painted in one of the following colours:
Dark grey, NCS4010–R70B.
M-Cell match, RAL7044.
Dark green, RAL6028.
Dark brown, RAL8028.
Brick red, RAL8023.
Structural
requirements
There must be adequate clearance at the front of the ancillary enclosure for
operation and maintenance purposes.
The enclosure can be placed either on the right (recommended) or left side of
the main enclosure. The minimum distance between the ancillary enclosure and
the main enclosure depends on the method of cable entry used for the main
enclosure and other factors, such as whether an optional cable shroud is fitted
(only relevant if the ancillary enclosure is to be mounted to the left of the main
enclosure).

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 1–19
Specifications – ancillary enclosure GSM-208-323
Site layout plan

– ancillary
enclosure with
main enclosure
Figure 1-7 shows the site layout plan for the ancillary enclosure when installed
next to a main enclosure.
NOTE The 85 mm minimum clearance between the enclosure
and the ancillary enclosure is required for the flexible
cable conduits.
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ 1900 mm 700 mm
OPTIONAL
SHROUD
ANCILLARY
MAIN ENCLOSURE 800 mm
ENCLOSURE
250 mm 85 mm min.
285 mm max.
NOTE For the true width and depth of the enclosure, add 50 mm
to allow for the overhang at the top of the enclosure.
The cables from the ancillary enclosure will not reach their
connection points in the main enclosure if the distance
between the right side of the main enclosure and the left
side of the ancillary enclosure exceeds 285 mm.
Figure 1-7 Ancillary enclosure site layout plan view

Tech. 1–20 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Chapter 2
Enclosure structure and
components

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A i
GSM-208-323

ii 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323
Chapter 2
Fan tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–16
Hood view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 2–20

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A iii
GSM-208-323

iv 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure structure
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure structure

Introduction to
the enclosure
This chapter provides information about the enclosure structure and its
components. All components, except the power distribution equipment, Heat
Management System (HMS) and indoor cabinet, are described here.
Enclosure
description
The Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure is essentially a metal box, with
front opening doors and hood for access. This provides a controlled
environment for one or two Horizonmacro indoor BTS cabinets in an outdoor
location, through the use of a Heat Management System (HMS).
Additional cooling for the power system is provided by two fan trays. One tray is
mounted at the base of each side of the enclosure, below the rectifier modules.
These provide cooling by blowing air directly over the chassis of each rectifier.
Cable entry to the enclosure is low level, through the left or right side of the
base or from beneath. An optional high level cable entry kit is available if high
level cable entry is required.
Internally, the enclosure can be conveniently divided into six functional areas
(see Figure 2-1) for:
S AC supply and interface cabling.
S Battery backup.
S AC and dc power distribution (PDU B).
S Power distribution and customer equipment (PDU A).
S Horizonmacro cabinet (BTS 0).
S Horizonmacro cabinet (BTS 1).
AC SUPPLY
AND
INTERFACE
CABLING HORIZONMACRO HORIZONMACRO
INDOOR CABINET MASTER INDOOR
(BTS 1) CABINET
(BTS 0)
BATTERY
BACKUP
AC AND DC POWER POWER DISTRIBUTION AND

DISTRIBUTION CUSTOMER EQUIPMENT
(PDU B) (PDU A)
Figure 2-1 Functional areas within the enclosure

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–1
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure structure GSM-208-323
View of the
components
within the
enclosure
Figure 2-2 shows an internal view of the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor
enclosure, showing components.
NOTE Only items in bold text, plus the doors (not shown in
Figure 2-2), are discussed in this chapter.
HORIZONMACRO
ALARM
HORIZONMACRO LIGHTS MASTER INDOOR
INTERFACE
INDOOR CABINET CABINET
MODULE
PRIMARY AC (BTS 1) (BTS 0)
TERMINAL BOX SMOKE
DETECTOR HOOD
AND
THERMOSTATS
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
SPACE FOR
CUSTOMER
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ EQUIPMENT
DC POWER RECTIFIERS
DISTRIBUTION
BACKUP UNIT FAN TRAY
BATTERIES FAN TRAY
(NOT VISIBLE) (NOT VISIBLE)
AC POWER HEATER
DISTRIBUTION
UNIT
RECTIFIERS
–48 V DC CONNECTOR
POWER PANEL (FOR CUSTOMER
CONTROL EQUIPMENT)
MODULE
Figure 2-2 Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure (fully equipped)

Tech. 2–2 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Alarm interface module (AIM)
Alarm interface module (AIM)

Functional
description of
the AIM
The AIM provides the interface between alarms for equipment fitted as part of
the enclosure and the Horizonmacro master indoor cabinet. Alarm signals are
relayed from the BTS 0 ALARM connector on the AIM to the EXTERNAL
ALARMS connector on the interface panel on the top of the BTS. PIX0 and
PIX1 connectors on the AIM connect to the corresponding PIX connectors on
the BTS interface panel.
The AIM also provides termination and line overvoltage protection for six 2 Mbit
120 ohm twisted pair lines.
In addition to the above, the AIM provides the interface for alarm signals from
the optional ancillary enclosure (see Chapter 10 for details of the ancillary
enclosure).
AIM block
diagram
Figure 2-3 shows an interconnection block diagram for the AIM.
SMOKE
DETECTOR
ENCLOSURE HOOD
THERMOSTATS CONTACT
LINE
TERMINATION J24 J23 J22 J21 J20 J19 J18 J17 J16 J15 J14
J25
THERMAL SENSORS
BTS 0 EXT. ALARMS 4
BTS 0 EXT. ALARMS 3
BTS 0 EXT. ALARMS 2
BTS 0 EXT. ALARMS 1

BTS 0 BIB
2 MBIT 2 MBIT 2 MBIT 2 MBIT 2 MBIT 2 MBIT 2 MBIT

UNIT
SMOKE ALARM
BTS 0 RELAY 4
BTS 0 RELAY 3
BTS 0 RELAY 2
BTS 0 RELAY 1
EARTH LINE 6 LINE 5 LINE 4 LINE 3 LINE2 LINE 1

HOOD SWITCH
J13
INTERFACE
(OPTIONAL)
J26
BTS 0
J12
ALARM 0
J27
BTS 0 PIX1
J11
J28
BTS 0 PIX0
J10
ANC. CAB. ALARM
OVERRIDE OVERRIDE
SW 1 SW 2
ALARM INTERFACE
J9
BATTERY ALARM
BATTERY ALARM
BTS 0 BTS 1 MODULE (AIM)

MASTER SLAVE
ANCILLARY
EXTERNAL
J8
INTERNAL
INTERNAL
BATTERY
CABINET
SENSOR
SYSTEM
POWER
EARTH
HMS 0
HMS 1
BTS 0
BTS 0
J7
DOOR 1
J1 J2 J3 J5 J6 J4 J41 J40
CONTACT
DOOR 2
CONTACT
POWER
SYSTEM ANCILLARY
HMS 0 ENCLOSURE
HMS 1
EARTH
BAR
Figure 2-3 AIM interconnection block diagram

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–3
Alarm interface module (AIM) GSM-208-323
AIM connector
locations
Figure 2-4 shows the physical locations of the connectors, DIP switch blocks
and pin positions on the AIM.
J7
J21 J20 J19 J18
SK4
COM
COM
COM
COM
SK9
NC
NC
NC
NC
NO
NO
NO
NO
1
4
J12 1 J15 4 1 J14 4
J9
J27
J28
4
1
SK3
SK10 J17 J16
1 4 1 4
SK8
SK5
1
20
20
1
1
4
J10 4 4
J11 J40 J41
1 1
4
1
SK7 7 3 3
SK6 SW 1
1 J4 J1 J22
1 1
1 6
SK2
SK11
1
4 SW 2
4 3 3
J13 1 6 3 J23 J2 J24
J8 1 1 1
J5
4
1
1
SK1
SK12
14 20
20 J3 J26
J25 1 1
1
J6
Figure 2-4 Connector locations on the AIM

Tech. 2–4 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
AIM connector
pinouts
Table 2-1 to Table 2-24 list the pinouts for all the connectors on the AIM.
Table 2-1 J1: HMS 0 BTS 0

Pin Signal description Pin Signal description
1 HMS 0 fail – BTS 0 3 BTS 0 door 2 open
2 HMS 0 fail return – BTS 0 4 BTS 0 door 2 link 1
Table 2-2 J2: HMS 1 BTS 0

1 HMS 1 fail – BTS 0 3 BTS 0 door 2 link 1
2 HMS 1 fail return – BTS 0 4 BTS 0 door 2 link 2
Table 2-3 J3: Power system

1 AC 1 fail 14 AC 1 fail return
2 Smoke alarm 15 Smoke alarm return
3 O/T shutdown 16 O/T shutdown return
4 ANC smoke alarm trip 17 ANC smoke alarm trip return
5 – 18 –
6 Low voltage alarm 19 Low voltage alarm return
7 Rectifier 1 fail 20 Rectifier 1 fail return
9 BTS smoke alarm 22 BTS smoke alarm return
10 Temperature sensor 23 Temperature sensor return
11 – 24 Aux supply 0 V
12 – 25 –
13 Aux supply 24 V

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–5
Table 2-4 J4: Ancillary enclosure

1 ANC smoke alarm trip return 7 Smoke alarm return
2 ANC smoke alarm trip 8 Smoke alarm return link
3 BTS 0 door 2 link 3 9 Temperature sensor return
4 BTS 0 door 2 open return 10 ANC temperature sensor
5 ANC enclosure overtemp. 11 O/T shutdown return link
return
6 ANC enclosure 12 O/T shutdown return
overtemperature
Table 2-5 J5: Internal battery sensor

1 INT temperature sensor 3 Earth
2 Temperature sensor return
Table 2-6 J6 and J7: Earth and 2 Mbit earth

– All pins run to earth
Table 2-7 J8 to J13: 2 Mbit lines 6 to1

1 Rx+ 3 Tx+
2 Rx– 4 Tx–
NOTE In Table 2-7, J13 = 2 Mbit line 1, J12 = 2 Mbit line 2 .... J8
= 2 Mbit line 6.
Table 2-8 J14: BTS 0 Ext. alarms 1

Pair Signal description Pair Signal description
1 BTS0_Ext1_1 3 BTS0_Ext3_1
BTS0_Ext1_2 BTS0_Ext3_2

Tech. 2–6 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02



Table 2-12 J18: BTS 0 relay 1

1 BTS0_Relay 1 NO 3 BTS0_Relay 1 COM
2 BTS0_Relay 1 NC

2 BTS0_Relay 2 NC

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–7

2 BTS0_Relay 3 NC

2 BTS0_Relay 4 NC
Table 2-16 J22: Hood switch

1 – 3 BTS 0 door 2 link 2
2 – 4 BTS 0 door 2 link 3
Table 2-17 J23: Smoke alarm

1 Aux supply –24 V 4 –
2 Aux supply 0 V 5 Smoke alarm
3 – 6 Smoke alarm return link
Table 2-18 J24: Thermal sensors

1 O/T shutdown 3 Cabinet overtemperature
2 O/T shutdown return link 4 Cabinet overtemperature return

Tech. 2–8 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Table 2-19 J25: BTS 0 BIB interface

1 Tx1+ 20 Tx1–
2 Rx1+ 21 Rx1–
3 Earth 22 Earth
4 Tx4+ 23 Tx4–
5 Rx4+ 24 Rx4–
6 Earth 25 Earth
7 Tx2+ 26 Tx2–
8 Rx2+ 27 Rx2–
9 Earth 28 Earth
10 Tx5+ 29 Tx5–
11 Rx5+ 30 Rx5–
12 Earth 31 Earth
13 Tx3+ 32 Tx3–
14 Rx3+ 33 Rx3–
15 Earth 34 Earth
16 Tx6+ 35 Tx6–
17 Rx6+ 36 Rx6–
18 Earth 37 Earth
19 Earth

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–9
Table 2-20 J26: BTS 0 Alarm 0

1 AC 1 fail 20 Rectifier 1 fail return
2 AC 1 fail return 21 Rectifier 2 fail
3 Linked to pin 4 22 Rectifier 2 fail return
4 Linked to pin 3 23 Linked to pin 24
5 HMS 0 fail – BTS 0 24 Linked to pin 23
6 HMS 0 fail return – BTS 0 25 BTS 0 door 2 open
7 HMS 1 fail – BTS 0 26 BTS 0 door 2 open return
8 HMS 1 fail return – BTS 0 27 BTS smoke alarm
9 – 28 BTS smoke alarm return
10 – 29 ANC enclosure
overtemperature
11 Linked to pin 12 30 ANC enclosure overtemp.
return
12 Linked to pin 11 31 –
15 Low voltage alarm 34 –
16 Low voltage alarm return 35 –
17 Linked to pin 18 36 Cabinet overtemperature
18 Linked to pin 17 37 Cabinet overtemperature return
19 Rectifier 1 fail

Tech. 2–10 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Table 2-21 J27: BTS 0 PIX1

1 BTS0_Ext9_1 19
9 – 27 BTS0_Ext16_2
10 – 28 –
11 – 29 –
12 – 30 –
13 – 31 –
14 – 32 –
15 – 33 –
16 – 34 –
17 – 35 –
18 – 36 –

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–11
Table 2-22 J28: BTS 0 PIX0

1 BTS0_Ext1_1 19 –
9 – 27 BTS0_Ext8_2
10 – 28 –
11 BTS0_Relay 1 NO 29 BTS0_Relay 1 NC
13 BTS0_Relay 2 NC 31 BTS0_Relay 2 COM
14 BTS0_Relay 3 NO 32 BTS0_Relay 3 NC
16 BTS0_Relay 4 NC 34 BTS0_Relay 4 COM
17 – 35 –
18 – 36 –
Table 2-23 J40: Internal battery alarm

2 BTS0_Ext15_1 5 BTS0_Ext15_link
3 BTS0_Ext16_1 6 BTS0_Ext16_link
Table 2-24 J41: External battery alarm

2 BTS0_Ext15_link 5 BTS0_Ext15_2
3 BTS0_Ext16_link 6 BTS0_Ext16_2

Tech. 2–12 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
DIP switch
settings on the
AIM
DIP switch blocks SW1 and SW2 on the AIM allow certain alarm signals to be
overridden. Table 2-25 and Table 2-26 describe the DIP switch settings for SW1
and SW2 on the AIM (closed (1) = alarm overridden).
Table 2-25 SW1: ANC enclosure override

Switch Default Pin Signal description
No. position
1 Closed 1
ANC smoke alarm override
12
2 Closed 2
Door alarm
11
3 Closed 3
ANC overtemperature alarm
10
4 Closed 4
ANC overtemperature shutdown
9
5 Closed 5
Internal battery temperature sensor
8
6 Open 6
External battery temperature sensor
7
Table 2-26 SW2: Alarm override

No. position
1 Open 1
Overtemperature shutdown
12
2 Open 2
Overtemperature alarm
11
3 Closed 3
Internal battery alarm
10
4 Closed 4
Internal battery auxiliary alarm
9
5 Closed 5
External battery alarm
8
6 Closed 6
External battery auxiliary alarm
7

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–13
Surge arrester
holders
Table 2-27 shows the designations of the surge arrester holders on the AIM (see
Figure 2-4 for locations).
Table 2-27 Surge arrester holders (SK1 to SK12)

SK1 1 Tx1+ SK7 1 Tx4+
2 Earth 2 Earth
3 Tx1– 3 Tx4–
SK2 1 Rx1+ SK8 1 Rx4+
2 Earth 2 Earth
3 Rx1– 3 Rx4–
SK3 1 Tx2+ SK9 1 Tx5+
2 Earth 2 Earth
3 Tx2– 3 Tx5–
SK4 1 Rx2+ SK10 1 Rx5+
2 Earth 2 Earth
3 Rx2– 3 Rx5–
SK5 1 Tx3+ SK11 1 Tx6+
2 Earth 2 Earth
3 Tx3– 3 Tx6–
SK6 1 Rx3+ SK12 1 Rx6+
2 Earth 2 Earth
3 Rx3– 3 Rx6–

Tech. 2–14 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Primary ac terminal box
Primary ac terminal box
Primary ac
terminal box
location and
function
The primary ac terminal box is mounted vertically on the rear wall of the
enclosure, on the left side. It provides the connection point for the incoming ac
supply to the equipment contained in the enclosure.
From left to right, the terminals are designated as follows: earth connection to
Principal Ground Bar (PGB); earth (PE), linked to PGB terminal; neutral (N);
phase 1 (L1); phase 2 (L2); phase 3 (L3).
If required, single phase operation is achieved by linking together the inputs to
terminals L1, L2 and L3 (the link bar is supplied).
View of the
primary ac
terminal box
The terminal box houses six terminal connectors, as shown in Figure 2-5.
TO PGB
AC SUPPLY CABLE
INPUT
Figure 2-5 The primary ac terminal box

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–15
Fan tray GSM-208-323
Fan tray
Introduction to
the fan tray
Two fan trays are mounted in the base of the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor
enclosure, one on the left side (for PDU B), and one on the right side (for PDU
A). The purpose of the fan trays is to provide cooling for the rectifiers, which are
mounted above them.
Fan tray
description
The left fan tray comprises two rows of three fans, and a control board. The right
fan tray comprises two rows of two fans. The fan trays are powered by –48 V dc
and are independently fused at the dc power distribution unit.
Each fan tray is linked to the rectifier fail alarm circuits on the power control
module, so a failure of one or more fans will be signalled to the AIM through the
power control module.
View of the fan

tray
Figure 2-6 shows the right fan tray used in the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor
enclosure. The left fan tray is similar but wider, to accommodate three fans in
each row.
CONTROL BOARD
FAN
POWER
CONNECTOR
Figure 2-6 The right fan tray

Tech. 2–16 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Smoke detector
Smoke detector
Operation of the
smoke detector
A smoke detector is mounted vertically in the enclosure, behind the vertical
support bracing. Its function is to shut down the equipment in the event of
smoke being detected within the enclosure. It provides an alarm via the BTS
approximately 30 seconds before the system is shut down.
The smoke detector is powered by 24 V dc from the power control module.
Once an alarm condition is detected, the smoke detector sends a smoke alarm
trip signal to the AIM. The AIM forwards the signal to both BTS 0 and the power
control module. On receiving the signal, the power control module inhibits the
operation of the rectifiers and disables LVD A and LVD B, thus isolating the BTS
cabinet(s) and the backup batteries.
The smoke alarm trip signal can only be cleared by removing and reapplying ac
power, or pressing the RESET button on the front of the power control module.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–17
Enclosure lighting GSM-208-323
Enclosure lighting
Enclosure
lighting
description
The Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure has two internal fluorescent
tube lights mounted in the roof panel, one on each side. The lights are powered
by 230 V ac from the AUXILIARIES CB2/4 circuit breaker on the ac power
distribution unit, and each light includes a 230 V Euro-type service outlet socket
built into the left side of the tube holder.
Additionally, each light is activated by a proximity switch, so movement within
the left or right side of the enclosure causes the left or right light to switch on
automatically.
A 3-position slider switch is mounted on the underside of each light fitting. This
allows each light to be manually switched on or off, or left in the automatic
(proximity switch controlled) position.
Under normal operating conditions, the AUXILIARIES CB2/4 circuit breaker
should be left switched on and the enclosure light switches should be in the
automatic position.
NOTE The AUXILIARIES CB2/4 circuit breaker also supplies ac
power to the optional ancillary enclosure.

Tech. 2–18 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Doors and hood
Doors and hood
Door function
The doors have the following functions:
S Provide physical security and environmental protection.
S Assist in heat management due to a Heat Management System (HMS)
being mounted on the inside of each door.
S Provide EMC shielding.
The door stays enable the doors to to be latched open at the 90° or 120°
position. Each door is fitted with a striker for individual door open alarm
microswitches.
Both doors overlap the lip of the hood. This means that the hood cannot be
lifted unless both doors are open.
Operation of the
door locks
The left and right door handles operate in a similar manner. Both doors have a
spring loaded locking handle and operate as follows:
1. Slide open the two lock protective covers.
2. Insert the key into the left lock and turn clockwise until the spring loaded
handle releases.
3. Turn the handle a quarter turn to the left to open the door.
4. Insert the key into the right lock and turn anticlockwise until the spring
loaded handle releases.
5. Turn the handle a quarter turn to the right to open the door.
6. Open both doors to the 120_ locking position.
NOTE A door open alarm is generated if the equipment is active.

This means that the green STATUS OK LED on the front
of the power control module will NOT be illuminated when
the doors are opened.
7. To close the doors, press down on the orange locking clip on the centre of
the gas strut on each door, close doors firmly and turn the handles a
quarter turn anticlockwise (for the left door) or clockwise (for the right door)
and push in until the handles are flush with the doors. The doors lock
automatically.
NOTE The key is not required to lock the enclosure. Turning the
left handle back to the vertical position when both doors
are closed causes the doors to lock automatically.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–19
Doors and hood GSM-208-323
Hood function
The hood has the following functions:
S Provides physical security.
S Provides environmental protection.
Hood operation
The hood can only be opened and closed when the doors are open. A lip on the
front edge of the hood is overlapped by the top edge of the doors, thus
preventing the hood from being lifted while the doors are closed. Also, the hood
is secured in the closed position by four screws and two latches. The screws
must be removed and the hood unlatched before it can be opened. The latches
must be closed and the screws refitted when the hood is closed.
A gas strut is fitted to either side of the hood to assist in opening and closing. A
pull strap is provided on the underside of the hood to assist in closing. Once the
hood starts to close, the gas struts ensure that the hood lowers gently to the
closed position.
A microswitch is fitted to the top lip of the enclosure, and is in contact with the
hood when the hood is in the closed position. This generates an alarm signal
when the hood is raised.
Hood view
Figure 2-7 shows the hood of the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor.
HOOD
GAS STRUT
HOOD LATCH
PULL STRAP
GAS STRUT
ENVIRONMENTAL
SEAL
Figure 2-7 Detailed view of the enclosure hood

Tech. 2–20 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Cable entry to the enclosure
Cable entry to the enclosure
Cable entry
overview
Cable entry to the enclosure is normally low level or from beneath the enclosure,
depending on customer requirements. High level cable entry (on the left side
only) is possible using an optional high level cable entry kit. Each type of cable
entry is catered for in the enclosure design.
Low level cable

entry
Low level cable entry to the enclosure can be from either the left or right side of
the base of the enclosure.
Two blanking plates are fitted on each side of the base of the enclosure.
Separate power/comms and RF cable plates are supplied for fixing in position
when the blanking plates are removed. Only one power/comms plate is
supplied, whereas four RF plates (each split into two) are supplied. Two of the
RF plates have a hole radius of 14.5 mm and two have a radius of 20 mm, so
that the most common RF cable sizes can be accommodated.
Figure 2-8 shows an example of how the low level cable entry plates can be
fitted.
RF PLATE
(2 HALVES)
ENCLOSURE
EARTH STUD
COMMS CABLE
HOLES (x 4)
POWER/COMMS POWER CABLE

PLATE HOLE
Figure 2-8 Low level cable entry plates (right side shown)

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–21
Cable entry to the enclosure GSM-208-323
Cable entry
from beneath
the enclosure
For certain installation types (on a rooftop, for example), it may be possible to
route the cables into the enclosure from beneath. Figure 2-9 shows an example
of how this might be achieved.
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ
ACCESS PANELS IN ENCLOSURE
BATTERY MOUNTED ON
COMPARTMENT SUITABLE
SUPPORT FRAME
CABLES FED TO
ENCLOSURE FROM ROOF
BENEATH
Figure 2-9 Cable entry to the enclosure from beneath

Tech. 2–22 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Optional high
level cable entry
High level cable entry is from the left side of the enclosure only. Three blanking
plates are fitted to the enclosure as standard. These are removed to enable the
three cable entry plates supplied in the optional high level hardware kit to be
installed.
NOTE Use of this kit also requires the optional high level feeder
cable kits.
One power/comms plate and two RF cable plates are supplied in the kit, and
each of these may be installed in any of the three positions to suit the required
configuration.
Each cable hole in the cable entry plate has a plug fitted. These plugs are
removed as required when the cables are installed.
Figure 2-10 shows a typical high level cable entry plate arrangement for the
enclosure.
POWER/COMMS
PLATE
RF PLATES
Figure 2-10 Typical high level cable entry plate arrangement

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–23
Optional cable
shroud and
cable
termination
bracket kits
Cable shroud kit
An optional cable shroud kit is available for use with the high level cable entry
kit. It is suitable for use with antenna feeder cables of up to 1/2 inch diameter.
The kit comprises a shroud and two cable securing brackets (see Figure 2-11).
The brackets screw onto the left side of the enclosure, and the antenna feed
cables attach to them using cable ties. The shroud also screws onto the side of
the enclosure, and provides additional environmental protection for the cables at
the point of entry to the enclosure through the high level cable entry plates.
SHROUD
CABLE
SECURING
BRACKETS
Figure 2-11 The optional cable shroud kit

Tech. 2–24 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Cable termination bracket kit

The cable termination bracket kit is designed for use with the high level cable
entry kit and the cable shroud kit. It enables larger diameter antenna feeder
cables (of between 1/2 inch and 15/8 inch) to be used with the high level cable
entry plates.
The kit comprises two plates. The inner plate, containing seven cable
termination holes, screws to the side of the enclosure. The outer plate,
containing five cable termination holes, screws onto the first plate and also onto
the shroud (see Figure 2-12).
The antenna feeder cables connect to the underside of the plates. Link cables
(not supplied) connect the feeder cables to the high level cable entry plates.
NOTE The two brackets supplied with the shroud kit are not
required when the cable termination bracket kit is used.
SHROUD
OUTER PLATE
INNER PLATE
Figure 2-12 The optional cable termination bracket kit

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 2–25

Tech. 2–26 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Chapter 3
Enclosure power distribution
equipment

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A i
GSM-208-323

ii 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323
Chapter 3
DC fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–7
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 3–14

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A iii
GSM-208-323

iv 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Overview of the power distribution equipment
Overview of the power distribution equipment
Introduction to
the power
distribution
equipment
This chapter describes the power distribution equipment which is factory fitted in
the enclosure.
Operation of the
power
distribution
equipment
Power distribution within the enclosure is handled by the equipment identified in
Table 3-1.
Table 3-1 Power distribution equipment within the enclosure

Rack Equipment
designation
PDU A Rectifier module (x 2)
DC connector panel (for customer equipment)
PDU B AC power distribution unit (2 panels)
DC power distribution unit
Power control module
Rectifier module (x 3 max.) – two plus one for system
redundancy
AC power distribution
Three phase or single phase ac input power is supplied through the primary ac
terminal box to the 4-pole circuit breaker (AC ISOLATION SWITCH) on the
upper panel of the ac Power Distribution Unit (PDU). This circuit breaker is the
primary isolator for all the equipment contained in the enclosure.
When the circuit breaker is closed, ac power is fed from the breaker to a mains
filter and then through MCBs or an RCBO to the following equipment:
S The rectifier modules in PDU A and PDU B.
S The enclosure heater (mounted in the base of PDU A), via a thermostat
switch.
S The cabinet lights and built-in 230 V ac service outlet sockets.
S The 230 V service power outlets (AUX 1, AUX 2 and HEATER AUX) on
the lower ac power distribution panel.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 3–1
Overview of the power distribution equipment GSM-208-323
DC power distribution
DC power is derived from the rectifier modules and is fed through MCBs in the
dc power distribution unit to the following equipment:
S Horizonmacro indoor BTS 0.
S Horizonmacro indoor BTS 1.
S HMS 0.
S HMS 1.
S COMMS 0 to COMMS 3 (on the dc connector panel in PDU B).
DC power from the rectifiers is fed to the Low Voltage Disconnect (LVD)
contactors, the fan trays in PDU A and PDU B, and the power control module.
View of the
power
distribution
equipment
Figure 3-1 shows the power distribution equipment in PDU A and PDU B.
PDU B PDU A
DC POWER
DISTRIBUTION
UNIT
RECTIFIERS
AC POWER
POWER DISTRIBUTION
CONTROL UNIT
RECTIFIERS
MODULE –48 V DC CONNECTOR
PANEL (FOR CUSTOMER
EQUIPMENT)
Figure 3-1 Power distribution equipment

Tech. 3–2 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 AC power distribution
AC power distribution
AC distribution
description
The ac supply to the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor may be either 230 V
nominal three phase (star configuration) or single phase. The ac power is
supplied to the ac power distribution unit from the primary ac distribution box
(see Chapter 2) through a fixed 5-core three phase power cable (3P + N + E).
For single phase operation, the three phases are linked at their inputs to the
primary ac distribution box (links are supplied).
The ac power distribution unit filters the incoming ac supply and provides the
primary power isolation, in the form of a 4-pole circuit breaker (labelled AC
ISOLATION SWITCH). The status of each phase of the ac supply is indicated by
LEDs on the front panel.
NOTE For single phase operation, all LEDs will be lit when the ac
supply is connected or unlit when the ac supply is
disconnected.
The ac supply power distribution unit supplies ac power directly to each rectifier
module, the heater, the lights and the 230 V service outlet sockets through
single pole circuit breakers on the front panel.
CB2/4 supplies ac power to the optional ancillary enclosure through a wired-in
extension to AUX 1.
View of the ac
power
distribution unit
Figure 3-2 shows a detailed view of the ac power distribution unit front panel.
AC ISOLATION SWITCH RECT 4 RECT 3 RECT 2 RECT 1 RECT 0 HEATER HEATER AUXILIARIES
CB1 CB3/2 CB3/1 CB2/1 CB1/2 CB1/1 INT AUX CB2/4
CB2/2 CB2/3
HEATER AUX
Figure 3-2 AC power distribution unit front panel

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 3–3
AC power distribution GSM-208-323
AC circuit
breakers
Table 3-2 shows details of the ac power distribution circuit breakers.
Table 3-2 AC circuit breakers
Phase Reference Function Rating Trip type
1 CB 1/1 Rectifier 0 16 A C
CB 1/2 Rectifier 1 16 A C
CB 2/2 Heater Int 10 A C
CB 2/3 Heater Aux (not used) 10 A C
CB 2/4 Aux 1, Aux 2, service auxiliaries 10 A RCBO
CB 3/2 Rectifier 4 16 A C
AC distribution
circuit diagram
Figure 3-3 shows a simplified circuit diagram for the ac power distribution.
CB 1/1
RECTIFIER
0
CB 1/2
RECTIFIER
1
CB 2/1
RECTIFIER
1 2 3 N E 2
CB 3/1
RECTIFIER
3
LINE FILTER CB 3/2
RECTIFIER
4
CB 2/2 THERMOSTAT
1 2 3 N E HEATER
CB 1 INT
1 CB 2/3
HEATER
2 AUX
CB 2/4
3
RCBO AUX 1
N
AUX 2
E
X1 X2 X3 XN SERVICE
AUX
Figure 3-3 AC distribution circuit diagram

Tech. 3–4 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 DC power distribution
DC power distribution
DC distribution
description
The –48 V dc output from the rectifiers is fed to the dc power distribution unit.
This provides circuit breaker or fuse protected –48 V dc power outlets to the two
BTS cabinets, the two HMS units, the dc connector panel in PDU A, the power
control module, and the fan trays. The dc power for the smoke detector (–24 V)
is derived from the power control module.
The dc supply to the BTS cabinets is fed through a low voltage disconnect
contactor (LVD A). The backup batteries are float charged through a second low
voltage disconnect contactor (LVD B).
The dc supply to the BTS cabinets is monitored through the power control
module. LVD A monitors the dc supply from the backup batteries to the BTSs
and disconnects the dc supply if the voltage level drops to 41 V (+/–0.25 V),
thus preventing deep discharge of the batteries. LVD B disconnects the
batteries from the system if the voltage level drops further to 39.5 V (+/–0.25 V).
The control circuitry ensures that the contactors are only reset when the ac
supply is restored and the batteries have recharged to a safe level.
The status of the LVD contactors is displayed on the power control module front
panel. The front panel also contains switches which allow manual control of the
contactors (see The power control module section in this chapter for further
information).
View of the dc
power
distribution unit
Figure 3-4 shows a detailed view of the dc power distribution unit front panel.
ALM SUPPLY ALM SENSE

FS1 T2AH FS2 T2AH
LVD A LVD B
FS3 T2AH FS4 T2AH
FAN 1 FAN 2 CB A1 CB A0 CB B5 CB B4 CB B3 CB B2 CB B1 CB B0
FS5 T2AH FS6 T2AH
Figure 3-4 DC power distribution unit front panel

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 3–5
DC power distribution GSM-208-323
DC circuit
breakers
Table 3-3 shows details of the dc power distribution circuit breakers.
Table 3-3 DC circuit breakers
Breaker bank / Reference Function Rating Trip type
DC bus
A CB A0 BTS 0 63 A Long delay
A CB A1 BTS 1 63 A Long delay
B CB B0 Comms 0 4A Long delay
B CB B4 HMS 0 10 A Motor start
B CB B5 HMS 1 10 A Motor start
DC distribution
circuit diagram
Figure 3-5 shows a simplified circuit diagram for the dc power distribution.
LVD A
CB A0
–48 V DC BTS 0
CB A1
BTS 1
LVD A
0 V DC CONTROL CB B0
Comms 0
CB B1
RECTIFIER Comms 1
V TRIM CB B2
Comms 2
CB B3
Comms 3
CB B4
HMS 0
CB B5
LVD B HMS 1
BATTERY
LVD B
CONTROL BATTERY
RETURN
REFERENCE
(M8 stud for connection
to principal ground bar)
BATTERY
THERMAL CHARGE
THERMAL
COMPENSATION
SENSOR
Figure 3-5 DC distribution circuit diagram

Tech. 3–6 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 DC power distribution
DC fuses
A fuse panel is mounted on the dc power distribution unit front panel. The fuses
protect the circuits shown in Table 3-4.
Table 3-4 DC fuses

Fuse no. Circuit protected Rating / Type
FS 1 Power control module supply 2 A / HRC
FS 2 Power control module negative sense 2 A / HRC
FS3 LVD A supply 2 A / HRC
FS 4 LVD B supply 2 A / HRC
FS 5 Fan tray in PDU A 2 A / HRC
FS 6 Fan tray in PDU B 2 A / HRC

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 3–7
The power control module GSM-208-323
The power control module

Overview of the
power control
module
The power control module provides the following functions for the power
distribution system:
S Monitoring.
S Control.
S Alarms interface.
The power control module monitors the ac and dc supply and takes appropriate
action should a fault condition occur. Faults are indicated on the module front
panel by the associated LED being unlit and alarm conditions are signalled to
the alarm interface module (see Chapter 2). A reset button is provided to reset
the system and clear alarm conditions.
The module automatically controls the operation of the LVD contactors, although
these can be controlled manually using the BYPASS switch. It also
automatically controls the battery float charge voltage (54.5 V at 20 °C),
although this can also be adjusted manually using the VOLT ADJ potentiometer.
In addition to the above, the power control module provides a 24 V dc supply
required to power the enclosure smoke alarm.
Front panel
view
Figure 3-6 shows a detailed view of the power control module front panel.
Figure 3-6 The power control module front panel

Tech. 3–8 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 The power control module
Front panel
controls and
indicators
Table 3-5 describes the controls and indicators on the power control module.
Table 3-5 Power control module front panel control and indicator functions
Legend Type Normal/ Function
Alarm
state
O.T. OK LED Green/Off Indicates whether the overtemperature
alarm is functioning correctly.
SMOKE OK LED Green/Off Indicates whether the smoke alarm is
functioning correctly.
LVD OK LED Green/Off Indicates whether both LVD units are
operational and the contactors are being
driven at the correct levels.
REC ATT LED Off/Red Indicates whether the REC ATT button
has been pressed and the equipment is in
the receiving attention state.
CONT OFF LED Off/Red Indicates whether the BATT ON/OFF
button has been pressed and the battery
contactor (LVD B) is off.
AC OK LED Green/Off Indicates whether ac power is present on
at least one phase.
STATUS OK LED Green/Off Indicates whether the equipment status is
ok, no alarms are present and the
equipment is not in the receiving attention
state.
BATT Button –/– Toggles LVD B on or off.
ON/OFF
REC ATT Button –/– Puts the equipment in the receiving
attention state. Any alarms present are
masked for maintenance purposes.
RESET Button –/– Resets the power control module.
VOLT ADJ. Pot. –/– This is used to adjust the nominal float
voltage level.
BYPASSED LED Off/Red Indicates whether the bypass switch has
been set to ON.
BCA ON LED Green/Off Indicates whether the BTS contactor (LVD
A) is on.
BCB ON LED Green/Off Indicates whether LVD B is on.
BYPASS ON If set to ON, automatic control of the
BYPASS OFF Switch –/– contactors is overridden and both are held
in the on position to enable the power
control module to be “hot swapped”.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 3–9
The power control module GSM-208-323
Alarm
management
The power control module provides the connection between the power system
alarms and the alarm interface module (AIM) through a 25-way D-type
connector. The alarm signal cable connects between J1 on the power control
module and J3 on the AIM.
The pinouts on J1 are shown in Table 3-6.
Table 3-6 J1: Power system alarms

1 AC 1 fail 14 AC 1 fail return
2 Smoke alarm 15 Smoke alarm return
3 O/T shutdown 16 O/T shutdown return
4 ANC smoke alarm trip 17 ANC smoke alarm trip return
5 – 18 –
6 Low voltage alarm 19 Low voltage alarm return
9 BTS smoke alarm 22 BTS smoke alarm return
10 Temperature sensor 23 Temperature sensor return
11 – 24 Aux supply 0 V
12 – 25 –
13 Aux supply 24 V
Alarm inputs
The alarm input signals accepted by the power control module are described
here.
The overtemperature shutdown signal causes the power control module to
inhibit the rectifiers and disable both LVD contactors, thus removing all dc power
to the BTS cabinets and communications equipment. The signal causes the
power control module to generate an ANC smoke alarm trip signal.
The overtemperature alarm signal is generated if the temperature reaches 70 °C

and shutdown of the equipment occurs if the temperature rises further to 80 °C.
The overtemperature shutdown alarm can only be reset by removing and

re-applying ac power or pressing the recessed reset button on the front of the
power control module (see Figure 3-6).

Tech. 3–10 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 The power control module
Smoke alarm shutdown

The smoke alarm shutdown signal operates in a similar manner to the
overtemperature shutdown signal, except that there is a 30 second delay before
dc power is removed. This signal also causes the power control module to
generate an ANC smoke alarm trip signal.
Like the overtemperature shutdown alarm, the smoke alarm shutdown alarm
can only be reset by removing and re-applying ac power or pressing the
recessed reset button on the front of the power control module (see Figure 3-6).
BTS disable
If the dc supply to the BTS has been disabled due to an ac power failure and
low voltage disconnect condition, the BTS will not restart if the temperature
within the enclosure is below the minimum specified for BTS operation.
The dc supply is restored automatically when the temperature reaches an
acceptable level.
Alarm output
signals
The alarm output signals generated by the power control module are described
here.
AC 1 fail alarm
The power control module combines the ac status monitor signal from each
rectifier and provides a single “AC 1 fail” alarm signal if the ac supply fails.
Rectifier 1 fail alarm

The power control module provides a non critical “Rectifier 1 fail” alarm signal if
one rectifier or rectifier cooling fan fails.
Rectifier 2 fail alarm

The power control module provides a critical “Rectifier 2 fail” alarm signal if more
than one rectifier or rectifier cooling fan fails.
Low voltage alarm

The power control module provides a “Low voltage” alarm signal if the backup
batteries have discharged to a voltage level where low voltage disconnect of the
BTS cabinet(s) is imminent (voltage < 43.0 V, +/–0.25 V). This initiates a
controlled shutdown of the equipment. The BTS cabinet(s) are disconnected if
the voltage falls to 41 V (+/–0.25 V), and the batteries are disconnected at a
voltage level of 39.5 V (+/–0.25 V).
ANC smoke alarm trip

The power control module provides a control signal to trip the circuit breakers in
an external equipment cabinet when an overtemperature shutdown or smoke
alarm shutdown signal has been received.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 3–11
The rectifier module GSM-208-323
The rectifier module
Rectifier
module
overview
This section describes the rectifier modules used in the Horizonmacro 12 carrier
outdoor enclosure.
Five rectifiers provide adequate operating power for all the modules within the
enclosure and full battery charging (including external extended battery backup).
Under normal operating conditions, four rectifiers provide sufficient power to
drive two Horizonmacro indoor BTS units and float charge the batteries. The
fifth rectifier then provides system redundancy.
View of the
rectifier module
Figure 3-7 shows a view of the rectifier module.
Figure 3-7 The rectifier module

Tech. 3–12 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 The rectifier module
Rectifier
functional
description
The rectifier is a power factor-corrected, wide input, ac power supply module.
Each module is a switching type ac/dc power converter with the following
regulated dc output:
S –55 V at 23.5 A (maximum output current).
S 1200 W (nominal).
The ac supply is fed to the rectifiers through circuit breakers on the ac power
distribution unit.
The regulated dc output is fed through circuit breakers on the dc power
distribution unit to the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets (via a low voltage
disconnect contactor), the HMS units, and the dc connector panel in PDU B.
The outputs of each rectifier are connected in parallel and all rectifiers in the
system actively share the load.
Front panel
LEDs
There are four LEDs mounted on the front of each rectifier, which indicate the
following:
S I/P HEALTHY (yellow) - lit when the input voltage is present and within
specified limits (150 to 264 V ac).
S OVERVOLTAGE (red) - lit when the rectifier has shut down due to an
output voltage in excess of –59.9 V dc.
S I/LIMIT (red) - lit when the rectifier is in current limit and delivering a
current in the range 22 A to 24 A. The LED is normally unlit, but when lit
does not necessarily indicate the existence of a fault as this may be due to
recharging of the batteries after an ac supply interruption.
S O/P HEALTHY (green) - lit when the output voltage is present and within
specified limits (–39 to –59.9 V dc).

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 3–13
Rectifier
functional
diagram
Figure 3-8 shows a functional diagram of the rectifier module.
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
VIN (88 V to 264 V)
VOUT (–55 V)
ENABLE IN
RELAY 1 ON
ENABLE OUT RECTIFIER
PCB
INPUT FAIL
POWER
YELLOW I/P HEALTHY POWER
CONVERTER CONTROL
LED OUTPUT FAIL MODULE
AND
OVERVOLTAGE SYSTEM
RED MONITOR
LED
RED I/LIMIT
LED
CURRENT SHARE OTHER
GREEN O/P HEALTHY RECTIFIERS
LED
VOLTAGE TRIM
POWER
CONTROL
AUXILIARY SUPPLY (12V) MODULE
Figure 3-8 Functional diagram of the rectifier module
Monitoring
Internal
Internal circuits monitor for the following:
S –55 V output voltage regulation.
S The –55 V output is also regulated to provide temperature compensation

for the float charging of the internal batteries (battery backup) in the range
–52.88 V at 40 _C to –56.72 V at 0 _C.
S Overvoltage protection. This provides shutdown if the output voltage

exceeds –59.9 V.
S Overcurrent protection. This provides constant current limiting at 22 A to

24 A, unless the output voltage drops below 39.6 V, when the output
current will fold back to between 3 A and 8 A.
S Enable control of the rectifier module from the power control module.

Tech. 3–14 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
External
The power control module monitors common alarm signals generated by the
changeover relays fitted within the rectifier modules. The possible alarms are:
S AC input fail - This alarm is active if all the rectifier modules lose their input
supply or the input drops below their operating minimum value.
S DC output fail - This alarm is active if the output from one or more rectifier
modules fails, or goes outside the preset tolerance level.
Alarm conditions generated by the rectifier module may be detected by one of
the red LEDs being lit, or by the dc output fail and mains input healthy LEDs
being unlit.
Protection
circuits
Activation of the protection circuits causes the rectifier module to shut down.
During a shutdown, the output circuits of the malfunctioning module are isolated
and its output healthy LED is switched off. The malfunctioning module informs
the power control module of the shutdown condition. An alarm signal is also
activated and sent to the power control module if all rectifier modules detect loss
of ac input voltage. After an alarm condition has ceased, normal operation of the
rectifier module is restored automatically.
Thermal
protection
The rectifier module is provided with additional internal thermal protection. It
shuts down if its ambient temperature exceeds a safe level, causing an alarm
message to be sent to the power control module. Normal operation of the
rectifier module resumes after the temperature returns to a safe level.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 3–15
Control and
alarm signals
The following signals are associated with rectifier module control and alarms:
S Enable out.
An independent –55 V output from each rectifier module commoned
together and connected to the dc power distribution unit.
S Enable in.
This signal, fed from the individual circuit breakers on the dc power
distribution unit, enables the rectifier output.
S Voltage trim.
A variable voltage signal, generated by the power control module, used to
regulate the rectifier output in order to produce a temperature
compensated battery charging voltage, to ensure that the internal or
external batteries are not overcharged.
S Current share
A signal representing the average current for the total system. Each
rectifier module compares its output current with the average current and
adjusts its output voltage so as to equalize its output current with the
average system current.
S Auxiliary supply
A 12 V supply independent of the rectifier output, but referenced to it,
used to power the power control module circuitry when the rectifier output
is inhibited.
S Input healthy
The normally open contact of the isolated changeover relay used to
indicate that the input is within specification.
S Output healthy
The normally closed contact of the isolated changeover relay used to
indicate that the output is within specification.

Tech. 3–16 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Rectifier
module pinout
connections
Table 3-7 lists the rectifier module pinout connections.
Table 3-7 Rectifier module pin connections (29-way Elcon)

Pin Signal/Description Pin Signal/Description
No. No.
1 +0 V output 16 Relay N/C
(rectifier output healthy)
2 –55 V output 17 Relay N/O
(rectifier ac input healthy)
3 Not connected 18 Not connected
5 Voltage trim 20 Not connected
6 Link enable input 21 Opto input
7 Not connected 22 Forced current share
9 Link enable output 24 Not connected
10 Not connected 25 Opto common
11 Not connected 26 Earth
13 +12 V auxiliary supply 28 AC input (neutral)
14 Not connected 29 AC input (live)
15 Relay common

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 3–17
The dc connector panel GSM-208-323
The dc connector panel

Description of
the dc
connector panel
The dc connector panel is mounted in PDU A, to the right of the rectifiers. It
provides four –48 V dc sockets for customer communications equipment, which
can be mounted in the 6 U of rack space available in PDU A.
Power for the dc connector panel is supplied from the dc power distribution unit.
Power to each connector on the panel is controlled via a separate MCB on the
front of the dc power distribution unit (COM 0 to COM 3).
View of the dc
connector panel
Figure 3-9 shows the detail on the dc connector panel.
ESP BONDING POINT
ESP
COMMS 0
GND
0V
–48V
COMMS 1
GND
0V
–48V
COMMS 2
GND
0V
–48V
COMMS 3
GND
0V
–48V
Figure 3-9 The dc connector panel

Tech. 3–18 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Internal battery backup
Internal battery backup
Overview of the
internal battery
backup system
The left side of the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure is fitted with a
closed two shelf compartment for backup batteries. Four 12 V monoblocs are
installed in the compartment and connected in series to provide a –48 V dc
supply in the event of a failure of the ac supply. The backup batteries can power
12 carriers under full load conditions for up to 40 minutes.
The batteries are connected to the enclosure dc supply through an isolator
switch mounted on the top of the battery compartment and the LVD B contactor.
The circuit breaker enables the backup batteries to be isolated from the system
for maintenance purposes.
View of the
internal battery
backup
compartment
Figure 3-10 shows the internal battery backup compartment.
BATTERY ISOLATOR
SWITCH
BACKUP
BATTERIES
COMPARTMENT
COVER
Figure 3-10 View of the internal battery backup compartment

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 3–19
Internal battery backup GSM-208-323
Battery thermal
charge
compensation
A thermal probe is connected to the positive battery terminal on the right battery
in the upper shelf, via an M8 copper ring terminal. This provides thermal charge
compensation by monitoring the battery temperature and adjusting the rectifier
battery charge voltage to the optimal level, thus maximizing the charge rate and
battery life, and minimizing battery gas discharge.
The thermal compensation is set at 4 mV/cell/_C, but is voltage clamped at the
values for 0 _C and 40 _C to prevent battery overcharge at temperature
extremes.
The thermal probe connects to J5 on the AIM (see Figure 2-3), and the signal
from it then passes to J1 on the power control module via J3 on the AIM.
Battery
connections
The connections for the internal batteries are shown in Figure 3-11.
+VE CONNECTION
(BLACK CABLE) TO
ISOLATOR SWITCH
–VE CONNECTION
(BLUE CABLE) TO
ISOLATOR SWITCH
THERMAL PROBE
CONNECTS HERE
BATTERY LINK
BATTERY LINK
Figure 3-11 Internal backup battery connections

Tech. 3–20 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Chapter 4
Heat management system

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A i
GSM-208-323

ii 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323
Chapter 4

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A iii
GSM-208-323

iv 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Overview of the heat management system (HMS)
Overview of the heat management system (HMS)
Introduction to
the HMS
The equipment installed in the enclosure emits heat, which must be removed in
order to maintain the correct working temperature.
The heat management system maintains the internal temperature of the
enclosure within the operational range of the installed equipment, provided the
external ambient temperature is within the range of –33 °C to +45 °C.
A BTS alarm is generated if the return air temperature from the enclosure
reaches 70 °C, and the equipment shuts down if the temperature rises further to
80 °C.
The HMS comprises the following equipment:
S HMS 0, mounted on the right door.
S HMS 1, mounted on the left door (fitted with a laptop computer support
bracket).
S A heater, mounted on a panel in PDU A (below the space allocated for
customer communications equipment).
HMS 0 and HMS 1 each contain four fans and a heat exchanger for air
circulation and heat dissipation, and a control board.
Operation of the
HMS
Under normal operating conditions, hot air from the equipment in the enclosure
is drawn into the top of each HMS unit by two radial fans. This air passes
downwards through a heat exchanger, and the cooled air returns to the inside of
the enclosure through a grille at the bottom of the HMS.
Two radial fans draw cool air into the HMS through the lower grille on the
outside of the door. The air passes through the heat exchanger and the heated
air is expelled through the upper grille on the outside of the door.
The speed of the fans is temperature controlled. This means that if the
temperature within the enclosure (measured at the heat exchanger) rises above
a predetermined level, the speed of all the fans increases to boost the airflow
through the heat exchanger, thus increasing the cooling rate.
NOTE The fans on the door (ambient air) side of the HMS do not
switch on until the air temperature at the heat exchanger
reaches 45 °C. These fans switch off if the temperature
falls below 43 °C.
Power for each HMS is supplied separately through a 13 pin D-type connector
fitted on the top panel. This also carries the alarm signal for notifying the BTS in
the event of fan failure within the HMS. A 9 pin D-type connector is also fitted on
the top panel for test purposes.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 4–1
Overview of the heat management system (HMS) GSM-208-323
HMS control
board
An HMS control board is mounted within each HMS, and has the following
functions:
S Distributes –48 V dc to each of the four internal fans.
S Controls the speed of each of the fans according to temperature.

S Sends a summary alarm signal to the AIM in the case of fan failure,
internal temperature exceeding 70 °C, or if the door is opened.
View of the HMS

Figure 4-1 shows the main components of the HMS (HMS 0 and the right door
are omitted for clarity).
LOCATION OF TEST
CONNECTOR
HOT AIR
INLETS
POWER AND
SIGNAL
CONNECTOR
HMS 1
COOL AIR
OUTLET
BRUSH
SEAL HEATER
DOOR SEAL
Figure 4-1 View of HMS 1 and the heater

Tech. 4–2 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Overview of the heat management system (HMS)
Airflow through
the HMS
Figure 4-2 shows the airflow through the HMS.
DOOR HMS
DOOR GRILLE RADIAL FAN
OUTLET AIR
(HOT)
HOT AIR
HEAT ENCLOSURE
EXCHANGER INTERIOR
BRUSH SEAL
AMBIENT AIR
(COOL)
COOLED AIR
WARMED AIR
DOOR GRILLE HEATER

RADIAL FAN
IN COLD CONDITIONS
Figure 4-2 Cross sectional view of airflow through the HMS
Operation of the
heater
The heater is powered directly from the ac power distribution unit through a
circuit breaker (HEATER INT) and a control thermostat. A heater test switch is
provided on the ac distribution unit front panel.
The purpose of the heater is to prevent the enclosure air temperature from
dropping too low. If the temperature of the air circulating within the enclosure
drops to 5 °C, the heater switches on automatically to warm the air. Once the air
temperature within the enclosure reaches 8 °C, the heater switches off.
The controlling thermostat for the heater is mounted in the base plate of the ac
power distribution unit.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 4–3
HMS specifications GSM-208-323
HMS specifications
Introduction to
HMS
specifications
The specifications for each door mounted HMS used in the Horizonmacro 12
carrier outdoor enclosure are described in this section
Power
requirements
The power requirement for each HMS is –48 V dc at 7.6 A (max.).
Protection
rating
The protection rating for the HMS cabinet is IP55.
Physical
characteristics
The physical characteristics for the HMS are as follows:
Height: 1050 mm
Width: 495 mm
Depth: 180 mm
Weight: 35 kg (approx.)
Performance
The HMS performance figures are as follows:
Specific thermal output: 120 W/K

Output per fan: 100 W
Temperature
range
The HMS operates over a temperature range of –33 °C to +45 °C.

Tech. 4–4 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 HMS specifications
Fan setpoints
The fan speed (percentage) temperature setpoints are as follows:
Internal fan: 45% at < 40 °C.

45% to 100% at between 40 °C and 57 °C (linear increase).
External fan: Off at < 45 °C, 35% at 45 °C (switch off at 43 °C).
35% to 100% at between 45 °C and 60 °C (linear increase).
Figure 4-3 shows a graphical representation of the relationship between fan
speed and temperature.
% Speed
100
90
80
70
60
50
45
INTERNAL
40
FAN
35
30 EXTERNAL
FAN
20
10
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Temp. (°C)
43 45 57
Figure 4-3 Relationship between HMS fan speed and temperature

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 4–5
HMS specifications GSM-208-323

Tech. 4–6 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Chapter 5
Horizonmacro indoor cabinet
structure

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A i
GSM-208-323

ii 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323
Chapter 5
Top panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 5–6

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A iii
GSM-208-323

iv 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Cabinet structure of Horizonmacro indoor
Cabinet structure of Horizonmacro indoor
External cabinet
view
Figure 5-1 shows an external view of an indoor cabinet with the door open.
ig.231.rh
Figure 5-1 Horizonmacro indoor cabinet with door open

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 5–1
Cabinet structure of Horizonmacro indoor GSM-208-323
Overview of
structure
description
The equipped cabinet is shown in Figure 5-2. The cabinet is designed for
minimum maintenance and maximum ease of module replacement, and has
access only from the front and the top.
This chapter describes the cabinet structure and inner connections to assist
understanding of the cabinet functions. There should be no need to dismantle
the cabinet beyond Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) level.
The cabinet structure components are explained in the following sections:
Empty cabinet and SURF harness

This section describes the empty cabinet and the SURF harness connections
between the SURF, the backplane and the transceivers.
Top panel
This section describes the bare top panel, with all modules removed.
Cage backplane interface panel harness assembly (CBIA)

This section describes the CBIA. It also describes the backplane connections
between all modules, and the harness from the backplane to the interface top
panel connectors.
Door
This section describes the structure and function of the door.

Tech. 5–2 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Cabinet structure of Horizonmacro indoor
Filled cabinet
view
Figure 5-2 shows a cabinet with maximum number of modules installed. Further
information is contained in the later chapters of this technical description.

CIRCUIT BREAKER
ONE SURF (Rx)
THREE PSMs
THREE Tx BLOCKS
(DCFs SHOWN AS EXAMPLE) T43/BIB
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
SIX TRANSCEIVERS MODULE (CBM)
DC POWER IN
(CTUs)
INTERFACE
PANEL
CONNECTORS
TWO 2-FAN UNITS
ONE 4-FAN UNIT
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SYSTEM
ALARM MODULE
DIGITAL MCUF
MODULES
FMUX/NIU/BPSM ig.128.rh
(NOT VISIBLE)
Figure 5-2 Cabinet, without door, showing main components

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 5–3
Empty cabinet and SURF harness GSM-208-323
Empty cabinet and SURF harness
SURF harness
and cabinet
attachment
The SURF harness is fitted on the back wall of the cabinet, as shown in
Figure 5-3. The chassis of the SURF harness supports the SURF module.
The SURF harness provides:
S Three connectors to the SURF, for RF and power.
S One RF connector to each CTU, consisting of three inputs, one each for
Rx1, Rx2 and RF loopback test, as shown in Figure 5-4. The RF
connectors are free floating to ensure fitting of CTU modules.
S One connector to the backplane, for power from the PSMs.
Cabinet view
with installed
SURF harness
Figure 5-3 shows the SURF harness installed in an empty cabinet with, for
clarity, SURF harness cables not shown.
SURF HARNESS
EARTH CABLE FOR MAIN CAGE
ig.232.rh
Figure 5-3 SURF harness installed in empty cabinet

Tech. 5–4 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Empty cabinet and SURF harness
SURF harness
view
Figure 5-4 shows the SURF harness with connectors indicated.
SLOT FOR SURF

MODULE
Rx B X 6
RF LOOPBACK X 6
Rx A X 6
THREE CONNECTORS
TO SURF
POWER CONNECTOR TO
BACKPLANE
CTU 5
CONNECTOR FOR
EACH CTU
Rx A
CTU 0
LOCATING PINS RF LOOPBACK

TEST PORT (L)
Rx B
ig.233.rh
Figure 5-4 SURF harness with connectors indicated

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 5–5
Top panel GSM-208-323
Top panel
Top panel
description
The top panel provides:
S A basket to hold up to three Tx blocks. This includes three holes to enable
connection of CTU Tx cables to the underside of each Tx block. The holes
also allow cooling of the Tx blocks from underneath.
S A slot for insertion of the SURF module.
S A location hole for the interface panel.
S An area for ventilation purposes above the PSMs.
S A cable hole for fibre optic extension cables from the MCUF FMUX to an
FMUX of another cabinet.
Top panel view

Figure 5-5 shows a top panel with major features labelled.
SLOT FOR SURF MODULE
LOCATION HOLE
FOR INTERFACE
PANEL
BASKET TO HOLD
THREE Tx BLOCKS
VENTILATION PANEL
HOLE FOR ONE Tx BLOCK (LOCATED ABOVE PSMs)
CTU CONNECTIONS CABLE HOLE FOR FIBRE
OPTIC EXTENSION CABLES
ig.235.rh
Figure 5-5 Top panel with major features labelled

Tech. 5–6 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Cage backplane interface panel harness assembly (CBIA)
Cage backplane interface panel harness assembly (CBIA)
CBIA overview
The CBIA provides a platform for module installation and power and digital
signal interconnection to cabinet modules. The CBIA consists of:
S The main cage - provides compartments for fans, CTUs, digital modules,
BPSMs, PSMs and CBM.
S The backplane - routes power and signals for all cage modules and power
to the SURF.
S The harness - links the backplane to the interface panel.
S The interface panel - contains the T43/BIB and the required power and
communications connectors.
CBIA and
interface panel
schematic view
Figure 5-6 shows the CBIA main cage and the interface panel.
INTERFACE
PANEL
MAIN
CAGE
HARNESS LINKS
BACKPLANE
CONNECTORS TO
UNDERSIDE OF
INTERFACE PANEL
BACKPLANE
ATTACHED TO
ENTIRE BACK
OF CAGE
DIGITAL MODULE
SECTION OF CAGE ig.236.rh
Figure 5-6 View of CBIA cage and the interface panel

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 5–7
Cage backplane interface panel harness assembly (CBIA) GSM-208-323
Backplane and
harness view
Figure 5-7 shows the CBIA harness linking the interface panel and the
backplane at the rear of the main cage. Each backplane harness connector is
identified. The door switch and heat sensors are also identified.
INTERFACE
DOOR SWITCH
PANEL
NIU to T43/BIB
J21 THREE HEAT
T43/BIB SENSORS
DOOR SWITCH
CONNECTOR J55
EXTERNAL SIX CTU

ALARMS J23 CONNECTOR
RTC J32 HOLES FOR
SURF
ICS J26 HARNESS
POWER
GPS J22 PIX J25
CONNECTOR
(IF FITTED) FOR SURF
HARNESS
ig.237.rh
Figure 5-7 Rear view of CBIA showing backplane and harness

Tech. 5–8 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
CBIA cage
function and
diagram
The main cage holds the modules and supports the backplane. Each
compartment contains guides for easy insertion of the modules. Figure 5-8
shows the module compartments of the cage.
MAIN CAGE
POWER SUPPLY MODULES
(PSMs)
CIRCUIT BREAKER MODULE
HALF SIZE DIGITAL

MODULES (FMUX,
FULL SIZE NIUs AND BPSM)
TRANSCEIVERS (CTUs) DIGITAL
MODULES
(MCUFs
AND
ALARM)
HALF SIZE DIGITAL
MODULES (FMUX,
NIUs AND BPSM)
2-FAN 2-FAN 4-FAN
HOLES IN BACK PANEL OF CAGE FOR

BACKPLANE FAN CONNECTORS
Figure 5-8 Front view of CBIA cage showing where modules fit
CBIA harness
function
The harness provides cables to link connectors on the backplane with
connectors on the underside of the interface panel.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 5–9
Cage backplane interface panel harness assembly (CBIA) GSM-208-323
CBIA backplane
function
The backplane is a multilayered printed circuit board with attached connectors
on front and back. The backplane has the following functions:
S Routes power and digital signals throughout the cabinet.
S Provides connectors for the harness cables linking to the interface panel.
S Provides connectors for plug-in modules.
S Provides power to the SURF harness, when the main cage is inserted into
the cabinet.
S Provides a connector for the door switch cable.
S Provides connectors for three heat sensors in the main cage, above the
CTUs.
Attachment of
cage to cabinet
The CBIA is installed in the cabinet in the factory and must not be removed.

Tech. 5–10 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Interface panel
function
The interface panel provides all connection points to the required power sources
and telecommunications links. All connectors are linked to the backplane via the
CBIA harness. Plastic connector covers, supplied by Motorola, keep unused
connectors protected from damage by static or foreign matter, and should be
retained.
Interface panel
diagram
Figure 5-9 shows the locations of the interface panel connectors.
T43/BIB DC POWER
INPUT
VENTILATION
GRID
GPS
(if fitted)
CCB
(not used)
AC POWER
PIX 0 SOCKET INPUT
PIX 1
ICS
EXTERNAL ALARMS
ig.239.rh
Figure 5-9 Interface panel connector locations
Interface panel
pinouts
Interface panel pinouts are detailed in Installation and Configuration:
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor (GSM-208-423), Interface panel cabling of
this service manual.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 5–11
Cabinet door GSM-208-323
Cabinet door
Door function
The cabinet is fitted with a door which has the following functions:
S Protects modules from damage.
S Ensures correct air ventilation.
S Provides EMC shielding.
The door has a ventilation grid with internal honeycomb grid, a vertical
aluminium air baffle, and a horizontal door stop bracket. The door stop bracket
enables the door to open to 95° or 130°, though when installed within the 12
carrier outdoor enclosure opening is restricted.
The lock is a trigger latch, opened (if unlocked) by pressing the middle button.
There is also a door alarm bracket, which operates the cabinet door alarm
switch.
Door external
and internal
view
Figure 5-10 shows both sides of the cabinet door.
INTERNAL VIEW
DOOR ALARM DOOR STOP
BRACKET BRACKET
EXTERNAL VIEW
VERTICAL AIR HONEYCOMB

BAFFLE VENTILATION
VENTILATION TRIGGER
GRILLE LATCH ig.266.rh
Figure 5-10 External and internal view of cabinet door

Tech. 5–12 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Chapter 6
Horizonmacro indoor temperature
control

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A i
GSM-208-323

ii 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323
Chapter 6
Indoor fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 6–2

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A iii
GSM-208-323

iv 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Indoor temperature control system
Indoor temperature control system

Overview of
indoor
temperature
control system
The heat management system (HMS) of the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor
enclosure maintains the internal enclosure temperature within the operating
limits required by the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet.
The indoor cabinet internal temperature is maintained within normal operational
limits by internal fans. The fans draw in air from beneath the cabinet, and the air
is expelled through the door and top cabinet vents. The speed of each fan is
controlled by a heat sensor mounted on the fan hub.
If the cabinet overheats, a temperature sensor provides a warning. Dual
sensors, set at a higher temperature threshold, activate shutdown of the cabinet
PSMs. The cabinet is restarted when the sensors are reset by a substantial fall
in temperature.
The external rectifiers and internal CTUs have their own shutdown responses to
overheating.
The CTUs shutdown at 92 _C. 850/900 MHz CTUs also have an internal 4 dB
power reduction response to overheating at 85 _C. 1800/1900 MHz CTUs have
a 0.6 dB cut back at 70 _C, in addition to the 4 dB power reduction at 85 _C.
The CTU shutdown response to overheating provides a second level of cabinet
protection, independent of the cabinet heat sensors.
Temperature
shutdown
sensors
The three cabinet temperature sensors are located above the CTU shelf (see
Figure 5-7) and consist of the following:
S One 70 _C sensor provides a cabinet overtemperature alarm when the
cabinet temperature exceeds planned level. The alarm is processed by
the alarm board and MCUF, and sent on to the OMC-R via the BSC.
S Two 85 _C sensors shut down the PSMs to protect the cabinet equipment
from heat damage. Both sensors must detect excess temperature for the
shutdown to take place; this reduces the risk of an unnecessary shutdown.
No prior notification of shutdown is given to the OMC-R, except for the
original 70 _C sensor alarm. This is because the MCUF and CTUs
immediately lose power and functionality.
Cabinet restart
after shutdown
The cabinet is restarted when the two 85 _C temperature sensors reset at
55 _C. This re-establishes an earth point for the PSM internal detectors
connected to the cabinet heat sensors, which then reactivate the PSM outputs.
The MCUF then reboots as a normal power up.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 6–1
Indoor fans GSM-208-323
Indoor fans
Indoor fan
overview
The indoor cabinet operating temperature is maintained by three sets of fans:
S One 4-fan unit (referred to as FAN0), located in front and beneath the
digital module shelf.
S Two identical 2-fan units (FAN1 and FAN2), located beneath the CTU
shelf.
Figure 6-1 shows the two types of fan unit.
2-FAN
UNIT
4-FAN
UNIT
RESET BUTTONS
(ONE PER FAN)
SLIDE LATCH FOR

MODULE REMOVAL
Figure 6-1 View of 2-fan and 4-fan units
Fan operation
and reset
The fans run continuously, and respond to temperature changes to ensure
adequate air flow.
Each fan has a reset button, for use if a fan has stopped or cannot start. Each
reset button is marked FRONT or REAR to identify the appropriate fan.
Filter sheet
option and
effect on fans
Filters are an option and not essential in a clean environment. The single filter is
mounted under all the fan units. If clogged, fan airflow may be reduced, causing
strained fan motors and increased fan noise.

Tech. 6–2 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Chapter 7
Horizonmacro indoor power
supply

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A i
GSM-208-323

ii 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323
Chapter 7
PSM alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 7–2

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A iii
GSM-208-323

iv 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Power supply modules (PSMs)
Power supply modules (PSMs)
Overview of
PSM
When the indoor cabinet is installed within a 12 carrier outdoor enclosure, the
supply provided by the enclosure is –48 V dc. The dc power supply modules
(PSMs) used within the indoor cabinet must therefore be –48 V dc (positive
earth input).
NOTE Other PSM types (+27 V dc and 230 V ac) are available
for the standard Horizonmacro indoor cabinet. These are
NOT suitable for use when the cabinet is installed within
the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure. All PSMs have the same
external appearance and are located in the same
positions. Different types are identified only by front panel
labels.
The PSMs are fed from a backplane connector, and use pulse width modulation
to generate output supply. A front panel switch (shown in Figure 7-1), disables
the output, reducing the input current as shown in Table 7-1.
Table 7-1 Input currents for power supply module

Type of PSM Output voltage Input current Input load when
full load full load output switch off
–48 V nominal dc +27 V 18 A 0.5 A
NOTE There are several manufacturers of the PSMs. Each is

fully compatible with the same type of PSM of a different
manufacturer.
PSM location
and redundancy
The PSMs are located above the digital shelf and circuit breaker module. There
are three slots, two for maximum cabinet configuration and one for redundancy.
Table 7-2 shows the recommended number of PSMs for different operational
configurations.
Table 7-2 PSM operational configurations

Number of Maximum load capability
PSMs fitted
1 Complete operation of cabinet for up to three CTUs.
2 Complete operation of cabinet for up to six CTUs.
3 Redundancy and power load sharing (further enhancing
reliability by reducing temperature of operation).

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 7–1
Power supply modules (PSMs) GSM-208-323
PSM alarms
There are three alarms for each PSM, indicated by a combination of two LEDs:
S Output fail.
S Input fail.
S Overtemperature.
PSM module
view and LEDs
Figure 7-1 shows a view of the PSM with LEDs identified.
AIR VENTS ON
ENTIRE TOP AND
GREEN LED BOTTOM PANELS
ACTIVE
RED LED
ALARM
OUTPUT DISABLE
SWITCH
M4 MODULE ATTACHMENT
SCREWS
Figure 7-1 View of PSM with LEDs identified

The LEDs function with the properties shown in Table 7-3.
Table 7-3 Power supply module LED functions
Green LED Red LED Indication
ACTIVE ALARM
OFF OFF 1. Cabinet power supply off, or
2. Output disable switch off, or
3. Module not connected.
ON OFF Normal operation.
OFF ON Alarm condition with module unable to supply
power.
ON ON Internal problem (such as overtemperature), but
still able to maintain supply.
PSM backplane
protection
If a power track on the backplane is broken or short circuited, the PSM detects
the fault and shuts down to prevent further damage.

Tech. 7–2 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 MicroBCU power supply module (BPSM)
MicroBCU power supply module (BPSM)

Introduction to
the BPSM
This section describes the mBCU power supply module (BPSM). The BPSM,
located in the digital shelf of the main cage, supplies regulated dc power to the
digital modules.
A single (master) BPSM, mounted in the lower half of the digital module shelf,
can provide sufficient power for:
S One MCUF.
S One FMUX.
S Two NIUs.
S The alarm module.
An optional second BPSM can be fitted in the upper half of the digital module
shelf to supply any or all of the following:
S Backup power to the alarm module, which is the only digital module
powered by both BPSMs (for redundancy).
S Optional redundant MCUF and associated FMUX (fitted in the upper half
of the digital module shelf).
S To meet a requirement for two additional NIUs (fitted in the upper half of
the digital module shelf).
During normal operation, with all the outputs within their regulation limits, a
green LED located on the front panel is illuminated. No alarms are generated by
the BPSM.
BPSM diagram
Figure 7-2 shows a BPSM.
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
GREEN LED
Figure 7-2 The BPSM module

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 7–3
MicroBCU power supply module (BPSM) GSM-208-323
Functional
description
The BPSM is a switching type dc - dc power converter that converts the cabinet
+27 V dc power to the following dc outputs:
S +3.3 V ± 1 % at 10 A (full load current)
S +5 V ± 2 % at 10 A (full load current).
S +12 V ± 5 % at 4 A (full load current).
S –12 V ± 5 % at 2 A (full load current).
Internal BPSM circuits monitor the +3.3 V, +5 V, +12 V and –12 V outputs for the
following purposes:
S Output voltage regulation.
S Overvoltage protection – provides shutdown if output voltage exceeds 1.1
to 1.2 times the rated output.
S Overcurrent protection – maximum output current has the following limits:
– 1.1 to 1.8 times full load rating of +3.3 V output.
– 1.1 to 1.8 times full load rating of +5 V output.
– 1.25 to 2 times full load rating of +12 V and –12 V outputs.
Circuit protection
Additional internal circuitry protects the BPSM:
S Input dc reverse polarity protection, achieved by an input series diode.
S Thermal protection by automatic BPSM shutdown. Normal BPSM
operation resumes after the BPSM temperature reduces to a safe level.
S A 10 A fuse is located near the backplane connector.
LED display
An active (green) LED mounted on the front of the BPSM is lit when all output
voltages are present and within specified limits. A functional diagram is shown in
Figure 7-3.
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
VOUT (+5 V)
VOUT (+12 V)
GREEN
LED POWER VOUT (–12 V)
CONVERTER AND
SYSTEM MONITOR VOUT (3.3 V)
VIN (+27 V)
Figure 7-3 BPSM functional diagram

Tech. 7–4 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Circuit breaker module (CBM)
Circuit breaker module (CBM)
CBM overview
The CBM provides circuit protection and manual isolation for all parts of the
cabinet, except the PSMs. The CBM is located above the digital module shelf
and below the PSMs. The honeycomb casing permits cabinet ventilation
through the module.
The CBM is connected to the backplane, providing isolator switches and
overload protection for the equipment indicated in Figure 7-4.
View of the CBM

Figure 7-4 shows views of the CBM with circuit breaker buttons identified.
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
HANDLE BAFFLE
SCREWS
FANS
(7 A)
6 CTUs (0 TO 5)
CCBs (0 AND1) SURF BPSMs (A AND B) (12 A)
(not used) (2 A) (7 A)
FRONT VIEW
Figure 7-4 Views of CBM with circuit breaker buttons identified

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 7–5
Circuit breaker module (CBM) GSM-208-323
Operation of the
CBM
Power for each module is supplied via the appropriate circuit breaker switch.
Overload of any circuit results in the appropriate front panel circuit breaker
button tripping to the off (out) position. The button can be pressed to the on (in)
position when overload problem has been corrected.
CTUs, BPSMs, SURF and fans can be isolated by pressing and releasing the
appropriate button to the off (out) position. Power is restored by pushing the
appropriate button to the on (in) position.
NOTE The two buttons marked CCB0 and CCB1 isolate power to
cavity combining blocks (CCBs) if used in a standard
Horizonmacro indoor installation. CCBs cannot be used in
the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure and both CCB0 and
CCB1 should be switched off (out).

Tech. 7–6 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Chapter 8
RF modules

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A i
GSM-208-323

ii 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323
Chapter 8
RF modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
RF overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–3
BBH example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–21
SURF module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–23

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A iii
GSM-208-323

HCU plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–36
HCU view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–36
TDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–38
TDF view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–38
DCF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–42
DCF view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–42
DDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–44
DDF view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–44

iv 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 RF equipment detail
RF equipment detail
RF equipment
overview
This chapter describes the functional operation of radio frequency (RF) modules
used in the cabinet. All descriptions are presented at a block diagram level.
RF modules described
The following equipment is described:
S Compact Transceiver Unit (CTU).
S Sectorized Universal Receiver Front-end (SURF) module (for receive
path), both single and dual band variants.
S Several types of transmit block (Tx block). Tx blocks are used for various
configurations of transmit path, depending on number of antennas, CTUs
and functionality, including potential shared receive path.
RF general information and loopback test function

The following additional information is presented in this chapter:
S General definition of transmit and receive functions in this RF equipment
detail section.
S An RF overview and RF test function description in the next section.
S An explanation of CTU frequency hopping in a section immediately after
the CTU section.
These descriptions are intended to assist the reader in understanding the
information on the RF modules.
RF
specifications
All equipment meets or exceeds ETSI regulations. Frequency information is
listed in the Specifications part of this manual.
Receive (Rx) RF
hardware
Receiver RF hardware consists of the SURF module and optional Tx block
receive path, and the receive section of the CTU.
The SURF module provides bandpass filtering and low-noise amplification for up
to three sectors, with diversity receive antenna signals, together with switching
to CTUs.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–1
RF equipment detail GSM-208-323
CTU Rx role
The CTU provides the following receive functions:
S Receiver tuning (on a timeslot basis) to any receive channel frequency.
S Demodulation and equalization of the receive channel signal.
S Measurement of the received signal strength indication (RSSI) and signal
quality.
S Recovery of received data from the demodulated radio channel.
S Channel decoding of the received data and processing of the recovered
signal. Traffic data is passed on to the MCUF for routeing to the MSC.
S Digital interface to the SURF module, which controls selection by the
SURF switch of the receive signals from the appropriate antenna.
S Comparison and processing of an additional receive path from a second
antenna input to support diversity.
Transmit (Tx)
RF hardware
Transmit RF hardware consists of Tx blocks in appropriate combinations to meet
requirements of antenna sharing for the transceivers.
CTU Tx role
The CTU provides the following transmit functions:
S Transmit tuning (on a timeslot basis) for generation of any transmit
channel RF frequency.
S Encoding transmit data output.
S Digital modulation of transmit data onto the transmit radio channel signal.
S Final RF power amplification and output power level control of the transmit
radio channel RF signal.
S Channel encoding of the data to be transmitted, interleaving signal and
traffic channel data, as defined by ETSI.
Rx/Tx single
antenna
duplexing
Duplexers allow a single antenna to be used for both transmit and receive
operations. Duplexers exist within several of the transmit blocks. Normally,
duplexed RF signals are used through one antenna, with a second receive
antenna to provide diversity.
CAUTION If a single antenna (non-diversity) is required, the duplex
antenna RF receive cable from the transmit block must be
connected to the RxA path at the SURF. Simply switching
off diversity at the OMC-R without the correct SURF
configuration will cause a loss of reception.

Tech. 8–2 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 RF overview and RF test function
RF overview and RF test function

RF overview
This section explains the RF functional blocks and additional RF loopback test
capability.
The terminology, functionality and optional capabilities are set out, as a basis for
understanding more detailed descriptions in RF module sections of this chapter.
RF main
component
explanation
The following description should be read in conjunction with Figure 8-1.
The RF equipment consists of three main blocks:
S The CTU.
S The SURF module.
S The Tx block.
CTU
The CTU can operate at 850 MHz, 900 MHz, 1800 MHz or 1900 MHz,
depending on the BTS variant ordered. It can receive two inputs, RxA and RxB,
from the SURF. These inputs are converted into digital voice/data. The two Rx
signals provide diversity of the Rx function from the MS (uplink).
The CTU also generates a Tx data signal, translated from received digital
voice/data, which is transmitted by cable to the Tx block for antenna
transmission to the MS (downlink).
The third (middle) port provides an RF loopback test signal capability, for
automatic transmission of RF test signals to the SURF.
SURF module
One of six variants of the SURF module can be installed in the Horizonmacro
indoor cabinet:
S Single band 850 MHz SURF.
S Dual band 900 MHz SURF.
S Single band 1800 MHz SURF
S Dual band 1800 MHz SURF.
The single band SURF modules accept up to three pairs of antenna inputs, and
the dual band SURF modules accept up to four pairs of antenna inputs. The
SURF switches the inputs to the appropriate CTUs under the control of the
database via the MCUF. There are two inputs to each CTU for Rx diversity.
The SURF also contains loopback test circuitry, connecting with a test signal
from each CTU.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–3
RF overview and RF test function GSM-208-323
Tx block
There are up to three Tx blocks, each block serving two CTUs.
Tx blocks filter the transmit signal for the required Tx band. Tx blocks also use
filters to enable the Rx frequency signal to be passed to the SURF, if one
antenna is used for both Tx and Rx signals.
RF loopback
purpose
The loopback test function is primarily used to identify faults when the RF
system has failed. The loopback test function enables a diagnostic capability at
the OMC-R, by creating a test signal to identify if the fault is either:
S Software (that the OMC-R can correct).
S Particular hardware (CTU or SURF).
The result is a reduction in site assessment visits, and avoidance of
unnecessary visits when hardware is functioning correctly.
NOTE The RF loopback test feature available on the
Horizonmacro, is not available on previous generations of
equipment.
RF loopback
hardware
The RF loopback test function is essentially a hardware capability built into the
CTU and the SURF. Software instructions activate the test hardware, to route
test signals through the RF system.
RF loopback
software
operation
When provided with suitable software, GSR5 or later, the OMC-R can operate
the loopback test functions, and receive the results of the tests.

Tech. 8–4 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 RF overview and RF test function
Functional
diagram of RF
Figure 8-1 shows the basic RF and loopback/VSWR test functions. For clarity,
only one CTU and one Tx block is shown, and part of the SURF.
A connected to SURF)
A B
B
SURF
RxA RxB
Figure 8-1 RF functional diagram

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–5
RF overview and RF test function GSM-208-323
Description of
RF test modes
The following description should be read in conjunction with Figure 8-1.
NOTE The RF test capability described requires software load
GSR5 or later.
The loopback test hardware picks up an attenuated signal by coupled link from
the normal CTU transmit signal.
The signal is mixed down to the receive band for testing the Rx functionality of
the SURF and CTU. Power to the loopback circuitry is automatically turned off
when the radio is in normal operation.
SURF test mode

The loopback signal is injected into the antenna receive path of the SURF by
coupled link. This tests the complete SURF and CTU Rx system path.
Test of CTU Rx circuitry

The loopback signal is injected directly internally into the Rx input of the CTU.
This tests the receive portion of the CTU.
VSWR test mode

The test signal, at Rx frequency, is injected into the antenna port through
coupled link on the SURF. Reflected power is monitored by the receive system
to calculate VSWR. Detection of a high VSWR may indicate the presence of a
cable or antenna fault.

Tech. 8–6 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Compact transceiver unit (CTU)
Compact transceiver unit (CTU)
Overview of the
CTU
This section provides the technical description of the compact transceiver unit
(CTU).
NOTE The CTU may be an 850 MHz, 900 MHz, 1800 MHz or a
1900 MHz transceiver, depending on requirements. The
functionality of the CTU is the same for all variants.
The CTU:
S Generates the RF frequencies required to perform the transmit and
receive functions.
S Contains the digital circuits required for eight timeslots of channel
equalization, encoding and decoding, and transceiver control logic.
The CTU provides the air interface between a BSS and MSs, with the following
features:
S Capability of diversity reception (input from two antennas) which improves
the quality reception in the presence of multipath fading and interference.
S Frequency change on a timeslot basis for frequency hopping and
equipment sharing.
S Transmit power control.
CTU Tx RF output specification

For Tx RF output, see Technical Description: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor
(GSM-208-323) Overview and specifications.
Location and requirements

The CTU shelf is next to the digital module shelf, in the base of the cabinet.
The cabinet can contain six CTUs. A minimum of one CTU must be fitted in
each cabinet.
CTU internal
boards
The CTU is a single field replaceable unit (FRU), which contains:
S CTU transceiver (XCVR) board.
S Power amplifier (PA) board.
S Power supply unit.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–7
Compact transceiver unit (CTU) GSM-208-323
Alarm reporting
The CTU status is indicated by LEDs on the front panel, as shown in Figure 8-2
and described in Table 8-1. Major sub-systems, such as synthesizers and RF
amplifiers, are monitored, with alarm signals as necessary.
Table 8-1 CTU front panel status indicators

Indicator LED When the LED is CTU status
RADIO OFF Module off.
STATUS
Flashing green Code required or being loaded.
Green Normal operational mode.
Flashing yellow Test mode.
Yellow Radio inhibited.
Red Alarm condition.
Transmit (Tx) OFF Transmitter is off.
STATUS
Yellow Transmitter is keyed on.
RADIO Both LEDs flashing Non-volatile memory boot code
STATUS AND rapidly upgrade.
TRANSMIT Do not remove power or reset
(Tx) STATUS (see CAUTION below).
CAUTION When both LEDs are flashing, the boot code is

downloading into non-volatile memory for software
upgrade. Do not remove power or reset the cabinet until
downloading has been completed, otherwise the
non-volatile memory will be corrupted.
If the boot code is corrupted, contact the Motorola
Customer Network Resolution Centre, requesting the boot
code restoration procedure and the appropriate boot code
file.

Tech. 8–8 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
View of the CTU

Figure 8-2 shows the CTU with main features identified.
M4 MODULE ATTACHMENT BACKPLANE POWER AND

SCREW SIGNAL CONNECTOR
Tx OUT
CONNECTOR
RxA
LOOPBACK
TEST PORT (L)
TEST INTERFACE
RxB
HANDLE
TTY INTERFACE
CONTROL
PROCESSOR RADIO STATUS LED
RECESSED MANUAL RESET BUTTON

(IF FITTED)
M4 MODULE ATTACHMENT Tx STATUS LED
SCREW
Figure 8-2 View of CTU showing main external features

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–9
CTU connectors
and reset
The TTY RS-232 serial port has three serial links onto the 9-way connector:
S Radio subsystem (RSS).
S Equalizer and control processor (EQCP).
S Channel coder control processor (CCCP).
A test interface port on the CTU front panel provides access to critical test
points for factory alignment and maintenance.
Pressing the reset button (if fitted) causes a processor hard reset, which initiates
a normal power-up sequence. If a reset button is not fitted, a reset is achieved
by switching power off and on again using the appropriate CBM button.
Figure 8-3 shows the front panel and Table 8-2 shows connector functions.
Tx OUT CONNECTOR
TEST INTERFACE
TTY INTERFACE
RADIO STATUS LED

(IF FITTED)
Tx STATUS LED
Figure 8-3 CTU front panel
Table 8-2 CTU front panel connectors

Front panel legend Function Connection to
Tx OUT Transmitter RF output Tx Block
TTY INTERFACE Test access to processor Three RS-232s
TEST INTERFACE Factory use Test equipment

Tech. 8–10 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
CTU
input/output
diagram
Figure 8-4 shows a block diagram for the operation of the CTU.
LOOPBACK RECEIVE
RF OUT (TO SURF) XCVR BOARD
CHANNEL A RECEIVE RF IN
CHANNEL B RECEIVE RF IN
(FROM SURF) RSSI
I1 DATA
Rx
Q1 DATA
I2 DATA
Q2 DATA
Rx ALARMS
AGC DATA
Tx PA DETECTOR AND TEMPERATURE
READING (DIGITAL SIGNAL)
Tx SYNTH SEL
LOCK ALARMS
13 MHz REF IN SYNTHESIZER
Rx SYNTH SEL
SYNTH DATA
DIGITAL
CONTROL AND
SIGNAL
PROCESSING
Tx CLK
Tx SYNC
Tx DATA (MODULATOR)
RF
Tx KEY LOOP
BACK
PWR CONTROL DATA
Tx
Tx ALARMS
2.048 Mbit/s DATA INPUT
AND 2.048 MHz CLOCK INPUT
Tx RAMP CONTROL
(MANCHESTER ENCODED
DATA FROM MCUF)
2.048 Mbit/s DATA OUTPUT

AND 2.048 MHz CLOCK OUTPUT TEMPERATURE
POWER
(MANCHESTER ENCODED CCB DATA AND PA
AMPLIFIER DETECTOR
DATA TO MCUF) BOARD (ANALOGUE
SIGNAL)
RF Tx
PSU ALARMS
OUTPUT
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
27 V FOR ALL BOARDS IN
CTU
Figure 8-4 CTU block diagram

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–11
CTU Tx
connector
The CTU Tx connector is a short SMA to SMA link to the base of the
appropriate Tx block or feedthrough plate.
NOTE The Tx cable has a 90° SMA connector at one end, and a
straight SMA connector at the other end. The 90° end is
designed for connection to the Tx port of a CTU.
CTU Rx
function
The receiver part of the CTU accepts two amplified and filtered receive antenna
signals from the SURF module. These two signals are applied to inputs (branch
A and branch B) of the CTU transceiver board. Figure 8-5 shows a CTU receiver
functional diagram for one branch.
The input from the SURF module is filtered, amplified and down converted to
ensure the signal level and frequency range are correct for the next stage.
RSSI data (applicable only to GPRS and RACH bursts) is used for automatic
gain control (AGC) to ensure signal strength is correct for the intermediate
frequency (IF) stage.
RSSI
ADC I DATA
Rx INPUT IF
ADC Q DATA
AGC DATA
Figure 8-5 CTU receiver functional diagram for one branch
The primary function of the IF is to filter and amplify the incoming signal.
The path is demodulated into quadrature signals and filtered by baseband
analogue filters. These signals are then digitized (I1/I2 data and Q1/Q2 data)
and made available to the equalizer for the purposes of receive synchronization
and data recovery.

Tech. 8–12 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
CTU Tx function
IQ modulator
IQ modulator data for eight timeslot channels is applied to the modulator state
machine. This data is encoded, serial-to-parallel converted and split into
quadrature components. The quadrature components are D/A converted and
applied to a quadrature modulator to create a Gaussian minimum shift keyed
(GMSK) carrier at an intermediate frequency (IF).
Figure 8-6 shows a functional diagram of the IQ modulator.
DAC AMPLIFIER
MODULATOR
STATE
IQ MACHINE
MODULATOR
DATA DAC
Figure 8-6 IQ modulator functional diagram
IF and exciter stages

The low level modulated carrier is applied to a combination of analogue and
digital attenuators for RF power control. The power control data comes from the
digital sections of the XCVR. The output of the power control elements is further
amplified by an exciter chain to drive the power amplifier.
The GMSK modulated IF is filtered and applied to the input of a controlled gain
amplifier for transmitter pulse sloping (ramped). The ramped signal is filtered
and then mixed with the main transmitter injection and is upconverted to the
final transmit channel frequency.
Figure 8-7 shows a functional diagram of the IF and exciter stages.
EXCITER
MIXER
DISTRIBUTED GAIN AND
FILTER RAMPING FILTER
POWER CONTROL
Figure 8-7 IF and exciter functional diagram

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–13
Power amplifier board

Figure 8-8 shows a functional diagram of the power amplifier (PA). The PA
board provides amplification and a forward power detector. The isolator protects
the PA board amplifiers. The detected output is used to adjust the final CTU RF
power output level by the digital sections of the XCVR.
The PA board consists of six functional blocks:
S RF power amplifier.
S RF forward power directional coupler.
S RF forward power detector.
S Temperature sensor.
S CCB control.
S RF loopback circuit.
The isolator performs two functions:
S Isolates multiple transmitters to reduce intermodulation distortion.
S Protects the RF power amplifier from possible damage resulting from load
mismatches.
RF LOOPBACK
DIRECTIONAL DIRECTIONAL
RF POWER COUPLER
AMPLIFIERS COUPLER
ISOLATOR
RF OUTPUT
TEMPERATURE LOAD
SENSOR
RF FORWARD CCB
LOOPBACK DATA
POWER
DETECTOR INJECT
PA BOARD
Figure 8-8 Power amplifier board functional diagram

Tech. 8–14 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
CTU digital
processing and
control
functions
The CTU digital processing and control function provides control and RF
processing for that CTU. These functions include:
S 2.048 Mbit/s links which interface with up to two MCUFs for redundancy.
S A software processing platform for the radio sub system (RSS)
S A digital signal processor (DSP) for radio control and channel equalization
(EQCP).
S A DSP for channel coding, data routeing, and baseband hopping (CCCP).
S Control of RF systems: diversity receiver, transmitter, and power amplifier.
S Alarm monitoring of internal devices and external cabinet elements.
S Control of external modules including CCBs, and SURF.
S Maintenance ports for processor TTY, test point sub system, and CTU test
connections.
Figure 8-9 shows a CTU digital functional diagram.
TPS
TRAU DATA
REDUNDANT TDM
INTERFACE CCCP DSP
2.048 Mb LINK
HDLC LINK PCI

BACKBONE
RSS
TTY TO ALL EQCP DSP
PROCESSING
PROCESSORS
Rx INTERFACE
CTU INTERFACE Tx INTERFACE
FUNCTION SYNTHESIZER INTERFACE
PA INTERFACE
Figure 8-9 CTU digital functional diagram
2 Mbit/s TDM Links

The CTU interfaces to the redundant MCUF are by 2.048 Mbit/s links on the
backplane (or FMUX modules in extension cabinets). These links are
Manchester encoded, thus providing both clock and data in a single connection.
The recovered clock provides a frequency reference for the CTU. The Rx and
Tx circuitry supports FMUX fibre optic lengths of up to 1 km.
The TDM links are formatted into 32 x 64 kbit/s timeslots to provide:
S Downlink and uplink TRAU speech data.
S Downlink baseband hopping data to be routed to/from other CTUs.
S Cell site air interface synchronization.
S HDLC channel for control information between RSS and MCUF.
S Baseband routeing information to indicate source of downlink baseband
hopping data.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–15
RSS processor
The RSS processor function communicates with:
S The MCUF via dedicated 64 kbit/s timeslots in the TDM link.
S The rest of the digital control functions by the peripheral communications
interface (PCI) bus.
S A dual port interface for communication with the CCCP.
A TTY interface is also provided for user support.
The RSS processor memory includes flash EPROM and 8 Mbytes of DRAM.
Flash EPROM is used for code storage.
EQCP processor
The EQCP processor handles all radio control functions and the channel
equalizer function. The EQCP controls the Rx and Tx function via the CTU
control function on a per timeslot basis. These EQCP functions include:
S Alarm management.
S Downlink burst building and modulator control.
S Transmitter power control.
S Synthesizer channel control.
S RF frequency hopping.
S Receiver front end and remote tune combiner control.
S Uplink synchronization and equalization.
S Diversity receiver control.
S Receiver automatic gain control (AGC).
S Receive signal strength (RXLEV) calculation.
S Timing advance calculation.
S Support of front panel indicators.
The EQCP communicates with the rest of the digital control functions via the
common PCI bus interface. A TTY interface is provided for radio level
calibration, system monitoring, and CTU level test.

Tech. 8–16 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
CCCP processor
The CCCP processor handles all the GSM specified layer 1 channel encoding
and decoding functions for speech and control data associated with the air
interface. In addition, it manages the routeing of TRAU frames and baseband
hopping (BBH) data, via the TDM interface, to and from the MCUF. The CCCP
functions include:
S Uplink channel decoding.
S Downlink channel encoding.
S GSM specified encryption algorithms.
S Baseband frequency hopping (not supported in GSM850 or PCS1900
BTS variants).
S TRAU frame collection and synchronization.
S Alarms management.
The CCCP communicates with the rest of the digital control functions via the
common PCI bus interface. A dual port RAM (DPR) is also used in the downlink
direction for communications from RSS. In addition to the TDM function, a serial
link is provided to support uplink and downlink TRAU data.
CTU interface function

The CTU interface function provides the air interface timing and radio control
circuitry required for Rx (uplink) and Tx (downlink) control functions. A common
PCI bus allows all the processing elements including the RSS processor, EQCP,
and CCCP to communicate with the various CTU functions. The CTU interface
includes:
S Master GSM air interface timing function.
S Independent Rx gain control interface for each diversity receiver branch.
S Baseband Rx data interface for each diversity receiver branch.
S Receiver front end and CCB control.
S Tx data interface including GMSK modulator which provides baseband
data to the transmitter.
S Tx and power amplifier power control interface.
S Rx and Tx frequency synthesizer control which supports RF frequency
hopping.
S CTU and cabinet alarm data collection.
S Alarms sampling and multiplexing.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–17
CTU
uplink/downlink
Downlink traffic data flow

Downlink TRAU data from the MCUF is received by the TDM function then
routed to the CCCP function where it is encoded (cyclic, block, and
convolutional), interleaved, and encrypted to GSM recommendations. Signalling
messages are also received from the RSS processor and encoded. These traffic
and control messages are built into air interface frames and then routed back to
the MCUF via the TDM function for baseband hopping. The CCCP calculates a
BBH routeing word, which informs the MCUF of the radio link to be the source of
its post hopped data. The post hopped data is then once again sent back down
to the appropriate CTU where it is received by the TDM function and passed to
the EQCP function. The EQCP inserts midamble and guard bits to the data bits
and forwards the data on to the modulator for transmission. The EQCP also
programs the CTU for the correct RF channel and transmit power level for this
transmitted burst.
Uplink traffic data flow

Baseband uplink traffic and control data messages are received by the CTU
interface function and sent to the EQCP where they are equalized. The EQCP
also calculates timing advance and RXLEV information, which is forwarded to
the RSS process. The recovered data bits are forwarded into the CCCP
process, where it is de-interleaved, decoded, and decrypted into TRAU frames.
Control messages are passed to the RSS function, while TRAU frames are sent
to the MCUF via the TDM interface.

Tech. 8–18 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 CTU frequency hopping
CTU frequency hopping
Overview of
CTU frequency
hopping
The CTU supports two types of frequency hopping, Synthesizer Frequency
Hopping (SFH) and Baseband Frequency Hopping (BBH). This section provides
an explanation of both types. In both cases, the MS switches channels after
every transmit/receive (Tx/Rx) burst pair. The difference between SFH and BBH
is in the method by which channel switching is achieved at the BTS.
Synthesizer
Frequency
Hopping (SFH)
SFH uses the frequency agility of the CTU to change Tx/Rx frequency on any
timeslot (TS), without affecting other timeslots.
SFH can only be used with wideband combining.
With SFH, each TS is allocated a number of frequencies (max 64) over which to
perform the hopping. When determining the hardware requirement for CTUs
using SFH the following rules apply:
S A minimum of two CTUs are required per cell due to BCCH requirements.
Timeslot 0 of CTU 0 is used for the BCCH carrier as shown in Figure 8-10.
CTU 0 cannot use SFH. Only CTU 1 and additional CTUs can use SFH.
S Hopping through the BCCH carrier (using the BCCH carrier frequency as
one of the SFH frequencies) is permitted except for timeslot 0. However,
the corresponding timeslot for the BCCH CTU will be switched off for this
period.
CTU 0 CTU 1
(BCCH) (USED FOR SFH)
0 (BCCH) 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
Figure 8-10 Minimum SFH requirement

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–19
CTU frequency hopping GSM-208-323
SFH example
not through
BCCH
CTU 0
In this example of SFH, CTU 0 provides the BCCH and cannot frequency hop.
CTU 0 has to transmit at maximum cell site power to meet the BCCH
requirement. Timeslots are used as shown below:
S TS 0 = Combined BCCH TS (BCCH/CCCH/DCCH). Transmitted at

maximum cell site power.
S TS 1-7 = Traffic channels, all non-hopping. All traffic channels transmit at

CTU 1 and additional CTUs

CTU 1 and any additional CTUs provide SFH traffic channels as shown below:
S TS 0-7 = Frequency hopping traffic channels. The frequency allocated to
the BCCH of CTU 0 cannot be used for frequency hopping purposes.
SFH example
hopping
through BCCH
carrier
CTU 0
In this example of SFH, CTU 0 provides the BCCH and cannot frequency hop.
CTU 0 has to transmit at maximum cell site power to meet the BCCH
requirement. Timeslots are used as shown below:
S TS 0 = Combined BCCH timeslot (BCCH/CCCH/DCCH). Transmitted at

S TS 1-7 = Unused timeslots transmitting dummy bursts for BCCH. All

channels transmit at maximum cell site power.
CTU 1 and additional CTUs

CTU 1 and any additional CTUs provide SFH traffic channels as shown below:
S TS 0 = Frequency hopping traffic channel, but prevented from using

BCCH frequency.
S TS 1-7 =Frequency hopping traffic channels, using all available

frequencies, including BCCH.
When the SFH selects the BCCH frequency, the CTU transmits at maximum cell
site power and the corresponding TS on CTU 0 is switched off for this period.

Tech. 8–20 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 CTU frequency hopping
Baseband
frequency
hopping (BBH)
BBH requires all eight timeslots of the CTU Tx (downlink) at the same frequency.
In the Rx (uplink) direction, the frequency agility of the CTU is used to change
timeslot frequencies on a timeslot basis. The BCCH frequency is always
transmitted at maximum cell site power.
BBH can use either Tx blocks or CCB Tx combining equipment. The main
reason for using BBH instead of SFH is to enable frequency hopping when
using CCBs (not be used in the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor), because the
mechanical tuning of CCBs is too slow for SFH.
The number of CTUs required to support BBH is the same as the number of
frequencies used.
NOTE BBH is not supported on GSM850 or PCS1900 BTSs.
BBH example
In Figure 8-11 MSs A, B and C are using TS 5 of CTUs 0, 1 and 2 respectively.
CTU 0 (BCCH) CTU 1 CTU 2
ARFCH=10 ARFCH=20 ARFCH=30
CTU 0 0 0 0
AT MAX 1 1 1
POWER 2 2 2
3 3 3
4 4 4
5 A 5 B 5 C
6 6 6
7 7 7
Figure 8-11 Diagram of BBH example using three CTUs

If the MSs are using cyclic hopping across ARFCNs 10, 20, 30 (an example
using EGSM900), each MS must transmit a burst of information each TDMA
frame (4.615 ms) on a different frequency. The data for the burst is received by
each CTU in turn (ARFCN 10, 20, 30), as shown in Table 8-3.
Table 8-3 BBH sequence example (EGSM900)
Burst Sequence Steps CTU 0 CTU 1 CTU 2
Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx
1 A10 A10 B20 B20 C30 C30
2 C10 A20 A20 B30 B30 C10
3 B10 A30 C20 B10 A30 C20
4 (same as 1) A10 A10 B20 B20 C30 C30
5 (same as 2) C10 A20 A20 B30 B30 C10
6 (same as 3) B10 A30 C20 B10 A30 C20
In the uplink direction the controlling CTU (for example CTU 0 for MS A in
Figure 8-11) tunes TS 5 in accordance with the frequency expected from the MS
for that particular burst.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–21
CTU frequency hopping GSM-208-323
Transmit
The transmit process is described by the following, as shown in Figure 8-12:
1. Traffic data from the network is passed through the NIU to the MCUF.
Within the MCUF an ASIC switches the data to CTU 0 (the dedicated CTU
for this particular MS call example).
2. The CTU, having processed the data (channel coding, interleaving,
encryption and routeing information) then passes the data back to the
ASIC.
3. The ASIC follows the BBH routeing information to direct the data to the
next Tx CTU in the sequence of Table 8-3.
NOTE BBH differs from normal and SFH CTU Tx procedures, in
that the data is directed to CTUs in a cyclic sequence at
stage 3. Without BBH, stage 3 always routes data to the
original CTU.
Tx CYCLES
THROUGH CTU
SEQUENCE NIU
ASIC
MCUF
3
3 1
2
CTU 2 CTU 1 3 CTU 0
Figure 8-12 Schematic of Base Band Hopping (BBH) example
Receive
Data from the MS is received by one CTU allocated to that MS (in this case
CTU 0). The CTU will synthesize hop to the Rx signal. This ensures that the
handover and equalizers within only one CTU will be connected to a particular
MS.

Tech. 8–22 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 SURF module
SURF module
SURF module
overview
The sectorized universal receiver front end (SURF) module is located in a
vertical slot at the rear of the cabinet top panel. Three connectors on the
underside of the module connect to the SURF harness which provides
connectivity to up to six compact transceiver units (CTUs). Antenna connections
are located on the top of the unit.
There are six types of SURF module available for the Horizonmacro indoor BTS,
depending on the frequency variant:
S 850 (MHz) single band SURF.
S 900 (MHz) dual band SURF.
S 1800 (MHz) dual band SURF.
The single band SURFs contains three amplifier sections for connection to three
pairs of receive antenna inputs providing reception at the appropriate frequency.
The 900 dual band SURF contains three amplifier sections for connection to
three pairs of antennas providing 900 MHz reception and, being dual band, a
further amplifier section for connection to a pair of 1800 MHz receive antennas.
The 1800 dual band SURF similarly contains three amplifier sections for
connection to three pairs of antennas providing 1800 MHz reception and a
further amplifier section for connection to a pair of 900 MHz receive antennas.
Each amplifier section provides two receive outputs which may be directed to
any of the six CTUs, by the switch section. There are three connections to each
CTU; RxA, RxB and loopback test (L).
The two receive outputs from amplifier 0 are split and may be used as
extensions to other cabinets if required. These act as extended antenna
connections from antenna 0. The extension cables are connected to the
receive antenna connection ports on the SURF of the extension cabinet (which
is able to respond to each amplified signal as if it were a normal antenna input).
NOTE The 900 MHz and 1800 MHz single and dual band SURFs
may vary slightly in appearance, depending on when the
BTS was manufactured.
Later single band SURFs have blanked out holes in the
positions where the second frequency N-type connectors
are fitted in dual band variants (see Figure 8-13).
Later dual band SURFs have slightly different label
numbering for the second frequency connectors. These
were originally numbered 0A and 0B, but are now
numbered 1A and 1B respectively. This later numbering
convention is used throughout the remainder of this
manual.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–23
SURF module GSM-208-323
Single band
SURF module
view
Figure 8-13 shows a later type single band SURF module, with features
identified. An earlier type single band SURF module is shown in Figure 8-14.
SIX N-TYPE RECEIVE ANTENNA CONNECTIONS

(2 PER DLNB EQUIVALENT)
RX-Pn RX-Pn
2B 0B
RX-Pn
1B
RX-Pn
RX-Pn 1A
2A
RX-Pn
0A
EXTENSION PORTS
TO OTHER
CABINETS
M6 MODULE HANDLE FOR

ATTACHMENT MODULE
SCREWS REMOVAL
SURF
MODULE
GUIDES FOR
INSERTION
3 CONNECTORS ON
UNDERSIDE TO SURF
HARNESS
Figure 8-13 Single band SURF module (later type) with features identified
NOTE Where RX-Pn appears in Figure 8-13, the n may be 850,

900, 1800 or 1900, depending on the frequency of the
SURF module.

Tech. 8–24 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
SIX N-TYPE RECEIVE ANTENNA CONNECTIONS

RXn RXn RXn

2B 1B 0B
RXn RXn RXn

2A 1A 0A
EXTENSION PORTS TO
OTHER CABINETS
HANDLE FOR
MODULE
M6 MODULE REMOVAL
ATTACHMENT
SCREWS
SURF
MODULE
GUIDE RAIL FOR

INSERTION
3 CONNECTORS ON UNDERSIDE
TO SURF HARNESS
Figure 8-14 Single band SURF module (earlier type) with features identified

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–25
Single band
SURF functional
description
The single band SURF provides front end filtering, amplification, and matrix
control of the RF receive signal between the antenna and the CTU
The single band SURF functional sections (Figure 8-15) consist of loopback,
filtering, amplification, splitting, digital processing and power selection.
Each section is duplicated for the second diversity path except for the digital
and dc power section which is shared by the two diversity paths. There are
three antenna pair inputs (ANT 0, ANT 1 and ANT 2) for each of the two
diversity branches (Branch A and Branch B). There are six outputs to the CTU
for each of the two diversity branches as well as one input from the CTU for the
loopback (LPBK) signal. There is also an output for an expansion cabinet for
ANT 0 on each branch.
The software database must be configured at the OMC-R to accept CTUs of the
same frequency as the single band SURF module in the cabinet.
The digital section swich, under the control of the database (signalled through
the MCUF and CTUs), routes the six amplifier outputs to the appropriate CTUs.
The digital and power supply section is also responsible for loopback switch
control, manual overrides, alarms and dc voltages.
The RF loopback test function is described in RF overview and RF test
function in this chapter.

Tech. 8–26 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Single band
SURF functional
diagram
Figure 8-15 shows a functional diagram of the single band SURF module.
ANTENNA
CONNECTIONS
ANT 2 ANT 1 ANT 0 TO NEXT

CABINET
ANTENNA
BR B BR A BR B BR A BR B BR A CONNECTIONS
SURF
RF LOOPBACK
SPLITTER
FILTER AND FILTER AND FILTER AND

AMPLIFIER 2 AMPLIFIER 1 AMPLIFIER 0
LOOPBACK
DIGITAL SECTION AND POWER SUPPLY CONTROL
D
C SWITCH
RF LOOPBACK
RxA RxB RxA RxB RxA RxB RxA RxB RxA RxB RxA RxB COMBINER
P
O
W
E
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
R
Rx1/Rx2/LOOPBACK CONNECTIONS TO SURF HARNESS
SIX CTUs VIA SURF HARNESS
Figure 8-15 Functional diagram of the single band SURF module

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–27
Dual band
SURF module
view
Figure 8-16 shows a later type dual band SURF module with features identified.
Both the 900 and 1800 variants are similar in appearance.
EIGHT N-TYPE RECEIVE ANTENNA CONNECTIONS

SECOND
FREQUENCY RX-S 1B
SECOND
FREQUENCY RX-S 1A
MAIN FREQUENCY
RX-P 2B
MAIN FREQUENCY
RX-P 1B
RX-P 2A
RX-P 0B
RX-P 1A
RX-P 0A
EXTENSION
PORTS TO OTHER
CABINETS
M6 MODULE
HANDLE FOR
ATTACHMENT
MODULE
SCREWS
REMOVAL
DUAL BAND
SURF GUIDES FOR
INSERTION
3 CONNECTORS ON
UNDERSIDE TO SURF
HARNESS
Figure 8-16 Later type dual band SURF module with features identified
NOTE Second frequency labelling on earlier types of dual band

SURF differs slightly from that shown in Figure 8-16.
1A and 1B are labelled 0A and 0B on earlier SURFs.

Tech. 8–28 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Dual band
SURF functional
description
The dual band SURF modules provide front end filtering, amplification, and
matrix control of the RF receive signal between the antenna and the CTU. The
dual band SURFs each have three antenna pair connections providing
reception on the primary frequency, and one antenna pair providing reception
on the secondary frequency. The two types of dual band (DB) SURF enable 900
CTUs to be mixed with 1800 CTUs in any combination, up to the maximum total
of six CTUs per cabinet.
The dual band SURF functional sections (Figure 8-17) consist of loopback,
filtering, amplification, splitting, digital processing and power selection.
Each section is duplicated for the second diversity path, except for the digital
and dc power section, which is shared by the two diversity paths. There are four
antenna pair inputs (ANT 0, ANT 1, ANT 2 and ANT DB) for each of the two
diversity branches (branch A and branch B). There are six outputs to the CTU
for each of the two diversity branches, as well as one input from the CTU for the
loopback (LPBK) signal. There is also an output for an expansion cabinet for
ANT 0 on each branch.
The software database has to be configured at the OMC-R to accept 1800
CTUs and 900 CTUs in the appropriate cabinet locations.
Digital codes are transmitted from the 900 CTUs and 1800 CTUs to the digital
section. The digital codes are different, so that 900 or 1800 CTUs can be
recognized and appropriate switching can be made to the required antenna for
transmission and reception.
The digital and power supply section is also responsible for loopback switch
control, manual overrides, alarms and dc voltages.
The RF loopback test function is described in RF overview and RF test
function in this chapter.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–29
ANTENNA CONNECTIONS
TO NEXT
ANT DB ANT 2 ANT 1 ANT 0 CABINET
ANTENNA
CONNECTIONS
BR B BR A BR B BR A BR B BR A BR B BR A
SURF
RF LOOPBACK
SPLITTER
FILTER AND FILTER AND FILTER AND FILTER AND
AMPLIFIER 3 AMPLIFIER 2 AMPLIFIER 1 AMPLIFIER 0
SECONDARY PRIMARY PRIMARY PRIMARY

FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY
DIGITAL SECTION AND POWER SUPPLY

LOOPBACK
CONTROL
D
C SWITCH
RF LOOPBACK
RxA RxB RxA RxB RxA RxB RxA RxB RxA RxB RxA RxB COMBINER
P
O
W
E
R
Rx1/Rx2/LOOPBACK CONNECTIONS TO
SIX CTUs VIA SURF HARNESS
SURF HARNESS
Figure 8-17 Functional diagram of the dual band SURF module

Tech. 8–30 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Tx blocks overview
Tx blocks overview
Introduction to
Tx blocks
Transmit (Tx) blocks are located in three positions in the basket above the
CTUs. There are four types of transmit (Tx) blocks, three of which are available
as 850, 900, 1800 or 1900 variants, and one dual band variant (for use with
900 MHz or 1800 MHz BTSs only).
CAUTION Unused Tx block locations must be covered with a
blanking plate for correct airflow and EMI shielding.
S TDF (850, 900, 1800 or 1900) = Twin duplexed filter.

S Dual band TDF (900/1800) = Dual band twin duplexed filter.
S DCF (850, 900, 1800 or 1900) = Duplexed combining bandpass filter.
S DDF (850, 900, 1800 or 1900) = Dual-stage duplexed combining filter.
These Tx blocks are cooled by airflow from beneath. The DDF has fins, whereas
the TDF, dual band TDF and DCF do not.
Three types of plate can be located in the basket:
S Blanking plate. This ensures proper airflow and EMI shielding for an
unused basket Tx block location.
S Feedthrough plate. This converts two SMA connectors to two N-type
connectors, used for connecting Tx cables to DDFs.
S Hybrid combining unit (HCU). This combines two SMA connectors to
one N-type, enabling two additional CTUs to be connected to a DDF.
Screw retention
in Tx block
locations
The plates are attached to the base of the top panel basket using six M4
screws.
Tx blocks are attached to the top surface of the top panel using two M6 screws.
It is important to ensure that all unused M6 Tx block screw locations have a
screw in place and tightened to the correct torque. This is to ensure maximum
quality of EMC and general containment.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–31
Tx blocks overview GSM-208-323
View of basket
for Tx blocks
Figure 8-18 shows the top panel and basket which holds the Tx blocks.
SLOT FOR SURF MODULE
LOCATION HOLE
FOR INTERFACE
PANEL
BASKET TO HOLD
THREE Tx BLOCKS
VENTILATION PANEL
HOLE FOR ONE Tx BLOCK (LOCATED ABOVE PSMs)
CTU CONNECTIONS CABLE HOLE FOR FIBRE
OPTIC EXTENSION CABLES
ig.235.rh
Figure 8-18 View of top panel showing Tx block basket
Transmit block
connectors
The transmit block connectors are of the following types:
S SMA connectors for cables to transceivers.
S 7/16 connectors to antennas.
S N-type connectors used for cables from SURF modules and also for HCU
and feedthrough connections.
The SMA connectors are underneath the Tx block (for ease of connection to the
CTUs), and the other connectors are on top, as shown in Figure 8-19.
NOTE All unused SMA inputs to DCF, DDF and HCU modules
must be fitted with 50 ohm load terminations.

Tech. 8–32 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Tx blocks overview
View of Tx block
connectors
Figure 8-19 shows a typical Tx block with connector locations.
7/16 CONNECTOR TO
ANTENNA
N-TYPE CONNECTOR
TO SURF
HOLE FOR TOP

PANEL BASKET
ATTACHMENT
ISOMETRIC VIEW
SMA Tx CONNECTORS
FROM CTUs
N-TYPE CONNECTOR 7/16 CONNECTOR TO

TO SURF ANTENNA
SIDE VIEW
SMA Tx CONNECTORS
FROM CTUs
Figure 8-19 Typical Tx block

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–33
Blanking plate GSM-208-323
Blanking plate
Purpose of
blanking plate
The blanking plate is fitted in locations where a Tx block is not required. The
blanking plate ensures correct air flow through the cabinet.
The plate is attached to the base of the top panel basket using six M4 screws.
NOTE It is important to ensure that all unused Tx block screw
locations have a screw in place and tightened to the
correct torque. This is to ensure maximum quality of EMC
and general containment.
View of
blanking plate
Figure 8-20 shows a view of the blanking plate.
M4 HOLES FOR
ATTACHMENT
Figure 8-20 View of the blanking plate

Tech. 8–34 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Feedthrough plate
Feedthrough plate
Purpose of
feedthrough
plate
The feedthrough plate converts the normal SMA connector from the CTU to an
N-type connector. Each feedthrough plate has a pair of these converters, one
for each of two CTUs. The top N-type connectors are used to connect with the
(optional) third Tx port on the top of a DDF Tx block.
The plate is attached to the base of the top panel basket using six M4 screws.
View of
feedthrough
plate
Figure 8-21 shows a top view of a feedthrough plate.
M4 HOLES FOR
ATTACHMENT
N-TYPE
CONNECTORS FOR
DDF USE
SMA CONNECTORS BENEATH

FROM CTUs
Figure 8-21 View of the feedthrough plate
Feedthrough
plate
connectors
Each feedthrough plate connects to:
S The Tx outputs of two CTUs, using SMA connectors.
S The Tx inputs of DDFs, using N-type connectors.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–35
HCU plate GSM-208-323
HCU plate
HCU overview
The hybrid combining unit (HCU) combines two CTU Tx signals.
There are six holes for attachment to the bottom of the Tx block basket.
HCU view
Figure 8-22 shows the HCU plate with connectors identified:
M4 HOLES FOR
ATTACHMENT
N-TYPE CONNECTOR TO DDF
SMA TRANSMIT CONNECTORS

BENEATH HCU MODULE FROM CTUs
Figure 8-22 HCU plate view showing connectors
HCU functional
diagram
Figure 8-23 shows a functional diagram of the HCU.
INPUT TO DDF
N-TYPE
CONNECTOR
HCU
3 dB TYPICAL
LOAD
LOSS ACROSS
COMBINER
SMA
Tx Tx
CONNECTORS
FIRST CTU SECOND CTU
Figure 8-23 HCU functional diagram

Tech. 8–36 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 HCU plate
HCU
connectors
Each HCU connects to:
S The Tx outputs of two CTUs, using SMA connectors.
S The Tx input of a DDF, using an N-type connector.
NOTE All unused SMA inputs to HCU modules must be fitted
with 50 ohm load terminations.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–37
TDF GSM-208-323
TDF
Overview of
TDF
The purpose of the twin duplexed filter (TDF) Tx block is to enable each
antenna to serve one CTU for both Tx and Rx.
The TDF has two identical sections, each providing a single path from a CTU to
a separate antenna. There is no combining in the TDF.
The TDF is located in the basket above the CTUs, and attached to the top
surface of the top panel using two M6 screws.
TDF view
Figure 8-24 shows the TDF Tx block with connectors identified:
HOLES FOR TOP PANEL

BASKET ATTACHMENT
N-TYPE
CONNECTORS
TO SURF
7/16 CONNECTORS
TO ANTENNAS
TWO SMA Tx
CONNECTORS BENEATH
TDF (FROM CTU)
Figure 8-24 View of TDF Tx block with connectors identified

Tech. 8–38 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 TDF
TDF functional
diagram
Figure 8-25 shows a functional diagram of the TDF.
Tx TO Tx TO
ANTENNA Rx TO SURF ANTENNA
Rx TO SURF
Rx FROM
ANTENNA
Rx FROM
7/16 7/16 N-TYPE
ANTENNA
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
N-TYPE
CONNECTOR
TDF
Rx BANDPASS Rx BANDPASS
FILTER FILTER
1 dB TYPICAL
LOSS ACROSS
TDF
Tx BANDPASS Tx BANDPASS
FILTER FILTER
Tx Tx
SMA
CONNECTORS
Figure 8-25 TDF functional diagram
TDF connectors
Each TDF connects to:
S The Tx outputs of two CTUs, using SMA connectors. The two connectors
are underneath the TDF.
S Two antennas, each for both Rx and Tx, using 7/16 connectors. These
connectors are on top of the TDF.
S The SURF, using two N-type connectors. These connectors are on top of
the TDF.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–39
Dual band TDF GSM-208-323
Dual band TDF

Overview of
dual band TDF
The purpose of the dual band twin duplexed filter (dual band TDF) Tx block is to
enable one 900 MHz antenna to serve one EGSM900 CTU for both Tx and Rx,
and an 1800 MHz antenna to serve one DCS1800 CTU for both Tx and Rx.
NOTE The dual band TDF for the GSM850 and PCS1900 BTS
variants is not currently available.
The dual band TDF is essentially a TDF with one section providing a path for
900 MHz signals and another section providing a path for 1800 MHz signals.
There is no combining in the dual band TDF.
The dual band TDF is located in the basket above the CTUs, and attached to
the top surface of the top panel using two M6 screws.
Dual band TDF

view
Figure 8-26 shows the dual band TDF Tx block with connectors identified.
N-TYPE CONNECTOR TO
900 MHz SURF CONNECTION
N-TYPE CONNECTOR TO
1800 MHz SURF CONNECTION
7/16 CONNECTOR TO
900 MHz ANTENNA
(ANT. EGSM 900)
7/16 CONNECTOR TO
1800 MHz ANTENNA
(ANT. DCS 1800)
SMA Tx CONNECTOR
BENEATH DUAL BAND TDF
SMA Tx CONNECTOR (FROM 1800 CTU)
BENEATH DUAL BAND TDF
(FROM 900 CTU)
Figure 8-26 View of dual band TDF Tx block with connectors identified

Tech. 8–40 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Dual band TDF
Dual band TDF

functional
diagram
Figure 8-27 shows a functional diagram of the dual band TDF.
Tx TO 900 Rx TO 900 Tx TO 1800 Rx TO 1800

ANTENNA SURF ANTENNA SURF
Rx FROM Rx FROM
900 1800
ANTENNA 7/16 ANTENNA 7/16 N-TYPE
CONNECTOR N-TYPE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
Dual
band
TDF
Rx BANDPASS Rx BANDPASS
FILTER FILTER
1 dB TYPICAL
LOSS ACROSS
DUAL BAND
TDF
Tx BANDPASS Tx BANDPASS
FILTER FILTER
Tx Tx
SMA
CONNECTORS
900 CTU 1800 CTU
Figure 8-27 Dual band TDF functional diagram
Dual band TDF

connectors
Each dual band TDF connects to:
S The Tx output of one 900 CTU and one 1800 CTU, using SMA
connectors. The two connectors are underneath the dual band TDF.
S One 900 MHz antenna and one 1800 MHz antenna. Each antenna is used
for both Rx and Tx, and each is connected to the dual band TDF using
7/16 connectors. These connectors are on top of the dual band TDF.
S A SURF module with dual band capability. Two N-type connectors, located
on top of the dual band TDF, connect one receive path to the SURF’s
900 MHz input and one receive path to the SURF’s 1800 MHz input.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–41
DCF GSM-208-323
DCF
DCF overview
The purpose of the duplexed combining bandpass filter (DCF) Tx block is to
enable each antenna to serve two CTUs for both Tx and Rx.
The DCF combines two Tx inputs, dissipating half the power within an internal
load.
The signal then passes through a bandpass filter and out to the antenna.
A receive bandpass filter passes only the Rx signal to the SURF module.
The DCF is located in the basket above the CTUs, and attached to the top
DCF view
Figure 8-28 shows a DCF with connectors identified.
HOLE FOR TOP

PANEL BASKET
ATTACHMENT
N-TYPE CONNECTOR TO
SURF
7/16 CONNECTOR
TO ANTENNA
HOLE FOR TOP

PANEL BASKET
ATTACHMENT
TWO SMA Tx CONNECTORS

BENEATH DCF (FROM CTU)
Figure 8-28 DCF Tx block view with connectors identified

Tech. 8–42 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 DCF
DCF functional
diagram
Figure 8-29 shows a functional diagram of the DCF.
Tx TO
ANTENNA Rx TO SURF
Rx FROM
ANTENNA 7/16 N-TYPE
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
DCF
Rx BANDPASS
FILTER
4 dB TYPICAL
LOSS ACROSS
DCF
Tx BANDPASS
FILTER
LOAD
Tx SMA Tx
CONNECTORS
Figure 8-29 Functional diagram of DCF
DCF connectors
Each DCF connects to:
S The Tx outputs of two CTUs, using SMA connectors. The two connectors
are underneath the DCF.
S A single antenna for both Rx and Tx, using a 7/16 connector. This
connector is on top of the DCF.
S The SURF, using an N-type connector. This connector is on top of the
DCF.
NOTE All unused SMA inputs to DCF modules must be fitted with
50 ohm load terminations.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–43
DDF GSM-208-323
DDF
Overview of
DDF
The dual-stage duplexed combining filter (DDF) differs from the DCF in having a
second stage of combining to allow a third CTU Tx input. This third CTU Tx
input is connected to either:
S A feedthrough plate connector for a single additional CTU, or
S An HCU plate connector for combining two additional CTUs.
The DDF is located in the basket above the CTUs, and attached to the top
DDF view
Figure 8-30 shows a view of the DDF Tx block with connectors identified.
HOLE FOR TOP

PANEL BASKET
ATTACHMENT
N-TYPE CONNECTOR TO
SURF
N-TYPE CONNECTOR
FROM CTU BY
FEEDTHROUGH PLATE
OR HCU
7/16 CONNECTOR
TO ANTENNA
HOLE FOR TOP

PANEL BASKET
ATTACHMENT
COOLING FINS
TWO SMA Tx CONNECTORS
BENEATH DDF (FROM CTU)
Figure 8-30 DDF Tx block view with connectors identified

Tech. 8–44 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 DDF
DDF functional
diagram
Figure 8-31 shows a functional diagram of the DDF.
Tx TO
THIRD (OR COMBINED ANTENNA Rx TO SURF
THIRD/FOURTH) CTU
Rx FROM
ANTENNA
N-TYPE 7/16 N-TYPE
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
Tx
LOAD
Rx BANDPASS
FILTER
7 dB TYPICAL
LOSS
ACROSS DDF
Tx BANDPASS
FILTER
LOAD
DDF
Tx Tx
SMA
CONNECTORS
Figure 8-31 Functional diagram of the DDF
DDF connectors
Each DDF connects to:
S The Tx outputs of three or four CTUs, using:
Two SMA connectors underneath the DDF.
An N-type connector on top of the DDF for connection to a feedthrough
plate (for a third CTU) or HCU plate (for combined third/fourth CTUs).
S A single antenna for both Rx and Tx, using a 7/16 connector. This
connector is on top of the DDF.
S The SURF, using an N-type connector. This connector is on top of the
DDF.
NOTE All unused SMA inputs to DDF modules must be fitted with
50 ohm load terminations.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 8–45
DDF GSM-208-323

Tech. 8–46 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Chapter 9
Digital modules

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A i
GSM-208-323

ii 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323
Chapter 9
MCUF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–4
NIU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–14
NIU diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–16

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A iii
GSM-208-323

iv 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Overview of digital modules
Overview of digital modules

Overview,
locations and
redundancy
Digital modules provide the Horizonmacro indoor equivalent of M-Cell6 micro
Base Control Unit (microBCU) functionality. They are located in the bottom right
side of the cabinet, and are electronically interconnected through the backplane.
Fibre optic connections are at the front of the appropriate modules.
Each digital module is assigned A (master) or B (redundant), with one BPSM
(microBCU Power Supply Module) for A and one BPSM for B. The alarm module
is not assigned to A or B, as it is supplied by both BPSMs for redundancy.
The master MCUF is assigned to A, and the redundant MCUF to B, each with
an associated FMUX.
The four NIUs are used by the operational MCUF, but two NIUs are powered by
BPSM A and two NIUs by BPSM B.
All slots are annotated with the legend of the appropriate module and located as
shown in Figure 9-1.
Digital module
and BPSM
locations
Figure 9-1 shows the position of modules within the digital module shelf.
DIGITAL
MCUF B MODULE SHELF
FMUX
NIU B0
NIU B1
BPSM
REDUNDANT (B)
ALARM
MODULE
MASTER (A)
MCUF A
FMUX
NIU A0
NIU A1
BPSM ig.322.rh
Figure 9-1 Digital and BPSM module locations, including optional redundancy

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–1
Overview of digital modules GSM-208-323
MCUF and NIU

redundancy
The digital module shelf can:
S Support two MCUFs at a BTS site, one master, one slave (for
redundancy).
S Enable a master MCUF failure to result in a slave MCUF becoming the
master after a reset.
S Enable the OMC-R operator to initiate a master/slave MCUF swap.
S Configure the CTUs by the master MCUF.
All four NIUs operate from the master MCUF, but each pair of NIUs depend on a
BPSM for power. All NIUs configure to the master MCUF clock.
NOTE When fitting a replacement redundant MCUF, care must
be taken to ensure firmware compatibility with the master
MCUF. Firmware incompatibility may result in a loss of
communication between the two MCUFs so that the
redundant MCUF is not in a position to take control in the
event of a failure of the master MCUF.
Full size and

half size
modules
Modules are full size and half size, as shown in Table 9-1.
Table 9-1 Full size and half size digital modules

Full size modules Half size modules
Main control unit with dual FMUX (MCUF) Network interface unit (NIU)
Alarm module Fibre optic multiplexer (FMUX)
BPSM (microBCU power
supply module)

Tech. 9–2 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Overview of digital modules
Digital module
and CTU
connections
The MCUF is connected to the CTUs in the same cabinet through the
backplane. Optional connection to CTUs in up to three additional cabinets (six
CTUs per cabinet) is by fibre optic links. FMUXs, two internal to the MCUF and
one half size module, convert the electronic data stream into a fibre optic signal.
An FMUX module in each extension cabinet converts the fibre optic signal back
to electronic data stream, for transmission to CTUs via the backplane.
The NIU modules convert signals for terrestrial E1 or T1 lines.
Diagram of
digital module
and CTU
connections
Figure 9-2 shows a block diagram of the digital module and CTU connections.
E1/T1 E1/T1
NIUA0 NIUA1 NIUB0 NIUB1
TO EXTENSION 2 TO EXTENSION
CABINET FOR SIX 2 FMUX MCUF CABINET FOR SIX
FMUX TRANSCEIVERS
TRANSCEIVERS
2 TO EXTENSION
FMUX
CABINET FOR SIX
TRANSCEIVERS
(CONNECTIONS VIA BACKPLANE)
2
TRANSCEIVER
2
TRANSCEIVER
2
TRANSCEIVER
2
TRANSCEIVER
2
TRANSCEIVER
2
TRANSCEIVER
Figure 9-2 Digital module and CTU connections

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–3
MCUF GSM-208-323
MCUF
MCUF overview
The main control unit with dual FMUX (MCUF) provides the site processing
functions, apart from RF functions of the transceiver. The MCUF also provides
switching for up to six network interfaces (via four NIUs) and up to 24
transceivers.
Two Horizonmacro indoor cabinets, BTS 0 and BTS 1, may be installed within
the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure. BTS 0 is designated as the master cabinet and
fitted with two MCUF modules, one for redundancy. Each MCUF module has an
electronic ID for remote identification. BTS 1 is designated as an extension
cabinet and is not equipped with MCUF modules. A fibre optic link connects the
master cabinet MCUF to an FMUX in the extension cabinet.
The MCUF provides the following functions:
S Maintenance and operational/control processing.
S Call processing (for example resource management and switching of

baseband hopping data).
S Switching of traffic and control information.
S Timing reference and network/BTS master clock synchronization.
S The functionality of two FMUX (see FMUX module and FMUX function in
this chapter).
S Support for up to six transceivers via the backplane in the master cabinet
and up to an additional 18 transceivers via FMUX connections to other
cabinets.
S Support of up to six E1 or T1 circuits, via NIU modules.
S Support of the CSFP function via the PCMCIA flash memory card.
Capability to
replace MCU of
M-Cell6 and
M-Cell2
The MCUF combines the MCU function of M-Cell6 with two FMUX modules. If
the MCUF is installed in an M-Cell6 or M-Cell2, the MCUF automatically reverts
to the functionality of an MCU and the internal FMUX devices no longer operate.
In M-Cell2, reverting to MCU mode includes the ability to directly connect to two
transceivers by modified use of the front panel FMUX fibre optic connections.
NOTE This capability to use MCUF in M-Cell6 and M-Cell2 is only

possible with GSR4 software release or later.

Tech. 9–4 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 MCUF
GPROC, TSW
and GLCK
functions
The MCU section of the MCUF module combines functions of older generation
equipment:
S The BTP (Base Transceiver Processor) functions and CSFP (Code
Storage Facility Processor) functions (provided PCMCIA card fitted),
formerly achieved by generic processor boards (GPROCs).
S The timeslot switch (TSW).
S The generic clock (GCLK).
MCUF module
view
Figure 9-3 shows an MCUF module.
PROCESSORS
BACKPLANE
INTERNAL FMUX
CONNECTORS
FIBRE OPTIC
CONNECTIONS
TTY MMI
DEBUG PORT
CAL PORT
OSCILLATOR
BDM PORT
PCMCIA
CARD SLOT
STATUS LEDS (RED & GREEN)
PCMCIA EJECT
BUTTON
RESET BUTTONS
(FULL - REMOVES SOFTWARE FROM MEMORY
CPU – RESETS MCUF CPU)
Figure 9-3 View of the MCUF

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–5
MCUF GSM-208-323
MCUF
functional
diagram
Figure 9-4 shows a functional diagram of the MCUF.
SIGNAL CONNECTOR TO BACKPLANE
TTY 2
INTERFACE
BDM PORT 2
3 3 MMI GPS
MAIN RS232
(IF USED)
PROCESSORS
4 4 PIX
V.28 OUTPUT
RED LED
GREEN LED
EXTERNAL
SITE ID
RESET AND
WARM RESET RESET
SWITCHES
CONTROL 16/32 Mbyte

DATA DRAM
PCMCIA
INTERFACE PCMCIA
ADDRESS FAST FLASH
EEPROM
SLOW FLASH
EEPROM
6
NIU
ASIC REDUNDANT
MCUF
SYNC GPS 1PPS

(IF USED)
BLOCK EXTERNAL
CLOCK
FLASH
2 EPROM
DEBUG PORT
RAM EXTERNAL
FIBRE OPTIC 6 FMUX
CONNECTORS MODULE
CTU x 6 VIA
FMUX IN 6 6 CTU x 6
2
OTHER FMUX IN SAME
CABINETS CABINET
(OR TCU x 6 2 6
VIA FMUX IN FMUX
M-CELL6
CABINETS)
Figure 9-4 Functional diagram of MCUF in MCUF mode

Tech. 9–6 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 MCUF
Link to
redundant
MCUF
The link to the redundant MCUF is similar to a transceiver link, but does not
have the BBH capability, or the link delay measurement and compensation
facility. The 6.12 s, and 60 ms signals, are inserted into timeslots 8 and 16.
When the MCUF is in slave mode, timeslot and E1/T1 clock information is
extracted from the MCUF link and passed to the sync block.
The main processor HDLC link to the redundant MCUF can be routed in any
unused timeslot(s) of this link.
The ASIC can switch any timeslot on the redundancy link to any timeslot on any
of the other links connected to it such as the transceiver links, network links,
redundancy link or processor links.
Front panel
interfaces
TTY interface
A standard TTY interface is provided on the front panel, of 9.6 kbit/s (8 bits, No
parity, 1 stop bit (8 N 1)). A local maintenance terminal can be attached to this
port to use the MMI (Man Machine Interface) of the MCUF.
Debug and BDM ports

Two front panel ports are for Motorola factory and development use only:
S The debug port, consists of a TTY connection to the sync processor to
access sync firmware, together with other connections to the ASIC and
main processors.
S The Background Debug Mode (BDM) port is used for low level debugging
of the main processors.
FMUX fibre optic connections

There are fibre optic connections from the MCUF internal FMUX modules. The
fibre optic connectors enable connection to FMUX modules in other cabinets for
additional transceivers.
CAL port
The CAL port on the front panel of the MCUF can be used to calibrate the sync
block clock via MMI commands. The 8 kHz reference output is used in the
GCLK calibration procedure (see Calibrating the MCUF (GCLK) in Category
523 Maintenance Information: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor (GSM-208-523)
later in this manual).

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–7
MCUF GSM-208-323
PCMCIA interface
The PCMCIA card is located on the front panel of the MCUF, and is used for:
S Code Storage Facility Processor (CSFP) memory.
S Rapid site initialization.
The PCMCIA socket is an industrial standard 68 pin single socket, fitted with an
ejector. The PCMCIA interface supports rev 2.1 type I and II cards.
The 20 Mbyte card can be write enabled, for upgrade of site information, or
disabled to protect card use for other sites or secure the site code.
Front panel
switches and
indicators
The front panel of the MCUF module has two reset switches as shown in
Figure 9-3:
S FULL is a hard reset (power up - removes software from the memory).
S CPU is a soft reset (this resets the MCUF main processors, but the
software remains in RAM).
A hard reset results in the software being reloaded to the DRAM in the same
way as normal power up.
NOTE During the CPU (soft) reset, pressing CPU reset again will
perform a hard reset. Double pressing of the CPU reset
thus has the same effect as a hard reset.
The MCUF has two front panel LEDs (one green and one red) as shown in
Figure 9-3, with indications as shown in Table 9-2.
CAUTION When red and green LEDs are flashing, the boot code is
downloading into non-volatile memory for software
upgrade. Do not remove power or reset the cabinet until
downloading has been completed, as this will corrupt the
non-volatile memory. If boot code is corrupted, contact the
Motorola Customer Network Resolution Centre, requesting
the boot code restoration procedure and the appropriate
boot code file.
Table 9-2 MCUF front panel LED indication

Red Green Status
Off Off Board not powered up or in rest cycle
Off On Normal operation
On Off Fault condition
Flashing Flashing Non-volatile memory boot code upgrade
(Do not remove power nor reset – see CAUTION)

Tech. 9–8 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 MCUF
PIX interfaces
The MCUF provides four PIX outputs on the backplane, driven at V.28 levels.
The four PIX outputs, routed to the cabinet alarm board, enable relay contact
control of external customer equipment.
DRAM, flash
EPROM and
code loading
functions
DRAM
The 16 Mbyte DRAM provides operational code and data storage for the main
processors. There is also a SIMM socket in the circuit board, enabling the
addition of a further 16 Mbytes if required. After software initialization, the DRAM
uses ECC protection. Memory protection is provided by the main processors.
Fast flash EPROM

The fast flash 1 Mbyte bank (256k x 32) is used for bootcode and executive
process code. It has a fast access time (<75 ns) , enabling direct execution.
The bootcode is factory set, and reprogrammed only in major software
upgrades.
Slow flash EPROM

The slow flash 0.5 Mbyte bank (256k x 16) is used for non-volatile data storage
of diagnostic data and module ID information.
Code loading
The boot and executive code, held in the fast flash EPROM, initiates the MCUF
on power up or reset. If a PCMCIA memory card is fitted, operational code may
be obtained and copied to the DRAM for execution. If no card or code is
available, the operational code is obtained from the BSC.
Before execution, the operational code held in DRAM is checked with code held
at the BSC. The BSC downloads any changed code objects to the DRAM.
After successful checking of the DRAM operational code, the code is executed,
and the PCMCIA memory card updated with any changed objects.
CSFP code loading

If a PCMCIA memory card is available, then a code storage facility processor
(CSFP) function can be supported. A new software load can be downloaded in
background, without any reduction in service, and stored on the PCMCIA card.
Once the complete load has been transferred to the PCMCIA card, a code swap
can be initiated. The site is reset and the new software brought into service (<10
minutes). As a precaution, the old version is held on the PCMCIA card to
support a roll back to the original version if required.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–9
MCUF GSM-208-323
ASIC
functionality
The Application Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC) provides central switching
capabilities for the MCUF. It is capable of supporting up to 24 transceivers,
together with up to six network interfaces and two links to the on-board
processors, one link to the sync processor and a link to the redundant MCUF.
The link to the sync processor is used for code loading purposes only. The
ASIC supports baseband hopping across the 24 transceiver links.
The ASIC provides interface features associated with the transceiver links,
these include synchronization features to allow for delay in the link to the
transceivers, and the necessary framing and encoding to support the link.
All of the serial links into the ASIC are internal lines (I lines), 125 ms framed,
with 32 eight bit timeslots per frame.
ASIC transceiver link features
The ASIC interfaces to a maximum of 24 transceiver links. The ASIC can switch
any timeslot on any of the transceiver links to any timeslot on other links
connected to the ASIC; transceiver links, network links, MCUF redundancy link
or processor links.
The ASIC provides the following features associated with the transceiver links:
S Link advance/delay compensation.
The ASIC will continually measure the round trip delay on each transceiver
link to calculate a timing advance for each link. The link advance is
applied, and can be adjusted by the main processor via the processor
parallel interface.
S BBH data switching.
BBH switching is performed automatically on any timeslot configured as

BBH data. A single timeslot from the transceiver is selected for BBH
routeing information, and defines which transceiver link (0-23) should be
used for downlink.
S Timing reference insertion.
The ASIC receives timing pulses from the sync block and inserts the
appropriate bits into the transceiver downlink synchronization and framing
timeslots. The sync block will provide a version of the 6.12 s and 60 ms
signals that is advanced by 125 ms for this purpose.
S Manchester coding/decoding.
The transceiver links are all Manchester coded/decoded by the ASIC.

This function can be switched on or off (default on) on a per link basis.
The disable feature is for applications outside of the MCUF module.

Tech. 9–10 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 MCUF
ASIC/network and processor link switching

The ASIC supports a maximum of six network links and two main processor
links. The data to/from these links can be switched to/from any timeslot on other
links connected to the ASIC.
The two links to the main processor allow it to route HDLC and other links to the
appropriate place:
S 24 HDLC timeslots for the BCF RSS channel to each transceiver.
S Four timeslots for NIU control channels (two local, two redundant).
S Sync processor code load channel.
S Two channels for RSL links.
S One HDLC channel occupying up to three timeslots to the redundant

MCUF.
Sync block
functionality
The sync block is controlled via the parallel interface of the main processors.
The sync block is responsible for site synchronization functions. It generates all
required local references from a high stability local clock source. This clock
source may also be locked to the incoming network clocks.
The sync clock source is in the form of a crystal oscillator (OCXO) which warms
up for phase locking in 4 minutes, and achieves frequency stabilization in 15
minutes.
Site frame reference generation and re-timing includes:
S 2.048 MHz – For serial communications.
S 16.384 MHz – For FMUX communications.
S 125 ms – For NIU framing and transceiver framing.
S 60 ms – For transceiver GSM timing.
S 6.12 s – For GSM superframe.
The reference clocks available to the sync block are:
S Six network extracted clocks (E1/T1 source via NIUs). Any of the NIU
modules under control of the MCUF can extract a reference clock from an
E1/T1 link and pass to the Sync block.
S CAL port. The CAL port can be used to calibrate the sync block clock via
MMI commands. The reference output provides a monitoring point.
S Redundant MCUF link.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–11
MCUF GSM-208-323
Phase lock loop (PLL) operating modes

The PLL uses the selected reference signal as the loop reference clock. It
includes an OCXO accurate to 0.05 ppm, a phase comparator and a loop filter.
The PLL has the following operating modes:
S Warm-up
The PLL is open loop and using the calibration frequency, but the OCXO
is not yet warmed up.
S Set frequency
The PLL is open loop and using the calibration frequency, and the OCXO
is warmed up.
S Fast tune
Closed loop with wide filter for coarse locking to the reference (extracted
from network clock).
S Fine tune
Closed loop with narrow filter for accurate locking to the reference
(extracted from network clock).
When in fine tune closed loop mode, the accuracy is 0.01 ppm.
Sync block code load

The sync block controller has a dedicated 2.048 Mbit/s serial link into the ASIC
enabling a 64 kbit/s HDLC channel to the main processors for code loading.
The sync block includes 256 k of flash EPROM used to store:
S Boot code.
S Operational code.
The boot code, which cannot be altered, queries the main processors on the
current version of the sync operational code.
If the stored operational code is the correct version, the boot code will move the
operational code to RAM and execute the code.
If the query results in the need for new operational code, the sync processor will
download the operational code from the main processors via the ASIC to the
RAM in the sync block.
After a successful download, the boot code programmes the flash EPROM with
the new operational code and runs the operational code in RAM.
GSM counters
The following counters are provided:
S GSM frame incremented every 4.615 ms, range 0 - 1325.
S GSM superframe incremented every 6.12 s, range 0 - 2047.

Tech. 9–12 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 MCUF
Integral MCUF
FMUX
functionality
The equivalent function of two FMUX modules exists integral to the MCUF,
enabling two extension cabinets to be connected. To enable total of four
cabinets to be joined together as one BTS site, an FMUX module is also
required in the master cabinet to connect the third extension cabinet. A single
cabinet site has no need for the FMUX functionality, because the MCUF
connects with the cabinet CTUs through the backplane.
Each fibre optic multiplexer (FMUX) function multiplexes and demultiplexes six,
full duplex, transceiver links to one (TX/Rx) pair of fibre optic cables. This
enables up to six transceivers in a single extension cabinet (either
Horizonmacro or M-Cell6) to be linked to the master cabinet.
Each FMUX fibre optic link is full duplex 16.384 Mbit/s. The FMUX optical link is
capable of driving up to 1 km.
For functional description of FMUX see FMUX module and FMUX function in
this chapter.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–13
NIU GSM-208-323
NIU
Overview of NIU
The network interface unit (NIU) module provides two E1 or two T1 termination
links to the terrestrial network. The NIU E1/T1 outputs are connected to a T43 or
BIB board, depending on the impedance matching requirement of the customer
terrestrial circuits.
There are two types of NIU board, one for E1, one for T1. The NIU layout is
common to both E1 and T1, the only differences being in the associated crystal
oscillators and line matching resistor values.
An on-board NIU control processor provides network interface configuration and
supervision, controlled by the MCUF.
NIU locations
The cabinet may contain up to four NIU modules in the digital module shelf, as
shown in Figure 9-1. Two NIUs are located in the master (lower) part of the
shelf. Two NIUs are in the redundant (upper) part of the shelf, though these
upper NIUs are also used for non-redundant purposes.
An NIU in slot A0 supports two E1/T1 links.
An NIU in slot A1 supports one E1/T1 link.
An NIU in slot B0 supports two E1/T1 links.
An NIU in slot B1 supports one E1/T1 link.
NIU command
identity number
Each NIU is identified in the database by an identity number, from 0 to 3.
Table 9-3 shows the NIU slots and equivalent identity number.
Table 9-3 NIU slot and equivalent command identity

NIU (MSI) identity number NIU slot
used in commands
0 A0
1 B0
2 A1
3 B1

Tech. 9–14 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 NIU
NIU view and

LEDs
Figure 9-5 shows an NIU module.
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
NIU GREEN LED
NIU RED LED
RESET/DISABLE
SWITCH
Figure 9-5 View of the NIU module

The NIU status is indicated by the two front panel LEDs, one green and one red,
controlled by the on-board processor, as shown in Table 9-4.
Table 9-4 NIU LED display
Red LED Green LED Status of NIU board
Off Off NIU not powered up, or in reset cycle.
Off On Normal operation.
Flashing Flashing NIU undergoing system code download.
On On NIU self testing following switch on or
reboot.
Red LED extinguishes after 20 seconds, or
after 50 seconds following a reboot due to
code download.
NIU
functionality
The NIU provides two E1/T1 interfaces into the network (link 0 and link 1) as
well as LAPD encoding/decoding and clock recovery from a selected E1/T1 link.
The second E1/T1 interface (link 1) is not used for NIUs placed in positions NIU
A1 and NIU B1, as shown in Figure 9-1.
An NIU control processor provides network interface configuration and
supervision, controlled by the MCUF. The NIU control processor maintains two
independent control links in the redundant configuration (one to each MCUF),
each using timeslot 0 of MCUF link 0.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–15
NIU GSM-208-323
NIU diagram
Figure 9-6 identifies the functional blocks in the NIU.
BACKPLANE CONNECTORS
RS232
RESET CONNECTION
SWITCH RESET
RED LED BDM

CONTROL CONNECTION
GREEN LED
PROCESSOR
DATA
DRAM
ADDRESS
XTAL
FLASH
EEPROM REDUNDANT
ÏÏÏÏÏ
MCUF LINK 0
REDUNDANT
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
MCUF LINK 1
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
MASTER MCUF
MUX LINK 0
ÏÏÏÏÏ
DEMUX
MASTER MCUF
ÏÏÏÏÏ
LINK 1
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
TIMESLOT
MULTIPLEXER FRAMER LIU
NETWORK
E1/T1 LINK 0
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ
EXTRACTED
CLOCK 0
ÏÏÏÏÏ
REF 6.12 s
REF 125 ms
ÏÏÏÏÏ
REF 2.048 MHz
ÏÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ FRAMER LIU
EXTRACTED
CLOCK 1
ÏÏÏÏÏ
NETWORK
E1/T1 LINK 1
ÏÏÏÏÏ
Figure 9-6 Functional diagram of NIU module

Tech. 9–16 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 NIU
Control
processor
The control processor interfaces to timeslot 0 of link 0 from each connected
MCUF.
The processor uses 512 Kbytes of flash EPROM for boot code. operational
code storage and module ID. Code is executed directly from the flash EPROM.
The boot code can be overwritten under control of the MCUF, if required.
The processor also has an on-chip 1 Mbyte of DRAM.
TTY Ports
The processing section provides two TTY ports for Motorola debugging
purposes only.
Resets
The processor is capable of soft resetting itself. The front panel reset causes a
hard reset of the entire board. Power-on also resets the processor.
The MCUF is able to reset the NIU via a message on the HDLC link.
NIU/MCUF
framing and
clocks
The control processor is supplied with a clock from an on-board crystal
oscillator, which has an output enable pad for test purposes. The framer
devices also have their own crystal oscillators on-board.
The framer devices provide the decoded and jitter attenuated receive data, for
passing to the MCUF.
The framer devices also extract a clock signal from an E1/T1 link, which is then
passed to the MCUF synchronization circuit. At the MCUF, this signal is used to
phase lock a local 16.384 MHz clock signal. Once phase locked, three reference
clock signals are provided for NIU use:
S REF 2.048 MHz clock signal.
S REF 6.12 s clock signal.
S REF 125 ms clock signal.
The NIU transmit and receive framing is controlled by this 125 ms reference
pulse received from the MCUF.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–17
NIU GSM-208-323
Distance
measurement
The NIU provides the ability to perform network distance delay measurement on
either of the two network links. Measurement can only be performed on one link
at a time.
Three modes of operation are possible:
S Mode 1. A pattern is transmitted in a selected network timeslot and the
corresponding receive timeslot is monitored for its return. The delay is
measured to an accuracy of ± 488 ns. The pattern is transmitted on the
6.12 second reference signal.
S Mode 2. The receive link is monitored for the pattern. When received the
pattern is transmitted back in the next frame. The time between receipt
and transmission of the pattern is measured to an accuracy of ± 488 ns.
S Mode 3. The receive link is monitored for the pattern. When it is detected
a strobe is generated for the MCUF sync block.
Radio signalling
links (RSLs)
The radio signalling links (RSLs) to the BSC from the main processor on the
MCUF are 64 Kbit/s LAPD links. The LAPD encoding of this RSL data is
performed on the NIU by the NIU control processor.
The RSL links between the MCUF and NIU must be sent as follows:
S RSL link 1 is embedded in the NIU control link; that is, it will be in timeslot
0 of link 0 to the NIU. This link is important for initialization.
NOTE When the NIU is on a network link to a BSC or another
BTS, the RSL can be placed on either link on any default
timeslot other than zero.
S RSL link 2 is on a different timeslot from that used for the network
connection
The NIU will support a maximum of two RSL links. The RSL links may both be
on a single network link or shared between the two network links.
The NIU hardware supports switching for 64 k and 16 k LAPD channels.
T1 NIU need to
set link type
T1 NIUs and E1 NIUs cannot be interchanged. A T1 link line consists of 24
timeslots as opposed to 32 timeslots for an E1 link line. A T1 link generates
specific T1 alarms, referred to as Red alarms. A T1 NIU supports the same MSI
type of device transitions as an E1 NIU.
The OMC-R operator should set the link type or it will default the site to an E1
system. In ROM it is set by a ROM-only MMI command. In RAM it is a database
parameter set by a chg_element command.
The RSL default timeslots are the same for a T1 NIU and an E1 NIU. The basic
mechanism for communicating and configuring is also the same.

Tech. 9–18 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 T43/BIB-NIU - E1/T1 mapping
T43/BIB-NIU - E1/T1 mapping
Overview of
T43/BIB-NIU
connection
The NIU network interface (E1/T1) links connect to a single CIM (T43) or BIM
(BIB) board on top of the cabinet by a single backplane connector and cable.
NIU to T43
mapping and
command ID
Only six network interfaces are used: three pairs connect to the master NIU
modules, and three pairs connect to the redundant NIU modules. Each NIU is
identified in the database by an identity number, from 0 to 3, as shown in the
final column of Table 9-5.
NOTE The redundant NIU modules are only redundant in the
sense of being supplied by a different BPSM, and can
thus continue to operate if the master BPSM fails. All NIUs
are available for separate use.
Table 9-5 defines the mapping from the T43/BIB connector to NIU boards.
Table 9-5 T43/BIB connector to NIU boards

T43 network 37-way D-type NIU location NIU identity (MSI)
side connections used in commands
connector (BIB)
J1 1,20 NIU A0 - Tx1 MSI(NIU) 0
J2 2,21 NIU A0 - Rx1
J7 7,26 NIU A0 - Tx2 MSI(NIU) 0
J8 8,27 NIU A0 - Rx2
J13 13,32 NIU A1 - Tx1 MSI(NIU) 2
J14 14,33 NIU A1 - Rx1
J4 4,23 NIU B0 - Tx1 MSI(NIU) 1
J5 5,24 NIU B0 - Rx1
J10 10,29 NIU B0 - Tx2 MSI(NIU) 1
J11 11,30 NIU B0 - Rx2
J16 16,35 NIU B1 - Tx1 MSI(NIU) 3
J17 17,36 NIU B1 - Rx1

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–19
T43/BIB-NIU - E1/T1 mapping GSM-208-323
Diagram of T43
connection to
NIUs
Figure 9-7 shows a diagram of T43 connection to NIUs.
J
1
2
NIU A0
7
8
13
14 NIU A1
T43
J
4
5
NIU B0
10
11
16
17 NIU B1
J0
Figure 9-7 Diagram of T43 connection to NIUs

Tech. 9–20 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 FMUX module and function
FMUX module and function
Overview of
FMUX module
The fibre optic multiplexer (FMUX) module multiplexes and demultiplexes six,
full duplex, transceiver links to one (TX/Rx) pair of fibre optic cables. This
enables up to six transceivers in a single extension cabinet (either
Horizonmacro or M-Cell6) to be linked to the master cabinet.
The FMUX has two modes of operation:
S Working in conjunction with the MCUF to multiplex transceiver links to/from
an extension cabinet.
S Operating in the extension cabinet to supply the transceivers in that
cabinet.
Two FMUX modules may be fitted in the digital module shelf, one to the master
MCUF, and one to the slave. An extension cabinet only requires one FMUX to
connect to six transceivers within the cabinet (plus one for redundancy if
required).
Each FMUX fibre optic link is full duplex 16.384 Mbit/s. The FMUX optical link is
capable of driving up to 1 km.
FMUX module
view
Figure 9-8 shows an FMUX module.
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
FIBRE OPTIC INPUT FROM

ANOTHER MCUF/FMUX IN
ANOTHER CABINET AT THE SITE
FIBRE OPTIC OUTPUT TO

ANOTHER MCUF/FMUX IN
ANOTHER CABINET AT THE SITE
Figure 9-8 View of FMUX module

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–21
FMUX module and function GSM-208-323
FMUX
functional
diagram
Figure 9-9 shows a block diagram of the FMUX module.
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
Rx FIBRE OPTIC
DATA RECEIVER MANCHESTER
ENCODED
FROM
MCUF/FMUX
IN ANOTHER
CABINET
MUX / 2:1 TO MCUF (IF

Tx/Rx DEMUX 6
SELECT MAIN
6 CABINET)
TO CTUs OR
TCUs (IF
EXTENSION
TO CABINET)
MCUF/FMUX
IN ANOTHER
CABINET
SELECT
Tx FIBRE OPTIC CONTROL
DATA TRANSMITTER (FROM MCUF)
Figure 9-9 Functional diagram of FMUX module
FMUX
functional
explanation
The MCUF transmits and receives a 2.048 Mbit/s data stream link to each
operational transceiver. In the master cabinet this is achieved by the backplane,
without using an FMUX.
If the transceiver is in an extension cabinet, the master cabinet FMUX combines
the data stream with up to five others (see Figure 9-9), and then converts the
electronic signal to fibre optic, for onward transmission to the extension cabinet.
At the extension cabinet, another FMUX converts the fibre optic signal back to
electronic form, for transmission to the transceivers.
The data stream return from the extension cabinet is a reverse of the above.
The multiplexer/demultiplexer can support up to six transceiver links. It uses a
16.384 Mbit/s Manchester encoded serial data link, organized as 256 x eight bit
timeslots in a 125 ms frame. Manchester coding is used to detect errors,
indicated at timeslot zero for each transceiver, enabling error correction at the
other FMUX.

Tech. 9–22 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Alarm module
Alarm module
Alarm module
overview
The alarm module is located in the digital module shelf, adjacent to the MCUFs.
It provides the cabinet equipment with an external alarm system to report
operational status. The alarm module:
S Collects all cabinet alarms (received from the backplane).
S Provides current sensing for 16 customer inputs, referred to as site
alarms. These inputs are provided by the PIX connectors PIX0 and PIX1.
S Controls up to four relay driven outputs linked to customer equipment.
(Changeover contacts 30 V 1 A maximum.) These outputs are provided by
the PIX0 connector.
S Transmits alarm information to all CTUs in the same cabinet.
Alarm module
view
Figure 9-10 shows an alarm module.
BACKPLANE
CONNECTOR
5 LED PAIRS
Figure 9-10 Alarm module view

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–23
Alarm module GSM-208-323
Alarm module
functionality
The alarm module receives inputs from:
S Cabinet PSMs (identifying type, manufacturer and slot number).
S Environmental control devices.
S Customer defined alarms.
The alarm board receives these inputs, encodes them, and then passes the
code word to all CTUs in the cabinet via the backplane.
Alarm module
replacement –
effect on alarms
The alarm module can be replaced while the cabinet system is running (hot
replacement). This will temporarily interrupt alarms, with the OMC-R receiving
an additional alarm module out of service alarm, which automatically clears
upon correct insertion of the replacement module.
Alarm collection
from extension
cabinets
Extension cabinet alarms are sent from the extension cabinet alarm module to
the extension cabinet CTUs. The CTUs transmit the alarms to the main cabinet,
by using the normal FMUX connection, for transmission to the MCUF.

Tech. 9–24 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Alarm module
Alarm module
display
presentation
All alarms LEDs are green or off when equipment is functioning correctly, and
red when equipment is faulty. The LED designations are shown in Table 9-6.
Table 9-6 Alarm module LED list

LED Normal/Alarm Fault indicated by alarm state (LED is red)
location state
1 (top) Off/Red AC supply fail.
2 Off/Red Rectifier fail.
3 Off/Red Indoor cabinet door open.
4 Off/Red Enclosure door/hood open.
5 Off/Red Low voltage disconnect (LVD) alarm (battery
backup option).
6 Green/Red Fan Tray 0 faulty (4-fan tray).
9 Off/Red HMS 1 fan fail.
10 (bottom) Off/Red HMS 0 fan fail.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 9–25
Alarm module GSM-208-323

Tech. 9–26 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Chapter 10
Ancillary enclosure

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A i
GSM-208-323

ii 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323
Chapter 10

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A iii
GSM-208-323

iv 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Ancillary enclosure structure
Ancillary enclosure structure
Introduction to
the ancillary
enclosure
The ancillary enclosure is a customer option for extending the battery backup
capability of the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor from 0.7 hours up to a
maximum of 4.0 hours.
Mechanical
design
The ancillary enclosure matches the appearance of the main enclosure. A single
lockable door opens to the right and provides access to the enclosure. The
hood is fixed and does not open.
Cable entry to the enclosure is provided by two lengths of flexible conduit,
preinstalled on the left side. The conduits are designed for connection to the low
level cable entry holes on the main enclosure. The –48 V dc output and the
alarm signal cable are carried in one conduit, and the 230 V ac supply and earth
cables are carried in the other.
Most of the enclosure interior space is used to provide adjustable shelving to
accommodate various monobloc types. Each of the three shelves can contain
four 12 V monoblocs (one –48 V battery string).
A Battery Management Module (BMM) is mounted at the top of the enclosure.
This provides the following facilities:
S Battery circuit protection.
S Power monitoring.
S Battery monitoring.
S –48 V dc auxiliary power.
S Alarm interface to the main enclosure.
A 230 V ac heater unit is mounted in the base of the enclosure to prevent the
internal temperature from dropping below 0 °C. This heater unit is of the same
design as the one used in the main enclosure.
The following alarm sensing equipment is also installed in the ancillary
enclosure:
S Smoke detector.
S Overtemperature alarm thermostat.
S Overtemperature shutdown thermostats (two).
S Door closure sensor.
Interior lighting for the enclosure is provided and is powered from the 230 V ac
supply.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 10–1
Ancillary enclosure structure GSM-208-323
Ancillary
enclosure
layout
Figure 10-1 shows the internal layout of the ancillary enclosure.
LIGHT (NOT VISIBLE)
BATTERY MANAGEMENT
MODULE
BATTERY STRING 3
BATTERY STRING 2
BATTERY STRING 1
HEATER TEST BUTTON
AC SUPPLY
ISOLATOR SWITCH
HEATER UNIT
ADJUSTABLE SHELVING
Figure 10-1 Ancillary enclosure machanical layout (door removed)

Tech. 10–2 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-323 Ancillary enclosure technical description
Ancillary enclosure technical description
Circuit diagram
Figure 10-2 shows a circuit diagram for the ancillary enclosure.
ENCLOSURE 80 °C 70 °C SMOKE
THERMOSTATS Open on Open on DETECTOR
rise rise
D104
8
J7
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR 2 FS3 FS5
J
4 J CUST
D106
5 EQPMT
2 FS2
J LVD
9 J
D105 FAN
DOOR 8
(NOT USED)
SENSOR
BATTERY
CONTROL FS1 FS4 J 8
ALARM MONITOR
D100 UNIT 1
AND J 1
CONTROL 6
SIGNALS
B101
BATTERY 8
B100 MONITOR J
0 V DC J 2
–48 V DC 0 2
CB 3 CB 2 CB 1
CURRENT BATTERY 8
SENSE J
MONITOR 3
3
VOLTAGE
SENSE
C100 C101
–48 V DC 0 V DC
AC CIRCUIT
B112 B116
D103
COMPARTMENT 3
J
LIGHT AND
1 B113 B114 B115
SERVICE OUTLET
– + – + – + – +
A102
BLOC 4 BLOC 3 BLOC 2 BLOC 1

12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V
3
A100 J J
1 2
3
D102
STRING 3
THERMOSTAT
B107 B108 B109 B110 B111
J3 – + – + – + – +
3

A101
12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V
D101 STRING 2
HEATER B103 B104 B105 B106
B102
– + – + – + – +

12 V 12 V 12 V 12 V
STRING 1
Figure 10-2 Ancillary enclosure circuit diagram

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 10–3
Ancillary enclosure technical description GSM-208-323
The battery
management
module
The BMM provides all the dc power, control and monitoring facilities for the
ancillary enclosure, as described below:
Battery circuit protection

The BMM houses three circuit breakers / isolators, one for each of the battery
strings. The circuit breakers connect the battery strings to a single output feed to
the main enclosure, and are equipped with auxiliary contacts and a shunt coil for
trip alarms and remote shutdown.
Battery monitoring
The BMM monitors the voltage of each 12 V monobloc in the enclosure through
voltage sense cables, connected between the monobloc terminals and the BMM
(connectors J1, J2 and J3). A single summary alarm is generated if a sustained
voltage imbalance of >10% is detected between monoblocs in the same battery
string.
The BMM front panel (Figure 10-3) houses LEDs to indicate the condition of
each monobloc in the enclosure. This enables easy identification of which
monobloc has failed.
Figure 10-3 Battery monitoring facilities on the BMM front panel
Auxiliary power
The BMM provides two fused –48 V dc auxiliary power outlets. One outlet is
mounted on the rear panel and can be used to power an enclosure fan (not
required). The other outlet is mounted on the front panel and can be used for
the connection of customer equipment.
The auxiliary power is taken from the dc feed to the main enclosure and is fed to
the outlets through a Low Voltage Disconnect (LVD) circuit. This circuit also
provides dc power for the smoke detector.
Power monitoring
Two pairs of 4 mm test sockets are provided on the BMM front panel. One pair
is for voltage monitoring, and the other pair is for current monitoring.

Tech. 10–4 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Alarm interface
The BMM provides inputs for the following alarms:
S Smoke alarm.
S Enclosure overtemperature alarm and overtemperature shutdown.
S Door open.
S Battery fail.
The alarm signals are routed from the BMM to the Alarm Interface Module (AIM)
in the the main enclosure via a single 25-way cable.
NOTE The BMM also accepts ANC smoke alarm trip signals and
battery monitor alarm reset signals from the main
enclosure.
BMM front panel

Figure 10-4 shows the front panel of the BMM.
Figure 10-4 BMM front panel detail
BMM rear panel

Figure 10-5 shows the connectors on the BMM rear panel.
+ –
0V 0V 0V –48 V –48 V –48 V

TO TO TO TO TO TO
STR 1 STR 2 STR 3 STR 1 STR 2 STR 3
ANDERSON SBS175
CONNECTOR
(TO MAIN ENCLOSURE)
Figure 10-5 BMM rear panel detail

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 10–5
BMM connector
pinouts
Table 10-1 to Table 10-6 list the pinouts for the connectors on the BMM.
Table 10-1 J4: Internal battery temperature sensor

1 Earth 3 Temperature sensor return
2 Temperature sensor
Table 10-2 J5: Comms power

1 –48 V 3 Earth
2 0V
Table 10-3 J6: Main enclosure signal cable

1 ANC smoke alarm trip return 14 Batt fail alarm
2 ANC smoke alarm trip 15 Batt fail alarm return
3 Door switch return 16 Batt monitor reset
4 Door switch 17 Batt monitor reset return
5 ANC enclosure overtemp 18 Aux alarm
return
6 ANC enclosure 19 Aux alarm return
overtemperature
7 Smoke alarm return 20 –
8 Smoke alarm 21 –
9 Temperature sensor return 22 –
10 ANC temperature sensor 23 –
11 O/T shutdown return 24 –
12 O/T shutdown 25 –
13 –

Tech. 10–6 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
Table 10-4 J7: Smoke/overtemperature alarm

1 Smoke dc –ve 6 O/T shutdown
2 Smoke dc +ve 7 O/T shutdown return
3 Smoke alarm 8 ANC enclosure
overtemperature
4 Smoke alarm return 9 ANC enclosure overtemp
return
5 –
Table 10-5 J8: Fan power/alarm (not used)

1 –48 V 3 Fan fail
2 0V 4 Fan fail return
Table 10-6 J9: Door alarm

1 Door switch 2 Door switch return

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 10–7
Alarm
management
All alarm signals to and from the ancillary enclosure are handled by the battery
management module. The BMM connects directly to the Alarm Interface Module
(AIM) in the main enclosure through a 25-way signal cable. This connects
between J6 on the rear panel of the BMM and J4/J41 on the AIM.
Alarm signals from the BMM to the AIM can be overridden, depending on the
position of DIP switches on SW1 in the AIM.
The pinouts for J6 on the BMM are shown in Table 10-3 (see BMM connector
pinouts).
Alarm and control inputs

S ANC smoke alarm trip and O/T shutdown
Smoke alarm and overtemperature signals are fed directly from the
sensors in the ancillary enclosure, through the BMM, to the AIM in the
main enclosure. The power control module then processes the signals and
issues an ancillary enclosure shutdown signal to the BMM. The BMM then
uses a 12 V dc control signal to trip all the circuit breakers in the ancillary
enclosure.
NOTE An overtemperature or smoke alarm signal generated by
the sensors located within the main enclosure itself also
causes an ancillary enclosure shutdown signal to be
generated.
S Batt monitor reset

The default settings for the battery monitors are non-latching. If the battery
monitors are set to latch on fail, the battery monitor reset function can be
controlled remotely via site output relay 4 from BTS 0 in the main
enclosure.
Alarm and control outputs

S Batt fail
Each monobloc is monitored by the BMM and any voltage imbalance, or
failure of the battery monitoring circuit, results in a single summary alarm
being sent to the AIM.
S Aux alarm
The BMM sends an Aux alarm to the AIM when one of the battery circuit
breakers has tripped (or if the fan fails – not used).

Tech. 10–8 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
The battery
strings
A maximum of 12 monoblocs can be installed in the ancillary enclosure,
arranged in three –48 V strings of four 12 V monoblocs. The dc voltage from
each string is fed to a single pair of dc supply cables to the main enclosure
through separate circuit breakers / isolators on the BMM front panel (see
Figure 10-2).
Under normal circumstances, the monoblocs in the ancillary enclosure are float
charged from the main enclosure. However, if an interruption to the main ac
supply occurs, power for the main enclosure and the ancillary enclosure is
automatically supplied from the monoblocs with no interruption. The LVD in the
power system automatically disconnects the monoblocs if the output voltage
drops below 39.5 V (+/–0.25 V) to prevent deep discharge.
The shelving for the monoblocs is adjustable to accommodate monobloc types
from different battery manufacturers (see Table 1-14 in Battery specifications
in Chapter 1 of this category).
The extended battery backup times available for the main enclosure when
additional battery strings are installed in the ancillary enclosure vary between
1.9 hours when one string is installed, up to 4.0 hours when three strings are
installed.
The heater unit

The heater unit is mounted in the base of the ancillary enclosure. It switches on
at low temperature to prevent the internal temperature from dropping below
0 °C.
A test button, mounted next to the ac isolator switch, is provided to test the
operation of the heater.
The heater is powered by 230 V ac from the ac distribution unit in the main
enclosure.
AC isolator
switch
An ac isolator switch is installed in the ancillary enclosure, to the right of the
heater unit. This allows the ac supply for the heater and light/service outlet
socket to be isolated locally from the ac powered equipment in the enclosure,
avoiding the need to open the main enclosure to isolate the supply externally.
Smoke detector
A vertically mounted smoke detector is installed near the top of the back wall, on
the left side of the enclosure, behind the BMM.
The smoke detector is powered by 24 V dc from the BMM. On detection of
smoke, the smoke detector sends an alarm signal to the AIM in the main
enclosure via the BMM. This causes the power control module in the enclosure
to send an ancillary enclosure shutdown signal to the BMM, resulting in all the
battery string circuit breakers on the BMM being tripped.

29th May 02 68P02902W67-A Tech. 10–9
Enclosure
lighting
Enclosure lighting is provided by a single fluorescent tube light, mounted
centrally in the roof panel. The light is powered from the same 230 V ac supply
from the main enclosure as the heater.
The light is of a similar type to that used in the main enclosure and is activated
by a proximity sensor.

Tech. 10–10 68P02902W67-A 29th May 02
INTRODUCTION TO SITE PREPARATION INSTALLING THE INSTALLING THE INDOOR INSTALLING THE
INSTALLATION ENCLOSURE CABINET ANCILLARY ENCLOSURE
CHAPTER 6 CHAPTER 7 CHAPTER 8
INTEROPERABILITY SITE COMMISSIONING SITE DECOMMISSIONING
Category 423
Installation & Configuration (Inst.)
Installation & Configuration: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A i
GSM-208-423

ii 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423
Category 423
Installation & Configuration (Inst.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–2
Rural sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–10
Site access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–12
Site layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–12

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A iii
GSM-208-423

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–13
Chapter 3
Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–4
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–7

iv 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423

Chapter 4

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A v
GSM-208-423

GPS pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–35
RTC pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–36
ICS pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–40
Chapter 5

vi 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423

Chapter 6

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A vii
GSM-208-423
Chapter 7
Chapter 8

GSM-208-423


29th May 02 68P02902W68-A ix
GSM-208-423

x 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Chapter 1
Introduction to installation

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A i
GSM-208-423

ii 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423
Chapter 1

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A iii
GSM-208-423

iv 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Introduction to installation
Introduction to installation
Installation
instructions
General installation instructions for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet are
included within every cabinet shipped.
This document specifically describes the installation of Horizonmacro indoor
cabinets within a 12 carrier outdoor enclosure.
NOTE It is important to follow the instructions given within this
document when installing Horizonmacro indoor equipment
within the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure. General
installation instructions received as part of the
Horizonmacro indoor consignment should be removed and
discarded.
Manual scope
This category (GSM-208-423) covers installation and commissioning for the
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure (complete with two Horizonmacro
indoor cabinets) and the optional ancillary enclosure. The information is
arranged in the following chapters:
Chapter 1 Introduction to installation

General information, safety instructions and information about tools needed to
install the equipment.
Chapter 2 Site preparation

Describes the procedures to be followed for initially preparing the site and
installing the necessary ducting and base.
Chapter 3 Installing the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure

All procedures necessary to install the enclosure in preparation for the
installation of one or two Horizonmacro indoor cabinets.
Chapter 4 Installing the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet

All procedures necessary to install one or two Horizonmacro indoor cabinets
ready for operation, together with suggested RF configuration options.
Chapter 5 Installing the ancillary enclosure

Describes the procedures for installing the optional ancillary enclosure to
provide additional battery backup for the main enclosure.
Chapter 6 Horizonmacro interoperability

Supplementary information, describing how M-Cell BTSs can be connected to
Horizonmacro BTSs.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 1–1
Introduction to installation GSM-208-423
Chapter 7 Site commissioning

All procedures necessary to enable the site to be fully operational.
Chapter 8 Site decommissioning

All procedures necessary to decommission the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets,
the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure, and the optional ancillary enclosure.
Software
requirements
The GSM/EGSM900 and DCS1800 BTSs require BSS and OMC-R software
release GSR4 (or higher) in the network.
The GSM850 and PCS1900 BTSs require BSS and OMC-R software release
GSR5.1 (or higher) in the network.
Safety
instructions
The following safety instructions must be observed when installing the
equipment described in this manual:
S The installation and configuration procedures described in this manual
must only be carried out by suitably trained personnel.
S Installation and commissioning must comply with all relevant national and
regional regulations.
S The enclosure(s) must be bolted down.
Contact
information
Contact the Motorola local office if problems are encountered when carrying out
any installation procedures described in this manual.

Inst. 1–2 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Tool kit requirements
Tool kit requirements

Overview for
tool kit
This section describes the recommended tools required for installing,
commissioning and maintaining the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure,
the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets, and the optional ancillary enclosure.
Tool kit list

Table 1-1 lists the contents of the tool kit.
Table 1-1 Installation tool list

Quantity Description
1 pair Safety goggles
1 Hard hat
1 Dust mask
1 pair Ear defenders
1 Antistatic wrist strap with coiled lead
1 Antistatic mat
1 Marker pen
1 Torch
1 Socket set (A/F/metric 13 mm sq drive)
1 250 mm adjustable spanner
1 200 mm adjustable spanner
1 each Combination spanners metric: 8 mm to 25 mm
1 Ratchet ring spanner (15 mm x 13 mm)
1 Torque spanner (12 mm)
1 Torque wrench (1 to 25 Nm)
1 Torxdriver set (T10 to T30) and security Torxdriver set (T10 to T30)
1 M6 Torx spanner (for SMA Tx block connectors)
1 Security allen key set
1 Claw hammer
1 Pipe cutter
1 Junior hacksaw
1 300 mm hacksaw
1 pair 150 mm side cutters
1 pair 150 mm heavy duty side cutters
1 pair Flush cut wire cutters

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 1–3
Tool kit requirements GSM-208-423
1 pair Light duty cable cutters
1 pair Cable shears
1 Knife with retractable blade
1 pair General purpose pliers
1 pair Snipe nose pliers
1 pair Industrial scissors
1 pair GP serrated jaw pliers
1 Set of jeweller’s screwdrivers
1 Screwdriver set (including flat and cross-head blades)
1 Isolating transformer (suitable for site use)
1 Piston drill (suitable for drilling concrete and capable of accepting
an M20 drill bit)
1 M20 drill bit
1 Drill bit set
1 6 m 240 V extension cable (twin outlet)
1 Soldering iron (dual temperature) with holder
1 Coaxial cable stripper for 2002 (75 ohm coaxial cable)
1 Hand crimp tool
1 Crimp tool for type 43 connectors
1 BNC crimp tool with inserts
1 Telephone plug crimp tool
1 50 mm crimp tool
1 Cable tie gun
1 1.5 m wooden step ladder
1 Table vice
1 250 mm vice grips
1 7.5 m tape measure
1 300 mm steel rule
1 Spirit level (1 m)
1 Centre punch
1 Pocket scriber
1 250 mm half round file
1 pair Straight point tweezers
1 Null modem

Inst. 1–4 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Tool kit requirements
1 RS232 mini tester
1 M to M gender changer

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 1–5
Tool kit requirements GSM-208-423

Inst. 1–6 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Chapter 2
Site preparation

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A i
GSM-208-423

ii 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423
Chapter 2
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–2
Rural sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–10
Site access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–12
Site layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–12
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–13

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A iii
GSM-208-423

iv 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Preparation overview
Preparation overview
Overview to site
preparation
This chapter contains:
S Information that should be read for initial planning.
S Information that should be read for safe completion of procedures.
S Pre-installation procedures to be followed to prepare the site before
beginning the installation.
Pre-installation
procedures
Pre-installation for the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure comprises the sections listed
in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 Pre-installation sections in this chapter

Section Description
Site requirements and Details mechanical, electrical and structural
considerations parameters to be taken into account when selecting
a site.
Visiting the site Defines the site operating procedures.
Preparing the site Details general site construction parameters.
Earthing the site Earthing techniques.
Preparing the Details the procedures for laying the enclosure
foundation foundations.
NOTE The information contained here also applies to the

optional ancillary enclosure, unless stated otherwise.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 2–1
Site requirements and considerations GSM-208-423
Site requirements and considerations
Overview of
requirements
The base site area, where the equipment is to be installed, must meet:
S Structural requirements, allowing space for all conditions, including
maintenance, expansion and associated cables.
S Allowance for enclosure height. including allowance for open lid.
S Weight, allowing for potential additions on expansion.
S Width and height, allowing door to be opened beyond 90°.
S Environmental and power requirements, as defined in manual
specifications.
Equipment
dimensions
The dimensions of the 12 carrier outdoor equipment are shown in Table 2-2.
The shroud and ancillary enclosure are optional and must be ordered
separately.
Table 2-2 Equipment dimensions (in mm)

Cabinet type Height Width Depth
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor 1400 1900 (no shroud) 800
enclosure 2150 (inc. shroud)
Horizonmacro indoor cabinet 750 700 430
Ancillary enclosure 1400 700 * 800 *
* Add 50 mm to allow for the overhang at the top of the enclosure.
Weights
The equipment weights are shown in Table 2-3.
Table 2-3 Equipment weights

Equipment Weight (kg)
12 carrier outdoor enclosure 710 kg
Indoor cabinet (6 CTUs fitted) 110 kg (approx.)
Ancillary enclosure 150 kg (empty)
750 kg max. (3 battery strings installed)

Inst. 2–2 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Site requirements and considerations
Torque values
screw/bolt
Power
specifications
Main enclosure input power supply requirements

The power requirements for the main enclosure are shown in Table 2-5.
Table 2-5 Main outdoor enclosure power requirements

range
230 V ac three phase 150 to 264 V ac 20 A per phase
and neutral (star) at 45 to 65 Hz
or
230 V ac single phase 60 A
Ancillary enclosure input power supply requirements

The power requirements for the ancillary enclosure are shown in Table 2-6.
Table 2-6 Ancillary enclosure power requirements

range
230 V ac single phase 150 to 264 V ac 5A
(derived from the ac power at 45 to 65 Hz
distribution unit in the main
enclosure)
Output voltage from the ancillary enclosure to the main enclosure is –48 V dc.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 2–3
Power consumption
The power consumption figures for the main enclosure are shown in Table 2-7.
Table 2-7 Power consumption of full enclosure (12 carriers)
Typical measured consumption Maximum power consumption
4054 W 6080 W
NOTE The maximum power consumption figures apply to
extreme operating conditions (minimum operating ambient
temperature, heaters on, maximum RF output power,
charging batteries and lowest module efficiencies, for
example).
Typical power consumption is for the equipment running at
full RF output power, trickle battery charge and nominal
module efficiencies.
Maximum thermal dissipation

Thermal dissipation has to remove the energy of maximum power consumption,
less RF power output of the 12 transceivers.
Maximum power consumption: 6080 W.
12 DCS1800 CTUs at full power at antenna: (12 x 16 = 192) approx. 200 W.
12 EGSM900 CTUs at full power at antenna: (12 x 20 = 240) approx. 250 W.
Maximum thermal dissipation, DCS1800: 6080 – 200 = 5880 W.
Maximum thermal dissipation, EGSM900: 6080 – 250 = 5830 W.
NOTE Thermal dissipation figures are not currently available for
when 850 MHz or 1900 MHz CTUs are used.
RF power
output
The RF power output figures are shown in Table 2-8 and Table 2-9.
Table 2-8 RF power output at CTU Tx connector
GSM850 and EGSM900 DCS1800 and PCS1900
60 W (47.8 dBm) +/–1.0 dBm 50 W (47.0 dBm) +/– 1.0 dBm
Table 2-9 RF power output at indoor cabinet after Tx blocks

Tx block GSM850 EGSM900 DCS1800 PCS1900
TDF 40 W 32 W
(46.0 dBm) (45.1 dBm)
DCF 20 W 16 W
(43.0 dBm) (42.1 dBm)
DDF 8.5 W 7W
(39.3 dBm) (38.5 dBm)

Inst. 2–4 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Sensitivity
The receive sensitivity of the equipment is shown in Table 2-10.
Table 2-10 Rx sensitivity *
Frequency Band Without Duplexer With Duplexer
850 MHz –107 dBm –106 dBm
900 MHz –107 dBm –106 dBm
1800 MHz –108.5 dBm –107.5 dBm
1900 MHz –107 dBm –106 dBm
* Guaranteed over all channel types, fading profiles, RF frequencies
and operating conditions.
Battery backup
(internal)
The Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure is fitted with limited battery
backup.
Table 2-11 Backup power specifications
Location Capacity Typical power duration
(per battery) (12 carriers)
Internal batteries 100 Ah 40 minutes
Battery backup times can be extended by installing the ancillary enclosure (see
below).
Battery backup
(external)
Typical extended battery backup nominal times available for the main enclosure
when additional battery strings are installed in the ancillary enclosure are listed
in Table 2-12. These times assume that 12 carriers are in use in the main
enclosure and the battery strings are fully charged.
Table 2-12 Battery backup times (nominal)
No. of battery strings Backup time
1 (in main enclosure) 0.7 hr
2 1.9 hr
3 2.8 hr
4 4.0 hr
NOTE Battery backup times are affected by the equipment
operating temperature.
Network
transmission
options
Options exist for E1, T1 and HDSL (star and daisy chain) transmission.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 2–5
Environmental
requirements
Table 2-13 shows the environmental limits for both the main enclosure and the
optional ancillary enclosure.

Environment Temperature Relative Humidity
Operating –33 _C to + 45 _C 5% to 100% relative humidity, not to
plus a solar gain of exceed 30 g water / m3 air.
1.2 kW/m2
Storage –45 _C to +70 _C. 8% to 100% relative humidity, not to

is 40 _C.
Structural
requirements
(main
enclosure)
There must be adequate clearance at the front of, and above, the enclosure for
operation and maintenance purposes. It is also recommended that there is
adequate side clearance to open the doors to 120° (see Figure 2-1), and rear
clearance of 150 mm is required to open the hood.
Enclosure ventilation entry is through vent panels in the doors, allowing a

cabinet to be placed close to a wall. However, a clearance of 150 mm is
required for side cable entry (if used), between the cabinet and obstructions,
such as a wall or another cabinet.
If an optional shroud is to be fitted, an additional 250 mm clearance is required

on the left side of the enclosure.
Allow adequate clearance at the front and sides to allow for installation and
maintenance.


Inst. 2–6 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Structural
requirements
(ancillary
enclosure)
There must be adequate clearance at the front of the ancillary enclosure for
operation and maintenance purposes.
The ancillary enclosure can be placed either on the right (recommended) or left
side of the main enclosure. The minimum distance between the ancillary
enclosure and the main enclosure depends on the method of cable entry used
for the main enclosure and other factors, such as whether an optional cable
shroud is fitted (only relevant if the ancillary enclosure is to be mounted to the
left of the main enclosure).
Enclosure site
plan
Figure 2-1 shows the site layout plan for a single enclosure.
NOTE The minimum clearance for side cable entry is not
required if cable entry is through the base of the
enclosure.
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ 1900 mm 150 mm
FOR HOOD
OPTIONAL
SHROUD
800 mm ENCLOSURE
1975 mm
1025 mm
MINIMUM
FRONT
CLEARANCE
150 mm
250 mm
Figure 2-1 Outdoor enclosure site layout plan view

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 2–7
Ancillary
enclosure site
plan
Figure 2-2 shows the site layout plan for the optional ancillary enclosure when
installed next to a main enclosure.
NOTE The 85 mm minimum clearance between the main
enclosure and the ancillary enclosure is required for the
flexible cable conduits.
ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ 1900 mm 700 mm
OPTIONAL
SHROUD
ANCILLARY
MAIN ENCLOSURE 800 mm
ENCLOSURE
250 mm 85 mm min.
285 mm max.
NOTE For the true width and depth of the ancillary enclosure,
add 50 mm to allow for the overhang at the top of the
enclosure.
The cables from the ancillary enclosure will not reach their
connection points in the main enclosure if the distance
between the right side of the main enclosure and the left
side of the ancillary enclosure exceeds 285 mm.
Figure 2-2 Ancillary enclosure site layout plan view

Inst. 2–8 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Visiting the site
Visiting the site
Overview of site
visit
When preparing to do work at a site and upon arrival, follow the instructions
provided in this section.
Before
departure to
site
Before departing to the site:
1. Ensure that team members have adequate test equipment, tools, and
hardware to carry out the task. Check for any special requirements.
2. Contact the person in charge of the site to advise of the team’s estimated
time of arrival and the expected duration of their stay on the site. This will
usually have been dealt with previously, but it is always advisable to make
sure that the information has been passed on.
3. Ensure that the team read the site access details on each visit to a site as
local regulations may change.
Arrival at all
sites
When entering any site:
1. Do not enter the site until contact has been made with the OMC-R or
MSC. Contact the local OMC-R and local MSC to announce the team’s
arrival before entering the site.
2. Enter the site and check for site alarms, for example intruder alarms, that
may have been activated by entry.
3. Read any local instructions.
Arriving at
occupied sites
In any exchange or occupied building, contact the person in charge or caretaker
of the site, who will explain local regulations. This person may also advise teams
on parking, rubbish removal, and canteen facilities.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 2–9
Visiting the site GSM-208-423
Arriving at
unoccupied
sites
When entering an unoccupied site:
1. Do not enter the site until contact has been made with the OMC-R or
MSC. Contact the local OMC-R and local MSC to announce the team’s
arrival before entering the site.
2. Enter the site and check for site alarms, for example intruder alarms, that
may have been activated by entry.
3. Advise the local OMC-R or MSC that the team is on site and indicate the
expected duration of time on site.
4. Arrange with the OMC-R or MSC to check the 2 Mb links as soon as
possible.
Leaving site
during
installation and
optimization
When leaving a site:
1. Contact the local OMC-R or MSC to announce the team’s departure.
2. Out of hours, if an alarm is fitted and the local MSC staff have gone home,
contact the Network Control Centre or OMC-R and inform them of the
team’s departure.
3. Sign out of the site as necessary.
Rubbish on site
Clear rubbish from the site on completion of the job, unless otherwise indicated
by the customer.
WARNING Do not burn rubbish, as packaging might give off toxic
gases.
Rural sites
It is the responsibility of the senior member of the team to ensure that all
personnel on site are aware of the country code and, especially with respect to
water authority sites, any relevant health regulations.
Adhere to these points of The Country Code:
S Guard against all risk of fire.
S Fasten all gates (remember site visits could be traced back if a complaint
is made).
S Leave no litter.
S Drive carefully on country roads and observe speed restrictions at all
times.
S Keep to the paths/tracks across farm land.

Inst. 2–10 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Visiting the site
On site safety
All personnel must:
S Ensure that under no circumstances should anyone move the enclosure(s)
or cabinets without assistance. The enclosure(s) and cabinets must be
safely positioned at all times.
S Wear supplied safety helmets when antenna or overhead work is in
progress, and when local regulations require them.
S Wear supplied safety goggles and dust masks when drilling. This is
particularly important when drilling overhead ironwork.
S Wear supplied ear protectors while drilling is in progress.
S Wear approved safety footwear when moving heavy equipment.
Stop any work that you are supervising should any person in your team not be
properly protected, or be unaware of safety requirements.
When installing cable ties, even temporarily, cut the excess or tail properly. This
is to prevent sharp edges inflicting injury when not cut flush with the locking
edge.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 2–11
Preparing the site GSM-208-423
Preparing the site
Introduction to
site preparation
This section provides a general overview on the preparation of a site, and site
requirements. For specific sites, refer to the site-specific documentation.
Base site
structure
The base site structure should be designed to meet accepted cellular system
specifications. Additionally, the site must meet the environmental and electrical
operating criteria detailed previously in Site requirements and considerations.
Site
requirements
The customer should provide secure access from unauthorized personnel,
ample protection from fire, and adequate lighting and clearance at the front and
rear of the equipment for operation and maintenance. Additionally, four cable
ducts with sufficient space for communications cables, power cables, earth
cables, and antenna RF cables should be provided.
Site access
The site access road and equipment receiving area must be constructed of
asphalt, concrete, or other suitable load bearing aggregate capable of
supporting the transportation vehicle and a fully equipped enclosure. The area
available, and the overhead clearance, must be sufficient to accommodate
turning or reversing of the transportation vehicle and must allow the vehicle to
depart after unloading.
Ensure there is a minimum overhead clearance of 6 m to enable heavy
equipment to be lifted from the transport vehicle. Take special care if the lifting
operation is in the vicinity of overhead cables.
NOTE Ensure the area is clear of standing water, fallen leaves,

mud, and building debris.
Site layout
The site layout plans are provided in Site requirements and considerations.
Figure 2-1 shows the site layout plan with dimensions for an outdoor enclosure
only. Figure 2-2 shows a typical site layout plan for an outdoor enclosure with
an optional ancillary enclosure.

Inst. 2–12 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Earthing the site
Earthing the site
Overview
The following provides information on suggested earthing procedures for an
outdoor site.
The separate earth systems must be isolated from each other to facilitate
periodic testing of the earth systems. Earth inspection pits are provided for this
purpose.
Earthing
requirements
Each enclosure site external earth must be assessed on an individual site basis,
as conditions will vary considerably depending on local soil conditions and site
topography. It is essential that a site survey and soil resistance test be
performed before installation. The site architect defines the site and foundation
earthing requirements to ensure a resistance of less than 10 ohms. A typical site
earthing plan is shown in Figure 2-3.
EARTH CONDUCTOR COPPER
INTO ENCLOSURE TAPE
VIA PVC PIPE MAST BONDING (ONE
SHOWN FOR CLARITY)
TEST
CONNECTION
INSPECTION
BOX CROSS BONDING
ENCLOSURE
MAST
CROSS
BONDING TEST
CONNECTION
FOUNDATION
INSPECTION
FOUNDATION BOX
METALWORK
FOUNDATION
EARTH RODS WITH METALWORK BONDING
FOUNDATION
METALWORK BONDING INSPECTION BOXES FOR
FOUR PLACES MINIMUM SYSTEM TEST
Figure 2-3 Typical site earthing plan for open field site
Earth electrode
system
The earth electrode system consists of a series of interconnected earth
electrodes (minimum of four) that are located outside the foundation reinforcing
metalwork. Refer to Figure 2-3 for details. The earth rods should be connected
together using TCO30 solid tape conductors, avoiding any sharp bends; a
minimum bend radius of 250 mm is recommended.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 2–13
Earthing the site GSM-208-423
Cross bonding
Foundation metalwork must be connected to the earth electrode network. The
earth system must also be cross-bonded to an adjacent antenna mast, with two
connections made between the two systems. All earth cable terminations must
be crimped, clamped or welded; soldered joints are not permitted.
Earthing
procedure
The main enclosure must be earthed as detailed in this procedure. Make
provision for routeing the earth cables into the site and to the enclosure before
beginning installation of the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets into the enclosure.
NOTE The optional ancillary enclosure does not have a separate
earth. It is earthed through the Principal Ground Bar
(PGB) in the main enclosure.
Excavate the site to accommodate the foundation to a depth determined by the

site architect. For the earth components to be used, refer to Figure 2-3 and
proceed as follows:
1. Drive a minimum of four copper earth rods 2.4 m long below the surface,
and connect these rods together with 70 mm Cross Sectional Area (CSA)
solid conductor.
2. Connect the earth rods to the cabinet earth busbar via a 70 mm CSA solid
conductor.
3. Check that the earth electrode installation resistance is less than 10 ohms.
If the resistance is greater than 10 ohms, install more earth rods to bring
the resistance within specification.
4. Cross-bond the earth system to the adjacent antenna mast earth with
conductors of 70 mm CSA, buried at a depth of not less than 500 mm.
5. Bond equipment such as fences, fuel tanks, metal buildings, or steel
building skids associated with the site to the closest earthing rod or
bonding wire.

Inst. 2–14 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Earthing the site
Earth electrode
testing
Three methods of earth electrode test (earth mat) are used and should be
tested as detailed in BS7671 16th Edition (or equivalent country regulations):
S Fall of potential.
S 61.8% rule.
S Slope method.
The method of test to be used at a specific site is determined by the site
conditions, the extent of the earth system and the limitations of the site
boundaries. The method used at the site is to be determined from the earth
electrode compliancy certificate and repeated annually. Before proceeding with
the test, ensure that the resistance of the test leads is less than 0.05 ohms.
Fall of potential
This method of testing is used for measuring resistance of earth electrodes but
is only practical on single earth electrode systems.
Drive the current test spike and potential spike into the ground as shown in
Figure 2-4. Perform the three resistance tests and check that the average of the
three tests is less than 10.0 ohms.
61.8% Rule
This method applies when the three electrodes (earth, potential and current) can
be positioned in a straight line, the soil is homogenous and also when single
electrode systems are being used.
Set up the test equipment as shown in Figure 2-4 with the potential spike placed
at a distance of 61.8% of the distance from the earth electrode to the current
test spike. A greater accuracy can be achieved by increasing the number of
readings.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 2–15
Earthing the site GSM-208-423
Slope method
This method applies to large earth systems. Refer to Figure 2-4, but insert the
potential spike at a number of points between the earth system and the current
spike. A minimum of six readings must be taken to plot a graph and this graph
compared to published tables to calculate the resistance.
On completion of testing, complete and sign the earth electrode test
documentation (Forms of Completion and Inspection Certificate).
PAT Tester
C2 P2 C1/P1
25 m
3m 3m
(Test 2) (Test 3)
Potential Earth
spike electrode
Current
test 50 m
spike (Test 1)
Figure 2-4 Earth electrode test setup

Inst. 2–16 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Preparing the foundation
Preparing the foundation
Overview of
foundation
preparation
NOTE The information contained here also applies to foundation
preparation for the optional ancillary enclosure.
The enclosure must be installed on a separate concrete base of sufficient size

and strength to accommodate the enclosure containing two fully equipped
Horizonmacro indoor cabinets and (if applicable), the optional ancillary
enclosure. Concrete base requirements to be determined by the structural
engineer.
WARNING Excavations exceeding 1.2 m in depth must be adequately

shored to prevent land slip or trench collapse. Excavated
earth must not be placed within 1 m of the excavation
edge.
The foundation depth is determined by a soil survey performed by the site

architect, but must be of sufficient strength to withstand a maximum gross
weight of 710 kg and 105 knot (120 mph) winds on the enclosure front or rear.
If an ancillary enclosure is to be installed with the main enclosure, the
foundation must be able to withstand the combined maximum gross weight of
both enclosures (1460 kg).
NOTE Refer to Site requirements and considerations in this
chapter for details of equipment weights.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 2–17
Preparing the foundation GSM-208-423
Enclosure
foundation
The following cross-sectional diagram in Figure 2-5 shows a typical foundation
for the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure or the ancillary enclosure
(bolts and anchors not to scale).
M12 BOLTS USED TO SECURE
ENCLOSURE
M12 ANCHOR
CONCRETE
FOUNDATION
Figure 2-5 Typical enclosure foundation
Preparing the
foundation
To prepare the foundation:
1. Excavate the foundation (refer to Figure 2-5).
WARNING Do not place excavated earth within 1 m of the excavation
edge.
2. Erect concrete shuttering to produce the required base.

3. Position the cable ducts (if low level cable entry method is in use). Ensure
that they are positioned so that they face towards the required cable entry
point on the enclosure.
4. Make the foundation from 20 mm mix concrete with the cable ducts (If
used) mounted in position. If required, locally thicken the areas around the
foundation bolts.
CAUTION Ensure the concrete is laid to give a water run off with
tapered edges. Where a field site, other than an already
permanent hard standing, is laid, the foundation must
have a bevelled finish.
To avoid overstressing the enclosure, use a spirit level or
theodolite to check that the concrete base surface is level
to 3 mm across diagonals.

Inst. 2–18 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Chapter 3
Installing the enclosure

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A i
GSM-208-423

ii 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423
Chapter 3
Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–4
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–7

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A iii
GSM-208-423


iv 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Installation overview
Installation overview
Introduction to
installation
This chapter provides the information required to install the Horizonmacro 12
carrier outdoor enclosure and its internal and external interfaces.
CAUTION Ensure that all site associated equipment is completely
installed before carrying out commissioning.
NOTE Some site equipment may not be produced by Motorola

(antennas, for example). Refer to site-specific
documentation and non-Motorola vendor instructions.
Before starting an installation, ensure the site has been prepared according to
the description summarised in Chapter 2, Site preparation, Preparation
overview, and the site-specific documentation.
Installation
sections
Installation comprises the sections shown in Table 3-1.
Table 3-1 Installation sections in this chapter

Section Description
Equipment delivery Information on delivery packaging, and how to
and unpacking unpack the equipment.
Fitting enclosure onto Provides procedure for securing enclosure to
base prepared base.
Earthing and transient Describes site earthing procedures and enclosure
protection internal earths.
Installing the rectifiers Describes the procedure for installing the rectifiers in
the enclosure.
Installing the internal Describes the procedure for connecting up the
batteries internal batteries.
Installing cables and Describes installing RF, power, and comms cables.
connecting power Also describes installing the optional high level cable
entry plates and shroud.
Connecting input Provides detailed descriptions for connecting power.
power
E1/T1 line
testing
If an E1/T1 line has been provided, contact the local MSC and, at the earliest
opportunity, arrange to test the line back to the MSC.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–1
Installation overview GSM-208-423
Enclosure
components
Figure 3-1 shows a filled enclosure with main components identified. The right
door and hood are omitted for clarity.
HORIZONMACRO
INDOOR CABINET
(BTS 1)
PRIMARY AC
TERMINAL BOX
LOCATION OF
LEFT HOOD LATCH
HORIZONMACRO
INDOOR CABINET
ALARM INTERFACE (BTS 0)
MODULE
LAPTOP COMPUTER RECTIFIERS
SUPPORT BRACKET (HIDDEN)
BACKUP
BATTERIES
RECTIFIERS
HMS 1
FAN
POWER DC CONNECTOR
TRAY HEATER
CONTROL PANEL
MODULE 6 U SPACE FOR (HIDDEN)
CUSTOMER
EQUIPMENT
AC AND DC FAN
POWER TRAY
DISTRIBUTION (HIDDEN)
UNITS
Figure 3-1 Enclosure with components identified

Inst. 3–2 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Equipment
package units
Most of the enclosure equipment is supplied already fitted into the 12 carrier
outdoor enclosure. The only exceptions to this are itemized in the following list:
S Rectifiers.
S Battery pack (4 monoblocs).
S Horizonmacro indoor cabinet(s).
These items are packed separately. The battery pack must not be installed until
after the enclosure is sited in position.
The following ancillary items required during installation are packed separately
within the enclosure:
S Low level cable entry plates.
S Spreader plates.
S Cover plates for mounting access holes.
S Connecting cable for monoblocs.
S Grommets for power and comms cables.
Optional equipment which may also be supplied separately is as follows:
S High level hardware kit.
S Cable shroud kit (for use with high level hardware kit).
S Antenna feeder cable termination bracket kit (for use with high level
hardware and shroud kits).
S Ancillary enclosure (refer to Chapter 5 for installation information).

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–3
Equipment delivery and packaging GSM-208-423
Equipment delivery and packaging
Delivery and
packaging
overview
Before the enclosure equipment arrives, installation personnel should designate
an area at the site where the equipment can be unloaded. This area should also
be suitable for unpacking the equipment, if necessary. Consult with the heavy
freight or moving company and the owners of the site to select this area.
CAUTION The enclosure equipment should be delivered to the site
while still contained in its packaging. This is to protect the
enclosure from damage and moisture whilst in transit.
The equipment should be carefully delivered to the site by the freight company,
along with the necessary moving dollies and padding. Use the dollies and
padding to move the equipment from the unloading area to the installation point.
NOTE Retain all paperwork supplied with the enclosure.
Packaging
The equipment enclosure is shipped in packaging similar to that shown in
Figure 3-2.
CARDBOARD LID
(TEMPLATE PRINTED ON UNDERSIDE)
ENCLOSURE
CARDBOARD
DELIVERY
BOX
METAL SECURING METAL SECURING

WOODEN PALLET
BAND BAND
Figure 3-2 Typical shipping packaging (front of delivery box removed for clarity)

Inst. 3–4 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Weather conditions affecting unpacking/installation
Weather conditions affecting unpacking/installation
Overview of
weather
considerations
Before beginning the unpacking/installation process, it is important to read and
take into account the following information concerning the climatic conditions at
the intended site.
Weather
conditions
WARNING Due consideration should be given to the hazards of wind
and other inclement weather conditions when installing the
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure. This is
especially important when using a ladder to gain access.
Use discretion at all times. Do not climb a ladder,
scaffolding, or use some other similar method of
access, if you feel unsafe to do so under these
weather conditions.
Do not attempt to open the enclosure doors if the wind
speed exceeds 25 knots (30 mph).
Maintenance
cover
Motorola recommend the use of a maintenance cover for access to the
enclosure during inclement weather conditions.
NOTE The maintenance cover is not supplied with the
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure and should be
provided by the customer, if required.
Installation procedures for the enclosure are dependent on the weather

conditions. There are three situations where the recommended guidelines
should be considered before commencing work:
S No access.
S Access with maintenance cover.
S Access without maintenance cover.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–5
Weather conditions affecting unpacking/installation GSM-208-423
No access
Access should not be attempted to the enclosure during the following actual or
imminent inclement weather conditions, with or without the maintenance cover:
S Winds in excess of 25 knots (30 mph).
S Heavy persistent rain, snow, hail or sleet.
S During an electrical storm.
Access with maintenance cover

Access may be made to the enclosure under the following conditions with the
use of the maintenance cover:
S Wind speeds of less than 25 knots (30 mph).
S Persistent rain, snow, hail or sleet.
S Where airborne substances (such as leaves or dust) may cause a
problem.
Access without maintenance cover

Access may be made under the following conditions without the use of the
maintenance cover:
S No precipitation occurring or likely to occur during the maintenance period.
Under these conditions the cover of the enclosure may be removed.

Inst. 3–6 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Unpacking and preparing the enclosure
Unpacking and preparing the enclosure
Tools
Use these tools to unpack, prepare and install the enclosure:
Claw hammer (or similar levering device).
Knife.
Screwdriver set.
Spirit level.
Socket set.
280 mm adjustable spanner.
Torque wrench.
Lifting straps and 4 x M16 eyebolts (swivel head preferred) and suitable
hydraulic lifting gear. If fixed eyebolts are used, they must be of the
collared type.
Avoiding
condensation
build up
Do not unpack the enclosure until power is available and ready to be connected.
Condensation can build up inside the enclosure if it is unpacked and left
standing without being switched on.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–7
Unpacking and preparing the enclosure GSM-208-423
Safety
considerations
For each enclosure to be installed, consider the following safety information:
WARNING Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosures are fitted with

four lifting points, designed to accommodate M16 swivel
head eyebolts, built into the enclosure base. If swivel head
eyebolts are used to lift the enclosure, they must be
manufactured to CE conformity, and must have a safe
weight load of 710 kg each.
Before attempting to insert the eyebolts, visually check
each one for damage. If any damage is apparent, DO
NOT USE. The eyebolts must not be overtightened; hand
tight is sufficient. Screw the eyebolt fully into the lifting
point so that no thread is left exposed.
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosures are heavy
and should not be installed without the use of lifting
equipment unless sufficient personnel are available to
ensure that Health and Safety regulations are not
breached.
Even before the installation of Horizonmacro indoor
cabinets, the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure can weigh up to
490 kg. When fully equipped with two indoor cabinets,
weight increases to 710 kg. Handle the enclosure with
extreme caution, and in accordance with any local health
and safety regulations.
Motorola recommend the use of slings in conjunction with
hydraulic lifting apparatus for moving and positioning the
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure and
associated indoor cabinets.
In addition to these points, refer to and comply with any
local regulations that govern the use of lifting equipment.
For the subsequent use of eyebolts, there may be local regulations that govern
the use of lifting equipment and stipulate a test and/or examination regime. If
the eyebolts are to be used, ensure that all such regulations are met.
The installation support procedures are described in the following sections.

Inst. 3–8 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Unpacking and preparing the enclosure
Enclosure
access
procedures
Enclosure access procedures include:
S Door and hood opening and closing.
Door opening and closing

Both doors have a spring loaded locking handle and operate as follows:
handle releases.
3. Turn the handle a quarter turn to the left to open the door.
NOTE When the equipment is active, a door open alarm is

generated. The alarm can be cancelled by taping down
the door microswitch buttons.
quarter turn anticlockwise (for the left door) or clockwise (for the right door)
and push in until the handles are flush with the doors. The doors lock
automatically.
Hood opening and closing

NOTE The hood can only be opened and closed when both
doors are open.
The hood is opened as follows:

1. Ensure both enclosure doors are open.
2. Remove the four hood securing screws from the front lip of the hood.
3. Release the two internal hood latches (one on each side – see
Figure 3-1).
4. Lift the hood to its maximum height, as defined by the two gas struts.
To close the hood, pull the strap attached to the centre of the hood inner panel.
The hood will lower gently to the horizontal position. Ensure the hood strap is
stowed neatly inside the enclosure. Secure the hood using the two latches and
four securing screws.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–9
Unpacking and preparing the enclosure GSM-208-423
Enclosure
unpacking and
preparation
The following describes the procedure for unpacking the equipment.
NOTE It is recommended that the installer reads through the
following procedure before starting to unpack and install
the equipment.
Dismantling the shipping packaging and obtaining template

To dismantle the shipping packaging and obtain template:
1. Cut the plastic banding that secures the packaging.
2. Lift the lid free of the box.
3. Deliver the lid (template printed on the underside) to the site for
positioning on the concrete base.
4. Undo the taped fastening on the box side.
5. Unwrap the box from around the enclosure.
The enclosure is now ready to be prepared for lifting.
Preparing the enclosure for lifting
WARNING Even before the installation of Horizonmacro indoor
cabinets, the enclosure can weigh up to 490 kg. Handle
with extreme caution and in accordance with local health
and safety regulations.
To prepare the enclosure for lifting and remove it from the wooden delivery
base:
CAUTION Take care to avoid damaging the enclosure in any way,
especially by scratching the outer surfaces.
1. Inspect the equipment immediately for damage. Report the extent of any
damage to the transport company.
NOTE If required (for rooftop installation, for example), the
Horizonmacro indoor cabinet(s) can be installed at this
time before lifting the enclosure. Refer to Chapter 4 for
installation information.
2. Ensure the enclosure hood and doors are closed securely.
3. Refer to local regulations regarding the lifting of heavy objects and refer to
Safety considerations described earlier in this chapter before lifting the
enclosure.
The enclosure can now be lifted gently and manoeuvred to the concrete base.
Safe disposal of
packing
material
The packing material used by Motorola is non-returnable, and should be
disposed of safely.

Inst. 3–10 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Installing mounting bolt anchors using the template
Installing mounting bolt anchors using the template
Introduction to
mounting bolt
anchor
installation
The Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure is supplied with a drilling
template printed on the inside of the packaging lid. The template is laid down on
the concrete base and pilot holes are drilled through the cardboard and into the
concrete in the positions indicated for the enclosure mounting bolt anchors.
NOTE Mounting bolt anchors are not required if the enclosure is
to be mounted above ground level, for example on a
custom made support frame. In such cases, the template
is used to mark the drilling positions on the support frame
for the mounting bolts.
View of
template
Figure 3-3 shows how the cardboard lid is marked to provide a drilling template
for the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure.
DRILL POSITION
MARKER
Figure 3-3 Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor drilling template

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–11
Installing mounting bolt anchors using the template GSM-208-423
Procedure for
marking bolt
hole positions
using the
template
The procedure for marking the position of the mounting holes for the M12
anchor bolts is as follows:
1. Lay the cardboard enclosure template centrally on the concrete base.
WARNING Wear safety glasses and a dust mask when drilling holes.
CAUTION Drilling concrete flooring produces cement dust, which is

harmful to equipment and wiring. Protect the enclosure
and any nearby equipment from dust. Use a tarpaulin,
cloth, or plastic sheeting to cover exposed equipment.
Clean up any accumulated debris from the anchor
installation carefully before exposing the equipment. Use
drilling equipment suitable for cutting steel reinforced
concrete.
2. Using a 6 mm drill bit, drill four pilot holes through the cardboard and into
the concrete in the positions shown on the template. Remove the
template.
3. Check that the distances between the pilot holes are correct (see
Figure 3-3) before starting the procedure to install the enclosure anchor
bolts.
NOTE If the optional ancillary enclosure is being installed at the
same time as the main enclosure, the mounting hole
positions for this can also be marked out at this point (see
Chapter 5 for further details).

Inst. 3–12 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Procedure for
installing
enclosure bolt
anchors
The pilot holes in the concrete base must be drilled out to accept the M12
anchor bolts. Mounting washers are supplied with the enclosure, but bushes
and M12 steel bolts must be supplied by the customer.
CAUTION Drilling concrete flooring produces cement dust, which is

harmful to equipment and wiring. Protect the cabinets and
any nearby equipment from dust. Use a tarpaulin, cloth, or
plastic sheeting to cover exposed equipment. Clean up
any accumulated debris from the anchor installation
carefully before exposing the equipment. Use drilling
equipment suitable for cutting steel reinforced concrete.
1. Using the four pilot holes as a guide, drill the concrete base to a depth and
clearance for the M12 anchor bolts using a suitable drill bit.
2. Insert the M12 mounting anchors in the holes in the base.
3. Fit the supplied washers to the anchor bolts. Insert the anchor bolts into
the anchor.
4. Place the supplied spreader plates against each anchor bolt and tension
up the anchor bolts to expand the anchors.
5. Partially unscrew the M12 bolts from the anchors so that approximately
25 mm is protruding above the base (the bolts will act as a guide for the
holes in the enclosure base). Remove the spreader plates and retain for
securing the enclosure to the base.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–13
Fitting the enclosure onto its base GSM-208-423
Fitting the enclosure onto its base
Procedure for
fitting an
enclosure
To fit the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure onto the concrete base:
WARNING Even without the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets, a 12

carrier outdoor enclosure can weigh up to 490 kg. When
fitted with two fully equipped indoor cabinets, this weight
increases to 710 kg.
Observe proper lifting precautions and handle each
enclosure with extreme caution to avoid tipping.
1. Lift and then lower the enclosure onto the concrete base, ensuring that the
mounting holes in the enclosure base line up with the anchor bolts in the
concrete base.
2. For each anchor bolt, insert the supplied spreader plate through the
access hole in the base so that it butts up against the anchor bolt (see
Figure 3-4).
3. Tighten up the anchor bolts to the correct torque while holding the
spreader plate in position. (See Chapter 2, Site preparation, Site
requirements and considerations for torque values.)
4. Remove each of the eyebolts from their threaded holes (located on the
base of the enclosure), and return the eyebolts to the tool kit for future
use.
5. Fit the supplied cover plates over the mounting access holes that will not
be used for low level cable entry and secure in position.
ANCHOR BOLT
SPREADER PLATE
Figure 3-4 Fitting the spreader plate to the anchor bolt

Inst. 3–14 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Earthing and transient protection
Earthing and transient protection
Site earthing
This part of the manual summarizes general procedures for earthing the site.
Refer to the Grounding guidelines for cellular radio installations instructions,
provided in Cellular system engineering guide 68P81150E62, for detailed
earthing information.
WARNING Each enclosure must be earthed separately. Enclosures

must not be daisy chained together.
S The cell site equipment must be earthed (in the same common earth point
as its power source).
S Provision should be made for earthing the site before beginning the
installation of the enclosure. See Chapter 2, Site preparation, Earthing
the site.
S An M12 earthing terminal (stud) is located on either side of the enclosure
base.
S Refer to the site-specific documentation for detailed site earthing
information.
Transient and
lightning
protection
All E1/T1 lines connected to Motorola equipment have secondary transient
protection as part of the BIB or T43 board. Ensure the receive and transmit
antenna connections to the enclosure are fed through coaxial electromagnetic
protection (EMP) devices.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–15
Installing the rectifiers GSM-208-423
Installing the rectifiers
Introduction to
rectifier
installation
The rectifiers must be ordered separately from the enclosure and indoor
cabinets. For this reason, they are packed separately and must be installed after
the enclosure has been installed in position.
A minimum of two and a maximum of five rectifiers may be installed in the
enclosure. Table 3-2 shows the configuration options for the rectifiers.
Table 3-2 Rectifier configurations

No. of rectifiers Configuration
2 Single BTS, no redundancy option.
3 Single BTS, redundancy provided.
4 Two BTSs, no redundancy option.
5 Two BTSs, redundancy provided.
Figure 3-5 shows an illustration of the rectifier module.
Figure 3-5 The rectifier module

Inst. 3–16 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Installing the rectifiers
Rectifier
installation
procedure
CAUTION Handle the rectifier with care; the module weighs 4.6 kg.
To install the rectifiers, proceed as follows:

1. Open the doors of the enclosure and identify the mounting positions for
the rectifiers, depending on how many are to be installed (see Figure 3-6).
For single BTS installations, install rectifiers 0 and 1. For two BTS
installations, install rectifiers 0 to 3. Rectifier 4 is for system redundancy
(one or two BTS installations).
2. Carefully unpack the rectifiers and inspect for signs of damage.
3. Insert each rectifier in position in the rack. Ensure that each rectifier is
pushed fully home into its connector on the backplane before tightening
the two M6 screws. Tighten to a torque of 3.4 Nm.
The procedure for installing the rectifiers is now complete.
NOTE The rectifiers are all connected to a common supply rail
and could therefore be installed in any slot. However, they
MUST be installed as shown in Figure 3-6 to correspond
with the circuit breaker designations on the front of the dc
distribution panel.
PDU B PDU A
RECTIFIER 4 RECTIFIER 2 RECTIFIER 1

RECTIFIER 3 RECTIFIER 0
Figure 3-6 Rectifier identification

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–17
Installing the internal batteries GSM-208-423
Installing the internal batteries
Introduction to
installing the
internal
batteries
For safety reasons the internal batteries, consisting of four 12 V monoblocs, are
supplied separately from the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure. The
batteries must be installed and connected as soon as the enclosure is secured
in its permanent location. Straps are provided in the enclosure to secure the
monoblocs in position and prevent any movement after installation.
Procedure for
installing the
internal
batteries
NOTE If cable entry to the enclosure is through the base, install
the cables before the monoblocs as removal of the access
plates at the rear of the battery compartment may be
required (see Installing cables and connecting power).
Also, if the optiional ancillary enclosure is being installed
at the same time as the main enclosure, do not install the
monoblocs in the main enclosure until after the ancillary
enclosure has been installed (see Chapter 5 for ancillary
enclosure installation details).
The procedure for installing the internal monoblocs is as follows:

1. Ensure the battery isolator switch located on the top of the battery
compartment is OFF.
2. Remove the battery compartment protective cover by undoing the ten
securing screws.
3. Thread the four battery retaining straps through the slits in the base of the
two shelves in the battery compartment (see Figure 3-7).
4. Remove the monoblocs from their packaging. Position two monoblocs on
each shelf and secure in place with the straps provided. Lifting straps are
provided on the front and rear of each monobloc. Smear light grease on
the monobloc terminals.
5. Using the links and cable provided, connect the monobloc terminals in
series as shown in Figure 3-8. Connect the thermal probe from J5 on the
AIM to the positive terminal of the right monobloc on the upper shelf.
NOTE All inter-shelf cabling must run up the front of the upper
shelf (see Figure 3-8), otherwise the compartment cover
will not fit properly.

Inst. 3–18 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Installing the internal batteries
6. Undo the two protective cover securing screws on the underside of the
isolator switch and remove the cover. Connect the blue (–) isolator switch
cable to the negative terminal on monobloc No. 4. Connect the black (+)
cable to the positive terminal on monobloc No. 1. Connect the free ends of
these cables to the isolator switch. Refit the switch protective cover.
7. Refit the battery compartment cover.
Battery
installation
diagrams
Figure 3-7 shows the battery retaining straps in position on a shelf.
Figure 3-7 Fitting the battery retaining straps in the battery compartment
Figure 3-8 shows the cable connections for the batteries. Battery retaining
straps are removed for clarity.
+VE CONNECTION
(BLACK CABLE) TO
ISOLATOR SWITCH
–VE CONNECTION
(BLUE CABLE) TO
ISOLATOR SWITCH
BATTERY LINK
THERMAL PROBE
CONNECTS HERE
BATTERY LINK
Figure 3-8 Battery terminal connections

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–19
Installing cables and connecting power GSM-208-423
Installing cables and connecting power
Overview of
power and earth
cabling
On delivery, the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure is configured for a
230 V ac three phase (star connected) power supply. The possible alternative
configuration of ac power is 230 V single phase.
This section describes the procedures for connecting power and earth cabling to
the enclosure.
WARNING Do not daisy chain together earths from different

enclosures.
Do not make ac input power connections at the ac supply
to the enclosure at this time. Connecting input power is
the final installation procedure in this chapter.
Enclosures must be earthed with a conductor capable of
carrying the full fault current of the overcurrent protection
device.
Power specifications can be found in Chapter 2, Site preparation, Site

requirements and considerations.
Cable routeing
CAUTION Ensure that covers are fitted to any unused connectors on
the enclosure interconnection panel. The covers protect
the connectors from damage by static electricity or foreign
matter.
Adequate means should be provided for routeing cables from the main power
source to the equipment, such as a cable trough or conduit.
NOTE The current-carrying capacity of a cable for continuous
service is affected by all of the following factors
(references: IEC 364, BS7671):
– Ambient temperature.
– Grouping.
– Partial or total enclosure in thermal insulating material.
– Frequency (ac only).

Inst. 3–20 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Installing cables and connecting power
Enclosure
earthing points
The main earth connection point is located on the side of the enclosure base.
M12 earthing studs are fitted to both sides for optional connection to the right or
left side of the enclosure. The connection is for protective earthing, lightning
protection and functional earthing of the enclosure.
Within the enclosure, a copper earth bar, the Principal Ground Bar (PGB), is
connected to the base and provides earth connections for all internal
equipment. The PGB is electrically insulated from the enclosure structure.
Preparing for
connection
To prepare for connecting ac power cables to the outdoor enclosure:
1. Position the screened power cable, complete with earth, in a conduit.
2. Route the conduit to the ac power cable entry point on the appropriate
side of the enclosure.
Cable entry to
the enclosure
There are several methods of cable entry to the enclosure. If required, cables
may be installed using a combination of the methods listed below.
NOTE Installation of the optional ancillary enclosure may affect
the cable entry options available.
The normal methods of cable entry to the enclosure are as follows:

S Low level, left side.
S Low level, right side.
S From beneath the enclosure (requires the enclosure to be mounted off the
ground).
The following optional methods of cable entry are also possible, provided the
required kit has been ordered:
S High level (left side only).
S High level, using the optional shroud kit.
S High level, using the optional shroud kit and the optional cable termination
bracket kit.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–21
Low level cable entry

Low level cable entry to the enclosure is through the base, on the left or right
side, or both sides.
NOTE Low level RF link cable kits are not available for this
equipment. If low level cable entry to the enclosure is
required, custom length RF link cables must be supplied
by the customer.
The following procedure describes how to install the power, comms and RF
cables on the right side of the enclosure using the low level cable entry plates
(see Figure 3-9). The procedure for installing cables on the left side is similar
(and recommended if an optional ancillary enclosure is also to be installed).
Differences between the two methods are described at the appropriate places in
the text.
1. Undo the 12 screws that secure each of the two access plates to the floor
of the enclosure and remove the plates (see Figure 3-10). If cable access
from the left side of the enclosure only is required, it is not necessary to
remove the right hand access plate.
2. Select the correct diameter cable entry plate for the RF feeder cables and
screw the lower half of the plate to the base. Mount the feeder cables in
the lower half of the plate, fit the upper half and screw in position.
3. Measure the length of RF link cable required and, referring to Figure 3-10,
feed the link cable down the channel behind the battery compartment and
across the base of the enclosure to the appropriate feeder cable. Repeat
the process for each RF cable.
NOTE If access is required to the channel behind the battery

compartment, remove the compartment cover and then
remove the two access covers mounted vertically at the
rear of the compartment.
4. Working through the access hole in the base of the enclosure, connect the
link cables to the feeder cables. M6 studs are provided on the inside of the
access hole for earth connections (see Figure 3-10). If required, lightning
protection devices can be installed here.
Make the connections between the RF link cables and the SURF/Tx
blocks as soon as the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets have been installed
(see Chapter 4).
5. Screw the power/comms cable entry plate to the base of the enclosure.
6. Select suitably sized grommets from those supplied with the enclosure. Fit
them onto the power and comms cables before feeding the cables through
the holes in the cable entry plate to the appropriate equipment in the
enclosure. Fix the grommets in position on the cable entry plates.
7. Refit all access plates.

Inst. 3–22 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
COMMS CABLE
HOLES (x 4)
ENCLOSURE
EARTH STUD
POWER CABLE POWER/COMMS

HOLE PLATE
RF PLATE
(2 HALVES)
Figure 3-9 Low level cable access plates (right side shown)
CHANNEL AT
REAR OF
BATTERY RF LINK
COMPARTMENT CABLE PATH
RF PLATE
RF FEEDER
CABLE
ACCESS COVER
PLATE
EARTH STUDS
(COVER PLATE REMOVED)
Figure 3-10 Example of low level RF cable routeing through the enclosure

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–23
Cable entry from beneath the enclosure

If the enclosure is mounted above ground level (on a custom made support
frame, for example), the cables can be fed directly into the left side of the
enclosure from below. The cables are then connected as if they were fed into
the enclosure through the low level cable entry plates on the left side of the
enclosure.
Figure 3-11 shows an example of how cable entry through the base of the
enclosure is achieved.
RF LINK
CABLE PATH
CHANNEL AT
REAR OF
BATTERY
COMPARTMENT
RF FEEDER EARTH STUDS

CABLE (COVER PLATE REMOVED)
CUSTOM
SUPPORT
FRAME
Figure 3-11 Cable entry example through the base of the enclosure

Inst. 3–24 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
High level cable entry (requires high level hardware kit SVLN1440)
The high level hardware kit comprises three cable entry plates: two RF plates
and one power/comms plate. The plates can be fitted in any order on the left
side of the enclosure to meet different customer requirements.
Proceed as follows to install the power, comms and RF cables using the high
level cable entry plates:
1. Undo the eight screws that secure each outer wall cover plate to the left
side of the enclosure and remove the cover plates.
2. Open the enclosure doors, undo the four hood retaining screws and lift the
hood to access the inner wall cover plates. Remove and discard the inner
wall cover plates to expose the cable entry holes.
3. Connect an earth cable to the inside face of each cable entry plate using
an M6 nut and spring washer (see Figure 3-12).
4. Determine which plate is to be fitted in which hole position. From the
outside of the enclosure, feed the earth cable through the hole and place
the plate in position over the hole. Secure the plate in place using the
eight screws previously used to secure the blanking plate.
5. Repeat the installation procedure for the remaining two plates. Connect
the three earth cables to the PGB inside the enclosure.
6. Determine which holes in which plates are to be used and remove the
appropriate blanking plugs. These have the same nut fixing as 7/16
bulkhead connectors.
7. Connect the external RF feeder cables to the connectors on the RF cable
entry plates. Earth studs are provided on each RF cable entry plate for
earth connections.
8. Connect the RF link cables between the SURF module or Tx blocks
(depending on requirements) and the RF cable entry plates as soon as the
Horizonmacro indoor cabinets have been installed (see Chapter 4).
NOTE A high level RF link cable kit (one required for each sector)
is available for connecting between the high level cable
entry plates and the SURF module or Tx blocks on the
indoor cabinet. The kit number is SVLN1283.
9. Feed the power and comms cables through the holes in the power/comms
cable entry plate. Select suitably sized grommets from those supplied with
the enclosure, fit them onto the cables and fix in position on the cable
entry plate.
10. Make the internal connections to the appropriate equipment in the
enclosure.
Figure 3-12 shows the detail of the high level cable entry plates. Figure 3-13
shows the side of the enclosure with the plates installed.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–25
POWER/COMMS PLATE
OUTSIDE FACE INSIDE FACE
GASKET
POWER CABLE M6 NUT
BLANKING PLUG SPRING WASHER
COMMS CABLE PLAIN WASHER
BLANKING PLUG
(x 4)
EARTH CABLE
RF PLATE (x 2)
OUTSIDE FACE INSIDE FACE
GASKET
M6 NUT
SPRING WASHER
PLAIN WASHER
RF CABLE
EARTH STUD BLANKING PLUG EARTH CABLE
(x 6) (x 6)
Figure 3-12 Detail drawing of the high level cable entry plates
POWER/COMMS
PLATE
RF PLATES
Figure 3-13 High level cable entry plates fitted in position

Inst. 3–26 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
High level cable entry using the optional shroud kit

The shroud kit (number SVLN1442 – 1446) is an option for use only with the
high level cable entry kit, and provides additional environmental protection.
The kit comprises a shroud and two cable securing brackets, and is suitable for
use with antenna feeder cables of up to 1/2 inch diameter.
The following procedure for installing the shroud kit assumes that the high level
hardware kit has already been installed.
1. Screw each of the two cable securing brackets to the left side of the
enclosure using four screws supplied with the kit (see Figure 3-14).
2. Connect the antenna feeder cables to the connectors on the high level RF
cable entry plates.
3. Feed the power and comms cables through the power/comms cable entry
plate, as described previously in High level cable entry.
4. Secure all cables to the cable securing brackets using cable ties.
5. Fit the shroud over the cables and fix to the enclosure using six screws.
SHROUD
CABLE
SECURING
BRACKETS
Figure 3-14 Fitting the shroud kit to the enclosure

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–27
High level cable entry using the optional cable termination bracket
kit
NOTE The optional cable termination bracket kit can only be
fitted in conjunction with the optional high level cable entry
and shroud kits.
The cable termination bracket kit (number SVLN1483) is an option for use only
with the high level cable entry kit and the shroud kit. It allows antenna cables of
various sizes to be connected to the enclosure
The kit comprises two cable termination plates, and is suitable for use with
antenna feeder cables of between 1/2 inch and 15/8 inch diameter .
The following procedure for installing the cable termination bracket kit assumes
that the high level hardware kit has already been installed.
1. Screw the inner plate to the side of the enclosure using eight screws
supplied with the kit (see Figure 3-15).
2. Connect up to seven antenna feeder cables to the plate.
3. Connect link cables between the antenna feeder cables and the high level
RF plates.
4. Screw the outer plate to the inner plate, as shown in Figure 3-15.
5. Connect up to five antenna feeder cables to the plate.
6. Connect link cables between the antenna feeder cables and the high level
RF plates.
7. Route the power and comms cables up the side of the inner or outer plate,
as required (see Figure 3-16). Feed the power and comms cables through
the power/comms cable entry plate, as described previously in High level
cable entry.
8. Mount the shroud over the cable termination brackets and secure to the
side of the enclosure using six screws (see Figure 3-17). Take care not to
trap the power/ comms cables between the angled edges of the two plates
and the side of the shroud.
9. Secure the outer plate to the shroud rear panel using two screws.
NOTE To improve clarity, antenna feeder cables and
power/comms cables are not shown in Figure 3-15,
Figure 3-16 or Figure 3-17.

Inst. 3–28 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
OUTER PLATE INNER PLATE
Figure 3-15 Fitting the cable termination bracket kit to the enclosure
SPACE FOR POWER AND

COMMS CABLES
SHROUD
CABLE TERMINATION
BRACKET KIT
SPACE FOR POWER AND

COMMS CABLES
Figure 3-16 Plan view of the cable termination bracket kit (shroud fitted)

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–29
SHROUD
OUTER PLATE
INNER PLATE
Figure 3-17 Completed cable termination bracket kit installation

Inst. 3–30 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Supply cable
identification
To connect an outdoor enclosure to the main ac power source, observe the
following rules.
Three-phase supply
For three-phase ac connections:
S The phase L1 power cable is labelled No. 1.
S The neutral cable is blue.
S The earth cable is green and yellow.
Single-phase supply
For single-phase ac connections:
S The line power cable is brown or red.
S The neutral cable is blue or black.
S The earth cable is green and yellow.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–31
Connecting 230 V 3-phase (star) ac power cables GSM-208-423
Connecting 230 V 3-phase (star) ac power cables
Configuring the
primary ac
terminal box
WARNING Ensure that the mains input isolator is set to position O
(off) and the source is isolated before proceeding.
On delivery the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure is configured for a

230 V ac three phase (star connected) power supply.
Connecting
230 V ac
3-phase (star)
mains input
cables
Proceed as follows to connect the earth, 3-phase (star), and neutral power
cables to the primary ac terminal box:
CAUTION Some countries may use an alternative colour coding
scheme for 3-phase cables. Equivalent colours for this
scheme are shown in brackets.
1. Connect the green/yellow ac supply earth cable to terminal 2 (PE) of the

primary ac terminal box.
2. Check that terminal 1 of the primary ac terminal box is connected to the
enclosure earth (PGB).
3. Connect the blue neutral cable to terminal 3 (N) of the primary ac terminal
box.
4. Connect the phase 1 cable labelled No. 1 to terminal 4 (L1) of the primary
ac terminal box.
ac terminal box.
ac terminal box.
7. Check the security of all connections within the primary ac terminal box.

Inst. 3–32 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Connecting 230 V 3-phase (star) ac power cables
230 V ac
3-phase (star)
wiring diagram
Figure 3-18 shows the wiring diagram for the primary ac terminal box when
configured for a 230 V ac 3-phase and neutral (star) power supply.
PRIMARY AC TERMINAL BOX
PE N L1 L2 L3
1 2 3 4 5 6
No. 1
BLUE No. 2
GREEN/YELLOW No. 3
GREEN/YELLOW
EARTH CONNECTION FROM

PGB AC SUPPLY INPUT
Figure 3-18 Wiring diagram for 230 V ac 3-phase (star)

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–33
Connecting 230 V single phase ac power cables GSM-208-423
Connecting 230 V single phase ac power cables
Configuring the
primary ac
terminal box
WARNING Ensure that the mains input isolator is set to position O
(off) and source is isolated before proceeding.
On delivery, the Horizonmacro12 carrier outdoor enclosure is configured for a

230 V ac three phase (star) power supply. If connecting to a single phase 230 V
ac supply, then all three live input terminals must be linked together at the
primary ac terminal box. A link bar is provided for this purpose.
Connecting
230 V ac single
phase mains
input cables
To connect a 230 V earth, live, and neutral power cable to the primary ac
terminal box:
1. Connect the ac power input earth cable (green/yellow) to terminal 2 (PE)
in the primary ac terminal box, and check the connection of the enclosure
earth cable to terminal 1.
2. Connect the live ac cable (brown or red) to terminal 4 (L1) in the primary
ac terminal box.
3. Using the link bar provided, link terminals 4, 5 and 6 (L1, L2 and L3) in the
primary ac terminal box, as shown in Figure 3-19.
4. Connect the neutral ac cable (blue or black) to terminal 3 in the primary ac
terminal box.
5. Check the security of all connections within the primary ac terminal box.

Inst. 3–34 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Connecting 230 V single phase ac power cables
230 V ac single
phase wiring
diagram
Figure 3-19 shows the wiring diagram for the primary ac terminal box when
configured for a 230 V ac single phase power supply.
PRIMARY AC TERMINAL BOX
PE N L1 L2 L3
1 2 3 4 5 6
LINK BAR
BROWN
OR RED
BLUE OR
BLACK
GREEN/YELLOW
GREEN/YELLOW
EARTH CONNECTION FROM

PGB AC SUPPLY INPUT
Figure 3-19 Wiring diagram (230 V ac single phase)

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 3–35
Checking default settings on the AIM GSM-208-423
Checking default settings on the AIM

AIM DIP switch
settings
DIP switch blocks SW1 and SW2 on the AIM allow certain alarm signals to be
overridden. Table 3-3 and Table 3-4 show the default DIP switch settings when
an optional ancillary enclosure is not connected.
no. position
1 Closed 1
12
2 Closed 2
Door alarm
11
3 Closed 3
10
4 Closed 4
9
5 Closed 5
8
6 Open 6
7

no. position
1 Open 1
12
2 Open 2
11
3 Closed 3
10
4 Closed 4
9
5 Closed 5
8
6 Closed 6
7

Inst. 3–36 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Chapter 4
Installing the Horizonmacro indoor
cabinet

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A i
GSM-208-423

ii 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423
Chapter 4

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A iii
GSM-208-423

GPS pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–35
RTC pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–36
ICS pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–40

iv 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Installation
sections
Horizonmacro indoor cabinet installation comprises the sections shown in
Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 Installation sections in this chapter

Section Description
Installation overview An overview of the installation procedure and
identification of main cabinet components.
Equipment delivery Information on delivery packaging, and how to
and unpacking unpack the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet.
Installing the Provides procedure for installing Horizonmacro
Horizonmacro indoor indoor cabinet(s) into a prepared 12 carrier outdoor
cabinets enclosure.
Connecting RF cables Describes cables and connectors used for
and antennas connection to RF modules.
Suggested RF Describes suggested RF configurations for single or
configurations dual cabinet installations to meet specific operational
requirements.
Connecting fibre optic Identifies fibre optic connections and describes
cables handling considerations.
Interface panel Describes interface panel connections.
cabling
Connecting power Describes power and earth cable connections.
and earth cabling

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–1
Introduction to
installation
This chapter provides the information required to install one or two
Horizonmacro indoor cabinets, together with their internal and external
interfaces, within the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure.
CAUTION Ensure that all site associated equipment is completely
installed before commissioning the cabinet for operation.
NOTE Some site equipment may not be produced by Motorola

(antennas, for example). Refer to site-specific
documentation and non-Motorola vendor instructions.
Ensure installation of the enclosure has been completed before commencing

installation of the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets. Refer to Chapter 3 of this
manual, Installing the enclosure, for details of enclosure installation.
NOTE Each Horizonmacro indoor cabinet is supplied with a
booklet entitled, Installation & configuration,
Horizonmacro indoor, which describes the standard
installation in an indoor environment. When installing the
Horizonmacro indoor cabinet in a 12 carrier outdoor
enclosure, the standard installation booklet must be
removed from the packaging and destroyed.
Instructions for installing the Horizonmacro indoor
equipment into a 12 carrier outdoor enclosure are fully
covered in this document.
Connections to antennas and E1/T1 data links are made at the Horizonmacro
indoor cabinet interface panel. External cables enter the 12 carrier outdoor
enclosure from the right or left side of the enclosure via cable access plates.
Cabinet
identification
The two Horizonmacro indoor cabinets are designated BTS 0 and BTS 1.
BTS 0 is mounted in the right side of the enclosure and configured as the
master cabinet. All E1/T1 lines and external alarms are connected to BTS 0.
BTS 1 is mounted in the left side of the enclosure and configured as an
extension cabinet. BTS 1 is not equipped with an MCUF module, and is instead
connected to the MCUF of BTS 0 via an FMUX module and a fibre optic link.
NOTE If the enclosure is to be equipped with only one
Horizonmacro indoor cabinet then it must be installed as
BTS 0.

Inst. 4–2 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Cabinet view
Figure 4-1 shows the main components of a fully equipped Horizonmacro indoor
cabinet.

CIRCUIT BREAKER
ONE SURF (Rx)
THREE PSMs
THREE Tx BLOCKS
(DCFs SHOWN AS EXAMPLE) CIRCUIT T43/BIB
BREAKER
MODULE (CBM)
SIX TRANSCEIVERS DC POWER IN
(CTUs)
INTERFACE
PANEL
CONNECTORS
TWO 2-FAN UNITS

ONE 4-FAN UNIT
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL SYSTEM
ALARM MODULE
DIGITAL MCUF
MODULES
FMUX/NIU/BPSM
(NOT VISIBLE)
Figure 4-1 Cabinet with components identified (door removed)
E1/T1 line
testing
If an E1/T1 line has been provided, contact the local MSC and, at the earliest
opportunity, arrange to test the line back to the MSC.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–3
Transient and
lightning
protection
All E1/T1 data lines connected to Motorola equipment have secondary transient
protection as part of the BIB or T43 board.
Ensure the receive and transmit antenna connections to the enclosure are fed
through coaxial electromagnetic protection (EMP) devices.

Inst. 4–4 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Equipment delivery and unpacking
Equipment delivery and unpacking
Delivery and
packaging
overview
Before the cabinet equipment arrives, installation personnel should designate
an area at the site where the equipment can be unloaded. This area should also
be suitable for unpacking the equipment. Consult with the heavy freight or
moving company and the owners of the building (if applicable) to select this
area.
CAUTION The cabinet equipment should be delivered to the site
while still contained in its packaging. This is to protect the
cabinet in transit and from moisture.
The equipment should be carefully delivered to the site by the freight company,
along with the necessary moving dollies and padding. Use the dollies and
padding to move the equipment from the unloading area to the installation point.
NOTE With the single exception of the booklet entitled,
Installation & configuration, Horizonmacro indoor, all
paperwork attached to packaging, or found inside the
cabinet should be collected and retained.
The Installation & configuration, Horizonmacro indoor
booklet must be removed and destroyed. Complete details
for the installation and configuration of the Horizonmacro
indoor cabinet in a 12 carrier outdoor enclosure are
contained in this document.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–5
Equipment delivery and unpacking GSM-208-423
Packaging crate
The cabinet equipment is shipped in a crate of a similar construction to that
shown in Figure 4-2.
Figure 4-2 Typical shipping crate detail
Equipment
module
packaging
The equipment modules are supplied already fitted into the cabinet. The plinth is
packed upside down on top of the cabinet.
NOTE When the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet is to be installed
inside a 12 carrier outdoor enclosure, the plinth base is
not required and may be stored away safely for future use.

Inst. 4–6 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Equipment delivery and unpacking
Unpacking the
equipment
NOTE It is recommended that the installer read through the
the equipment.
Tools
Use the following tools to dismantle the crate and unpack the cabinet.
S Claw hammer (or similar levering device).
S Knife.
Obtaining plinth base

The plinth base is not required when the indoor cabinet is to be installed within a
12 carrier outdoor enclosure. The plinth base should be removed from the crate
and stored away for future use, if required.
To obtain the plinth base:
1. Cut the plastic banding that secures the crate.
2. Remove the crate lid and take out the plinth base.
3. Refit the crate lid and secure.
Delivery and dismantling of shipping crate

To deliver and dismantle the shipping crate:
1. Deliver remaining cabinet equipment to site in its original packaging.
NOTE The packing material used by Motorola is non-returnable
and should be disposed of safely.
2. Lift the lid free of the crate.

3. Lift out the cardboard protective pieces.
4. Lift the box over the cabinet.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–7
Equipment delivery and unpacking GSM-208-423
Removing the cabinet from the crate base

WARNING The cabinet can weigh up to 110 kg if fully equipped.
Handle each cabinet with extreme caution, and in
accordance with local health and safety regulations.
To remove the cabinet from the crate base:

CAUTION Care must be taken to avoid damaging the cabinet in any
way, especially by scratching the outer surfaces.
1. Carefully cut open the sealed barrier bag containing the cabinet.
2. Use straps attached to the plywood base holding the cabinet, to lift cabinet
over the delivery base and foam.
3. Remove the desiccant bag from the cabinet.
The cabinet is now unpacked.
Safe disposal of
packing
material
The packing material used by Motorola is non-returnable, and should be
disposed of safely.
CTU allotted
slot retention
CTUs are supplied already fitted in the cabinet, with Tx cable correctly attached
by Motorola. CTUs must remain in the allotted slots for Motorola calibrations to
be valid.

Inst. 4–8 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Installing the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets
Installing the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets
Overview of the
installation
procedure
One or two Horizonmacro indoor cabinets may be installed within a single 12
carrier outdoor enclosure. The right shelf of the enclosure is for BTS 0 and the
left shelf is for BTS 1. If only one cabinet is to be installed then it must be
installed as BTS 0 in the BTS 0 shelf.
WARNING A fully equipped Horizonmacro indoor cabinet weighs

approximately 110 kg. Handle each cabinet with extreme
caution, and in accordance with local health and safety
regulations. Eyebolts are available for use with lifting
equipment.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–9
Installing the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets GSM-208-423
Eyebolt lifting
positions
Eyebolts must be fitted into the four designated cabinet top panel locations,
shown in Figure 4-3. These locations are identified with an eyebolt symbol and
the word LIFT.
Figure 4-3 also shows the location of the earth connection point on the indoor
cabinet.
EYEBOLT POSITIONS
BRACKET
SECURING
SCREW REAR OF CABINET
EARTH STUD
EYEBOLT
BRACKET
POSITIONS
SECURING SCREW
Figure 4-3 Eyebolt and earth stud positions

Inst. 4–10 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Procedure for
installing indoor
cabinets
The 12 carrier outdoor enclosure is designed to allow the installation of
Horizonmacro indoor cabinets from above, through the hood aperture.
Before beginning any lifting operation, ensure that the shelf area within the
enclosure is free from obstructions, and all cables are safely secured so that
they do not interfere with the cabinet installation. Also ensure that the door of
the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet is closed and secured.
NOTE If only one cabinet is to be installed then it must be
installed as BTS 0, on the right shelf.
The installation procedure is as follows:

1. Open the enclosure doors, then open the hood as far as possible.
2. Unscrew and remove the two L-shaped cabinet securing brackets (for BTS
0 or BTS 1 as required) from the enclosure chassis (see Figure 4-4).
Retain for later use.
3. Unscrew and remove the two cabinet retaining plates located at the front
of the shelf (see Figure 4-4).
4. Using suitable lifting equipment, lift the cabinet into position above the
enclosure and gently lower it onto the enclosure shelf. Carefully adjust the
position of the cabinet on the shelf so that the front of the cabinet is flush
with the front of the shelf. Remove the eyebolts.
5. Secure the cabinet in place using the two cabinet retaining plates located
on the enclosure chassis next to both front corners of the shelf (see
Figure 4-4).
6. Remove the two bracket retaining screws from the rear of the cabinet top
panel (see Figure 4-3).
7. Align the L-shaped securing brackets into position on the cabinet top
panel. Attach brackets to the top panel by re-inserting the bracket
retaining screws, and attach to the enclosure chassis using the screws
removed in step 2.
8. Connect the enclosure earth lead from the PGB to the earth stud on the
indoor cabinet interface panel (see Figure 4-3).
9. Repeat steps 2 to 8 for a second cabinet, if required.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–11
Installing the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets GSM-208-423
Cabinet
securing plates
and brackets
Figure 4-4 shows the location of the cabinet securing plates and the L-shaped
securing brackets. There are two plates and two brackets for each cabinet
though one plate and one bracket for BTS 0 are obscured from view.
L-SHAPED CABINET
SECURING
BRACKETS (BTS 0)
L-SHAPED
CABINET
SECURING
BRACKETS
(BTS 1)
CABINET
RETAINING
CABINET PLATES
RETAINING (BTS 0)
PLATES
(BTS 1)
Figure 4-4 Location of cabinet securing plates and brackets

Inst. 4–12 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Illustration of
completed
installation
Figure 4-5 shows two Horizonmacro indoor cabinets installed as BTS 0 and BTS
1 within a 12 carrier outdoor enclosure. The enclosure doors have been
removed for clarity.
HORIZONMACRO HORIZONMACRO
INDOOR CABINET INDOOR CABINET
(BTS 1) (BTS 0)
Figure 4-5 Installed Horizonmacro indoor cabinets

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–13
Connecting RF cables and antennas GSM-208-423
Connecting RF cables and antennas
Overview of RF
connections
The components shown in Figure 4-6 provide all the RF connections to and
from the cabinet.
THREE
TRANSMITTER/RECEIVERS
(Tx BLOCKs)
SURF
SIX
TRANSCEIVERS
(CTUs)
ig.128.rh
Figure 4-6 Location of RF components
All RF connections internal to the cabinet, (ie. those between CTUs, Tx blocks,
SURF and earth/connector plates), are cabled correctly at production, for the
cabinet configuration supplied. Only antenna cable connections, RF cable
connections and fibre optic connections between adjacent cabinets need to be
completed by the installer.

Inst. 4–14 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Connecting RF cables and antennas
Types of RF
connector
Table 4-2 lists the RF module connectors with their destinations.
Table 4-2 RF module connectors and destinations

RF Module Type of connector Destination
CTU transceiver SMA Tx block (underneath)
Tx block SMA CTU transceiver
N-type SURF
7/16 Antenna
SURF N-type Rx N-type of Tx block
SURF/Tx block
interconnecting
cables
Table 4-3 lists cable types used for SURF/Tx block interconnections.
Table 4-3 SURF/Tx block interconnecting cables

Part number Description Use
3086225N01 34.5 cm coaxial cable terminated at either Tx block to SURF
end with straight N-type plugs.
3086225N02 28 cm coaxial cable terminated at one end Tx block to Tx
with a straight N-type plug, and at the block
other end with a right-angle N-type plug.
3086225N03 2.25 m coaxial cable terminated at either SURF to SURF
end with straight N-type plugs.
3086225N04 2.25 m coaxial cable terminated at one Tx block to Tx
end with a straight N-type plug, and at the block
other end with a right-angle N-type plug.
Unused SMA
connections
Ensure that any unused SMA inputs to DCF, DDF or HCU modules are fitted
with 50 ohm termination loads.
Torque of RF
connectors
For correct torque of connectors, see Chapter 2, Site requirements and
considerations, Site preparation.
CAUTION Care should be taken when tightening SMA connectors to
avoid damage by excessive force.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–15
Connecting RF cables and antennas GSM-208-423
RF connection
principles
The primary receive path is connected to the A branch of the SURF module,
either directly, or from the Rx connector on the Tx block in non diversity
configurations. The diversity receive path is connected to the B path on the
SURF. this is normally duplexed with the transmit signal on a single antenna,
and fed to the SURF from the Rx connector on the Tx block. Within any single
cabinet, the lowest numbered sector is normally connected to amplifier 0
connections, and higher numbered sectors to amplifiers 1 and 2 as appropriate.
For example, sector 1 is connected to SURF connectors 0A and 0B, sector 2 to
1A and 1B and sector 3 to 2A and 2B. However, if a sector is split between two
cabinets, the split sector antennas must be connected to amplifier 0 (this is the
only path with a connection to the extension ports). Extension ports must be
connected to the correct branch at the destination cabinet.
The transmit path feeds from the CTUs to the Tx block or feedthrough plate
immediately above. Two signals are combined in most Tx blocks. A third signal
can be combined using a feedthrough plate and the third input of a DDF. The Tx
blocks then duplex the Tx signal with the diversity Rx signal before feeding to
the antenna.
Rx/Tx duplexing
on a single
antenna
Duplexers allow a single antenna to be used for both transmit (Tx) and receive
(Rx) operations. Duplexers exist within several of the transmit blocks. Normally
duplexed RF signals are used through one antenna, with a second receive
antenna to provide diversity.

Inst. 4–16 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Suggested RF configurations
Suggested RF configurations
Overview of
configuration
diagrams
The following series of RF configuration diagrams show suggested ways of
connecting together Horizonmacro SURF and Tx blocks to meet different
operational requirements. The series of diagrams is by no means exhaustive,
and numerous alternative configurations may be adopted to achieve the same
aim.
The Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure may contain one or two
Horizonmacro indoor cabinets. Diagrams are therefore included to cover single
cabinet and dual cabinet configurations.
Each Horizonmacro cabinet is represented by a SURF module and three Tx
blocks. Interconnecting cables are identified by a label; N01, 2, 3 or 4. Further
details of each cable type are shown in Table 4-3. Antenna connecting cables,
not supplied as part of the Horizonmacro equipment, are shown in dotted lines.
With the exception of Figure 4-23 and Figure 4-24, the diagrams are applicable
to GSM850, EGSM900, DCS1800 or PCS1900 single band operation, although
only the 1800 SURF module is illustrated.
NOTE Dual band 900 and 1800 SURFs are available, but 850
and 1900 SURFs are only available as single band.
Figure 4-23 shows one way of achieving dual band operation using two
Horizonmacro cabinets. A single band 1800 SURF is installed in one cabinet
and a dual band 900 SURF in the other. Figure 4-24 shows another, using one
of each type of dual band SURF.
CAUTION Diversity is assumed in all the RF configuration diagrams
shown here, except for Figure 4-8. If a single antenna
(non-diversity) is required, the duplex antenna RF receive
cable from the transmit block must be connected to the Rx
A path at the SURF (see Figure 4-8). Simply switching off
diversity at the OMC-R without the correct SURF
configuration will cause a loss of reception.
Digital connections
Digital connections between cabinets are not shown in the following diagrams.
Fibre optic cables used to provide digital connections between cabinets are
described in Connecting fibre optic cables.
Depopulated site configurations

The purpose of a depopulated site configuration is to allow customers to provide
a future expansion capability, at the time of installation. The diagram showing
the final target configuration is to be used to connect Tx blocks, SURF and
antennas. Depopulated site configurations are supplied with fully equipped RF
section to achieve the target configuration, with CTUs only fitted to alternate
slots. CTUs are fitted in slots 0, 2 and 4. Unused Tx block SMA connectors must
be fitted with 50 ohm terminating loads.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–17
Single cabinet configurations GSM-208-423
Single cabinet configurations

Configuration
for omni 1
Figure 4-7 shows a suggested configuration for omni 1 with twin duplexed filter.
2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A
RX RX RX RX RX RX EXT EXT
N01
RX RX
ANT ANT
BLANK BLANK TDF

2 1 0
Figure 4-7 Single cabinet omni 1 with TDF
Omni 1 or 2
(with
non-diversity)
Figure 4-8 shows suggested diversity or non-diversity configurations for omni 1
or omni 2 with duplexed combining bandpass filter.
2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A 2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A
RX RX RX RX RX RX EXT EXT RX RX RX RX RX RX EXT EXT
N01 N01
ANT ANT
RX RX
BLANK BLANK DCF BLANK BLANK DCF

2 1 0 2 1 0
Diversity configuration Non-diversity configuration
Figure 4-8 Single cabinet omni 1 or 2 with DCF (diversity and non-diversity)
Unused SMA connectors must be terminated as shown below.
If configured for... Then 50 ohm load required on
unused SMA input to...
omni 1 DCF 0

Inst. 4–18 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Single cabinet configurations
Configuration
for omni 3 or 4
Figure 4-9 shows a suggested configuration for omni 3 or omni 4 with duplexed
combining bandpass filter.
2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A
N01 N01
ANT ANT
RX RX
BLANK DCF DCF

2 1 0
Figure 4-9 Single cabinet omni 3 or 4 with DCF

Unused SMA connectors must be fitted with 50 ohm terminating loads as shown
below.
omni 3 DCF 1
Configuration
for omni 3
Figure 4-10 shows a suggested configuration for omni 3 with dual stage
duplexed combining filter.
2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A
N01
ANT
N02 RX
TX
FEED
BLANK THRU DDF
2 1 0
Figure 4-10 Single cabinet omni 3 with DDF

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–19
Configuration
for omni 4
Figure 4-11 shows a suggested configuration for omni 4 with dual stage
duplexed combining filter and hybrid combining unit.
2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A
N01
ANT
TX N02 RX
TX
BLANK HCU DDF
2 1 0
Figure 4-11 Single cabinet omni 4 with DDF and HCU
Configuration
for omni 5 or 6
Figure 4-12 shows a suggested configuration for omni 5 or 6 with dual stage
duplexed combining filter and air combining.
2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A
N01 N01
ANT ANT
RX N02 N02 RX
TX TX
FEED
DDF THRU DDF
2 1 0
Figure 4-12 Single cabinet omni 5 or 6 with DDF and air combining
below.
omni 5 DDF 2

Inst. 4–20 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Configuration
for sector 1/1 or
2/2
Figure 4-13 shows a suggested configuration for sector 1/1 or 2/2 with duplexed
combining bandpass filter.
SECTOR 1 SECTOR 2
2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A
N01 N01
ANT ANT
RX RX
DCF BLANK DCF

2 1 0
Figure 4-13 Single cabinet sector 1/1 or 2/2 with DCF
below.
sector 1/1 DCF 0 and DCF 2

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–21
Configuration
for sector 1/1
Figure 4-14 shows a suggested configuration for sector 1/1 with twin duplexed
filter.
SECTOR 2 SECTOR 1
2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A
N01 N01
RX RX
ANT ANT
BLANK BLANK TDF

2 1 0
Figure 4-14 Single cabinet sector 1/1 with TDF
Configuration
for single
cabinet sector
3/3
Figure 4-15 shows a suggested configuration for sector 3/3 with dual stage
duplexed combining filter.
SECTOR 1 SECTOR 2
2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A
N01 N01
ANT ANT
RX N02 N02 RX
TX TX
FEED
DDF THRU DDF
2 1 0
Figure 4-15 Single cabinet sector 3/3 with DDF

Inst. 4–22 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Configuration
for single
cabinet sector
1/1/1, 1/1/2, 1/2/2
or 2/2/2
Figure 4-16 shows a suggested configuration for sector 1/1/1, 1/1/2, 1/2/2 or
2/2/2 with duplexed combining bandpass filter.
SECTOR 3 SECTOR 2 SECTOR 1
2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A
N01 N01 N01
ANT ANT ANT
RX RX RX
DCF DCF DCF

2 1 0
Figure 4-16 Single cabinet sector 1/1/1, 1/1/2, 1/2/2 or 2/2/2 with DCF
below.
Sector 1/1/1 DCF 0, 1 and 2
Sector 1/1/2 DCF 1 and 2
Sector 1/2/2 DCF 2

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–23
Dual cabinet configurations GSM-208-423
Dual cabinet configurations

Configuration
for 2 cabinet
sector 3/3
Figure 4-17 shows a suggested configuration, using two Horizonmacro cabinets,
for sector 3/3 with dual stage duplexed combining filter.
SECTOR 1 SECTOR 2
N01 N01
ANT ANT
N02 RX N02 RX
TX TX
FEED FEED
BLANK THRU DDF BLANK THRU DDF
2 1 0 2 1 0
Figure 4-17 Two cabinet sector 3/3 with DDF
Configuration
for 2 cabinet
sector 4/4
Figure 4-18 shows a suggested configuration for sector 4/4 with dual stage
duplexed combining filter and hybrid combining unit.
SECTOR 1 SECTOR 2
N01 N01
ANT ANT
TX N02 RX TX N02 RX
TX TX
BLANK HCU DDF BLANK HCU DDF
2 1 0 2 1 0
Figure 4-18 Two cabinet sector 4/4 with DDF and HCU

Inst. 4–24 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Dual cabinet configurations
Configuration
for 2 cabinet
sector 5/5 or 6/6
for sector 5/5 or 6/6 with dual stage duplexed combining filter and air combining.
SECTOR 1 SECTOR 2
N01 N01 N01 N01
ANT ANT ANT ANT
RX N02 N02 RX RX N02 N02 RX

TX TX TX TX
FEED FEED
DDF THRU DDF DDF THRU DDF
2 1 0 2 1 0
Figure 4-19 Two cabinet sector 5/5 or 6/6 with DDF and air combining
Unused SMA connectors must be fitted with 50 ohm terminations as shown

below.
sector 5/5 both DDF 2 modules

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–25
Configuration
for 2 cabinet
sector 2/2/2
for sector 2/2/2 with duplexed combining bandpass filter.
N01 N01 N01
ANT ANT ANT
RX RX RX
BLANK DCF BLANK DCF BLANK DCF

2 1 0 2 1 0
Figure 4-20 Two cabinet sector 2/2/2 with DCF

Inst. 4–26 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Configuration
for 2 cabinet
sector 3/3/3 or
4/4/4
for sector 3/3/3 or sector 4/4/4 with duplexed combining bandpass filter and air
combining.
N01 N01 N01 N01 N01 N01
ANT ANT ANT ANT ANT ANT
RX RX RX RX RX RX
DCF DCF DCF DCF DCF DCF

2 1 0 2 1 0
CABINET 2 CABINET 1
N03
N03
Figure 4-21 Two cabinet sector 3/3/3 or sector 4/4/4 with DCF and air
combining
below.
sector 3/3/3 cabinet 1, DCF 1
cabinet 2, DCF 0 and DCF 2

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–27
Configuration
for 2 cabinet
sector 4/4/4
for sector 4/4/4 with dual stage duplexed combining filter and hybrid combining
unit.
N01 N01
ANT ANT ANT
TX N02 RX TX RX TX N02 RX
TX TX TX
HCU DDF HCU DDF HCU DDF

2 1 0 2 1 0
N04
N03
N03
Figure 4-22 Two cabinet sector 4/4/4 with DDF and HCU

Inst. 4–28 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Configuration
for dual band
1/1/1-3/3/3
for dual band sector 1/1/1–3/3/3 operation, where sector 1/1/1 is EGSM900 and
sector 3/3/3 is DCS1800. This dual band configuration requires one single band
1800 SURF and one dual band 900 SURF.
All unused SMA connectors must be fitted with 50 ohm terminating loads.
SECTOR 3
900
SECTOR 2
900
SECTOR 1
900
1800 1800
1B 2B 1B 0B 1A 2A 1A 0A B A
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX EXT EXT
N01 N01 N01 N01 N01
RX RX RX RX ANT
RX
ANT ANT ANT ANT
900 1800 SECTOR 3 SECTOR 2 SECTOR 1
DUAL 1800 1800 1800
900 1800
BAND
TDF DCF
TDF
2 1 0
2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A
N01 N01
ANT ANT
RX N02 N02 RX
TX TX
1800 FEED 1800

DDF THRU DDF
2 1 0
Figure 4-23 Two cabinet dual band sector 1/1/1-3/3/3

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–29
Configuration
for dual band
3/3/3–1/1/1
for dual band sector 3/3/3–1/1/1 operation, where sector 3/3/3 is EGSM900 and
sector 1/1/1 is DCS1800. This dual band configuration requires one dual band
1800 SURF and one dual band 900 SURF.
All unused SMA connectors must be fitted with 50 ohm terminating loads.
SECTOR 3
SECTOR 2 1800
1800
SECTOR 1
1800
Rx2A Rx1A Rx0A Tx0 Tx1 Tx2
900 900
2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A
1B 1A
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX EXT EXT
ANT RX RX RX RX
RX
ANT ANT ANT ANT
900 1800
DUAL
900 BAND 1800
DCF TDF TDF
2 1 0

900 900 900
1800 1800
2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A
1B 1A
RX RX RX RX
RX RX RX RX RX EXT EXT
ANT ANT
RX RX
TX TX
900 FEED 900

DDF THRU DDF
2 1 0
Figure 4-24 Two cabinet dual band sector 3/3/3-1/1/1

Inst. 4–30 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Connecting fibre optic cables
Connecting fibre optic cables
Location of
fibre optic
connections
In an Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure equipped with two
Horizonmacro indoor cabinets, BTS 0 is designated master and BTS 1
designated as an extension cabinet.
The six transceivers of BTS 0 are supported and controlled by an MCUF module
through a backplane connection. Only the master cabinet, BTS 0, is fitted with
an MCUF module. The extension cabinet, BTS 1, has no MCUF module and the
six transceivers of BTS 1 are supported by the MCUF of BTS 0 via a fibre optic
link.
The MCUF can be connected to three fibre optic multiplexers (FMUXs). The
MCUF is equipped with two, and the third is an external module located in the
slot next to the master MCUF. Additional redundant modules may be installed
for both MCUF and external FMUX.
The extension cabinet (BTS 1) has only a single FMUX, with optional
redundancy, for fibre optic connectivity to the master cabinet.
Tx and Rx data connections to the MCUF and FMUXs are located on the front
panel of each module.
The following fibre optic cable, coloured orange and terminated with ST
connectors, is available for use.
Motorola part number:
3004946C04 5.6 m long Connects MCUF in BTS 0 to FMUX in BTS 1.
WARNING Do not look directly into a fibre optic cable or the data
in/out connectors of the FMUX or MCUF, with or without
the use of optical aids. Laser radiation can come from
either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre
optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–31
Connecting fibre optic cables GSM-208-423
Care of fibres
Optical fibre cables contain an inner core, which is a strand of glass coated by a
cladding (sometimes in two layers), and an outer protective sheath which
provides mechanical protection.
The fibre acts as a light waveguide. In order for the link to work correctly light
must be propagated with minimal losses from end-to-end of the fibre. A number
of problems can prevent this from happening, resulting in a potentially faulty link.
Care must be taken to ensure that the following conditions are met:
Minimum bend radius

All optical fibres have a minimum bend radius. This represents the smallest
circle that is allowed to be formed from a loop of fibre, that is how tight it can be
coiled, looped or bent.
CAUTION Under no circumstances should fibres be bent tighter than
the minimum bend radius.
If fibres are bent tighter than the minimum bend radius then two possible effects
can happen:
S Excessive light loss can occur from the outside of the bend, resulting in a
loss of performance.
S The fibre can fracture due to microscopic imperfections in the surface.
This type of break is invisible externally. If such a break occurs, excessive
light loss would be permanent and light would be scattered and reflected
from the break in the fibre. Returning the fibre to straight will not help and
the whole assembly will require replacement.
For glass fibres (orange or green outer sheath) the long term minimum bend
radius is approximately 30 mm, as shown in Figure 4-25.
30 mm
FIBRE OPTIC CABLE
Figure 4-25 Minimum bend radius of 30 mm

If the fibre is under tension (being stretched), the bend radius should be much
larger, at least doubled. This is because the tension in the fibre can increase the
possibilities of damage.
If in doubt about the radius, the fibre should be allowed to form its “natural” bend
radius by allowing it to bend under gravity only. This natural bend radius is
normally greater than 30 mm.

Inst. 4–32 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Connecting fibre optic cables
Protecting fibres and connectors

To maintain good light transmission through the fibre optic link it is essential to
maintain cleanliness of the connector end surfaces and/or bare fibre ends.
At all times when fibres are not connected into the system, the connector
protective caps (normally red) should be fitted and kept in place. This is
especially important when routeing fibres during installation.
Cleaning fibres and connectors

Cleanliness of fibre terminations and connectors is essential. If cleaning of
contaminated optical components is required, then all areas should be wiped
gently with a lint-free cloth, soaked in a suitable cleaning solution. Care should
be taken to ensure the ends of the fibres are not scratched in any way.
Connecting glass fibre cables

Fibre ST (push and turn) connectors are used to terminate the fibre optic cables
at either end.
Connecting
fibre optic link
between BTS 0
and BTS 1
The fibre optic cables connecting the master cabinet (BTS 0) to the extension
cabinet (BTS 1) connect directly to the front panel ports on the MCUF and
FMUX digital modules respectively. Cable access is through a hole on the
cabinet top panel, in front of the interface panel, and directly to the relevant
module.
The procedure for connecting the fibre optic link between BTS 0 and BTS 1 is
as follows:
NOTE Before proceeding with the connection procedure,
installers must first read the preceding section, Care of
fibres.
1. Connect a fibre optic cable (Motorola part 3004946C04) from BTS 0,

MCUF, Tx data port, to BTS 1, FMUX Rx data port.
2. Connect a fibre optic cable (Motorola part 3004946C04) from BTS 0,
MCUF, Rx data port, to BTS 1, FMUX Tx data port.
This completes the procedure for connecting the fibre optic link between BTS 0
and BTS 1.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–33
Interface panel cabling GSM-208-423
Interface panel cabling
Interface panel
diagram and
pinout
overview
With the exception of the fibre optic connection between master and extension
cabinets, all cabinet power and data connections are made on the interface
panel. Each cable connector is marked with the appropriate label and must be
plugged into the appropriate plug or socket on the interface panel.
All external data connections, including PIX and alarms, are terminated at the
master cabinet (BTS 0) interface panel.
The only connections to the BTS 1 interface panel are the separate –48V dc
power input cables.
Figure 4-26 shows the locations of all the interface panel connectors.
T43/BIB DC POWER
INPUT
VENTILATION
GRID
GPS
(if fitted)
CCB
(not used)
AC POWER
PIX0 SOCKET INPUT
PIX1
ICS
EXTERNAL ALARMS
ig.239.rh
Figure 4-26 Interface panel connector locations

Inst. 4–34 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Interface panel cabling
Interface panel
pinouts table
list
CAUTION Keep the plastic connector covers (supplied by Motorola)
on unused connectors to protect from damage by static or
foreign matter.
The following tables list the connector pinouts:

S GPS, see Table 4-4.
S RTC, see Table 4-5.
S BIB, see Table 4-6.
S T43, see Table 4-7.
S PIX0, see Table 4-8.
S PIX1, see Table 4-9.
S ICS, see Table 4-10.
S External alarms, see Table 4-11.
GPS pinouts
Table 4-4 lists the GPS pinout connections.
NOTE The GPS connector is optional on later BTS cabinets.
Table 4-4 GPS pin connections (15-way D-type)

No. No.
1 GPS power 1 9 GPS return 1
2 Rx negative 10 GPS power 2
3 Rx positive 11 PPS positive
4 Tx negative 12 PPS negative
5 Tx positive 13 Not connected
6 Spare (not connected) 14 Not connected
7 VPP (not connected) 15 Not connected
8 GPS return 2

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–35
RTC pinouts
Table 4-5 lists the RTC pinout connections.
Table 4-5 RTC pin connections (15-way D-type)

No. No.
3 RTC0 27 V 11 Earth
8 Not connected
NOTE CCBs cannot be fitted in the indoor cabinet if it is installed

in the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure.

Inst. 4–36 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
BIB
connections
The Balanced line Interconnect Board (BIB) provides the line isolation between
the E1/T1 circuit lines and the the backplane. The board provides an interface
for up to six input and six output balanced 120 ohm lines. Twelve transformers
are used to provide line isolation, while maintaining impedance matching
between the E1/T1 circuit lines and the NIU module. Each transformer has a 1:1
turn ratio to match the external and backplane 120 ohm connections.
Connection is made using a 37-pin D-type connector to both the BIB and the
external PCM circuit lines. Figure 4-27 shows a typical BIB and Table 4-6 lists
the BIB interconnections.
T17
T7 T8 T14 T16
T4 T5 J1 T11 T13
T10
T1 T2
J0
Figure 4-27 Balanced line interconnect board (BIB)
Table 4-6 BIB interconnections

NIU/ Pin Equipment/Ext Pin Pin Equipment/Ext Pin
port No. No. No. No.
0/0 J0-1 Tx1+ J1-1 J0-20 Tx1– J1-20
J0-2 Rx1+ J1-2 J0-21 Rx1– J1-21
not J0-4 Tx4+ J1-4 J0-23 Tx4– J1-23
used
J0-5 Rx4+ J1-5 J0-24 Rx4– J1-24
0/1 J0-7 Tx2+ J1-7 J0-26 Tx2– J1-26
J0-8 Rx2+ J1-8 J0-27 Rx2– J1-27
not J0-10 Tx5+ J1-10 J0-29 Tx5– J1-29
used
J0-11 Rx5+ J1-11 J0-30 Rx5– J1-30
1/0 J0-13 Tx3+ J1-13 J0-32 Tx3– J1-32
J0-14 Rx3+ J1-14 J0-33 Rx3– J1-33
not J0-16 Tx6+ J1-16 J0-35 Tx6– J1-35
used
J0-17 Rx6+ J1-17 J0-36 Rx6– J1-36
Connector J0 and J1, pins 3,6,9,12,15,18,19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34 and 37 are
connected to earth

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–37
T43
connections
The Type 43 interconnect board (T43) provides the impedance matching and
line isolation between the E1/T1 circuit lines and the backplane. The board
provides an interface for up to six input and six output unbalanced coaxial 75
ohm lines. Twelve transformers are used to provide impedance matching line
isolation between the E1/T1 circuit lines and the NIU module. Each transformer
has a 1:1.25 turn ratio to match the external 75 ohm and backplane 120 ohm
connections.
Connection is made using a 37-pin D-type connector to the interconnect board
and twelve type 43 coaxial connectors to the external E1/T1 circuit lines.
Figure 4-28 shows a typical T43, and Table 4-7 lists the T43 interconnections.
J0
J8 J4
J14 J10
J16 J2
J13 J11
J7 J1
J5
J17
Figure 4-28 Type 43 interconnect board (T43)
Table 4-7 T43 interconnections

NIU/ Pin Equipment Pin No. Pin Equipment Pin No.
port No. / Ext No. / Ext
0/0 J0-1 Tx1+ J1 centre J0-20 Tx1– J1 shield
J0-2 Rx1+ J2 centre J0-21 Rx1– J2 shield
not J0-4 Tx4+ J4 centre J0-23 Tx4– J4 shield
used
used
used
Connector J0, pins 3,6,9,12,15,18,19, 22, 25, 28, 31, 34 and 37 are not
used

Inst. 4–38 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
PIX inputs and

outputs
PIX outputs
PIX outputs comprise four relay contacts controlled by the alarm module and
MCUF. The relays have multiple contacts, some normally open and some
normally closed. The contacts are rated for 1 A at 30 V. The contacts may be
used for control of external equipment such as fans or audible alarms.
PIX inputs
PIX inputs comprise 16 connections to external sensors. These inputs report
alarms to the BSC, via the alarm module and MCUF, which forwards the alarms
to the OMC-R. The end-user supplies the external sensors. Each sensor
connects across an opto-coupled pair of PIX inputs (eight per PIX connector).
All sensors must be dry-contact type with the following specification:
S 5 kohms or greater across sense inputs for logic 1 (PIX opto-coupler off).
S 500 ohms or less across sense inputs for logic 0 (PIX opto-coupler on).
Table 4-8 shows PIX0 pin out connections and Table 4-9 shows PIX1 pin out
connections.
Table 4-8 PIX0 pin connections (37-way D-type)
No. No.
1 Site input Ext 1–1 19 Not connected
2 Site input Ext 2–1 20 Site input Ext 1–2
9 Not connected 27 Site input Ext 8–2
10 Not connected 28 spare
11 Site output relay 1 – NO 29 Site output relay 1 – NC
12 Site output relay 2 – NO 30 Site output relay 1 – COM
13 Site output relay 2 – NC 31 Site output relay 2 – COM
14 Site output relay 3 – NO 32 Site output relay 3 – NC
15 Site output relay 4 – NO 33 Site output relay 3 – COM
16 Site output relay 4 – NC 34 Site output relay 4 – COM
18 Not connected 36/37 Not connected

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–39
Table 4-9 PIX1 pin connections (37-way D-type)

No. No.
1 Site input Ext 9–1 19 Not connected
9 Not connected 27 Site input Ext 16–2
Pins 10 to 18 not connected Pins 28 to 37 not connected
ICS pinouts
Table 4-10 lists the ICS pin out connections. This is a future feature.
Table 4-10 ICS pin connections (25-way D-type)

No. No.
1 ICS0 TTY earth 10 ICS3 TTY earth
2 ICS0 TTY Rx 11 ICS3 TTY Rx
3 ICS0 TTY Tx 12 ICS3 TTY Tx
Pins 19 to 25 not connected

Inst. 4–40 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
External alarm
pinouts
Table 4-11 lists the external alarms connections at BTS 0. Ten alarms are also
shown on the alarm board front panel LEDs.
Table 4-11 External alarms pin connections (37-way D-type)

1 AC 1 fail 20 Rectifier 1 fail return
2 AC 1 fail return 21 Rectifier 2 fail
3 Linked to pin 4 22 Rectifier 2 fail return
4 Linked to pin 3 23 Linked to pin 24
5 HMS 0 fail – BTS 0 24 Linked to pin 23
6 HMS 0 fail return – BTS 0 25 BTS 0 door 2 open
7 HMS 1 fail – BTS 0 26 BTS 0 door 2 open return
8 HMS 1 fail return – BTS 0 27 BTS smoke alarm
9 – 28 BTS smoke alarm return
10 – 29 ANC cabinet overtemperature
11 Linked to pin 12 30 ANC cabinet overtemp. return
15 Low voltage alarm 34 –
16 Low voltage alarm return 35 –
17 Linked to pin 18 36 Cabinet overtemperature
18 Linked to pin 17 37 Cabinet overtemperature return
19 Rectifier 1 fail

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–41
Connecting power and earth cabling GSM-208-423
Connecting power and earth cabling

Overview to
power and earth
cabling
This section describes the procedure for connecting dc power and earth cabling
to each individual Horizonmacro indoor cabinet. Power and earth connections
are provided by the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure.
WARNING The cabinet should already have been earthed to the
enclosure chassis. See Figure 4-26 for the location of the
earth stud on the interface panel.
Do not daisy chain cabinet earths together.
Cabinets must be earthed with a conductor capable of
carrying the full fault current of the overcurrent protection
device.
Power specifications can be found in Chapter 2, Site preparation, Site

requirements and considerations.
Cable routeing
CAUTION Ensure that covers are fitted to any unused connectors on
the cabinet interconnect panel; the covers protect the
connectors from damage by static electricity or foreign
matter.
Do not connect dc input power from the enclosure to the
Horizonmacro indoor cabinet at this time.
Power cables are routed from the enclosure dc distribution panel (in PDU B) to
each Horizonmacro indoor cabinet via cable trays.
Cabinet and
ESP earthing
points
The main earth connection point is on the top interface panel, with a 10 mm M6
threaded stud, adjacent to the dc input. This connection is for protective
earthing and functional earthing of the cabinet.
Additional internal earths are:
S Door to cabinet frame.
S Main cage to interface panel above PSM.
S Tx block top panel to interface panel, near dc input.
S AC input connector (not used with 12 carrier outdoor enclosure
installations) to interface panel at rear of panel.
S Enclosure to interface panel, at rear, next to dc input.
An earthing wrist strap must be worn when handling electronic modules,
including the MCUF, FMUX, NIU, alarm module, CTU, and SURF. An ESP
earthing connection point is provided above the leftmost PSM.

Inst. 4–42 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Connecting power and earth cabling
Cabinet dc
connections
The 12 carrier outdoor enclosure provides a –48V dc supply to each
Horizonmacro indoor cabinet.
WARNING Ensure –48V dc PSMs are fitted to match the supply

source voltage provided by the 12 carrier outdoor
enclosure.
Each Horizonmacro indoor cabinet is connected via two dc input power cables,
positive and negative, to a –48V dc supply from the enclosure primary
distribution unit (PDU B).
S Negative input power cables are blue.
S Positive (earth) input power cables are black.
Two circuit breakers, marked BTS 0 and BTS 1, are mounted on the enclosure
dc distribution panel to provide input power isolation for the individual
Horizonmacro indoor cabinets.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 4–43
Connecting power and earth cabling GSM-208-423
DC power cable
connection
procedure
To connect dc power to the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet:
WARNING Do not wear an anti static wrist strap while servicing the
power supplies or power distribution cabling, as serious
personal injury can result.
1. At the enclosure dc distribution panel, identify the two circuit breakers

providing –48V dc to the Horizonmacro indoor cabinets. These are
labelled BTS0 and BTS1, where BTS0 refers to the right cabinet and
BTS1 refers to the left cabinet.
2. Switch both circuit breakers to the OFF position.
3. Use a digital voltmeter to ensure that power is not present on the positive
(black) or negative (blue) power cables.
4. Connect the black positive (+) dc power cable from the enclosure primary
distribution unit (PDU B) to the cabinet dc power connector assembly 0 V
terminal.
NOTE Make sure that the cone-shaped plastic cover is threaded
onto the cable before connection.
5. Connect the blue negative (–) dc power cable from the enclosure primary
distribution unit (PDU B) to the cabinet dc power connector assembly V IN
terminal.
NOTE Make sure that the cone-shaped plastic cover is threaded
onto the cable before connection.
6. Tighten the dc power and earth terminal connections (nuts on studs with
star washers) to the correct torque as described in Chapter 2.
The input power and earth cable connection procedure is now complete.

Inst. 4–44 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Chapter 5
Installing the ancillary enclosure

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A i
GSM-208-423

ii 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423
Chapter 5

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A iii
GSM-208-423

iv 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Introduction to ancillary enclosure installation
Introduction to ancillary enclosure installation
Installation
scenarios
The following scenarios are possible when installing the optional ancillary
enclosure:
S Before the main enclosure is installed.
S At the same time as the main enclosure is installed.
S After the main enclosure has been installed.
The installation sequence (particularly with regard to main enclosure actions)
varies slightly depending on which of the above scenarios applies.
For example:
Installation before the main enclosure

Connecting the cable conduits to the main enclosure cannot be done until the
main enclosure is installed.
Installation at the same time as the main enclosure

Only proceed with main enclosure installation as far as the internal battery
installation before wiring-in the ancillary enclosure. This enables the ancillary
enclosure to be connected to the main enclosure before the monoblocs are
installed in the main enclosure. (Failure to do this creates unnecessary work as
the monoblocs have to be removed to install the cable conduits.)
Installation after the main enclosure

This option assumes that the main enclosure is in an operational state prior to
installation of the ancillary enclosure. In this case the main enclosure must be
shutdown and isolated in preparation for connecting the ancillary enclosure.
The information provided in this chapter assumes that the main enclosure has
already been installed and is operational.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–1
Introduction to ancillary enclosure installation GSM-208-423
Ancillary
enclosure
layout
Figure 5-1 shows the internal layout of a fully equipped ancillary enclosure, with
major components identified.
LIGHT (NOT VISIBLE)
BATTERY MANAGEMENT
MODULE
BATTERY STRING 3
BATTERY STRING 2
BATTERY STRING 1
HEATER TEST BUTTON
AC SUPPLY
ISOLATOR SWITCH
HEATER UNIT
ADJUSTABLE SHELVING
Figure 5-1 Ancillary enclosure internal layout (door removed)

Inst. 5–2 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Safety
precautions
The following safety instructions must be observed when installing the ancillary
enclosure:
S The installation procedures described in this supplement must only be
carried out by suitably trained personnel.
S Installation and commissioning must comply with all relevant national and
regional regulations.
S The ancillary enclosure must be bolted down.
Tools required
Refer to Table 1-1 in Chapter 1 of this category for a list of tools required for
installation.
Structural
requirements
The structural requirements and site preparation procedures for the ancillary
enclosure are similar to those required for the main enclosure (refer to the
appropriate sections of Chapter 2 in this category for further details and site
plan).
Drilling
mounting holes
prior to
equipment
arrival
Templates for drilling the mounting holes are supplied with both the main
enclosure and the ancillary enclosure (on the inside of the packaging lids).
However, if the mounting holes are to be drilled prior to the arrival of the
ancillary enclosure, Figure 5-2 shows the measurements required.
200 mm
TO
400 mm
1785 mm 585 mm
ANCILLARY
12 CARRIER OUTDOOR ENCLOSURE 725 mm
ENCLOSURE
Figure 5-2 Mounting hole templates for the main and ancillary enclosures

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–3
Unpacking and preparing the ancillary enclosure GSM-208-423
Unpacking and preparing the ancillary enclosure
Avoiding
condensation
build up
Do not unpack the enclosure until power is available and ready to be connected.
Condensation can build up inside the enclosure if it is unpacked and left
standing without being switched on.
Safety
considerations
Consider the following safety information before installing the ancillary
enclosure.
WARNING Ancillary enclosures are fitted with four lifting points,

designed to accommodate M16 swivel head eyebolts, built
into the enclosure base. If swivel head eyebolts are used
to lift the enclosure, they must be manufactured to CE
conformity, and must have a safe weight load of 150 kg
each.
Before attempting to insert the eyebolts, visually check
each one for damage. If any damage is apparent, DO
NOT USE. The eyebolts must not be overtightened; hand
tight is sufficient. Screw the eyebolt fully into the lifting
point so that no thread is left exposed.
The ancillary enclosure is heavy and should not be
installed without the use of lifting equipment unless
sufficient personnel are available to ensure that Health
and Safety regulations are not breached.
Handle the ancillary enclosure with extreme caution, and
in accordance with any local health and safety regulations.
Motorola recommend the use of slings in conjunction with
hydraulic lifting apparatus for moving and positioning the
ancillary enclosure.
Do not attempt to install the battery strings until after
the ancillary enclosure has been moved into position
and bolted down.
In addition to these points, refer to and comply with any
local regulations that govern the use of lifting equipment.
For the subsequent use of eyebolts, there may be local regulations that govern
the use of lifting equipment and stipulate a test and/or examination regime. If
the eyebolts are to be used, ensure that all such regulations are met.
The installation support procedures are described in the following sections.

Inst. 5–4 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Unpacking and preparing the ancillary enclosure
Enclosure
access
procedure
The ancillary enclosure access procedure comprises door opening and closing
only.
NOTE The hood is fixed and cannot be opened.
The door opens to the right and has a spring loaded locking handle. A gas strut,
mounted at the bottom of the door, assists in opening the door and locks the
door open in the 120_ position. Proceed as follows to open and close the door:
1. Slide open the lock protective cover.
2. Insert the key into the lock and turn anticlockwise until the spring loaded
handle releases.
4. Open the door to the fully open 120_ position.
generated.
5. To close the door, press down on the orange locking clip on the centre of
the gas strut, close the door firmly and turn the handle a quarter turn to
the left and push until the handle is flush with the door. The door locks
automatically.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–5
Unpacking and preparing the ancillary enclosure GSM-208-423
Procedures for
unpacking and
preparing the
ancillary
enclosure
NOTE It is recommended that the installer reads through the
the enclosure.
Dismantling the shipping packaging and obtaining template

Proceed as follows to dismantle the shipping packaging and obtain the template
(see Figure 5-3):
1. Cut the plastic banding that secures the packaging.
2. Lift the lid free of the box.
3. Deliver the lid (fixing template printed on the underside) to the site for
positioning on the concrete base.
4. Undo the taped fastening on the box side.
5. Unwrap the box from around the enclosure.
The enclosure is now ready to be prepared for lifting.
CARDBOARD LID
(FIXING TEMPLATE PRINTED ON UNDERSIDE)
FLEXIBLE CABLE
CONDUIT
(COILED)
ANCILLARY
ENCLOSURE
CARDBOARD
DELIVERY
BOX
SECURING BAND
SECURING BAND
WOODEN PALLET
Figure 5-3 Typical shipping packaging (front of delivery box removed for clarity)

Inst. 5–6 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Unpacking and preparing the ancillary enclosure
Preparing the ancillary enclosure for lifting

WARNING The empty enclosure weighs 150 kg. Handle with extreme
caution, and in accordance with local health and safety
regulations.
To prepare the enclosure for lifting and to remove it from the wooden delivery
pallet:
CAUTION Care must be taken to avoid damaging the enclosure in
any way, especially by scratching the outer surfaces.
2. Ensure the enclosure door is closed securely.
3. Remove the plastic inserts from the four M16 threaded lifting points at the
base of the enclosure and screw in the eyebolts.
Refer to local regulations regarding the lifting of heavy objects and refer to
Safety considerations described earlier in this chapter before lifting the
enclosure.
The enclosure can now be lifted gently and manoeuvred to the concrete base.
Safe disposal of
packing
material
The packing material used by Motorola is non-returnable and should be
disposed of safely.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–7
Installing mounting bolt anchors using the template
Introduction to
mounting bolt
anchor
installation
The ancillary enclosure is supplied with a drilling template printed on the inside
of the packaging lid. The template is laid down on the concrete base and pilot
holes are drilled through the cardboard and into the concrete in the positions
indicated.
View of ancillary
enclosure
template
Figure 5-4 shows how the cardboard lid is marked to provide a drilling template
for the ancillary enclosure.
DRILL POSITION
MARKER
Figure 5-4 Ancillary enclosure drilling template

Inst. 5–8 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Procedure for
marking
ancillary
enclosure bolt
hole positions
The procedure for marking the position of the mounting holes is as follows:
1. Lay the cardboard installation template on the concrete base, on the right
side of the main enclosure. Ensure the gap between the main enclosure
bolt holes and the ancillary enclosure bolt holes is between 200 mm and
400 mm.
CAUTION Drilling concrete produces cement dust, which is harmful

to equipment and wiring. Protect the enclosure and any
nearby equipment from dust. Use a tarpaulin, cloth, or
2. Using a 6 mm drill bit, drill four pilot holes through the cardboard and into
the concrete in the positions shown on the template. Remove the
template.
3. Check that the distances between the pilot holes are correct (see
Figure 5-4) before starting the procedure to install the enclosure anchor
bolts.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–9
Procedure for
installing
ancillary
enclosure bolt
anchors
The pilot holes in the concrete base must be drilled out to accept the M12
anchor bolts. Mounting washers are supplied with the enclosure, but bushes
and M12 steel bolts must be supplied by the customer.
CAUTION Drilling concrete produces cement dust, which is harmful

to equipment and wiring. Protect the enclosure and any
nearby equipment from dust. Use a tarpaulin, cloth, or
1. Using the four pilot holes as a guide, drill the concrete base to a depth and
clearance for the M12 anchor bolts using a suitable drill bit.
2. Insert the M12 mounting anchors in the holes in the base.
3. Fit the supplied washers to the anchor bolts. Insert the anchor bolts into
the anchor.
4. Place the supplied spreader plates against each anchor bolt and tension
up the anchor bolts to expand the anchors.
5. Partially unscrew the M12 bolts from the anchors so that approximately
25 mm is protruding above the base (the bolts will act as a guide for the
holes in the ancillary enclosure base). Remove the spreader plates and
retain for securing the enclosure to the base.

Inst. 5–10 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Fitting the ancillary enclosure onto its base
Fitting the ancillary enclosure onto its base
Procedure for
fitting an
ancillary
enclosure
Follow the procedure given below to fit the ancillary enclosure onto the concrete
base. This procedure assumes that the main enclosure has already been
installed, and the ancillary enclosure is to be installed on the right side of it.
Installing the flexible cable conduits

WARNING The empty ancillary enclosure weighs 150 kg.
Observe proper lifting precautions and handle the
enclosure with extreme caution to avoid tipping.
1. Manoeuvre the ancillary enclosure close enough to the main enclosure so

that the two flexible cable conduits coiled on the left side can be unwound
and the ends fed loosely into the front access hole (see Figure 5-5).
2. Open the main enclosure doors and remove the two access plates in the
floor.
3. Using the access holes, pull the cable conduits through the base of the
main enclosure until all slack has been removed.
MAIN
ENCLOSURE
CABLE CONDUIT
FEEDER PLATE
(SPLIT)
CABLE CONDUIT
Figure 5-5 Fitting the cable conduits and feeder plate to the main enclosure

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–11
Fitting the ancillary enclosure onto its base GSM-208-423
Bolting the ancillary enclosure to the concrete base

1. Remove the two screws that secure the left front and left rear mounting
access plates to the bottom of the enclosure. (The mounting holes on the
right side of the enclosure can be accessed through the side access
holes.)
2. Lift and then lower the enclosure onto the concrete base. As it nears the
ground, look through the access holes on the front and sides to ensure
that the mounting holes in the enclosure base line up with the anchor bolts
in the concrete base. Also, pull the flexible cable conduits further into the
main enclosure so that all slack in the conduits is removed when the
ancillary enclosure is in its final position.
3. For each anchor bolt, insert the supplied spreader plate through the
access hole so that it butts up against the anchor bolt (see Figure 5-6).
NOTE If the ancillary enclosure is mounted close to the main
enclosure and is not easily accessible from the rear, it may
not be possible to gain access and tighten the left rear
anchor bolt through the access hole. In this case, the
ancillary enclosure is designed for stability with just three
anchor bolts fitted.
ANCHOR BOLT
SPREADER PLATE
Figure 5-6 Fitting the spreader plate to the anchor bolt (right rear shown)
4. Tighten up the anchor bolts to the correct torque while holding the
spreader plate in position.
NOTE Refer to the manufacturer’s data sheet for the correct
torque values for the M12 anchor bolts.
5. Fit the supplied blank access cover plates to the side access holes and
refit the front and rear mounting access plates, as appropriate.
NOTE All access cover plates and the split cable conduit plate
are secured using special anti-tamper screws. A special
right angle hex head screwdriver is supplied for tightening
these screws.

Inst. 5–12 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Fitting the ancillary enclosure onto its base
6. Remove each of the eyebolts from their threaded holes on the base of the
enclosure and return them to the tool kit for future use. Refit the plastic
inserts in the eyebolt holes.
Figure 5-7 shows the ancillary enclosure mounted next to the 12 carrier outdoor
enclosure.
ANCILLARY
OUTDOOR
ENCLOSURE
ENCLOSURE
FLEXIBLE CABLE
CONDUIT
85 mm MINIMUM
285 mm MAXIMUM
Figure 5-7 Ancillary enclosure installed next to 12 carrier outdoor enclosure
Existing RF
cable
re-routeing
If the main enclosure is already in service and the RF feeder cables enter the
enclosure from the right side, they can be disconnected, removed, and fed back
into the main enclosure through the rear side access panels in the base of the
ancillary enclosure. Spare RF feeder plates are supplied with the ancillary
enclosure for this purpose.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–13
Fitting the ancillary enclosure onto its base GSM-208-423
Installing the
ancillary
enclosure on
the left of the
main enclosure
The procedure for installing the ancillary enclosure on the left of the main
enclosure is very similar to the standard procedure for installing it on the right,
but note the following differences:
S The distances between the two enclosures must take into account
whether or not a shroud is fitted to the main enclosure. It may not be
practical to install the ancillary enclosure on the left of the main enclosure
if a shroud is used.
S The flexible cable conduits will need to be re-routed from the left to the
right side of the ancillary enclosure. The easiest way to do this is to
remove the conduit feeder plate, lift the enclosure off the ground, re-route
the conduits to the right side from underneath and then refit the feeder
plate on the right side of the enclosure.

Inst. 5–14 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Wiring the ancillary enclosure to the main enclosure
Wiring the ancillary enclosure to the main enclosure
Introduction to
wiring the
ancillary
enclosure to the
main enclosure
All the cables required to connect the ancillary enclosure to the main enclosure
are preinstalled in the two flexible cable conduits. The cable connections within
the ancillary enclosure are made in the factory, and therefore the only
connections that need to be made on site are to the appropriate equipment
within the main enclosure.
The procedures described here should be carried out in sequence and it is
assumed that the flexible cable conduits have already been fed into the base of
the main enclosure.
WARNING If the enclosure is operational, it must be shut down and

isolated from the external ac supply and the internal
battery backup isolator switch must be in the OFF position
before starting to wire up the cables to the enclosure.
Preparing the
main enclosure
The following procedure describes how to prepare the main enclosure prior to
connecting the cables from the ancillary enclosure, when mounted to the right of
the main enclosure.
1. Remove the battery compartment cover on the left side of the main
enclosure.
2. Remove the four monoblocs from the upper and lower shelves of the
battery compartment.
3. Remove the two vertically mounted access plates from the rear panel of
the upper and lower shelves of the battery compartment.
4. Remove the protective cover from the underside of the battery isolator
switch.
5. Remove the AIM module cover.
6. Disconnect the thermal probe cable from J5 on the AIM (the other end of
the cable has already been disconnected from the positive terminal of the
right monobloc on the upper shelf in step 2). Remove the cable from the
enclosure, as it is used in the ancillary enclosure (see Procedure for
installing the monoblocs later in this chapter).

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–15
Wiring the ancillary enclosure to the main enclosure GSM-208-423
AC supply
connection to
the main
enclosure
Figure 5-8 shows the ac supply and earth cables, as installed in the flexible
cable conduit. Proceed as follows to connect the cables in the enclosure:
1. Feed the ac cable conduit across the base to the cable channel at the rear
of the battery compartment.
2. Through the access holes at the rear of the battery compartment, feed the
cable conduit up the cable channel.
3. Secure the conduit termination brackets to the rear of the upper access
panel using two screws (fixings are supplied with the ancillary enclosure).
Secure the conduit to one of the brackets and feed the ac supply and
earth cables through the cable glands at the top of the cable channel.
4. Connect the earth cable to the Principal Ground Bar (PGB), mounted on
top of the battery compartment, behind the AIM.
5. Connect the ac supply cable to the ac connector fixed to the enclosure
chassis (see Figure 5-9). Use cable ties to secure the cable in position.
EARTH CABLE FACTORY CONNECTED

(TO PGB) IN THE ANCILLARY
ENCLOSURE
AC SUPPLY CABLE
(TO AC POWER
DISTRIBUTION UNIT)
Figure 5-8 Cable conduit containing ac supply cables
AC CONNECTOR PLUG
(FROM AC
DISTRIBUTION UNIT)
AC SUPPLY
CABLE
AIM
UPPER ACCESS
PANEL
LOWER ACCESS
PANEL
Figure 5-9 Routeing the ac supply cable to the main enclosure

Inst. 5–16 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Connecting the
dc supply and
alarm cables to
the main
enclosure
Figure 5-11 shows the dc supply and alarm cables as installed in the flexible
cable conduit. Proceed as follows to connect the cables to the enclosure:
1. Feed the dc/alarm cable conduit across the base to the cable channel at
the rear of the battery compartment.
2. Through the access holes at the rear of the battery compartment, feed the
cable conduit up the cable channel.
3. Secure the cable conduit in the unused conduit termination bracket on the
back of the upper access panel. Feed the alarm cable through the cable
gland at the top of the cable channel.
4. Feed the dc supply cables through the hole in the upper access plate.
Connect the cables to the spare M6 studs on the right side of the battery
isolator switch (see Figure 5-10).
0 V BLACK CABLE
–48 V BLUE CABLE
–48 V BLUE CABLE

0 V BLACK CONNECTS HERE
CABLE
–48 V BLUE 0 V BLACK CABLE
CABLE CONNECTS HERE
Figure 5-10 DC connections to the battery isolator switch
5. Refit the battery isolator switch protective cover. Refit the access plates to
the rear panel of the battery compartment.
6. Reinstall the four monoblocs on the upper and lower shelves. Refit the
battery compartment cover.
7. Refit the access plates to the floor of the enclosure.
8. Identify connectors J4 and J41 on the AIM board (see Figure 5-12).
Connect the 12-pin plug on the alarm cable to J4 and the 6-pin plug to
J41.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–17
Wiring the ancillary enclosure to the main enclosure GSM-208-423
9. Set the SW1 and SW2 DIP switch settings on the AIM as required (see
the next section, DIP switch settings on the AIM) and then refit the AIM
cover.
10. Fit the supplied conduit feeder plates to the main enclosure (see
Figure 5-5). Ensure all other feeder/blanking plates are fitted to the main
and ancillary enclosures.
DC SUPPLY CABLES
(TO BATTERY ISOLATOR SWITCH)
FACTORY CONNECTED
IN THE ANCILLARY
ENCLOSURE
ALARM CABLE
(TO AIM)
Figure 5-11 Cable conduit containing dc supply and alarm cables
J7
J21 J20 J19 J18
SK4
COM
COM
COM
COM
SK9
NC
NC
NC
NC
NO
NO
NO
NO
1
4
J12 J15 J14
1 4 1 4
J9
J27
J28
4
1
SK3
SK10 1 J17 4 1 J16 4
SK8
SK5
1
20
20
1
4
J10 4 4
J11 J40 J41
1 1
4
1
SK7 SW 1 7 3 3
SK6 J4 J1 J22
1 1 1
1 6
SK2
SK11
1
4 SW 2
4 3 3
J13 1 6 J23 J2 J24
3
J8 1 1 1
J5
4
1
1
SK1
SK12
14 20
20 J3 J26
J25 1 1
1
J6
Figure 5-12 J4 and J41 connector locations on the AIM

Inst. 5–18 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
DIP switch
settings on the
AIM
Table 5-1 and Table 5-2 show the settings required on DIP switch blocks SW1
and SW2 on the AIM when the ancillary enclosure is connected to the main
enclosure.

Switch Required Pin Signal description
No. setting
1 Open 1
12
2 Open 2
Door alarm
11
3 Open 3
10
4 Open 4
9
5 Open 5
8
6 Closed 6
7

Switch Required Pin Signal description
No. setting
1 Open 1
12
2 Open 2
11
3 Closed 3
10
4 Closed 4
9
5 Open 5
8
6 Open 6
7

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–19
Installing the battery strings GSM-208-423
Installing the battery strings

Introduction to
battery string
installation
For safety reasons, the battery strings are supplied separately from the ancillary
enclosure. The monoblocs should be installed and connected as soon possible
after the enclosure is secured in its permanent location.
One, two, or three battery strings can be installed in the ancillary enclosure, one
string per shelf. Each string comprises four 12 V monoblocs, connected in series
to produce a –48 V dc output. The design of the shelves in the ancillary
enclosure enables monoblocs from different manufacturers to be installed.
Figure 5-13 shows the shelf arrangement in the ancillary enclosure.
BATTERY MANAGEMENT
MODULE
SHELF FOR STRING 3
SHELF FOR STRING 2
SHELF FOR STRING 1
AC SUPPLY
ISOLATOR SWITCH
HEATER
Figure 5-13 Empty ancillary enclosure

Inst. 5–20 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Installing the battery strings
Battery
installation
safety
precautions
Observe the following safety precautions when installing the monoblocs:
WARNING Ensure the battery circuit breakers BATTERY 1, BATTERY

2 and BATTERY 3 are set to the OFF position.
S Use insulated tools when connecting monobloc terminals together, and

when connecting battery strings to the circuit breakers.
S Remove jewellery and watches before starting to install the monoblocs.
S Install the battery strings in numbered order, starting with string 1 on the
bottom shelf.
S Do not use naked flames near the monoblocs.
S The battery cables and monobloc terminals are colour coded:
BLUE cables on the left side of the enclosure are negative (–) and
must only be connected to the blue (–) terminal of monobloc 4 on
each shelf (see Figure 5-16).
BLACK cables on the right side of the enclosure are positive (+) and
must only be connected to the red (+) terminal of monobloc 1 on
each shelf.
S Do not remove the insulated boot from each battery cable termination until
immediately before connecting the cable to the monobloc.
S Do not leave exposed cables loose in the enclosure.
S If fewer than three battery strings are to be installed, ensure that the
cables to the unused string(s) are insulated from the enclosure and each
other by fitting the insulating boots provided.
WARNING The ancillary enclosure has a positive earth chassis.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–21
Procedure for
installing the
monoblocs
The procedure for installing string 1 in the bottom shelf is given below. String 2
and string 3 are installed in exactly the same manner.
Connect the thermal probe cable (taken from the main enclosure) between J4
on the BMM and the monobloc 1 positive terminal on shelf 2 (or shelf 1,
depending on how many strings are installed (see Figure 5-16)).
WARNING Observe the safety precautions given in the previous
section. There is a danger of explosion if the monoblocs
are installed incorrectly.
1. Remove the bottom shelf retaining bracket mounted on the left side of the
enclosure by undoing the two retaining screws (see Figure 5-14). Pull the
shelf forward until it reaches the shelf stop.
SHELF
SHELF RETAINING BRACKET
Figure 5-14 Enclosure detail showing retaining bracket
2. Position the backstop bracket to the rear of the shelf, according to the type
of monobloc being installed (see Figure 5-15). Secure the backstop
bracket in position by tightening the three M6 bolts.
HAWKER SBS C11 GNB MARATHON HAWKER CHLORIDE YUASA INDEPENDENCE

POWERSAFE
Figure 5-15 Backstop bracket positions for different monobloc types

Inst. 5–22 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Installing the battery strings
3. If Hawker monoblocs are being installed, fit the supplied M8 to M6

adapters on the monobloc terminals.
4. Lift monobloc 1 and then monobloc 4 (see Figure 5-16) into position on
the outer sides of the shelf. Locate the two supplied M8 studded bars into
the shelf inserts along the inner sides of the monoblocs and fasten
securely.
WARNING Each monobloc weighs at least 30 kg. Handle with care

and observe the correct safety precautions for lifting heavy
objects.
5. Install and secure the remaining two monoblocs.

6. Mount the supplied plastic bars over each pair of monoblocs and secure
them to the studded bars using the nuts and washers provided.
7. Push the shelf back into position and refit the shelf retaining bracket.
8. Apply grease (supplied) to the terminals of each monobloc.
9. Connect the supplied copper link bars between the monobloc terminals
(see Figure 5-16). Six of the eight voltage sense cables are already
connected to the link bars.
Note that the terminals on the Yuasa monoblocs connect using the inner
screw holes on the link bars, whereas the terminals on the monoblocs
from the other manufacturers connect using the outer screw holes.
10. Connect the –48 V (blue) cable and the loose left-hand voltage sense
cable to the negative terminal of monobloc 4.
11. Connect the 0 V (black) cable and the loose right-hand voltage sense
cable to the positive terminal of monobloc 1.
12. Tighten all terminal bolts to the correct torque (see Table 5-3) and then fit
the terminal protective covers.
Table 5-3 Monobloc terminal torque settings

Monobloc type Torque setting
Hawker SBS C11 5 Nm
Hawker Chloride Powersafe 4 Nm
GNB Marathon 11.3 Nm
Yuasa Independence 4 Nm
The ancillary enclosure is now ready for commissioning (see the appropriate
section of Chapter 6).

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 5–23
–48 V 0V
(BLUE) (BLACK)
THERMAL PROBE
CONNECTS HERE
IF 2 OR 3 STRINGS
STRING 3 ARE INSTALLED
LINK BAR
–48 V 0V CONNECTIONS
(BLUE) (BLACK)

HAWKER
HAWKER CHLORIDE
GNB
STRING 2
YUASA
–48 V 0V
(BLUE) (BLACK)

THERMAL PROBE
CONNECTS HERE
IF ONLY 1 STRING
IS INSTALLED
STRING 1
Figure 5-16 Monobloc arrangement in the ancillary enclosure

Inst. 5–24 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Chapter 6
Horizonmacro interoperability

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A i
GSM-208-423

ii 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423
Chapter 6

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A iii
GSM-208-423

iv 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Introduction to interoperability
Introduction to interoperability
Mixed product
sites
This chapter describes how the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor can be used in
conjunction with other Motorola BTS products.
Different Motorola product types can be collocated at the same physical site
without restriction, provided they are configured as logically separate
installations, and in accordance with the normal product engineering rules.
When mixed product types are installed at the same logical site, a number of
technical issues arise that restrict the hardware that can be configured, and the
way it is interfaced. This chapter explains which product types can be mixed in
this way, and how they are interfaced.
NOTE This chapter only applies to the Horizonmacro GSM/
EGSM900 and DCS1800 BTS variants.
GSM850 and PCS1900 Horizonmacro BTS variants
cannot be mixed with other Motorola BTS types.
Architectural
constraints
To enable different product types to be used at the same logical site, one
product type is chosen as master, which is connected to the extender equipment
so that the two product types can function as a single, logical BTS. This
approach is viable when the product types to be interfaced have similar
architectures.
Motorola BTS product types that can be interfaced for collocation at a single
logical site are therefore restricted to those shown in Table 6-1 below.
Table 6-1 BTS compatibility for collocation at a single logical site

Master Extender
InCell M-Cell2 M-Cell6 Horizonmacro
InCell Discontinued No No No
M-Cell2 No Yes* Yes* No
M-Cell6 No No Yes* Yes
Horizonmacro No No Yes* Yes
* Check for availability before ordering
Indoor and outdoor cabinets can be mixed, but different mechanical
arrangements may be required for routeing the inter-cabinet cabling.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 6–1
BTS architectures and interoperability GSM-208-423
BTS architectures and interoperability
M-Cell6 and
Horizonmacro
architectures
Figure 6-1 represents the high level architecture of the M-Cell6 and
Horizonmacro BTSs. Both systems provide an optical interface for connection to
remote transceivers, which in a normal installation would be used to connect to
transceivers of the same product type.
RF coupling RF coupling
CTU TCU
FMUX Fibre optic links FMUX FOX

to remote radios
MCUF FMUX
MCU
Network termination Network termination

functions functions
Horizonmacro M-Cell6
Figure 6-1 High level architecture of M-Cell6 and Horizonmacro BTSs
However, since the optical interface is identical for both products, it can be used
to link an M-Cell6 to Horizonmacro transceivers, or a Horizonmacro to M-Cell6
transceivers. The principle is shown in Figure 6-2.

Inst. 6–2 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 BTS architectures and interoperability
Cross connections
RF coupling RF coupling
(see text)
CTU TCU
Fibre optic link

FMUX FOX
FMUX
MCU
Network termination
functions
Abis Interface
Horizonmacro (Extender) M-Cell6 (Master)
Figure 6-2 Example of interfacing different products at a single logical site
When two product types are interfaced in this way, the control function for the
entire BTS is implemented by the master product. In Figure 6-2, this is the
M-Cell6. In practice, either BTS can be configured as master according to the
needs of the network concerned.
Example mixed
site
A multi-cabinet mixed site can typically be achieved in several ways. Figure 6-3
shows the alternatives layouts for a four cabinet mixed BTS site
Layout1 Horizonmacro Horizonmacro Horizonmacro M-Cell6
Layout2 Horizonmacro Horizonmacro M-Cell6 M-Cell6
Layout3 Horizonmacro M-Cell6 M-Cell6 M-Cell6
Figure 6-3 Example of alternative layouts for a 4-cabinet mixed BTS site

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 6–3
Technical
issues
When mixing different BTS types, the interface may be required to resolve
some or all of the following issues, depending on the site configuration:
S The interface must deliver both Rx and Rxdiv (receive diversity) signals to
each transceiver.
S The interface must not change the uplink (receive) signal level delivered to
any transceiver.
S The interface must ensure that in the mixed BTS configuration, RF
combiners remain correctly loaded.
Receive path
When a cell is wholly configured within one cabinet, there is no requirement to
connect the uplink or downlink RF signals between the master and extender
cabinets. The only interface between the cabinets in this type of mixed BTS
configuration is therefore at digital level, between FMUXs via the fibre optic link.
When a cell is split between two cabinets, the uplink signals must be connected
between the cabinets since both Rx and Rxdiv signals are required at each
transceiver. In this situation the downlink signal may or may not require
connection between cabinets, depending on the site configuration. The uplink
connectivity requirements are shown in Figure 6-4 (DCS1800) and Figure 6-5
(GSM900).

Inst. 6–4 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
DCS1800
Refer to Figure 6-4. In the Horizonmacro cabinet, low noise amplification in the
SURF module first boosts the Rx signal by +13 dB. Separate Rx outputs from
the SURF are then discretely routed to relevant transceivers in the master
cabinet, and to the LNA in the extender cabinet. Since the LNA boosts the Rx
signal by a further +13 dB, a 13 dB attenuator is placed in the signal path to
offset this additional signal gain, which would otherwise result in signal levels
outside the permitted range for the transceivers.
The Rxdiv signal is similarly given a +13 dB boost by the LNA in the extender
cabinet. Separate Rxdiv outputs from the LNA are then discretely routed to
relevant receivers in the extender cabinet, and to the SURF module in the
master cabinet. Since the SURF provides a further +13 dB boost, a 13 dB
attenuator is again placed in the signal path to offset this additional gain.
In this way, the arrangement shown in Figure 6-4 delivers Rx and Rxdiv signals
to the uplink path in both cabinets, at the required signal level.
Cell A Cell B Cell C
Rx Rxdiv Rx Rxdiv Rx Rxdiv
Duplexer Duplexer
Rxdiv
+13 dB SURF –13 dB LNA +13 dB
–13 dB Rx
Rx Rxdiv Rx Rxdiv
CTU TCU
FMUX FMUX FOX

Fibre
optic
link
MCU
To NIU and Abis

Interface
Figure 6-4 Functional overview of the receive path for a DCS1800 split cell
configuration

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 6–5
GSM900
Refer to Figure 6-5. In GSM900 products, RF gain for the IADU and SURF is
configurable. A split cell configuration is therefore dealt with in the same way as
that described for DCS1800, except that the 13 dB attennuators are not
required. Instead, the required signal level is maintained by using appropriate
gain settings for the IADU and SURF.
Cell A Cell B Cell C
Rx Rxdiv Rx Rxdiv Rx Rxdiv
Duplexer Duplexer
Rxdiv
IADU DLNB
SURF
* *
Rx
Rx Rxdiv Rx Rxdiv
CTU TCU
FMUX FMUX FOX

Fibre
optic
link
MCU
To NIU and Abis

Interface
* Configurable gain
Figure 6-5 Functional overview of the receive path for a GSM900 split cell
configuration

Inst. 6–6 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Transmit path
When configuring the downlink paths for a cell using three carriers or more, it
may be necessary to provide additional external RF load(s) for the combiners.
M-Cell6 combining
Figure 6-6 illustrates a typical M-Cell6 combining arrangement for a 4-carrier
cell. Carriers 1 and 2 are combined in a hybrid combiner (HCOMB) module. The
output from this module provides one of the three inputs to the 3IP CBF. The
HCOMB is equipped with an internal RF load, and is therefore self–contained.
The 3IP CBF requires one RF load for each of the two hybrids it contains, but is
equipped with only a single internal RF load. An additional load is therefore
provided for this purpose on the HCOMB casing.
Duplexer
External
load 3IP CBF
HCOMB Hybrid
Load Load
Hybrid Hybrid
Carrier 1 Carrier 2 Carrier 3 Carrier 4

One carrier from each of four transceivers
Figure 6-6 Typical M-Cell6 arrangement for combining four carriers

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 6–7
Horizonmacro combining
A similar arrangement is used in the Horizonmacro, which uses a Hybrid
Combiner Unit (HCU) and Dual stage Duplexed combining Filter (DDF), as
shown in Figure 6-7. The DDF has three input ports together with two internal
RF loads, and therefore does not require the addition of any external load.
Duplexer
Load
DDF
HCU Hybrid
Load Load
Hybrid Hybrid
Carrier 1 Carrier 2 Carrier 3 Carrier 4

One carrier from each of four transceivers
Figure 6-7 Typical Horizonmacro arrangement for combining four carriers

Inst. 6–8 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Mixed equipment combining

When the two different product types are interfaced, a situation can arise where
a 3IP CBF is connected to an HCU, as shown in Figure 6-8. In this configuration
it is therefore necessary to provide an additional external RF load for this 3IP
CBF. The example in Figure 6-8 shows downlink connections for a 4/4/4
configuration using mixed BTS types.
Sector3 Sector2 Sector1
2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A
HCU 2 DDF HCU 1

Load
3IP CBF 2 3IP CBF 1
HCOMB
11 10 9 8 7 6 Load 5 4 3 2 1 0
Figure 6-8 Downlink configuration for a 4/4/4 mixed cabinet installation
Inputs for the DDF are carriers 8 and 9, together with the output of HCU2. The
DDF contains two RF loads and is therefore self-contained. Inputs to 3IP CBF1
are carriers 0 and 1, together with the combined output of HCOMB. 3IP CBF1
contains a single load and is therefore connected to the external load mounted
on HCOMB. Inputs for 3IP CBF2 are carriers 4 and 5, together with the output of
HCU1, from the master cabinet. 3IP CBF2 contains a single load and therefore
requires the addition of an external 50 ohm load, as shown.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 6–9
M-Cell6 and
Horizonmacro
hardware
equivalents
Table 6-2 shows the RF hardware equivalents for the Horizonmacro and M-Cell6
BTSs.
Table 6-2 RF hardware equivalents for Horizonmacro/M-Cell6

Horizonmacro M-Cell 900 M-Cell 1800
900/1800
DCF CBF + duplexer Hybrid + duplexer
DDF 3- input CBF* + 2 x hybrid + dup/BPF
duplexer
HCU Hybrid Hybrid
Feedthrough plate Non-hybrid (no equivalent)
TDF TBF + duplexer 2 x dup/BPF
CCB master CCB master CCB master
CCB extender CCB extender CCB extender
SURF 3 x DLNB + IADU 3 x LNA
Split Sector Cable Rx Extender (no equivalent)
* 3-input CBF contains only one internal 50 ohm load.
Further
configuration
information
Provided the functional guidelines described in this chapter are followed, the
steps involved in upgrading an existing site with mixed equipment are
essentially the same as with a conventional upgrade:
S Determine the number of additional carriers required in the upgraded site.
S Based on the required site configuration (for example, 4/4/4), use the
functional guidelines provided in this chapter to decide the most effective
hardware configuration for the additional cabinet(s).
S Special upgrade kits are available for specified configurations.
S Configuration diagrams and product ordering help are available from the
Motorola local office.

Inst. 6–10 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Example
configurations
Configuration diagrams provided by the Motorola local office show top of rack
cable and antenna connections for mixed product configurations, together with
details of external RF loads required. Figure 6-9, Figure 6-10 and Figure 6-11
are examples of the type of diagram that can be provided.
GSM900 2/2/2 configuration using two cabinets

In this configuration, there are no split cells, and therefore no uplink/downlink
connections between the cabinets. The CBFs are 2-input devices, consequently
no external RF loads are required.
Sector 3 Sector 2 Sector 1
2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A
EXT
BLANK DCF BLANK

CBF BLANK CBF
Figure 6-9 GSM900 mixed Horizonmacro / M-Cell6 2/2/2 configuration using

two cabinets

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 6–11
GSM900 5/5 configuration using two cabinets

In this configuration, there are no split cells, and therefore no uplink or downlink
connections between the cabinets. In the M-Cell6 cabinet, both 3IP CBFs are
configured with external loads provided by the NON HYB. In the Horizonmacro,
one DDF has two direct RF inputs, plus a third input via the FEEDTHRU. The
second DDF has two RF inputs, one direct and one via the FEEDTHRU. This
arrangement facilitates using the transceivers in sequence. The two 50 ohm
loads are required to terminate the unused DDF/3IP CBF input ports.
Sector 2 Sector 1
2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A
EXT
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
DDF2 FEEDTHRU DDF1
3IP CBF2 NON-HYB 3IP CBF1
50 ohm loads
Figure 6-10 GSM900 mixed Horizonmacro / M-Cell6 5/5 configuration using

two cabinets

Inst. 6–12 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
DCS1800 4/4/4 configuration using two cabinets

In this configuration, sector 2 is split between the cabinets. The uplink Rx and
Rxdiv signals for sector 2 are therefore connected between the BTS types to
ensure the availability of both signals in both cabinets. In the M-Cell6 cabinet,
2-input hybrids are used for combining, each configured with a discrete external
load.
Sector 3 Sector 2 Sector 1
2B 1B 0B 2A 1A 0A B A
EXT
DCF DCF DCF HYB DUP HYB DUP HYB DUP
Figure 6-11 DCS1800 Mixed Horizonmacro / M-Cell6 4/4/4 configuration using

two cabinets

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 6–13
Special
hardware
A range of cables is available for uplink, downlink and fibre optic connections,
together with the uplink attennuators described earlier. Contact the Motorola
local office for further details.
In addition, the mounting plate and snap-in multi cable gland shown in
Figure 6-12 are required when expanding M-Cell6 outdoor sites with
Horizonmacro cabinets. In this type of configuration, the Horizonmacro
equipment is located to the left of the M-Cell6 cabinets.
ENVIRONMENTAL
GASKET
CABLE GLAND ENTRY PORT

ACCEPTS SNAP-IN MULTI CABLE
GLAND
Figure 6-12 Special cable gland plate required for mixed M-Cell6 and
Horizonmacro installations
The mounting plate is located as shown in Figure 6-13 in place of the original
blanking plate fitted to the M-Cell6.
MULTI CABLE
GLAND
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
M-Cell6 CABINETS
Figure 6-13 Location of the snap-in multi cable gland and mounting plate in the
M-Cell6

Inst. 6–14 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Chapter 7
Site commissioning

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A i
GSM-208-423

ii 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423
Chapter 7

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A iii
GSM-208-423

iv 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Commissioning overview and test equipment
Commissioning overview and test equipment
Overview of
commissioning
This chapter provides information required for the commissioning of the
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure and its associated indoor cabinet(s).
NOTE Some equipment at the site may not be produced by
Motorola (antennas, for example). Refer to site-specific
documentation and the non-Motorola vendor instructions.
All site preparation and equipment installation in the previous chapters must be
completed before commissioning. Commissioning consists of the following:
S Pre-power up checks.
S Powering up the enclosure.
S Testing the HMS and the heater.
S Powering up the cabinet.
PC to MCUF
cable pin
connections
Figure 7-1 shows the pin connections for the PC to MCUF test cable. These are
standard null modem pin connections. There is also a TTY adapter, to attach to
the cable, for CTU use, Motorola part number 58C86540N01.
PIN NUMBER PIN NUMBER
1 4
6 6
4 1
3 2
2 3
5 5
8 7
7 8
9 9
4 m LONG SCREENED CABLE
TO PC COMMUNICATIONS PORT TO MCUF TTY PORT

9-WAY D-TYPE FEMALE 9-WAY D-TYPE MALE
Figure 7-1 9-way to 9-way PC to MCUF cable pin connections

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 7–1
Commissioning overview and test equipment GSM-208-423
Test equipment
Table 7-1 provides details of the test equipment required to perform the
commissioning procedures in this chapter.
Table 7-1 Test equipment required for commissioning

Quantity Description Comments
1 IBM compatible 486 DX2 or The basic requirements are:
DX4 portable Personal TFT colour screen.
Computer (PC)
170 Mbyte hard drive
(minimum).
Minimum 4 Mbyte RAM or
recommended 8 Mbyte.
3.5 inch floppy drive.
Serial port.
CD-ROM drive (recommended)
PCMCIA (Type 2) compatible
slot.
Windows NT loaded.
Battery power.
1 Commercial terminal emulator PC PLUS or similar software.
software
1 Digital multimeter (must be Hewlett Packard E2378A or
sensitive enough to measure equivalent.
0.1 ohms)
1 ESD protection kit
1 9-way female D-type to 9-way For PC to MCUF.
male D-type Pin connections shown in
Figure 7-1.
1 PAT tester Insulation and earth tester.
1 SVLN1384 test adapter For testing the HMS units.

Inst. 7–2 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Pre-power up checks
Pre-power up checks
Overview of
pre-power up
checks
WARNING The power system checks provided in this section must be
performed before powering up the equipment.
This section contains procedures for testing the power system prior to applying
power to the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure and associated indoor
cabinets.
WARNING Up to 230 V ac is present within the enclosure when the

enclosure is connected directly to an ac power supply.
Earth straps are not to be worn during the commissioning
of the ac and dc power system. Watches and other
jewellery should be removed.
Only insulated tools should be used.
CAUTION This equipment contains CMOS devices and is vulnerable

to static discharge. Although the damage may not be
immediately apparent, CMOS devices may be damaged in
the long term due to mis-handling causing barrier
breakdown.
The approved earth strap (high impedance) must be worn
at all times when adjusting or handling the processor
cards (but see WARNING above, regarding use of earth
straps).
If the cabinet door is kept open for long periods of time
during commissioning, an alternative method of cooling
must be provided to avoid damage to the equipment
through overheating.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 7–3
Pre-power up checks GSM-208-423
Visual
inspection
Inspect the installation for damage in accordance with BS 7671 (16th Edition
<Section 712>) or the IEC 364 equivalent.
WARNING If damage is discovered during the visual inspection, the

commissioning must not proceed further until the damage
has been inspected and rectified by the manufacturers or
their representatives.
Enclosure exterior
Examine the exterior of the enclosure for structural, paint or mechanical damage
and report any damage to Motorola.
Enclosure interior
Examine the interior of the enclosure, including the two Horizonmacro indoor
cabinets, for structural, paint or mechanical damage and report any damage to
Motorola.
Request for
connection
Ensure that all correct Request for connection and Completion and
inspection form certificates have been sent to the local electricity supply board.
NOTE Samples of a typical Request for connection and a
Completion and inspection form are shown in Sample
form 1 and Sample form 2 on the following pages.
Apply conductive non-oxidizing grease to the earth mat connection on the earth
busbar if an earth mat connection is used.

Inst. 7–4 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Sample form 1: Request for connection
XXXXXXXXXX ELECTRIC
REQUEST FOR A CONNECTION OF A
CUSTOMER’S INSTALLATION
The electrical installation at the following address will be ready for connection
on (date) ......................................................................................................................................
NOTE : At least 4 full working days’ notice is required.
Address ......................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................ Telephone No. ...................................
DETAILS OF INSTALLATION
The installation to be connected is :
tick as appropriate
A completely new installation An alteration A rewire
TYPE OF EQUIPMENT CONNECTED LOAD (kW)

Cooker
Water heater
Storage radiators
Other list below
METHOD OF EARTHING tick as appropriate NO OF PHASES
PME 1
Cable Sheath 3
RCD Other Give Details
Other Give Details
DECLARATION
The electrical installation, summarised above, complies with the current edition of the Regulations for Electrical
Installations published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers and is now ready for connection to xxxxxxxxx
Electric’s supply network.
It is understood that xxxxxxxxxx Electric will carry out tests, required by law, prior to connection, but these tests
will NOT confirm that the installation complies with the IEE Wiring Regulations, NOR will its connection imply
that it is approved by xxxxxxxxxx Electric in any way.
Electrical Installer’s Name ............................................................................................................
Address ........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................... Telephone No. .................................
Signed ................................................................................ Date ...............................................

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 7–5
PARTICULARS OF THE INSTALLATION

(Delete or complete items as appropriate)
Type of Installation New/alteration/addition/to existing installation
Type of earthing (312–03): TN–C TN–S TN–C–S TT IT

(Indicate in the box)
Earth Electrode Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ohms
Method of Measurement .............................................
Type (542–02–01) and Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Characteristics of the supply at the origin of the installation ( 313–01 ):
Nominal voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . volts

Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hz ...... Number of phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ascertained determined
by by measured
enquiry calculation
Prospective short–circuit current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kA
Earth fault loop impedance (Ze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ohms

Maximum demand . . . . . . . . . . A per phase
Overcurrent protective device – Type BS ........................ Rating . . . . . . . . A
Main switch or circuit–breaker (460–01–02): Type BS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rating . . . . . . . . A No of poles . . . . .
(if an r.c.d., rated residual operating current I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mA.)
Method of protection against indirect contact:
1. Earthed equipotential bonding and automatic disconnection of supply
or
2. Other (Describe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main equipotential bonding conductors (413–02–01/02, 547–02–01): Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm2
schedule of Test Results: Continuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pages
Details of departures (if any) from the Wiring Regulations (120–04, 120–05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comments on existing installation, where applicable (743–01–01): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Inst. 7–6 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Sample form 2: Completion and inspection form
FORMS OF COMPLETION AND INSPECTION CERTIFICATE

(as prescribed in the IEE Regulations for Electrical Installations)
DETAILS OF THE INSTALLATION
Client:
Address: (1.) (see Notes overleaf)
DESIGN
I/We being the person(s) responsible (as indicated by my/our signatures below) for the Design of the electrical installation, particulars of which
are described on Page 3 of this form CERTIFY that the said work for which I/we have been responsible is to the best of my/our knowledge and
belief in accordance with the Regulations for Electrical Installations published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers, 16th Edition, amended
to (3.) (date . . . . . . . . .) except for the departures, if any, stated in this Certificate.
The extent of liability of the signatory is limited to the work described above as the subject of this Certificate.
For the DESIGN of the installation:
Name (In block Letters): Position:
for and on behalf of:
Address:
(2.) Signature: (3.) Date
CONSTRUCTION
I / We being the person(s) responsible ( as indicated by my/our signatures below ) for the Construction of the electrical installation, particulars of
which are described on Page 3 of this form CERTIFY that the said work for which I/we have been responsible is to the best of my/our knowledge
and belief in accordance with the Regulations for Electrical Installations published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers, 16th Edition,
amended to (3.) (date . . . . . . . . .) except for the departures, if any, stated in this Certificate.
For the CONSTRUCTION of the installation:
Address:

INSPECTION AND TEST
I / We being the person(s) responsible ( as indicated by my / our signatures below ) for the Inspection and Test of the electrical installation,
particulars of which are described on Page 3 of this form CERTIFY that the said work for which I/we have been responsible is to the best of my/
our knowledge and belief in accordance with the Regulations for Electrical Installations published by the Institution of Electrical Engineers, 16th
Edition, amended to (3.) (date . . . . . . . . .) except for the departures, if any, stated in this Certificate.
For the INSPECTION AND TEST of the installation:
Address:
I RECOMMEND that this installation be further inspected and tested after an interval of not more than . . . . years (5.)

(6) page 1 of . . . . pages

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 7–7
1. This document is intended for the initial certification of a new installation or of an alteration or addition to
an existing installation and of an inspection.
2. The signatures appended are those of the persons authorised by the companies executing the work of
design, construction and inspection and testing respectively. A signatory authorised to certify more than
one category of work shall sign in each of the appropriate places.
3. Dates to be inserted.
4. Where particulars of the installation recorded herein constitute a sufficient schedule for the purpose of
Regulation 514–09–01 further drawings / schedules need not be provided. For other installations the
additional drawings/schedules listed below apply.
5. Insert here the time interval recommended between periodic inspections. Regard should be paid to
relevant National or Local legislation and reference should be made to chapter 13.
6. The page numbers of each sheet should be indicated together with the total number of sheets involved.
(4) Schedule of additional records.
(6) page 2 of . . . . pages

Inst. 7–8 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Earth continuity
check
Ensure an earth continuity check has been performed on appropriate equipment
if required. Use the digital multimeter to check that the resistance of the test
equipment leads is less than 0.05 ohms.
Main equipment earths

Connect the PAT tester to the enclosure principal ground bar (PGB) and to the
following earth points:
S Antenna feeders.
S AC supply input earth.
– The local electricity board termination point.
– AC terminal box earth terminal block.
– AC supply isolator.
NOTE The switched isolator will not be connected to earth if it is
a double insulated device and will therefore not need to be
tested.
S Battery compartment chassis.

S Enclosure chassis.
S Horizonmacro indoor cabinet chassis.
S Power distribution unit chassis.
S Doors and hood.
S Rack members.
Check that the measured resistance is less than 0.1 ohms with the tester
connected to a conductive surface (bare metal) at extreme ends of the earth
cables.
On completion of each earth check, apply conductive non-oxidizing grease to
the earth connections on the earth busbar.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 7–9
AC power
system
insulation
check
Ensure an insulation check has been performed on all ac power cables which
supply the site up to the ac input to the cabinet. Testing must be carried out in
accordance with the BS 7671, 16th Edition (section 713-04–01 to 713-04-06), or
IEC 364 equivalent, at the voltage levels shown in Table 7-2, using an approved
insulation tester. Check that the resistance at each point is as shown in
Table 7-2.
Table 7-2 BS7671 (16th edition) Table 71A (part of)

Parameter AC test voltage Minimum insulation
(volts) (megaohms)
Up to and including 500 V 500 0.5
When the test has been completed, sign the completion and inspection
certificate (see Sample form 2).

Inst. 7–10 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Powering up the enclosure
Powering up the enclosure

Prerequisites
This procedure assumes all previous procedures have been completed.
AC power up
procedure
The following procedure should be carried out to power up the Horizonmacro 12
carrier outdoor enclosure, prior to applying dc power to the indoor cabinets.
1. Ensure all circuit breakers on the ac and dc power distribution units are
switched to OFF. Figure 7-2 shows the position of circuit breakers and
indicators on the ac PDU.
AC ISOLATION SWITCH RECT 4 RECT 3 RECT 2 RECT 1 RECT 0 HEATERHEATER

CB1 CB3/2 CB3/1 CB2/1 CB1/2 CB1/1 INT AUX CB2/4
CB2/2 CB2/3
HEATER AUX
1 2 3
Figure 7-2 AC power distribution unit

2. Switch the 4-pole circuit breaker (AC ISOLATION SWITCH) to ON.
3. Switch ON the required single pole circuit breakers (RECT 0 to RECT 4) to
apply ac input power to the rectifier modules.
NOTE The Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure may
contain between two and five rectifier modules, depending
on redundancy requirements and the number of indoor
cabinets fitted.
4. Check the phase indicators are illuminated on the front panel of the ac
distribution unit.
NOTE On 3-phase systems, the equipment will operate even if
one phase is lost.
5. Check that the yellow I/P HEALTHY and green O/P HEALTHY LEDs are
illuminated on the front panels of the rectifiers.
6. Switch ON the single pole circuit breaker (HEATER INT) to apply ac input
power to the thermostatically controlled heater.
7. Switch ON the AUXILIARIES CB2/4 circuit breaker to apply power to the
AUX 1 and AUX 2 sockets.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 7–11
Powering up the enclosure GSM-208-423
DC power up
procedure
Ensure the ac power up procedure has been completed before carrying out the
following procedure to apply dc power to the equipment. Figure 7-3 shows a
detailed view of the dc distribution unit front panel.

FS1 T2AH FS2 T2AH
LVD A LVD B
FS3 T2AH FS4 T2AH
FS5 T2AH FS6 T2AH
Figure 7-3 DC distribution unit front panel
1. Switch ON the HMS 0 and HMS 1 single pole circuit breakers to apply
power to the two door-mounted HMS units.
2. Switch ON either the BTS 0 single pole circuit breaker or both BTS 0 and
BTS 1, depending on whether one or two indoor BTSs have been
installed.
3. If customer communications equipment has been installed in PDU A and
connected to the –48 V dc distribution panel, switch ON the appropriate
COM circuit breaker(s) to supply power to the sockets on the distribution
panel.
4. Switch ON the isolator switch on the top of the backup battery
compartment to connect the backup batteries to the dc circuit.
The enclosure power up sequence is now complete and the indoor cabinet(s)
can now be powered up.

Inst. 7–12 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Testing the HMS units and the heater
Testing the HMS units and the heater
Prerequisites
These procedures assume that ac power has been applied to the enclosure, the
ac and dc power up procedures have been carried out and the HMS units and
heater are switched on.
A test adapter (available from Rittal) is required for testing that the HMS units
conform to the manufacturer’s specifications.
HMS unit test

procedure
The procedure for testing an HMS unit using the test adapter is as follows:
1. Connect the 9 pin D-type plug on the adapter to the D-type socket on the
top panel of the HMS unit (next to the power and signal connector). The
display panel on the test adapter indicates the current internal
temperature.
2. Initiate test mode by pressing the Test button. The display panel changes
to show “09” and the LEDs on the Enter and ↑ buttons flash.
3. To run manual tests, press the ↑ button. Four temperature tests (43 °C,
45 °C, 57 °C and 60 °C) can be run consecutively by pressing the ↑
button. When all tests have been completed, exit by pressing Enter or
restart the tests by pressing ↑.
The significance of the above temperatures is as follows:
43 °C: Speed of the internal fans increases from 45%.
45 °C: External fans switch on and run at 35%.
57 °C: Internal fan speeds reach 100%.
60 °C: External fan speeds reach 100%.
4. Unplug the test adapter when the tests are completed. Reset the HMS by
switching off the HMS 0 or HMS 1 circuit breaker (as appropriate) and then
switching on again.
5. Connect the test adapter to the other HMS unit and repeat the test
procedure.
If malfunctions are detected during testing, error codes in the range 1 to 9 are
displayed in sequence on the test adapter. The HMS unit must be replaced if
any error codes are displayed (see Chapter 3 of Maintenance Information:
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor (GSM-208-523) for the replacement
procedure).
Testing the
heater
Test the heater by pressing the heater test button on the front of the ac
distribution unit while holding out a hand in front of the heater grille. Release the
test button as soon as warm air is felt coming from the heater.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 7–13
Powering up the Horizonmacro cabinets GSM-208-423
Powering up the Horizonmacro cabinets
Prerequisites
This procedure assumes all previous procedures have been completed.
CAUTION –48V dc PSMs must be fitted to match the supply source
voltage provided by the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure.
Ensure that there is no blockage to ventilation at the base
of the cabinet.
Power up
procedure
without code
load
The following procedure should be carried out to power up the cabinet, with no
code load. This proves the cabinet hardware is capable of operation. The
procedure for cabinet code load is described in the next section.
Relevant components are shown in Figure 7-4.
WARNING Earth straps are not to be worn during the commissioning

of the power system, and watches and other jewellery
should be removed.
Only insulated tools should be used.
The power source must be supplied to the cabinet via a
suitable overcurrent protective device and be isolated from
the BTS cabinet.
Procedure to prepare the cabinet for power up without code load

To prepare the cabinet prior to power up, proceed as follows:
1. Ensure the power source isolator is switched off.
2. Disconnect all E1 lines to the BSC.
3. Remove optional PCMCIA card from MCUF slot, if fitted.
4. Set the switch of each PSM to the OUTPUT DISABLE position.
5. Press and release all push on/push off circuit breaker buttons to the out
(off) position.

Inst. 7–14 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Powering up the Horizonmacro cabinets
Power up of cabinet without code load

To power up the cabinet, proceed as follows:
1. Switch on the external power supply to the cabinet.
2. Turn each PSM switch to the OUTPUT ENABLE position; check that each
PSM has the active (green) LED on and the alarm (red) LED off.
3. Press the CBM circuit breaker button marked FANS. Check that each fan
module is operating correctly. Activate any fan not started by the restart
button (marked either FRONT or REAR) on the fan module.
4. Press the CBM circuit breaker button marked SURF.
NOTE The two CBM circuit breakers marked CCB0 and CCB1
are not used when the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet is
installed inside a 12 carrier outdoor enclosure. Both circuit
breakers should be switched off.
5. Press the CBM circuit breaker button marked BPSM A and (if redundant
BPSM fitted) BPSM B. Check all associated digital module LEDs operate
correctly; green LEDs lit on BPSM, NIU and MCUF, and red LEDs off on
NIU and MCUF.
NOTE Both red and green LEDs are initially lit on the NIU while
the unit conducts a self test. After approximately 20
seconds, the red LED will extinguish, indicating normal
condition.
6. Press the appropriate CBM circuit breaker buttons for the CTUs fitted, and
check that the RADIO STATUS LED for each CTU flashes green.
7. Close the door to ensure correct ventilation.
This completes the power up of the cabinet.
Power down of
cabinet
If the cabinet is not required to remain powered up, power down the cabinet as
follows:
1. Press all circuit breaker buttons to the out (off) position.
2. Switch each PSM to the OUTPUT DISABLE position.
3. Switch off the external power supply to the cabinet.
This completes the power down of the cabinet.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 7–15
Power up
procedure with
code load
The following procedure should be carried out to power up the cabinet, with
code load. The code will be provided either direct from the BSC from E1 line or
from a PCMCIA card installed in the PCMCIA socket of the master MCUF.
Relevant components are shown in Figure 7-4.
CAUTION This procedure should be carried out only by experienced
field personnel.
Procedure to prepare the cabinet for power up with code load

To prepare the cabinet prior to power up, proceed as follows:
1. Make E1 connection to BSC.
2. Insert (optional) PCMCIA card in MCUF PCMCIA socket.
3. Connect the 9 to 9-way cable from the PC serial A port to MCUF TTY port.
4. At the PC start the terminal emulator program.
NOTE It may take the system up to 30 minutes to reach this
point.
5. Change to Level 3 and at the MMI-RAM> prompt type:

CTRL N
7. Press and release all push on/push off circuit breaker buttons to the out
(off) position.

Inst. 7–16 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Power up of cabinet with code load

To power up the cabinet, proceed as follows:
CAUTION When the two LEDs of the CTU, or the MCUF, are
flashing, the boot code is downloading into non-volatile
memory for software upgrade. Power should not be
removed, nor the cabinet reset, until downloading has
been completed, as this will corrupt the non-volatile
memory. If boot code is corrupted, contact the Motorola
Customer Network Resolution Centre (see Contact
information in Chapter 1 of this category), requesting the
boot code restoration procedure and the appropriate boot
code file.
1. Switch on the external power supply to the cabinet.

2. Turn each PSM switch to the OUTPUT ENABLE position; check that each
PSM has the active (green) LED on and the alarm (red) LED off.
3. Press the CBM circuit breaker button marked FANS. Check that each fan
module is operating correctly. Activate any fan not started by the restart
button (marked either FRONT or REAR) on the fan module.
NOTE The two CBM circuit breakers marked CCB0 and CCB1
are not used when the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet is
installed inside a 12 carrier outdoor enclosure. Both circuit
breakers should be switched off.
BPSM fitted) BPSM B. Check all associated digital module LEDs operate
correctly; green LEDs lit on BPSM, NIU and MCUF, and red LEDs off on
NIU and MCUF.
MCUF initialization will commence at power up. A connection to the BSC will be
established and code download will take place. After download the site will be
initialized.
NOTE The NIU module will initially show both red and green
LEDs lit while the unit conducts a self test. When
rebooting due to a code download, the red LED
extinguishes after approximately 50 seconds.
CAUTION If the code is a different version, the non-volatile memory

will be upgraded at this point. Both LEDs will be flashing,
and a warning message will appear on the PC terminal.
Do not power down or reset the cabinet as this will corrupt
the non-volatile memory. If this happens, contact the
boot code file.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 7–17
6. Press the CBM circuit breaker buttons for the appropriate CTUs fitted, and
check that the RADIO STATUS LED for each CTU flashes green.
At this point, after the MCUF has initialized, the CTUs will download code from
the MCUF.
CAUTION If the code is a different version, the non-volatile memory
will be upgraded at this point. Both LEDs will be flashing.
Do not power down or reset the cabinet as this will corrupt
the non-volatile memory. If this happens, contact the
boot code file.
7. Once fully initialized, all CTUs should have RADIO STATUS LED solid
green, and TRANSMIT STATUS LED either off, solid yellow, or flashing
yellow.
8. Disconnect the 9 to 9-way cable from the MCUF TTY port.
9. Close the door to ensure correct ventilation.
This completes the power up of the cabinet.

Inst. 7–18 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Cabinet and
CBM views
Figure 7-4 shows the cabinet components and enlarged view of CBM showing
circuit breaker buttons.
SURF
SIX PSM2
TRANSCEIVERS
PSM1
(CTUs)
PSM0
CTU 5
TWO 2-FAN
UNITS
CTU 0
ONE 4-FAN
UNIT BPSM B
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
MODULE
FANS
BPSM A ig.128.rh
7A
not used SURF BPSMs (A AND B) 6 CTUs (0 TO 5) CTU 0

(CCB0 AND 1) 2A 7A 12 A
Figure 7-4 Diagram of cabinet with expanded view of CBM

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 7–19
Commissioning the ancillary enclosure GSM-208-423
Commissioning the ancillary enclosure
Pre-power up
checks
All relevant installation procedures described in Chapter 5 of this category must
have been carried out before the ancillary enclosure is commissioned. Make the
following pre-power up checks on the equipment:
S Ensure that the AUXILIARIES CB2/4 circuit breaker on the ac distribution
panel in the main enclosure is switched OFF.
S Ensure all BMM circuit breakers are switched OFF.
S Ensure the ac supply isolation switch at the bottom of the ancillary
enclosure is switched OFF.
Power up
sequence
This procedure assumes that the pre-power up checks have been completed.
Proceed as follows to power up the ancillary enclosure:
1. Switch on the AUXILIARIES CB2/4 circuit breaker on the ac distribution
panel in the main enclosure.
2. Switch on the ac supply isolation switch in the ancillary enclosure (turn the
switch 90° clockwise).
3. Switch on the BATTERY 1 to BATTERY 3 circuit breakers, as required. On
the front panel of the BMM, the green HEALTHY LED should illuminate for
each battery string installed in the enclosure.
NOTE A monobloc showing voltage imbalance and its position in

the enclosure is indicated by the relevant red LED being
illuminated on the MONOBLOC FAULT panel and the
HEALTHY LED for that string being unlit.
4. Press the heater test button (to the right of the ac isolator switch) while
holding a hand over the heater grille. Release the button as soon as heat
is felt coming from the heater.
5. Close the enclosure door.
This completes the ancillary enclosure power up procedure.
NOTE After installation of the ancillary enclosure, the monoblocs

should be given a commissioning charge for a period of 16
hours to ensure full capacity before undertaking a
discharge cycle. This allows the monobloc voltages to
equalize, thus preventing any initial erroneous monobloc
fault alarms.

Inst. 7–20 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Commissioning the ancillary enclosure
Power down
sequence
CAUTION If the ancillary enclosure is supplying dc power to the main
enclosure, first ensure that the BTS equipment is powered
down before powering down the ancillary enclosure.
Proceed as follows to power down the ancillary enclosure:

1. Switch all the ancillary enclosure circuit breakers to OFF.
2. Switch OFF the ac supply isolator switch at the bottom of the enclosure
(turn the switch 90° anticlockwise).
3. Isolate the ac supply to the enclosure by switching OFF the AUXILIARIES
CB2/4 circuit breaker on the ac distribution panel in the main enclosure.
This completes the ancillary enclosure power down procedure.
NOTE Minimal battery backup is still available to the BTSs
through the internal battery string in the main enclosure.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 7–21
Commissioning the ancillary enclosure GSM-208-423

Inst. 7–22 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
Chapter 8
Site decommissioning

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A i
GSM-208-423

ii 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423
Chapter 8

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A iii
GSM-208-423

iv 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Overview of decommissioning
Overview of decommissioning
Introduction
This chapter describes how to decommission the Horizonmacro 12 carrier
outdoor and the optional ancillary enclosure. To decommission equipment not
supplied by Motorola, for example E1/T1 links, power supplies and antennas,
refer to the vendor’s instructions.
WARNING Hazardous voltages exist inside the Horizonmacro 12

carrier outdoor enclosure.
Use extreme caution when working on an enclosure with
power applied. Remove all rings, watches and other
jewellery.
Prerequisites
Read Chapter 1 of this installation section before attempting to decommission
the equipment.
Isolate the incoming ac supply before starting decommissioning work.
Outline of the
procedure to
decommission
the equipment
Decommissioning of the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor itself is basically a two
stage process:
1. Decommissioning the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet(s).
2. Decommissioning the enclosure.
For each of the above, the procedure should be recorded using a separate
checklist to check that each action has been completed. Photocopy the
checklists contained in this chapter as often as required; do not write on the
original manual copies.
NOTE For enclosures with two indoor cabinets installed, the
decommissioning procedure for both cabinets is the same.
A separate checklist should be used for each cabinet.
A checklist is also provided for decommissioning the optional ancillary

enclosure.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 8–1
Decommissioning the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet GSM-208-423
Decommissioning the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet
Before starting
to
decommission
the indoor
cabinet
Before starting to decommission a Horizonmacro indoor cabinet ensure that:
S The main ac supply is switched off and that NO power is connected to the
enclosure.
S The backup batteries are isolated or disconnected.
S Sufficient packing cartons are available to pack the decommissioned
equipment.
S Any unused items have been retrieved from storage elsewhere.
Procedure to
decommission
an indoor
cabinet
Follow this procedure to decommission an Horizonmacro indoor cabinet:
Checking and making safe from power source

1. Check the cabinet for signs of damage.
2. Ensure that the enclosure is isolated from the ac supply and the power
cable has been disconnected at source and thus made safe.
3. Ensure the dc supply from the backup batteries is isolated.
4. Disconnect the dc input power cable, from the top of the indoor cabinet.
Disconnecting all external cables

1. Disconnect all cabling from the interface panel on the top of the cabinet.
2. Disconnect all RF cables to antennas or other cabinets from the SURF.
3. If applicable, disconnect fibre optic cables between the main cabinet and
any extension cabinets.
4. Disconnect the earth cable from the interface panel to the enclosure
chassis.
WARNING Stow disconnected cables so that they do not create a
hazard to personnel using the site.
5. If the cables are not to be used again for other equipment, dispose of
safely.

Inst. 8–2 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Decommissioning the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet
Removing the cabinet from the enclosure

1. Ensure that all cables to the cabinet have been disconnected.
2. Stow all internal enclosure cables safely out of the way before starting to
remove the cabinet from the enclosure.
3. Remove the cabinet securing brackets and plates from the enclosure
chassis.
WARNING The cabinet can weigh up to 110 kg if fully equipped.

Handle the cabinet with extreme caution, and in
accordance with local health and safety regulations.
Eyebolts are available for attaching lifting equipment.
4. Carefully remove the cabinet from the enclosure.

NOTE The cabinet may be removed either from the top or the
front of the enclosure simply by reversing the appropriate
installation procedure (see Installing the Horizonmacro
indoor cabinets in Chapter 4). The method used
depends on the customer preference and resources
available.
5. Refit the cabinet securing brackets and plates to the enclosure chassis.
6. Check the cabinet for signs of damage and record details on the checklist.
Repacking the cabinet

1. Carefully pack all bolts, washers and other removed items.
2. Pack the cabinet for storage, transport or safe disposal.
3. If sending equipment back to Motorola, seal the shipping container and
return, as advised, by the Motorola in-country Project Manager.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 8–3
Decommissioning the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet GSM-208-423
Horizonmacro
indoor cabinet
checklist
Copy this sheet and fill in the checklist in Table 8-1.
NAME_______________________________________DA TE_________
SIGNATURE _________________________________
SITE NAME __________________________________
EQUIPMENT TYPE ____________________________
NATIONAL ID ____________________________
Table 8-1 Checklist of completed decommissioning steps

ACTION Yes No N/A
Packing material (including polythene bag) on site
Power cable disconnected
Interface panel cables disconnected
RF cables disconnected
Extension cabinet fibre optic cables disconnected
Earth cable disconnected
All loose cables stowed and secured
Horizonmacro indoor cabinet decommissioned
Enclosure cables stowed safely
Securing brackets and plates removed
Indoor cabinet removed from enclosure
Securing brackets and plates refitted in enclosure
Is cabinet damaged? If yes, detail in comments box
Indoor cabinet packed
COMMENTS

Inst. 8–4 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Decommissioning the enclosure
Decommissioning the enclosure
Before starting
Before starting to decommission the enclosure, ensure that:
S The indoor cabinet(s) have been removed and repacked.
S Suitable lifting equipment is available to lift the enclosure.
S Suitable packing crates and cartons are available to pack the enclosure,
the rectifiers and backup batteries.
Procedure to
decommission
the enclosure
To decommission the enclosure:
1. Check the enclosure and its contents for signs of damage.
2. Remove the backup batteries and repack them. Refit the battery backup
compartment cover.
NOTE If an ancillary enclosure is connected to the main
enclosure, disconnect the cables and remove the cable
conduits before refitting the battery backup compartment
cover (see Decommissioning the ancillary enclosure
later in this chapter).
3. Withdraw all external ac supply, RF, E1/T1, and alarm cables from the
enclosure and store in suitable packaging. Do not remove the enclosure
earth lead until all other cables have been removed.
CAUTION Stow disconnected cables so that they do not constitute a
hazard to personnel using the site.
4. Remove all rectifiers from the enclosure and repack them.

5. If installed, remove customer communications equipment from PDU A and
repack.
6. Close the hood, close and lock the doors and store the key safely.
7. Unbolt the enclosure from the floor and move it to a location where it can
be safely packed into suitable transit packing (see Lifting the enclosure).

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 8–5
Decommissioning the enclosure GSM-208-423
Lifting the
enclosure
The enclosure is fitted with four lifting points, designed to accommodate M16
swivel head eyebolts, built into the front and rear of the enclosure base. If swivel
head eyebolts are used to lift the enclosure, they must be manufactured to CE
conformity, and must have a safe weight load of 710 kg each.
Before attempting to insert the eyebolts, visually check each one for damage. If
any damage is apparent, DO NOT USE.
1. Carefully remove the plastic insert from the M16 threaded lifting point.
2. Insert the eyebolt into the thread, ensuring that no cross-threading occurs.
WARNING The eyebolts must not be overtightened; hand tight is

sufficient. Screw the eyebolt fully into the lifting point so
that no thread is left exposed.
3. Repeat the procedure until all four eyebolts have been correctly fitted.
4. Attach the lifting straps from the crane to the eyebolts and then proceed to
hoist the enclosure into position for repacking.
For continued use of eyebolts, there may be local regulations that govern the
use of lifting equipment and stipulate a test and/or examination regime. If the
eyebolts are to be used, ensure that all such regulations are met.
Remember to remove the eyebolts and refit the plastic inserts when the lifting
operation is complete.

Inst. 8–6 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Decommissioning the enclosure
Enclosure
checklist
NAME_______________________________________DA TE_________
SIGNATURE _________________________________
SITE NAME __________________________________
EQUIPMENT TYPE ____________________________
NATIONAL ID ____________________________
Table 8-2 Checklist of completed enclosure decommissioning steps

ACTION Yes No N/A
Packing material (including polythene bag) on site
Suitable lifting equipment on site
Indoor cabinet(s) removed and packed
Optional equipment (ancillary enclosure for example)
disconnected and cables removed
Securing brackets and plates refitted in enclosure
Is enclosure damaged? If yes, detail in comments box
Backup batteries removed and packed
Backup battery compartment cover refitted
Rectifiers removed and packed
Customer communications equipment removed and
packed
All external cables disconnected and packed
Earth cable disconnected
Enclosure cables stowed safely
Hood and doors closed, locked and keys safely stored
COMMENTS

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 8–7
Decommissioning the ancillary enclosure GSM-208-423
Decommissioning the ancillary enclosure
Before starting
Before starting to decommission the ancillary enclosure, ensure that:
S Suitable lifting equipment is available to lift the enclosure.
S Suitable packing crates and cartons are available to pack the enclosure
and the monoblocs.
Safety
precautions
Observe the following safety precautions when decommissioning the ancillary
enclosure:
S Ensure that all the BATTERY circuit breakers are switched OFF and
remove jewellery and watches before starting to disconnect the
monoblocs.
S Disconnect the 0 V cable before the –48 V cable on each battery string.
S Use insulated tools for disconnecting the monoblocs.
S Each monobloc weighs at least 30 kg. Handle with care and observe the
correct safety precautions for lifting heavy objects.
Procedure to
decommission
the ancillary
enclosure
Proceed as follows to decommission the ancillary enclosure:
Preliminary actions
1. Check the ancillary enclosure and its contents for signs of damage.
2. Switch off all circuit breakers on the BMM and switch off the ac supply
isolator switch at the bottom of the enclosure.
3. Switch off and isolate the main enclosure (assuming this is still installed)
and switch off the battery isolator switch on top of the battery compartment
within the main enclosure.

Inst. 8–8 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Decommissioning the ancillary enclosure
Disconnecting and removing the monoblocs from the ancillary

enclosure
1. Starting with the uppermost string in the ancillary enclosure, first remove
the shelf retaining bracket mounted on the left side of the enclosure by
undoing the two retaining screws. Pull the shelf forward until it reaches the
shelf stop.
2. Where fitted, disconnect the thermal probe from J4 on the BMM and the
appropriate monobloc 1 terminal.
3. Disconnect the black 0 V cable and its voltage sense cable and then the
blue –48 V cable and its voltage sense cable from the outer monoblocs.
Fit an insulating boot over each cable termination as soon as it is
disconnected from the monobloc.
WARNING The 0 V cable must be disconnected before the –48 V

cable on each battery string.
4. Disconnect the copper links between monoblocs 1 to 2, 2 to 3 and 3 to 4.

5. Remove the plastic monobloc securing bars and then remove the inner
two monoblocs from the shelf. Fit the terminal protective covers before
repacking

objects.
6. .Remove the two M8 studded bars and then remove the two outer
monoblocs. Fit the terminal protective covers before repacking the
monoblocs.
Repeat the above procedure for each remaining string in the enclosure.
Disconnecting and removing cables from the main enclosure

1. Disconnect the ac and dc cables, the earth cable and the alarm signal
cable from their connection points in the main enclosure.
2. Remove the split cable conduit plate from the side of the main enclosure.
Repack and place it in the ancillary enclosure.
3. Remove the two internal monoblocs from the upper shelf and then remove
the access panel at the back of the shelf.
4. Undo the retaining screws that secure the flexible cable conduit brackets
to the rear of the access panel.
5. Remove the access panels in the floor of the main enclosure. Feed the
flexible cable conduits down to the base of the enclosure and then pull
them out of the enclosure from the side.
6. Fit a blanking panel over the open access hole at the side of the main
enclosure.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 8–9
Preparing the ancillary enclosure for transport

1. Remove the access panels at the base of the ancillary enclosure. Unbolt
the enclosure from the floor and then refit the access panels.
2. Secure the flexible cable conduits at the side of the ancillary enclosure
using cable ties attached to the overhang on the lid.
3. Close and lock the door and store the key safely.
4. Move the enclosure to a location where it can be safely packed into
suitable transit packing (see Lifting the ancillary enclosure later in this
chapter).
Lifting the
ancillary
enclosure
WARNING Ensure the monoblocs have been removed from the
enclosure. Do not attempt to lift/transport the ancillary
enclosure with the monoblocs still in place.
The ancillary enclosure is fitted with four lifting points, designed to

accommodate M16 swivel head eyebolts, built into the front and rear of the
enclosure base. If swivel head eyebolts are used to lift the enclosure, they must
be manufactured to CE conformity, and must have a safe weight load of 150 kg
each.
Before attempting to insert the eyebolts, visually check each one for damage. If
any damage is apparent, DO NOT USE.
1. Carefully remove the plastic insert from the M16 threaded lifting point.
2. Insert the eyebolt into the thread, ensuring that no cross-threading occurs.
WARNING The eyebolts must not be overtightened; hand tight is

sufficient. Screw the eyebolt fully into the lifting point so
that no thread is left exposed.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 until all four eyebolts have been correctly fitted.
4. Attach the lifting straps from the crane to the eyebolts and then proceed to
hoist the enclosure into position for repacking.
For continued use of eyebolts, there may be local regulations that govern the
use of lifting equipment and stipulate a test and/or examination regime. If the
eyebolts are to be used, ensure that all such regulations are met.
Remember to remove the eyebolts and refit the plastic inserts when the lifting
operation is complete.

Inst. 8–10 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-423 Decommissioning the ancillary enclosure
Restoring the
main enclosure
to operational
state
If the main enclosure is to be used after the ancillary enclosure has been
decommissioned and moved, carry out the following procedure:
1. Check that the external access blanking plate has been refitted and that
all internal access cover plates have been refitted.
2. Refit the previously removed monoblocs.
3. Connect the temperature probe cable (removed from the ancillary
enclosure) between J5 on the AIM and the positive terminal of the right
monobloc on the upper shelf in the battery compartment. Refit the battery
compartment cover.
4. Reset the DIP switches on SW1 and SW2 in the AIM to the default
settings (see Chapter 3 of this category). Refit the AIM module cover.
5. Check that all connections are secure and all access covers are in place
and secure.
The main enclosure can now be powered up using the power up procedure
given previously in Chapter 7 of this category.

29th May 02 68P02902W68-A Inst. 8–11
Ancillary
enclosure
checklist
NAME_______________________________________DA TE_________
SIGNATURE _________________________________
SITE NAME __________________________________
EQUIPMENT TYPE ____________________________
NATIONAL ID ____________________________
Table 8-3 Checklist of completed ancillary enclosure decommissioning steps

ACTION Yes No N/A
Packing material on site
Suitable lifting equipment on site
Is enclosure damaged? If yes, detail in comments box
All cables disconnected from connection points in the
enclosure
All monoblocs removed, terminal covers refitted, and
repacked
Insulating boots fitted to battery cables
All anchor bolts removed
Access panels refitted
Flexible cable conduits removed from enclosure and
secured to ancillary enclosure
Flexible cable conduit feeder plate removed from
enclosure and stowed safely
All cables stowed safely
Door closed, locked and key safely stored
Main enclosure restored to operational state and powered
up
COMMENTS

Inst. 8–12 68P02902W68-A 29th May 02
INTRODUCTION TO GENERAL MAINTENANCE ENCLOSURE FRU INDOOR CABINET FRU ANCILLARY ENCLOSURE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES REPLACEMENT REPLACEMENT FRU REPLACEMENT
CHAPTER 6
SITE VERIFICATION
PROCEDURES
Category 523
Maintenance Information (Maint.)
Maintenance Information: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A i
GSM-208-523

ii 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523
Category 523
Maintenance Information (Maint.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Chapter 1
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 1–1
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 1–1
Chapter 2
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–7

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A iii
GSM-208-523

Chapter 3
FRU list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–1

iv 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523

Chapter 4
FRU list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–1
View of PSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–6

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A v
GSM-208-523

Chapter 5
FRU list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 5–1

vi 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523

Chapter 6

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A vii
GSM-208-523


Chapter 1
Introduction to maintenance

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A i
GSM-208-523

ii 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523
Chapter 1
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 1–1
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 1–1

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A iii
GSM-208-523

iv 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Maintenance information introduction
Maintenance information introduction

Safety
Safety features are built into the equipment to protect against the potentially
lethal hazards that exist. All statements regarding safety within these routine
maintenance procedures must be adhered to when working on the equipment.
WARNING Potentially lethal voltages and high energy sources are
present in the enclosure when the external ac mains
isolator switch is set to the on position and/or batteries are
connected. Remove rings, watches and jewellery before
starting these procedures, and exercise extreme caution
when working on the equipment.
Maintenance procedures on this equipment must only be
carried out by suitably qualified personnel.
Tools
The tools required are those listed in Installation and Configuration:
GSM-204-423 Chapter 1 Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor tool kit.
Torque values
screw/bolt
Reporting faulty
devices
During general maintenance and FRU replacement procedures, it may be
possible to identify signs of damage caused by overheating, short circuits or
sudden component failure. This may indicate a problem that could repeat, cause
additional damage, or be a symptom of a failure elsewhere. Analysis of the
problem may identify common faults and make corrective action possible.
It is recommended that:
S The OMC-R is informed if an equipment safety problem has been
identified.
S The steps for Reporting safety issues are followed, detailed in the
frontmatter section of this manual.
Contact
information
Contact the Motorola local office if problems are encountered when carrying out
any maintenance procedures described in this manual.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 1–1
Weather conditions affecting access GSM-208-523
Weather conditions affecting access
Overview of
weather
considerations
Before beginning any maintenance procedure, it is important to read and take
into account the following information concerning the climatic conditions at the
intended site.
Weather
conditions
WARNING Due consideration should be given to the hazards of wind
and other inclement weather conditions.
Use discretion at all times. Do not climb a ladder,
scaffolding or use a similar method of access if you
feel unsafe to do so under such weather conditions.
Maintenance
cover
Motorola recommend the use of a maintenance cover for access to the
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure during inclement weather conditions.
NOTE The maintenance cover is not supplied with the
Horizonmacro equipment and should be provided by the
customer if required.
Installation and configuration procedures for the Horizonmacro enclosure are

dependent on the weather conditions. There are three situations where the
recommended guidelines should be considered before commencing work:
S No access.
S Access with maintenance cover.
S Access without maintenance cover.

Maint. 1–2 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Weather conditions affecting access
No access
Access to the enclosure should not be attempted during the following actual or
imminent inclement weather conditions, with or without the maintenance cover:
S Winds in excess of 25 knots (30 mph).
S Heavy persistent rain, snow, hail or sleet.
S During an electrical storm.
Access with maintenance cover

Access to the enclosure may be made under the following conditions with the
use of the maintenance cover:
S Persistent rain, snow, hail or sleet.
S Where airborne substances (such as leaves or dust) may cause a
problem.
Access without maintenance cover

Access may be made under the following conditions without the use of the
maintenance cover:
S No precipitation occurring or likely to occur during the maintenance period.
S When the temperature is between –30 _C to +40 _C (–22 _F to +104 _F).
Under these conditions the cover of the enclosure may be removed.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 1–3
Weather conditions affecting access GSM-208-523

Maint. 1–4 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
Chapter 2
General maintenance procedures

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A i
GSM-208-523

ii 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523
Chapter 2
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–7

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A iii
GSM-208-523

iv 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 General maintenance overview
General maintenance overview
Introduction to
general
maintenance
This chapter contains the procedures for the general maintenance of an
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure, an Horizonmacro indoor cabinet
Base Transceiver Station (BTS), and the optional ancillary enclosure. The
schedule for maintenance on the indoor cabinet is described in this chapter, but
there is no schedule for routine maintenance on the enclosure itself.
General maintenance procedures are to be carried out during site visits in
response to alarms (as required), or at intervals deemed appropriate by the
customer.
NOTE Since the equipment contained in the enclosure operates
as part of a network, the procedures in this chapter must
be performed in conjunction with the relevant network
procedures in the associated OMC-R manuals.
It is recommended that the following general maintenance procedures are

carried out on the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure:
S Ensure that the enclosure air inlet and outlet grilles are not blocked.
S Check normal operation, including HMS fans. Also check cable integrity
and the condition of all connections.
S Inspect general mechanical condition and finish of the enclosure.
S Inspect locks, handles and hinges and door seals. Lubricate if required.
Cleaning agents
The following is a list of cleaning agents and lubricant materials required for
general maintenance:
S Dustpan.
S Soft brush.
S Mild detergent.
S De-ionised water.
S Soft cloth.
S Lubricant (WD40 or equivalent).
S Light grease (TBI or equivalent).

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 2–1
Maintenance support procedures for the enclosure GSM-208-523
Maintenance support procedures for the enclosure

Introduction to
procedures
The maintenance support procedures include the following:
S Door opening and closing.
S Hood opening and closing.
Door opening
and closing
The left and right door handles operate in a similar manner. Both doors have a
spring loaded locking handle and operate as follows:
handle releases.
3. Turn the handle a quarter turn clockwise to open the door.
NOTE A door open alarm is generated if the equipment is active.
This means that the green STATUS OK LED on the front
of the power control module will NOT be illuminated when
the doors are opened.
quarter turn anticlockwise (left door) or clockwise (right door) and push in
until the handles are flush with the doors. The doors lock automatically.
Hood opening
and closing
NOTE The hood can only be opened and closed when both
doors are open.
The hood is opened and closed as follows:

1. Undo and remove the four hood securing screws from the front lip of the
hood.
2. Lift the hood until it rests in the fully open position.
3. Close the hood by pulling on the strap fixed to the inside of the hood.
Once the hood has started to close, the gas struts ensure that it lowers
gently to the closed position. Refit the hood securing screws.
A microswitch fitted to the top edge of the enclosure generates an alarm signal
when the hood is raised

Maint. 2–2 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 General maintenance procedures for the enclosure
General maintenance procedures for the enclosure
Type of
procedures
The general maintenance procedures involve the following:
S Cleaning air inlet and outlet grilles on the enclosure.
S Checking normal operation.
S Mechanical inspection of the cabinet, including inspection and lubrication
of locks and hinges.
S Periodic check of the installation.
present in the enclosure when the external ac supply
Procedures -
door and hood
Any requirement to open or close a door or the hood is assumed in the following
procedures. Shutting the door or the hood is assumed at the end of any
procedure. Detailed descriptions of cabinet access procedures are given in
Maintenance support procedures for the enclosure.
Cleaning inlet
and outlet
grilles
Air is drawn in and expelled through the grilles on the enclosure doors.
The following procedure should be followed to clean inlets, ducts and outlet
grilles:
S Examine the grilles on the doors and clean as necessary.
S Open the enclosure doors and examine the grilles on the HMS units.
Clean as necessary.
S Close the doors.
Checking
normal
operation
Check normal operation of the equipment in the enclosure by visual inspection
in the following procedure:

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 2–3
General maintenance procedures for the enclosure GSM-208-523
1. Observe the inside of the enclosure and note any signs of physical
damage, overheating, loose connections, or badly fitting components.
Take appropriate action to correct the damage, and inform the OMC-R.
2. Note the LEDs lit on the power control module. All the LEDs that denote
an OK function should be green.
NOTE The STATUS OK LED will be unlit if the door alarm
microswitch buttons have not been taped down.
3. Note the LEDs on the front of the rectifiers. The INPUT HEALTHY LED
should be yellow, and the OUTPUT HEALTHY LED should be green.
4. If any red LEDs are lit, further investigation is normally required by
opening the BTS cabinet door(s) and inspecting the equipment contained
within. See 12-monthly maintenance procedures for the indoor cabinet
later in this chapter for detailed information about checking the indoor BTS
equipment.
5. Test the operation of the heater by pressing the heater test button on the
front of the ac power distribution panel.

Maint. 2–4 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 General maintenance procedures for the enclosure
Inspection of
cabinet, locks
and hinges
Inspecting the enclosure exterior

Inspect the enclosure exterior using the following procedure:
S Check exterior panels for dents and structural damage.
S Check enclosure connections for signs of overheating and security of

attachment.
S Check cabinet exterior finish for signs of damage or deterioration. Restore

exterior finish as necessary.
Inspecting the doors and hood

Inspect the doors and hood using the following procedure:
S Check enclosure doors and hood for distortion, security and correct
operation.
S Check hinges for damage, security and correct operation. Carefully

lubricate the hinges. Ensure that all door seals are wiped clean of the
lubricant.
S Check the hood gas struts for damage, security and correct operation.
Carefully lubricate the gas struts and ensure that lubricated surfaces are
dirt-free.
S Check earth connections for damage and security.
S Check door lock mechanism and inspect for ease of operation. Lubricate
the mechanism with light grease. Ensure that lubricated surfaces are
dirt-free.
Inspecting the enclosure interior

Inspect the enclosure interior using the following procedure:
S Check all rack equipment for security of attachment, especially the rectifier
module attachment screws.
S Carry out a visual check of all wiring for signs of overheating and security
of attachment.
S Check the earth connections for corrosion and tightness using a torque
wrench. Tighten to the correct torque (see Installation & Configuration:
GSM-208-423, Chapter 2, Site requirements and considerations).
NOTE Do not overtighten the connections.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 2–5
General maintenance procedures for the enclosure GSM-208-523
Periodic check
of the
installation
NOTE Refer to Installation and Configuration: (GSM-204-423) to
carry out the following procedures.
It is recommended that the following be performed periodically:

S Inspection and testing in accordance with BS7671 (16th Edition Chapter
73), the IEC 364 equivalent or in accordance with local regulations.
S Earth electrode test.
Return to
service
After procedures have been completed, restore the cabinet to its operational
state, if necessary, and notify the OMC-R of base station availability.
Log the maintenance activity.

Maint. 2–6 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Routine maintenance for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet
Routine maintenance for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet
Routine
maintenance
intervals
Routine maintenance for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet is recommended at
the intervals shown in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 Routine maintenance schedule

6 months 12 months 24 months
Ensure that cabinet Annual check of the Inspect general
air inlets, outlet installation. mechanical condition of
grilles and filter (if the cabinet.
fitted) are not
blocked.
Check earth Check normal operation, Inspect locks, handles,
connections. including fans. Also cable and hinges of door.
integrity and state of all Lubricate if required.
connections.
These procedures are described in subsequent sections of this chapter, one to
cover 6-monthly, one 12-monthly, and one 24-monthly.
Tools
The only tools required are torque spanners, torque wrenches, and Torxdriver,
as listed in Installation and Configuration: GSM-208-423, Chapter 1,
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor tool kit requirements.
Door opening
and closing
procedure
Any requirement to open or close the enclosure doors and hood (to access an
indoor cabinet), and opening/closing the indoor cabinet door is assumed to be
done in procedures. Closing the hood and all doors is assumed to be done at
the end of any procedure.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 2–7
Routine maintenance for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet GSM-208-523
Opening the indoor cabinet door

The door lock has a trigger latch mechanism. Proceed as follows to open the
door:
1. Insert the correct key into the lock and turn.
2. Press the middle square panel by the lock to release the lock.
3. Open the door to the 95_ locking position.
CAUTION Avoid damaging the honeycomb door vent.
NOTE If the equipment is active, a door open alarm will be

signalled to the OMC-R.
4. To open the door to 130_, lift up the middle of the slide arm.
Closing the indoor cabinet door

To close the door, lift up the middle of the slide arm, close the door firmly and
lock it.

Maint. 2–8 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Indoor cabinet 6-monthly maintenance procedures
Indoor cabinet 6-monthly maintenance procedures

Type of
procedures
The 6-monthly maintenance procedures involve the following:
S Cleaning air inlets, outlet grilles and filter (if fitted).
S Checking earth connections.
present in the cabinet when the BTS circuit breakers on
the dc distribution panel are set to the on position.
Remove rings, watches and jewellery before starting these
procedures, and exercise extreme caution when working
on the equipment.
Cleaning air
inlets and filter
CAUTION If the cabinet is operational, this maintenance procedure
should be completed without delay, in order to minimize
duration of air cooling disruption.
Inlets are along the back, sides and front at the base of the cabinet.
Air is expelled through the door vent and through the top panel.
A filter is an option and is not essential in a clean environment. The single filter
is mounted under the fan units. If clogged, fan airflow may be reduced, straining
fan motors and increasing fan noise.
The following procedure should be followed to clean the air inlets and the filter:
S Use a brush to ensure the bottom inlets are clear of debris.
S Open the door and clean the aluminium door vent, taking care to avoid
damage.
S If a filter is fitted, remove the two front M6 screws to allow the filter holding
plate to drop down. Remove the filter and clean with soapy water away
from the enclosure and allow to dry.
S Refit the filter and lift up the holding plate, securing with the two M6
screws. Tighten to the correct torque (see Installation and Configuration:
(GSM-208-423), Chapter 2, Site requirements and considerations).
S Close and lock the door.
Checking earth
connections
Check all earth connections on the indoor cabinet for corrosion and tightness
using a torque wrench. Tighten to the correct torque (see Installation and
Configuration: (GSM-208-423), Chapter 2, Site requirements and
considerations).

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 2–9
Indoor cabinet 12-monthly maintenance procedures GSM-208-523
Summary of
12-monthly
procedures
S 6-monthly procedures.
S Checking and cleaning fans.
S Annual check of the installation.
on the equipment.
Checking and
cleaning fans
CAUTION If the cabinet is operational, this maintenance procedure
There are three cabinet fan modules, one 4-fan unit and two identical 2-fan
units. Table 2-2 shows the three fan positions.
Table 2-2 Fan positions

Fan Type of module Cabinet position
reference
0 4-fan unit Right side, beneath digital cage.
1 2-fan unit Middle, beneath CTUs.
2 2-fan unit Left side, beneath CTUs.
The fans can be checked and cleaned using the following procedure:
S Remove the fan module, by lifting the central slide latch and pulling out.
S Use a brush to remove any dust and dirt on the module.
S Refit the fan and check operation. Any fan not operating should be started
by pressing the appropriate RESET button.
S Observe the fans through the fan grilles to ensure they are operating
correctly, with no excessive noise. If there is excessive noise, identify the
fan and replace (see Maintenance Information: GSM-208-523, Chapter 4,
Replacing a fan module).

Maint. 2–10 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
Cabinet
modules in
operational
positions
Figure 2-1 shows the modules in the indoor cabinet.
ONE SURF (Rx)

THREE Tx BLOCKS
(DCFs SHOWN AS EXAMPLE)
T43/BIB
INTERFACE
PANEL
SIX CTUs
CONNECTORS
HEAT SENSORS
LOCATED ON
BACKPLANE
THREE
PSMs
TWO 2-FAN
UNITS
ALARM
BOARD
MCUF
CIRCUIT BREAKER
MODULE (CBM)
FMUX/NIU/BPSM
(NOT VISIBLE) ONE 4-FAN ig.128.rh
UNIT
Figure 2-1 Cabinet modules (door removed)

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 2–11
Checking
normal
operation
NOTE If two indoor cabinets are installed in the enclosure,
always check BTS 0 before BTS 1 as a major failure in
BTS 0 will prevent BTS 1 from operating (although BTS 0
can operate without BTS 1).
Check normal operation of the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet by visual inspection

in the following procedure:
1. Observe the inside of the cabinet and note any signs of physical damage,
overheating, loose connections, or badly fitting components. Take
appropriate action to correct the damage, and inform the OMC-R.
2. Note the LEDs lit on the modules shown in Table 2-3 to ensure correct
functioning of the cabinet. If any red LEDs are lit, other than the door open
alarm (alarm 3 on the alarm module), inform the OMC-R.
Table 2-3 Normal LED indications for cabinet modules

Equipment with LEDs Colour of LEDs lit
CTUs in locations 0 to 5 Tx status (ORANGE) or
operational status
(GREEN)
PSMs in locations 0 to 2 Top LED (GREEN)
Digital modules (NIU, MCUF, FMUX, GREEN
BPSM)
Alarm module 6, 7, 8 GREEN (fans)
3 RED (as door is open)
Annual check of
the installation
NOTE Refer to the appropriate chapters in Installation and
Configuration: (GSM-208-423) to carry out the following
tests.
It is recommended that the following tests are performed annually:

S Earth electrode test.
S Power commissioning.
S Pre-power up.
S Cabinet power up.
Log the maintenance activity.
After procedures have been completed, restore the cabinet to operational state
and notify the OMC-R of base station availability.

Maint. 2–12 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
Summary of
24-monthly
procedures
on the equipment.

S Mechanical inspection of cabinet, including inspection and lubrication of
locks and hinges.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 2–13
Mechanical
inspection of
cabinet, locks
and hinges
The following must be performed every 24 months.
Inspecting the cabinet exterior

The only part of the cabinet exterior (apart from the door) that can be inspected
is the top panel. Check the top panel connections for signs of overheating and
security of attachment.
Inspecting the door

Follow this procedure to inspect the door:
S Check the cabinet door for distortion, security and correct operation.
S Check hinges for damage, security and correct operation. Carefully
lubricate the hinges and ensure that all door seals are wiped clean of the
lubricant.
S Check the earth connection for damage and security.
S Check the door lock mechanism and inspect for ease of operation.
Lubricate the mechanism with light grease. Ensure that lubricated surfaces
are grit-free.
Inspecting the cabinet interior

Follow this procedure to inspect the cabinet interior:
S Check all rack equipment for security of attachment, especially PSM, CBM
and CTU module attachment screws using a Torxdriver. Tighten to the
correct torque (see Installation & Configuration: GSM-208-423, Chapter 2,
Site requirements and considerations).
S Carry out a visual check of all wiring for signs of overheating and security
of attachment.
WARNING Do not overstress the earth connections, as this may

damage the connector and reduce the protective function.
S Check the earth connections for corrosion and tightness using a torque
spanner. Tighten to the correct torque (see Installation & Configuration:
GSM-208-423, Chapter 2, Site requirements and considerations).

Maint. 2–14 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Routine maintenance for the ancillary enclosure
Routine maintenance for the ancillary enclosure
Routine
mainenance
intervals
Routine maintenance for the battery backup system is recommended at the
intervals shown in Table 2-4.
Table 2-4 Routine maintenance schedule

12 months 24 months
Check normal operation, including Inspect general mechanical condition
heater. Also cable integrity and state of the enclosure.
of all connections.
Carry out a partial discharge test on
the battery strings.
These procedures are described in subsequent sections of this chapter, one to
cover 12-monthly and one for 24-monthly procedures.
Assumptions
Any requirement to open the ancillary enclosure door is assumed in the
procedures. Closing the door is assumed at the end of any procedure.
Opening and
closing the
ancillary
enclosure door
The door opens to the right and has a spring loaded locking handle. A gas strut,
mounted at the bottom of the door, assists in opening the door and locks the
door open in the 120_ position.
Proceed as follows to open and close the door:
1. Slide open the lock protective cover.
2. Insert the key into the lock and turn anticlockwise until the spring loaded
handle releases.
4. Open the door to the fully open 120_ position.
generated.
5. To close the door, press down on the orange locking clip on the centre of
the gas strut, close the door firmly and turn the handle a quarter turn to
the left and push until the handle is flush with the door. The door locks
automatically.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 2–15
Ancillary enclosure 12-monthly maintenance procedures GSM-208-523
Ancillary enclosure 12-monthly maintenance procedures

Summary of
12-monthly
procedures
The 12-monthly maintenance procedures consist of the following:
S Checking the integrity of the cables.
S Checking the operation of the heater.
S Partial discharge test.
present in the ancillary enclosure when the AUXILIARIES
CB2/4 isolator switch in the main enclosure and the ac
supply isolator switch at the bottom of the ancillary
enclosure are set to the on position and/or the batteries
are connected.
on the equipment.
Checking cable
integrity
Visually check all internal cables for signs of overheating and check security of
attachment. Check the external flexible cable conduits for signs of damage.
Checking the
operation of the
heater
Test the operation of the heater by pressing the heater test button (mounted to
the right of the ac isolator switch) while holding a hand over the heater grille.
Release the button as soon as heat is felt coming from the heater.
Checking
normal
operation
Check normal operation of the ancillary enclosure by visual inspection of the
front panel of the BMM. The green HEALTHY LED for each battery string
installed should be illuminated. If not, the corresponding red MONOBLOC
FAULT LED indicates where a voltage imbalance exists in that string.
A MONOBLOC FAULT LED indicates a potential failure or degradation of a
monobloc in an otherwise healthy battery string. The monobloc should be
replaced, although if the battery string has been in service for some time, it is
recommended that the complete battery string is replaced.

Maint. 2–16 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Ancillary enclosure 12-monthly maintenance procedures
Partial
discharge test
The partial discharge test requires that at least one battery string is installed in
the ancillary enclosure.
To carry out the test, proceed as follows:
1. Ensure the equipment in the ancillary enclosure is operating normally and
that the green HEALTHY LED is illuminated for each battery string
installed.
2. Ensure that the battery isolator switch in the main enclosure is set to the
on position.
3. Disconnect the ac supply to the main enclosure, thus forcing dc power to
be supplied from the backup batteries.
4. Use the BMM front panel test sockets to monitor and record the operating
current and battery voltage at the beginning and end of the discharge test
5. Leave the equipment operating from backup power for 45 minutes.
Periodically check the BMM front panel to ensure that none of the
MONOBLOC FAULT LEDs is illuminated. If any of the LEDs is illuminated,
it is recommended that the complete battery string is replaced.
NOTE Terminate the test immediately if the battery voltage drops
to 44.0 V.
6. Reconnect the ac supply to the main enclosure.

7. Log the discharge test results to provide an indication of monobloc
degradation over lifetime. Monoblocs should be replaced when their
capacity has reduced to 80% of the rated capacity.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 2–17
Ancillary enclosure 24-monthly maintenance procedures GSM-208-523
Ancillary enclosure 24-monthly maintenance procedures
Summary of
24-monthly
procedures
are connected.
on the equipment.

S Mechanical inspection of the enclosure.
Mechanical
inspection of
the enclosure
The following procedures must be performed every 24 months.
Inspecting the door

Inspect the door using the following procedure:
1. Check the enclosure door for distortion, security and correct operation.
2. Check hinges for damage, security and correct operation.
3. Check the door earth connection for damage and security.
4. Check the door lock mechanism and inspect for ease of operation.
Lubricate the mechanism with light grease. Ensure that lubricated surfaces
are grit-free.
Inspecting the enclosure interior

Inspect the interior using the following procedure:
1. Check all battery shelves and the BMM for security of attachment.
2. Carry out a visual check of all wiring for signs of overheating and security
of attachment.

Maint. 2–18 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
Chapter 3
Enclosure FRU replacement
procedures

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A i
GSM-208-523

ii 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523
Chapter 3
FRU list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 3–1

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A iii
GSM-208-523

iv 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Overview of replacement procedures for enclosure FRUs
Overview of replacement procedures for enclosure FRUs

Introduction to
enclosure FRU
replacement
procedures
This chapter provides information on the replacement of FRUs in the

Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure. Only components classed as FRUs
are described in this chapter. FRUs contained in the Horizonmacro indoor
cabinet are described in Chapter 4 of this category.
Any requirement to open the enclosure is assumed in procedures. Closing the
hood, doors and locking the enclosure is assumed at the end of any procedure.
Where customers wish to perform a minor repair on an FRU, in order to save the
cost of full replacement, they should consult Motorola for more detailed
procedures or replacement components.
Isolating the
enclosure
If a FRU replacement procedure described in this chapter requires the enclosure
to be isolated from the external power source, this is achieved by switching off
the external ac supply isolator. However, equipment within the enclosure can
normally be isolated using the AC ISOLATION SWITCH circuit breaker on the
front of the ac power distribution unit and the battery isolator switch.
FRU list
The following is a list of FRUs used in this equipment:
S Fuses.
S Battery pack.
S Rectifiers.
S Power control module.
S Heater.
S Fan trays (left and right).
S HMS units.
S Alarm Interface Module (AIM).
Torque values
For torque values refer to Installation & Configuration: (GSM-208-423), Chapter
2, Site requirements and considerations.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 3–1
Overview of replacement procedures for enclosure FRUs GSM-208-523
FRU view of the

enclosure
Figure 3-1 shows the enclosure with FRUs identified.
RECTIFIERS
AIM
HMS
FAN TRAY
(HIDDEN) POWER
CONTROL
BATTERIES MODULE
FAN TRAY
RECTIFIERS
HEATER (HIDDEN)
(HIDDEN)
Figure 3-1 Enclosure showing FRU components
Replacing
non-FRU parts
Customers requiring the replacement of parts not classed as FRUs should:
1. Contact the local Motorola office for availability.
2. Seek Motorola expertise for fitting non-FRU parts.

Maint. 3–2 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Replacing fuses
Replacing fuses
Introduction to
fuse
replacement
Six fuses are mounted on the dc distribution panel, as shown in Figure 3-2.
FUSE PANEL

FS1 T2AH FS2 T2AH
LVD A LVD B
FS3 T2AH FS4 T2AH
FS5 T2AH FS6 T2AH
Figure 3-2 DC distribution panel showing fuse locations
The circuits protected by the fuses are described in Table 3-1.
Table 3-1 DC fuses

Fuse no. Circuit protected Rating / Type
FS 1 Power control module supply 2 A / HRC
FS 2 Power control module negative sense 2 A / HRC
FS3 LVD A supply 2 A / HRC
FS 4 LVD B supply 2 A / HRC
FS 5 Fan tray in PDU A 2 A / HRC
FS 6 Fan tray in PDU B 2 A / HRC
Fuse
replacement
procedure
A fuse can be replaced as follows:
1. Remove the required fuse holder from the fuse panel.
2. Remove the fuse from the holder and replace with a new fuse of the
correct type and rating.
3. Push the fuse holder firmly back into place.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 3–3
Replacing a battery pack GSM-208-523
Replacing a battery pack
Introduction to
battery pack
replacement
A replacement battery pack for the 12 carrier outdoor enclosure comprises four
12 V monoblocs.
The batteries can be replaced while the equipment is in service, provided they
are isolated from the rest of the system.
Figure 3-3 shows the batteries, as installed in the enclosure.
BATTERY
ISOLATOR
SWITCH
BACKUP
BATTERIES
COMPARTMENT
COVER
Figure 3-3 Backup battery installation
NOTE Battery cabling between the shelves must pass over the
front of the upper shelf and not the side of the shelf,
otherwise the compartment cover will not fit correctly (see
Figure 3-4).

Maint. 3–4 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Replacing a battery pack
Battery pack
replacement
procedure
Proceed as follows to replace the battery pack:
1. Isolate the batteries by switching off the battery isolator (see Figure 3-3).
2. Undo all the retaining screws and remove the battery compartment cover.
3. Undo the isolator switch blue cable connection to the negative terminal on
battery No. 4.
4. Undo the isolator switch black cable connection to the positive terminal on
battery No. 1.
5. Disconnect the terminal links and cable between the batteries on the
upper and lower shelves. Disconnect the temperature sensor cable from
the positive terminal on battery No. 3.
6. Undo the battery retaining straps and remove the batteries.
The replacement procedure is a reversal of the removal procedure. Figure 3-4
shows how the replacement batteries are connected together.
+VE CONNECTION
(BLACK CABLE) TO
ISOLATOR SWITCH
–VE CONNECTION
(BLUE CABLE) TO
ISOLATOR SWITCH
THERMAL PROBE
CONNECTS HERE
BATTERY LINK
BATTERY LINK
Figure 3-4 Battery terminal connections

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 3–5
Replacing a rectifier GSM-208-523
Replacing a rectifier
Introduction to
rectifier
replacement
This procedure describes how to remove and replace a rectifier in the
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure.
Between two and five rectifiers may be installed in the enclosure, depending on
the configuration.
Figure 3-5 shows a view of the rectifier.
Figure 3-5 The rectifier
WARNING Potentially lethal voltages, up to 230 V ac, and other high

energy sources are present within the enclosure when the
AC ISOLATION SWITCH circuit breaker on the ac
distribution panel is set to the ON position and/or batteries
are connected.
Replacing a rectifier does not require the removal of power. However, unless a
redundant rectifier is installed, it is advisable to perform this procedure during
periods of low traffic, as available power is reduced.
Notify the OMC-R of imminent repair activity.

Maint. 3–6 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Replacing a rectifier
Replacement
procedure for a
rectifier
To remove a rectifier
1. Switch OFF the appropriate circuit breaker for the rectifier being replaced
on the ac distribution panel (RECT 0 to RECT 4).
2. Unscrew the two M6 captive screws that secure the rectifier in position.
CAUTION Handle the rectifier with care; the module weighs 4.6 kg.
3. Using the handle, pull the rectifier out of its slot, supporting it from beneath
with the other hand as it emerges. Place it safely to one side.
The procedure for removing the rectifier is now complete.
To install a replacement rectifier

1. Repeat the removal procedure in reverse order.
2. Ensure that the rectifier is pushed fully home into its connector on the
backplane before tightening the two M6 screws. Tighten to a torque of
3.4 Nm.
3. Switch on the circuit breaker for the rectifier.
4. Check the operation of the rectifier LEDs. The yellow I/P HEALTHY and
green O/P HEALTHY LEDs should be illuminated.
The procedure for replacing the rectifier is now complete.
Notify the OMC-R of base station availability and log the maintenance activity.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 3–7
Replacing the power control module GSM-208-523
Replacing the power control module
Introduction to
power control
module
replacement
The power control module is mounted in PDU B, to the left of the ac and dc
power distribution units.
Before replacing the power control module, check that the FS1 and FS2 fuses
on the dc distribution panel have not blown. If the power control module needs
replacing, this can be done without switching off the equipment.
Figure 3-6 shows the power control module in PDU B.
RETAINING SCREW
BYPASS SWITCH
PULL HANDLE
RETAINING SCREW
Figure 3-6 The power control module

Maint. 3–8 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Replacing the power control module
Power control
module
replacement
procedure
Proceed as follows to replace the power control module:
1. Set the BYPASS switch on the front panel of the power control module to
the ON position (see Figure 3-6).
2. Undo the two panel retaining screws and withdraw the module using the
pull handle. Place the module safely to one side.
3. Insert the replacement module into the empty slot. Secure in position
using the two retaining screws and tighten to the correct torque.
4. Ensure the BYPASS switch is set to OFF.
The procedure for replacing the power control module is now complete.
Battery float
charge
adjustment
The battery float charge level should be checked after replacing the power
control module. This is achieved by measuring the voltage across the battery
terminals and adjusting the level using the VOLT ADJ potentiometer on the
power control module front panel.
The voltage measured is temperature dependent. For example:
At 20 °C, the float charge voltage should be 54.5 V.
At 10 °C, the float charge voltage should be 55.4 V.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 3–9
Replacing the heater GSM-208-523
Replacing the heater
Introduction to
heater
replacement
The heater is mounted in the base of PDU A, below the space allocated for
customer communications equipment. Figure 3-7 shows the heater mounted in
position in the enclosure.
PDU A
HEATER PANEL
HEATER UNIT
Figure 3-7 Location of the heater in the enclosure

Maint. 3–10 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Replacing the heater
Heater
replacement
procedure
Proceed as follows to replace the heater:
1. Remove any comms equipment, thus enabling access to the rear of the ac
power distribution unit.
2. Undo the four screws that secure the heater panel assembly to the PDU A
chassis and partially withdraw the assembly.
3. Disconnect the power connector from the rear of the ac distribution panel
and then remove the complete heater assembly from the chassis.
4. Separate the heater unit from the panel assembly by undoing the four
bolts that secure the unit to the base.
Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure. Test the new heater by
pressing the heater test button on the ac distribution panel.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 3–11
Replacing a fan tray GSM-208-523
Replacing a fan tray
Introduction to
fan tray
replacement
There are two fan trays installed in the enclosure. One is mounted under the two
rectifier slots in the right side of the enclosure (in PDU A) and the other is
mounted under the three rectifier slots in the left side of the enclosure (in PDU
B). The replacement procedure is the same for either tray, only the physical
location and size of the tray is different. (The right tray contains four fans while
the left tray contains six fans.)
Before replacing a fan tray, check that the relevant fuse has not blown (FS5 for
the left fan tray and FS6 for the right fan tray).
Figure 3-8 shows the left fan tray.
CONTROL BOARD
POWER
CONNECTOR
FAN
TIE WRAP LOCATION IN

THE FAN TRAY
Figure 3-8 The left fan tray

Maint. 3–12 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Replacing a fan tray
Fan tray
replacement
procedure
Proceed as follows to replace a fan tray:
1. Isolate the rectifiers above the faulty fan tray by switching off the
appropriate rectifier circuit breakers on the front of the ac distribution
panel.
2. Isolate power to the fan tray control board by removing fuse FS5 for the
left fan tray or FS6 for the right fan tray.
3. Carefully remove the isolated rectifiers from their slots. The fan tray can
now be accessed.
4. Undo and remove the single screw that secures the fan tray front panel
and partially withdraw the tray from the chassis.
5. Reach into the tray and disconnect the power connector from the control
board (see Figure 3-8).
6. Remove the tie wrap that secures the power cable to the right side of the
fan tray (see Figure 3-8 for the location of the tie wrap). The fan tray can
now be completely withdraw from the chassis.
Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure. Make sure the power
connector is secured out of the way while the replacement fan tray is slotted into
the chassis. Fit a new tie wrap to secure the power cable in position.
Remember to refit the fan tray fuse in the dc distribution panel.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 3–13
Replacing a HMS unit GSM-208-523
Replacing a HMS unit
Introduction to
HMS
replacement
A HMS unit is mounted on the inside of each door. The HMS unit on the right
door is HMS 0 and the unit on the left door is HMS 1.
Replacement of either HMS unit can be carried out while the enclosure
equipment is switched on.
Figure 3-9 shows the HMS unit mounted on the left enclosure door (HMS 1).
POWER AND
SIGNAL
CONNECTOR
LIFTING HANDLE
SECURING BOLTS
LAPTOP SUPPORT
BRACKET
(ON LEFT HMS ONLY)
MOUNTING SHELF
LIFTING HANDLE
Figure 3-9 HMS 1 mounted on the left door

Maint. 3–14 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Replacing a HMS unit
HMS
replacement
procedure
WARNING The HMS unit weighs 35 kg. Removal of a HMS unit
requires two persons.
Proceed as follows to replace a HMS unit:

1. Isolate the faulty HMS unit by switching off the appropriate circuit breaker
on the front of the dc power distribution unit.
2. If HMS 1 is to be replaced, undo the securing bolts and remove the plastic
laptop computer holder from the front of the HMS.
3. Unplug the power and signal connector from the top panel (see
Figure 3-9).
4. Undo and remove the four Torx bolts (two on each side) that secure the
HMS unit to the door.
5. Using the handles provided, lift the HMS unit off its shelf and away from
the door.
Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure. After replacement, the
HMS may be tested as described in Chapter 7 of Installation and Configuration:
(GSM-208-423).

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 3–15
Replacing the alarm interface module GSM-208-523
Replacing the alarm interface module

Introduction to
AIM
replacement
The AIM is mounted on the top of the battery compartment, behind the battery
isolator switch. The OMC-R must be notified, and the indoor cabinets and
enclosure must be shut down and isolated before the AIM can be replaced.
AIM
replacement
procedure
The procedure for replacing the AIM is as follows (refer to Figure 3-10):
1. Ensure all equipment is switched off and isolated from the supply
(including battery backup).
2. Using a cross-head screwdriver, undo the four screws on the AIM top
cover and then remove the cover.
3. Make a note of the DIP switch settings on the AIM board. Remove the
cover from the replacement AIM and set the switches on the new board to
the same settings.
4. Disconnect each connector in turn from the faulty AIM and connect to the
replacement AIM.
5. Undo the four cross-head AIM securing screws (mounted in the lid
retaining screw holes) and remove the faulty AIM from the top of the
battery compartment.
6. Fit the replacement AIM, secure in position and then fit the cover. Check
all connections.
The procedure for fitting a replacement AIM is now complete. Power up the
equipment, notify the OMC-R of base station availability and log the
maintenance activity.
AIM COVER
COVER
RETAINING
SCREW
AIM
Figure 3-10 The alarm interface module

Maint. 3–16 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
Chapter 4
Indoor cabinet FRU replacement
procedures

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A i
GSM-208-523

ii 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523
Chapter 4
FRU list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–1
View of PSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–6

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A iii
GSM-208-523


iv 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Overview of replacement procedures
Overview of replacement procedures
Field
replaceable
units (FRUs)
present in the cabinet when the ac mains isolator switch is
set to the on position and/or batteries are connected.
on the equipment.
This chapter provides information on the replacement of FRUs in the

Horizonmacro indoor cabinet. Only components classed as FRUs are described
in this chapter.
Any requirement to access the cabinet by opening the enclosure is assumed in
procedures. Shutting the cabinet door and locking the enclosure is assumed at
the end of any procedure.
Where customers wish to perform a minor repair on an FRU, in order to save the
cost of full replacement, they should consult Motorola for more detailed
procedures or replacement components (see Additional replacement parts).
Isolating the
indoor cabinet
Many of the FRU replacement procedures described in this chapter require the
indoor cabinet to be isolated from the external power source. This is achieved
by switching off the appropriate circuit breaker, BTS 0 or BTS 1, on the front of
the dc distribution panel.
FRU list
The following is a list of FRUs used in this equipment:
S Circuit breaker module (CBM).
S Power supply module (PSM).
S Fan modules.
S CTU module.
S Tx blocks, including feedthrough plate.
S SURF module.
S Digital modules (MCUFs, NIUs, FMUXs, alarm board; also BPSMs).
S Door.
S Heat sensors.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–1
Overview of replacement procedures GSM-208-523
Torque values
For torque values used, refer to Installation and Configuration: (GSM-208-423),
Chapter 2, Site requirements and considerations
FRU view of
cabinet
Figure 4-1 shows a cabinet with FRUs identified. The door is shown in the
relevant FRU section.
ONE SURF (Rx)

THREE Tx BLOCKS
(DCFs SHOWN AS EXAMPLE)
T43/BIB
INTERFACE
SIX CTUs PANEL
CONNECTORS
HEAT SENSORS
LOCATED ON
BACKPLANE
THREE
PSMs
TWO 2-FAN
UNITS
ALARM
BOARD
MCUF
CIRCUIT BREAKER
MODULE (CBM)
FMUX/NIU/BPSM
ONE 4-FAN ig.128.rh
UNIT
Figure 4-1 Indoor cabinet, without door, showing FRU components

Maint. 4–2 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Additional replacement parts
Additional replacement parts
Policy on
non-FRU parts
Non-FRU parts are:
S Items unlikely to fail, but replacement is essential if failure occurs.
or
S Subsections of FRUs, where local conditions may make it more
economical to repair the FRU.
Only qualified personnel should attempt non-FRU replacement, in order to
minimize risk of equipment damage. For example, the CBIA main cage requires
care in removal and installation, and Individual fans require care in ensuring
correct direction of airflow.
List of non-FRU
parts
Non-FRU parts include the following:
S Door lock.
S Individual fans within a fan module.
S Any part of the CBIA: main cage, harness, door sensor, interface panel,
backplane.
Replacing
non-FRU parts
Customers requiring non-FRU replacement should:
1. Contact the local Motorola office for availability.
2. Seek Motorola expertise for fitting non-FRU parts.
CBIA
attachment
screws
The CBIA is attached to the cabinet by screws which should not be loosened:
S Seven M4 screws to SURF harness (two guide pins lock cage into
position).
S Four M6 (left side) and five M6 (right side) screws at cabinet front.
S Eight M6 T30 screws for interface panel attachment to top panel.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–3
Replacing a circuit breaker module (CBM) GSM-208-523
Replacing a circuit breaker module (CBM)
Preconditions
for CBM
replacement
The CBM controls power for the whole of the indoor cabinet, apart from the
PSMs. Consequently, the replacement of a CBM can only take place after the
cabinet has been taken out of service and isolated, in agreement with the
OMC-R.
Views of CBM
Figure 4-2 shows views of the CBM with circuit breaker buttons identified.
BACKPLANE CONNECTOR
HANDLE-BAFFLE
SCREWS
NOT USED SURF FANS BPSMs (A AND B) 6 CTUs (0 TO 5)
ig.281.rh
FRONT VIEW
Figure 4-2 Views of CBM with circuit breaker buttons identified

Maint. 4–4 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Replacing a circuit breaker module (CBM)
Replacement
procedure for
CBM
The replacement procedure is as follows.
Removing the CBM

1. Verify that the cabinet is isolated from the dc supply.
3. Unscrew both CBM module attachment screws (shown in Figure 4-2)
using an M4 Torxdriver and then pull out the module, using the
handle-baffle.
Installing a new CBM

1. Check that all the circuit breaker buttons on the new CBM module are in
the out (off) position. Install new module and press firmly into place.
2. Tighten both module attachment screws to 2.2 Nm using an M4 Torxdriver.
Completing the new CBM installation

1. Switch on the dc supply to the cabinet using the appropriate circuit
breaker on the dc distribution panel in the enclosure.
2. Turn each PSM switch to the OUTPUT ENABLE position. Check that each
PSM has the ACTIVE (green) light on and the ALARM (red) light off.
3. Press the CBM isolator marked FANS. Check that each fan, eight in total,
is operating correctly. Any fan not started may be activated by pressing
the reset button (marked either FRONT or REAR) on the appropriate fan
unit.
BPSM fitted) BPSM B. Check all associated digital module indicators
operate correctly.
6. Press the CBM circuit breaker buttons for the appropriate CTUs fitted, and
check that the LEDs for each CTU indicate correct operation.
7. Close the door to ensure correct air circulation.
8. Notify the OMC-R of base station availability and log the maintenance
activity.
This completes the CBM replacement and power up sequence for a cabinet.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–5
Replacing a power supply module (PSM) GSM-208-523
Replacing a power supply module (PSM)
Preconditions
for PSM
replacement
There are three slots for PSMs. The PSMs installed in the indoor cabinet must
be the –48 V type.
One PSM can power up a cabinet containing up to three CTUs. The cabinet
only requires two PSMs to be fully operational with six CTUs. The spare third
slot (if a redundant PSM is not fitted) can be used for insertion of a replacement
PSM, thereby avoiding any need to take the cabinet out of service.
View of PSM
Figure 4-3 shows a view of the PSM with key features identified.
AIR VENTS ON ENTIRE

TOP AND BOTTOM PANELS
GREEN LED
ACTIVE
RED LED
ALARM
OUTPUT DISABLE
SWITCH
SCREWS
Figure 4-3 View of PSM with key features identified

Maint. 4–6 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Replacing a power supply module (PSM)
Replacement
procedure for
non-redundant
PSM
The following procedure should be followed if there are one or two PSMs fitted
in the cabinet:
1. Verify that the switch of the new PSM is set to OUTPUT DISABLE.
2. Remove the blanking plate of spare slot, by unscrewing the attachment
screws with an M4 Torxdriver.
3. Insert the new replacement PSM in the spare slot.
4. Ensure the replacement PSM is firmly in position and tighten both module
attachment screws to 2.2 Nm using an M4 Torxdriver.
5. Set the replacement PSM switch to OUTPUT ENABLE. Check that the
green ACTIVE LED is lit.
6. Set the switch of the faulty PSM to OUTPUT DISABLE. The green
ACTIVE LED will go off (the green light may already be off, if PSM failure
has resulted in output failure of that PSM). The red ALARM LED, if already
on due to alarm state, will stay on.
7. Unscrew the faulty PSM module attachment screws using an M4
Torxdriver and remove the module. The ALARM LED will go off.
8. Fit the cover plate in the empty PSM position, by tightening the attachment
screws to 2.2 Nm using an M4 Torxdriver.
Replacement
procedure for
redundant PSM
The following procedure should be followed if there are three PSMs fitted:
1. Verify that the switch of the new PSM is set to output disable.
2. Set the switch of the faulty PSM to OUTPUT DISABLE. The green
ACTIVE LED will go off (the green light may already be off, if PSM failure
has resulted in output failure of that PSM). The red ALARM LED, if already
on due to alarm state, will stay on.
3. Unscrew the module attachment screws using an M4 Torxdriver and
remove the module. The red LED will go off.
4. Insert the new replacement PSM.
5. Ensure the replacement PSM is firmly in position and tighten both module
attachment screws to 2.2 Nm using an M4 Torxdriver.
6. Set the switch to OUTPUT ENABLE. Check that the green ACTIVE LED is
lit.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–7
Replacing a fan unit GSM-208-523
Replacing a fan unit
Preconditions
for fan
replacement
CAUTION If the cabinet is operational, this replacement procedure
The fan units can be replaced while the indoor cabinet is operational, but be
aware that airflow is reduced while fans are out of service, and while door is
open. This will raise equipment temperature, and could shut down the cabinet
by triggering the heat sensors.
Views of 2-fan
and 4-fan units
Figure 4-4 shows a view of both a 2-fan and a 4-fan unit, including reset
buttons.
2-FAN
UNIT
4-FAN
UNIT
RESET BUTTONS
(ONE PER FAN)
SLIDE LATCH FOR

MODULE REMOVAL
Figure 4-4 View of 2-fan and 4-fan units

Maint. 4–8 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Replacing a fan unit
Identifying fan
unit
There are three cabinet fan units: one 4-fan unit and two identical 2-fan units.
Table 4-1 shows the three fan positions.
Table 4-1 Fan positions

Fan Unit type Cabinet position
reference
0 4-fan unit Right side, underneath digital cage.
1 2-fan unit Middle, beneath CTUs.
2 2-fan unit Left side, beneath CTUs.
Replacement
procedure for
fan units
To remove a fan unit and install a replacement, proceed as follows:
1. Lift the central slide latch.
2. Pull out the fan unit.
3. Insert the replacement unit firmly in place, ensuring the slide latch has
engaged.
4. Ensure all fans are operating. Any fan not operating should be started by
pressing its RESET button.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–9
Replacing a CTU GSM-208-523
Replacing a CTU
Preconditions
for CTU
replacement
WARNING Ensure that RF power is OFF before disconnecting RF
cables. Severe burns may result if RF power is ON when
cables are disconnected.
There are up to six CTUs in a cabinet. Replacing a CTU requires the removal of
RF transmitter power for that CTU. It is therefore advisable to perform this
procedure during periods of low traffic. The OMC-R should be notified of
imminent repair activity.
NOTE The CTU replacement procedure is the same for all CTUs,
regardless of frequency rating.
Read the Preserving CTU calibration section later in this
chapter prior to removing the CTU.
View of the CTU

Figure 4-5 shows a view of a CTU with key features identified.
SCREW
Tx OUT
CONNECTOR
TEST INTERFACE
HANDLE
TTY INTERFACE
CONTROL
PROCESSOR RADIO STATUS LED

(IF FITTED)
M4 MODULE ATTACHMENT Tx STATUS LED
SCREW
Figure 4-5 CTU view with key features

Maint. 4–10 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Replacing a CTU
Replacement
procedure for a
CTU
CAUTION An earthing wrist strap must be worn when handling
CTUs. An ESP earthing connection point is provided
above the leftmost PSM.
Removing a faulty CTU

NOTE Ensure that the preserve CTU calibration data feature is
enabled and determine which calibration data exchange
scenario applies before proceeding further (refer to
Enabling the preserve CTU calibration data feature and
Table 4-2 respectively, later in this chapter).
To remove a CTU:
1. Locate the CTU to be replaced. CTUs are sequentially numbered, with
CTU 0 on the right, and CTU 5 on the left, as shown in Figure 4-1.
2. Disable the CTU transmit RF power by using the lock_device or
shutdown_device command at the OMC-R or from a PC connected to
the MCUF.
NOTE Refer to Technical Description: BSS Command Reference

(GSM-100-321) for information on usage and specific
commands.
3. When the CTU has been shutdown, check the Tx STATUS LED (solid
yellow) is extinguished.
4. Press and release the appropriate CTU circuit breaker button on the CBM
to the out (off) position. Ensure the RADIO STATUS LED is extinguished.
WARNING Ensure that RF power is OFF, before disconnecting RF

5. Unscrew the coaxial cable from the Tx OUT SMA connector at the top of
the CTU front panel.
6. Unscrew the two CTU attachment screws using M4 Torx driver.
WARNING The CTU weighs 5 kg. Handle with care.
CAUTION Take care to avoid damage of CTU rear connectors when

handling outside of the cabinet.
7. Withdraw the CTU using the handle. Support the unit from underneath as
it slides out.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–11
Replacing a CTU GSM-208-523
Fitting a replacement CTU

To fit a replacement CTU:
1. Ensure that the correct CTU push-on/push-off circuit breaker button on the
CBM has been pressed to the out (off) position.
2. Ensure that the transmit RF power of the correct CTU has been locked
using the lock_device or shutdown_device command at the OMC-R
or from a PC connected to the MCUF.
3. Insert replacement CTU module, taking care to locate the module on the
guide rails. Press firmly into place.
4. Tighten both module attachment screws to the correct torque (see
Overview of replacement procedures), using an M4 Torx driver.
NOTE The Tx cable has a at one end, and a straight SMA
connector at the other end. The 90° end is designed for
connection to the Tx port of a CTU.
5. Screw the 90° SMA connector of the coaxial cable onto the Tx OUT SMA
connector at the top of the CTU front panel. Tighten to correct torque (see
Overview of replacement procedures).
6. Press and release the appropriate CTU circuit breaker button on the CBM.
The RADIO STATUS LED will flash green for about two minutes, and then
remain lit.
CAUTION If both RADIO STATUS and Tx STATUS LEDs are
flashing, the bootcode is downloading into non-volatile
memory for software upgrade. Power should not be
removed, nor the cabinet reset, until downloading has
been completed, as this will corrupt the non-volatile
memory. If bootcode is corrupted, contact Motorola
Customer Network Resolution Centre requesting the
bootcode restoration procedure and the appropriate
bootcode file.
7. Enable the CTU transmit RF power by using the unlock_device or

ins_device command at the OMC-R or from a PC connected to the
MCUF. The Tx STATUS LED (yellow) will be lit if the CTU is transmitting.
8. Calibrate the CTU using the appropriate procedure, as described in CTU
calibration data exchange procedures later in this chapter.
activity.

Maint. 4–12 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Preserving CTU calibration
Preserving CTU calibration
Introduction to
preserving CTU
calibration
This section describes the preserve CTU transceiver calibration feature, which
uses commands to store, display and clear calibration data. This feature is used
on busy systems where there is a need to replace a CTU quickly and thus
reduce system down time during peak hours.
NOTE After the CTU has been replaced, it will be necessary to
revisit the site at an off-peak period to carry out bay level
and cell site power (CSPWR) calibration to fully optimize
the hardware. The bay level calibration procedure is
described later in this chapter. The CSPWR calibration
procedure is described in Chapter 3 of this category.
Calibration data
overview
This function enables malfunctioning CTUs to be replaced without the need to
remove the cell from service. The calibration offsets can be displayed and
cleared using the disp_cal_data and clear_cal_data commands.
Display calibration offsets data

The disp_cal_data command only displays offsets from the CTU if the DRI is in
the busy-unlocked (B-U) state. The GPROC CM database values are displayed
when the CTU is locked or not busy. If the calibration values have been cleared,
they will not be available on the specific RAM of the CTU or the CM database,
and the response will be NO CALIBRATION DATA AVAILABLE.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–13
Preserving CTU calibration GSM-208-523
Store calibration data

The store_cal_data command sets a flag to indicate that when the CTU is
unlocked and comes into service, the calibration values will be copied from the
RAM in the CTU into the GPROC CM database. The values from the RAM in
the CTU will only be copied to the database if there are no calibration values in
the GPROC CM database, and if the CTU has values in the RAM to be copied.
If the RAM in the CTU has been cleared of all values, and the GPROC CM
database has calibration values for that specific CTU, when the CTU is unlocked
it will get a copy of these values from the CM database. Different calibration
values for the same CTU can exist in the CM database and the RAM in the
CTU.
Care has to be taken when calibrating a CTU. To ensure that the values in the
RAM of the CTU and CM database have the same calibration data, the existing
values have to be cleared using the clear_cal_data command before a
calibration can be successful and the correct calibration data saved. Calibration
data is stored in the master CM database at the BSC, and is used to update the
CM database copy at the BTS if it is valid.
NOTE The value 80H must be cleared from all the paths
(columns of data) stored in the CTU, otherwise the
calibration data will not be uploaded to the CM database.
Clear calibration data

The clear_cal_data command removes the offsets from RAM and the
database. To clear the data from a CTU that is B-U in the network, the
command is issued after the CTU is locked. A new CTU being put into the
network must first be allowed to become B-U and then locked, only after this will
the command clear the calibration data for that CTU. This is explained in the
calibration procedure.

Maint. 4–14 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
Calibration data exchange procedures

The process of uploading/downloading calibration data between the CTU and
the CM database is automatic, but the actual procedure used is determined by
one of the scenarios described in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 CTU calibration scenarios and procedures

Scenario: Site Description Procedure Used
initialization with ...
calibration data held If a CTU malfunctions and has to Preserve CTU
in the CM database, be replaced, the associated DRI is calibration data
but with invalid/no locked and the malfunctioning
calibration data in the CTU replaced with a new CTU
CTU. while the cell remains in service.
The DRI is then unlocked. When
the executive message Radio
Standby Success is received by
the CA at the BTS, the database
is queried to determine if any valid
offset data is stored. If any is
found in the database, this is
downloaded to the new CTU and
the CTU is allowed to come into
service (B-U).
invalid/no calibration Once the CA at the BTS receives CTU calibration
data held in the CM the executive message Radio
database and Standby Success, it checks the
invalid/no calibration CM database for valid offsets. If
data in the CTU. none exist, the BTS then queries
the CTU for valid data. If none
exists in the CTU, the CTU is
brought into service but the
Invalid transceiver calibration
data alarm is triggered.
invalid/no calibration Initially a CTU is calibrated and CTU
data held in the CM the antenna offsets stored within recalibration
database, but with the CTU. When the BTS initializes
valid calibration data and enters call processing mode,
in the CTU. the Central Authority (CA) at the
BTS queries Configuration
Management (CM) to see if valid
offset data exists. If no valid data
exists then the CTU(s) are queried
for the offset data, which is sent
via the Radio Signalling Link
(RSL) to the CM at the BSC.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–15
Preserving CTU calibration GSM-208-523
Calibration data format from the CM database

The format of the calibration data output from the CM database is described
here. This information is provided in response to the command:
disp_cal_data <location> DRI <device_id> <device_id2>
[<device_id3>]
For example:
disp_cal_data 21 dri 5 3 0
Where: 21 is: site

dri dri device
5 first dev_id
3 second dev_id
0 third dev_id
System response:
DRI ID 5 3 0
Data read from transceiver
Calibration data (All values in Hex):
Transmit Power Offset = 77
Receive System Data:
Antenna Number 1 2 3 4 5 6
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
73, 77, 74, 7E, 70, 81,
77, 81, 71, 76, 6D, 74,
74, 6F, 68, 69, 70, 83,
6D, 55, 56, 57, 55, 68,
67, 65, 66, 56, 80, 77,
66, 6C, 5F, 66, 78, 54,
67, 66, 56, 5F, 6C, 6D,
77, 5F, 66, 87, 9D, 56,
66, 66, 65, 64, 62, 44,
54, 5A, 5D, 5F, 60, 55,
55, 43, 44, 4D, 4E, 44,
65, 6F, 6D, 67, 77, 81,
66, 45, 4F, 4D, 44, 4A,
61, 60, 64, 66, 6D, 64,
54, 5D, 55, 5F, 60, 5B,
5D, 55, 5A, 67, 6F, 60,
Note that the second line of the system response indicates whether the data is
read from the CTU or the database. In the example above the information is
read from the CTU.
The number of rows of offset calibration data are as follows:
S GSM850 – 16
S PGSM900 – 16
S EGSM900 – 22
S DCS1800 – 47
S PCS1900 – 38

Maint. 4–16 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
Test equipment
required
The following equipment is needed to carry out the CTU calibration/recalibration
procedures:
S An IBM-compatible personal computer (PC).
S Terminal emulator software.
S A 9-way to 9-way cable (BTS).
S A 9-way to 25-way cable (BSC).
Commands
used
Table 4-3 lists the commands required to carry out this procedure.
Table 4-3 CTU calibration commands
BTS Command Function
lock_device Prevents the device being used (see Note below).
unlock_device Enables the device to be used (see Note below).
OMC-R/BSC Function
Command
store_cal_data Stores calibration data for all transceivers in the master
CM database at the BSC, which is then used to update
the CM database copy at the BTS.
disp_cal_data When transceiver is locked: Displays calibration data in
the CM database for the specified transceiver.
When transceiver is unlocked: Displays calibration data in
the RAM of the specified transceiver.
clear_cal_data Clears calibration data in the CM database at the BSC
and BTS for a specified transceiver.
NOTE Use shutdown_device instead of lock_device if the
CTU is currently active. Use ins_device instead of
unlock_device if shutdown_device was used to lock
the CTU.
NOTE If there is no RSL from the BTS to the BSC then a

command will not be executed by the BSC, as the BSC
has no knowledge of the command being entered.
All calibration data is stored in the master CM database at the BSC, which is
then used to update the CM database copy at the BTS only if the data is valid.
CINDY
commissioning
tool
Many of the procedures described in this chapter can be carried out
automatically using the CINDY commissioning tool. Refer to the relevant CINDY
user documentation for details.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–17
Enabling the preserve CTU calibration data feature GSM-208-523
Enabling the preserve CTU calibration data feature
Introduction to
the preserve
CTU calibration
data feature
NOTE The preserve CTU calibration data feature must be
enabled at either the OMC-R or the BSC, otherwise none
of the calibration data exchange procedures described in
Table 4-2 will work.
Determine the BSC/BTS configuration and cage slot allocation before starting
any of the calibration data exchange procedures.
Enabling the
preserve feature
at the OMC-R
Proceed as follows to enable the preserve CTU calibration data feature at the
OMC-R:
1. At the OMC-R man-machine interface (MMI), log in to the required base
site controller (BSC).
2. To initiate the preserve feature type:
store_cal_data <site_id>
All calibration data will be stored in the master CM database at the BSC, which
is then used to update the CM database copy at the BTS (if the data is valid).
Enabling the
preserve feature
at the BSC
Proceed as follows to enable the preserve CTU calibration data feature at the
BSC:
1. Connect the 9-way to 25-way cable from the PC serial A port to the BSP
TTY port.
3. At the MMI prompt, enter the appropriate level change command and
passwords.
4. At the MMI prompt type:
store_cal_data <location>

Maint. 4–18 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 CTU calibration data exchange procedures
CTU calibration data exchange procedures
Introduction to
CTU calibration
data exchange
procedures
The procedures listed in Table 4-2 are described here in detail. All three
procedures assume that the preserve CTU calibration data feature (described
previously) has been enabled.
Preserve CTU
calibration data
procedure
NOTE This procedure assumes that the store_cal_data
command has been used on the CTU at some time
previously while it was operational.
To replace a CTU using preserved calibration data, follow the procedures for
CTU replacement given previously in Replacement procedure for CTU.
The calibration data stored in the CM database is downloaded into the RAM of
the new CTU. The data is also stored in the non-volatile CTU memory.
NOTE After the CTU has been replaced, it will still be necessary
to revisit the site at an off-peak hour, to carry out bay level
and CSPWR calibration to fully optimize the hardware.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–19
CTU calibration data exchange procedures GSM-208-523
CTU calibration
procedures
Calibrating the CTU

This procedure is used to put a new CTU into service. If recalibration of a
working CTU is required, use the CTU recalibration procedures provided later
in this chapter.
Proceed as follows to calibrate the new CTU:
NOTE The CTU requires a code load prior to the calibration
process. Wait until the CTU finishes the code load and
stops flashing (in BUSY-UNLOCKED or
ENABLED-UNLOCKED state) before proceeding.
1. Lock all the DRIs in the same sector of the CTU to be calibrated. Always
lock the CTU providing the BCCH last, as this prevents the BCCH
switching to an alternative CTU. Enter the following command for each
of the DRIs.
lock_device <location> DRI <device_id1> <device_id2>
[<device_id3>]
2. Display the data in the CM database for the CTU to be calibrated:
disp_cal_data <location> DRI <device_id1>
3. If valid data is present, proceed to step 4. If the response seen is:
NO CALIBRATION DATA AVAILABLE
Enter the following:

4. Check there is calibration data present in the CM database for the DRI,
then clear that data for the CTU to be calibrated:
clear_cal_data <location> DRI <device_id1>
5. Confirm the data has been cleared from the CM database for the specified
CTU:
If no problems have occurred, the response will be:
NO DATA AVAILABLE
NOTE If there is a different response, ensure the CTU is in the

LOCKED state and carry out from step 2 again.
6. Carry out bay level and CSPWR procedures, as described in the relevant
section of this manual. Record the data.

Maint. 4–20 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
Checking the CTU calibration

Proceed as follows to check the CTU calibration:
1. Unlock the DRI of the calibrated CTU.
NOTE Ensure the previous calibration data has been cleared
before unlocking the CTU.
Enter the command:

unlock_device <location> DRI <device_id1>
Check that the calibrated CTU passes into BUSY-UNLOCKED state. The
new calibration data is uploaded to the CM database and is then used to
update the copy at the BTS.
2. Check the calibration data of the DRI of the calibrated CTU against the
values noted in step 6 of the previous procedure.
NOTE Allow one minute after uploading for the values in the CM
database at the BSC to be updated.
Enter the command:

The values seen should match the previous ones.
NOTE If the CTU is BUSY-UNLOCKED the data can be read
directly from the CTU. In ENABLED-UNLOCKED or
LOCKED state calibration data is read from the CM
database.
3. Make test calls in all timeslots of the new DRI to check audio quality and
then lock the tested DRI using the command:
lock_device <location> DRI <device_id1>
4. With the CTU LOCKED (or in ENABLED-UNLOCKED state), ensure the
calibration process has been carried out correctly by checking that the CM
database at the BSC has been updated with the new values.
Enter the command:
5. If everything is in order, the cell can be put back into service. Unlock all the
DRIs in the same sector that were locked previously using the command:
unlock_device <location> DRI <device_id1> <device_id2>
[<device_id3>]

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–21
CTU calibration data exchange procedures GSM-208-523
CTU
recalibration
procedures
Recalibrating the CTU

This procedure is used to recalibrate a working CTU when there is invalid or no
calibration data held in the CM database, but valid calibration data is present in
the CTU.
Proceed as follows to recalibrate the CTU:
1. At the site BTP, remote login to the serving BSC and enter the following
MMI command:
2. Lock all the DRIs in the same sector of the CTU to be recalibrated.
Always lock the CTU providing the BCCH last, as this prevents the
BCCH switching to an alternative CTU. Enter the following command for
each of the DRIs:
lock_device <location> DRI <device_id1> <device_id2>
[<device_id3>]
3. Display the data in the CM database for the CTU that is to be recalibrated
in the sector:
4. If valid data is present proceed to step 5. If the response seen is:
NO CALIBRATION DATA AVAILABLE
Enter the following:

5. Check there is calibration data present in the CM database for the DRI,
then clear that data for the CTU to be recalibrated:
clear_cal_data <location> DRI <device_id1>
6. Confirm the data has been cleared from the CM database for the specified
CTU:
If no problems have occurred, the response will be:
NO DATA AVAILABLE
NOTE If there is a different response, ensure the CTU is in the

LOCKED state and proceed from step 3 again.
7. Carry out bay level and CSPWR procedures, as described in the relevant
section of this manual. Record the data.

Maint. 4–22 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
Checking the CTU recalibration

Proceed as follows to check the recalibration:
1. Unlock the DRI of the recalibrated CTU.
NOTE Ensure the previous calibration data has been cleared
before unlocking the CTU.
Enter the command:

unlock_device <location> DRI <device_id1>
Check that the recalibrated CTU passes into UNLOCKED state. The new
calibration data is uploaded to the CM database and is then used to
update the copy at the BTS (even if the DRI does not have an RTF
assigned).
2. Check the calibration data of the DRI of the recalibrated CTU against the
values noted in step 7 of the previous procedure.
NOTE Allow one minute after uploading for the values in the CM
database at the BSC to be updated.
Enter the command:

NOTE If the CTU is BUSY-UNLOCKED the data can be read
directly from the CTU. In ENABLED-UNLOCKED or
LOCKED state calibration data is read from the CM
database.
3. Lock the tested DRI using the command:

lock_device <location> DRI <device_id1>
4. With the CTU LOCKED (or in ENABLED-UNLOCKED state), ensure the
recalibration process has been carried out correctly, by checking that the
CM database at the BSC has been updated with the new values.
Enter the command:
5. If everything is in order, the cell can be put back into service. Unlock all the
DRIs in the same sector that were locked previously using the command:
unlock_device <location> DRI <device_id1> <device_id2>
[<device_id3>]

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–23
Calibrating CTU bay level offset tables GSM-208-523
Calibrating CTU bay level offset tables
Introduction to
bay level offset
tables
calibration
NOTE CTU bay level offset tables calibration and VSWR checks
can be carried out automatically using the CINDY
commissioning tool. Refer to the relevant CINDY user
documentation for details.
Follow this procedure to calibrate the bay level offset tables to compensate for
the losses or gains due to preselectors and RF cabling from the antenna inputs
at the Horizonmacro to the CTU input.
All units are factory calibrated. This procedure is thus necessary only if one of
the following changes occur:
S A CTU is replaced.
S RF front end equipment is changed.
S The site is reconfigured.
S High power duplexers are fitted.
NOTE The procedures contained in Calibrating Horizonmacro
CTU bay level offset tables are to calibrate a single CTU.
Repeat the procedures for all CTUs affected by the
changes listed above.
Test equipment
required
The following test equipment is required:
S A 50 ohm 50 W dummy load.
S A signal generator (0 to 2 GHz).
S A 9-way to 9-way MCUF/CTU cable.
S A 9-way to 9-way EQCP/RSS CTU cable.
CAUTION All test equipment and test leads must be calibrated
annually by a recognized laboratory. Test equipment and
test leads must not be calibrated in the field.
Do not optimize Motorola cellular base stations with test
equipment that is beyond its calibration due date.
Allow test equipment to warm up for 30 minutes before
use.

Maint. 4–24 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Calibrating CTU bay level offset tables
Commands
used
Table 4-4 details the MMI commands that must be used to carry out the
procedure:
NOTE 1. The symbol 0 used in the commands in this procedure
is a zero.
2. BSS MMI commands may be entered in upper or lower
case. All other commands must be entered in the case
shown below.
CTU passwords are not case sensitive.
Table 4-4 MMI commands for CTU bay level offset calibration
BSS MMI command Function
ins_device Initializes the device, bringing it into service.
lock_device Prevents the device being used.
unlock_device Frees the device for further use.
clear_cal_data Clears previously stored calibration data for a specified
radio unit on a per DRI basis.
CTU TTY command Function
TEST Places the CTU into test mode.
BBH ALARM OFF Inhibits the BBH alarm.
CAL BAY @1/@2 Calibrates the bay level receive equipment.
AIC OUT Disables automatic intermodulation compensation.
ACT C Activates the Control Processor.
TS A CHAN # Sets all timeslots to channel #.
TS A ANT # Sets all timeslots to antenna #.
SYNTH 1 Stops synthesizer switching with synth 1 permanently on.
SYNTH NRM Enables synthesizer switching into normal working.
SAVE CAL BAY Transfers bay level calibration stored data in RAM to
FLASH EPROM.
BAYDONE @N Informs control processor that bay level calibration is
valid for branch N and sets bay level flag.
HALT C Stops the control processor.
WRENB Write enables the FLASH EPROM.
WRPTC Write protects the FLASH EPROM.
FR BAY Reads cal bay offsets from FLASH EPROM.
MR BAY Reads cal bay offsets from RAM.
CTU command Function
tcu_clock 0 Stops the CTU hunting between fibre A and fibre B and
forces the CTU to look only at fibre A.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–25
Preparation for
bay level
calibration
The RF path has to be prepared for bay level calibration. The CTU has to be
reset and locked, a dummy load connected if no antenna and the alarms
disabled. Proceed as follows:
1. Connect the 9-way to 9-way MCUF cable from the PC serial A port to
MCUF TTY port.
ins_device # dri A * 0
Where: # is: the number of the site logged

into.
A the antenna/relative cell
number (0 to 5).
* DRI number on the antenna.
NOTE The CTU must be brought into service as there is no flash

EPROM storage of code at the transceiver control
processor level.
If a connection to the BSC is not available a PCMCIA
commissioning card must be used.
4. Wait for the radio to finish initializing, then lock the cell using the lock
device command.
WARNING Failure to lock the cell could result in the BCCH

transmitting into, and causing damage to the signal
generator. Maintenance personnel could receive RF burns
when connecting to the antenna socket.
Type:
lock_device # dri A * 0

into.
number (0 to 5).
NOTE For ease of calibration, all CTUs in a cell should be

initialized and then locked. Always lock the transceiver
providing the BCCH last as this prevents the BCCH being
switched to alternate transceivers.

Maint. 4–26 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
5. Type:
clear_cal_data # dri A * 0
into.
number (0 to 5).
NOTE The clear_cal_data command clears all calibration data

out of the CM database. This is required to override the
preserve calibration feature, if enabled.
6. Connect port COM1 on the PC to the TTY Interface port on the transceiver
using the 9-way to 9-way EQCP/RSS cable.
7. At the MMI-ROM prompt type:
tcu_clock 0
The system responds with the following:
WARNING: CTU must be reset to get connection to MCU.
8. If a tx antenna is not connected to the radio under test, connect a 50 ohm

50 W dummy load to the Tx port of the radio under test.
CAUTION Ensure that you have entered the tcu_clock 0 command
at the RSS MMI-ROM 0000> prompt, as shown in step 7
before entering call processing to avoid EQCP instability
at step 3 of Bay level calibration (next procedure).
9. Switch the 9-way to 9-way EQCP/RSS cable from providing RSS

connectivity to providing EQCP connectivity.
10. At the EQCP prompt type:
.GSMFW
TEST
WARNING: The EQCP is now in test mode.
11. At the EQCP TEST prompt type:

BBH ALARM OFF
The alarm reporting for the BBH connection is turned off

AIC OUT
The AIC pad for branch 1 is OUT.
The AIC pad for branch 2 is OUT.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–27
Branch 1 RX0A
bay level
calibration
procedure
The following procedure is used for bay level calibration of branch 1 RX0A:
1. Connect the output of the signal generator to branch 1 of the antenna port
at the top of the Horizonmacro cabinet.
NOTE It is important to choose the correct number in the TS A
ANT command.
If Rx path is 0A or 0B of SURF then antenna is TS A ANT
1.
2.
3.
For 900 MHz dual band SURF, if Rx path is 1800 1A or
1800 1B of SURF then antenna is TS A ANT 2.
The antenna number can also be found by using the disp_equipment #
DRI A * 0 command. The number next to antenna_select is the antenna
number.
2. Set the signal generator to the first (lowest) test frequency for the correct
frequency band under test and set the output level of the signal generator
to
–65 dBm.
Table 4-5 to Table 4-8 list the test frequencies for GSM850, EGSM900,
DCS1800 and PCS1900 frequency bands.
ACT C
The EQCP is in the Call Processing state
Warning: After locking carrier down, enter CTU_CLOCK 0 command at RSS
MMI-ROM 0000> prompt before entering Call Processing to avoid EQCP
instability.
TS A ANT 1
All timeslots are under user control.
TS A CHAN #
Where: # is: the channel number of the
selected frequency, as shown
in the test frequency tables.
The data for all timeslots has been changed.

Maint. 4–28 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02

SYNTH 1
Synthesizer 1 is enabled.

CAL BAY @1
BAY LEVEL OFFSET = XX
Where XX = The hex value of the bay level reading.

SYNTH NRM
The system is under real time control.
9. Set the signal generator to the next frequency and repeat steps 5 and 6
for all the test frequencies in the appropriate test frequency table.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–29
Test frequency
tables
The GSM850, EGSM900, DCS1800 and PCS1900 test frequencies are listed in
Table 4-5, Table 4-6, Table 4-7 and Table 4-8.
Table 4-5 GSM850 test frequencies

Channel Frequency Channel Frequency
(MHz) (MHz)
132 825.001 196 837.801
140 826.601 204 839.401
148 828.201 212 841.001
156 829.801 220 842.601
164 831.401 228 844.201
172 833.001 236 845.801
180 834.601 244 847.401
188 836.201 250 848.601
Table 4-6 EGSM900 test frequencies

(MHz) (MHz)
979 881.001 43 898.601
987 882.601 51 900.201
995 884.201 59 901.801
1003 885.801 67 903.401
1011 887.401 75 905.001
1019 889.001 83 906.601
03 890.601 91 908.201
11 892.201 99 909.801
19 893.801 107 911.401
27 895.401 115 913.001
35 897.001 123 914.601

Maint. 4–30 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
Table 4-7 DCS1800 test frequencies

(MHz) (MHz)
516 1711.001 708 1749.401
524 1712.601 716 1751.001
532 1714.201 724 1752.601
540 1715.801 732 1754.201
548 1717.401 740 1755.801
556 1719.001 748 1757.401
564 1720.601 756 1759.001
572 1722.201 764 1760.601
580 1723.801 772 1762.201
588 1725.401 780 1763.801
596 1727.001 788 1765.401
604 1728.601 796 1767.001
612 1730.201 804 1768.601
620 1731.801 812 1770.201
628 1733.401 820 1771.801
636 1735.001 828 1773.401
644 1736.601 836 1775.001
652 1738.201 844 1776.601
660 1739.801 852 1778.201
668 1741.401 860 1779.801
676 1743.001 868 1781.401
684 1744.601 876 1783.001
692 1746.201 883 1784.401
700 1747.801

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–31
Table 4-8 PCS1900 test frequencies

(MHz) (MHz)
516 1851.001 668 1881.401
524 1852.601 676 1883.001
532 1854.201 684 1884.601
540 1855.801 692 1886.201
548 1857.401 700 1887.801
556 1859.001 708 1889.401
564 1860.601 716 1891.001
572 1862.201 724 1892.601
580 1863.801 732 1894.201
588 1865.401 740 1895.801
596 1867.001 748 1897.401
604 1868.601 756 1899.001
612 1870.201 764 1900.601
620 1871.801 772 1902.201
628 1873.401 780 1903.801
636 1875.001 788 1905.401
644 1876.601 796 1907.001
652 1878.201 804 1908.601
660 1879.801

Maint. 4–32 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
Branch 1 RX1A
bay level
calibration
procedure
Continue the bay level calibration procedure for the second antenna port as
follows:
1. Connect the output of the generator to RX1A.
2. Set the signal generator to provide –65.0 dBm at the antenna port and to
the first channel test frequency shown in the appropriate test frequency
table.
TS A ANT 2
TS A CHAN #

SYNTH 1
CAL BAY @1
SYNTH NRM

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–33
Branch 1 RX2A
bay level
calibration
procedure
Continue the bay level calibration procedure for the third antenna port as
follows:
1. Connect the output of the generator to RX2A.
table.
TS A ANT 3
TS A CHAN #

SYNTH 1
CAL BAY @1
SYNTH NRM

Maint. 4–34 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
900 (dual band)

SURF Rx1800
1A bay level
calibration
procedure
For the 900 MHz dual band SURF modules, two additional antenna ports, 1800
1A and 1800 1B, are available for 1800 MHz use.
NOTE On earlier dual band SURFs the 1A and 1B second
frequency ports are designated 0A and 0B respectively.
Continue the bay level calibration procedure for the branch 1 1800 antenna port
as follows:
1. Connect the output of the generator to RX1800 1A.
table.
TS A ANT 2
TS A CHAN #

SYNTH 1
CAL BAY @1
SYNTH NRM

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–35
Branch
completion
To complete the bay level procedure for the branch:
BAYDONE @1
BAY LEVEL CALIBRATION IS DONE

HALT C
The EQCP is in the Active Standby state

WRENB
Device OK. Flash is now write enabled.

SAVE CAL BAY
Save Cal Completed.

WRPTC
Flash is now write protected.
Branch 2
procedure
Repeat the procedures Bay level calibration branch 1 RX0A, Bay level
repeat for RX1A, Bay level repeat for RX2A and Bay level repeat for
RX1800 1A for branch 2 by connecting to RX0B, RX1B, RX2B and RX1800 1B
alternately. Enter @2 instead of @1 in the cal bay and baydone commands.

Maint. 4–36 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
Calibration
check
procedure
The following procedure should be used to check the bay level calibration has
been successful.
1. To verify that the bay level offset values have been stored in EPROM, use
the read command with the required offset address as an argument.
Offset addresses for the relevant frequency band can be found in
Table 4-9 to Table 4-12.
FR BAY To verify writes to flash.

MR BAY To verify writes to RAM.
Table 4-9 lists the CTU frequency offset addresses for GSM850
frequencies.
Table 4-9 CTU frequency offset addresses (GSM850)

Bay Level Calibration Storage Flash Address
Branch 1 Valid Flag A000700
Branch 1 Checksum A000706
Bay Level Offsets For Branch 1 Antenna 1 A00070C – A00073B
Bay Level Offsets For Branch 1 Antenna 2 A00073C – A00076B
Bay Level Offsets For Branch 1 Antenna 3 A00076D – A00079B
Bay Level Offsets For Branch 2 Antenna 1 A00079C – A0007CB
Bay Level Offsets For Branch 2 Antenna 2 A0007CC – A0007FB
Bay Level Offsets For Branch 2 Antenna 3 A0007FC – A00082B
GSM850 CTUs store offsets in 16 locations in each memory area per
antenna per branch.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–37
Table 4-10 lists the CTU frequency offset addresses for EGSM900
frequencies.
Table 4-10 CTU frequency offset addresses (EGSM900)

Bay Level Offsets For Branch 1 Antenna 1 A00070C – A00074D
Bay Level Offsets For Branch 1 Antenna 2 A00074E – A00078F
Bay Level Offsets For Branch 1 Antenna 3 A000790 – A0007D1
Bay Level Offsets For Branch 2 Antenna 1 A0007D2 – A000813
Bay Level Offsets For Branch 2 Antenna 2 A000814 – A000855
EGSM900 CTUs store offsets in 22 locations in each memory area per
antenna per branch.
Table 4-11 lists the CTU frequency offset addresses for DCS1800
frequencies.
Table 4-11 CTU frequency offset addresses (DCS1800)

Bay Level Offsets For Branch 1 Antenna 1 A00070C – A000798
Bay Level Offsets For Branch 1 Antenna 3 A000826 – A0008B2
Bay Level Offsets For Branch 2 Antenna 1 A0008B3 – A00093F
Bay Level Offsets For Branch 2 Antenna 2 A000940 – A0009CC
Bay Level Offsets For Branch 2 Antenna 3 A0009CD – A000A59
DCS1800 CTUs store offsets in 47 locations in each memory area per
antenna per branch.

Maint. 4–38 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
Table 4-12 lists the CTU frequency offset addresses for PCS1900
frequencies.
Table 4-12 CTU frequency offset addresses (PCS1900)

Bay Level Offsets For Branch 1 Antenna 1 A00070C – A00077D
Bay Level Offsets For Branch 1 Antenna 2 A00077E – A0007EF
Bay Level Offsets For Branch 1 Antenna 3 A0007F0 – A000861
Bay Level Offsets For Branch 2 Antenna 1 A000862 – A0008D3
Bay Level Offsets For Branch 2 Antenna 2 A0008D4 – A000945
Bay Level Offsets For Branch 2 Antenna 3 A000946 – A0009B7
PCS1900 CTUs store offsets in 38 locations in each memory area per
antenna per branch.
NOTE Each location consists of three bytes. For example, the
branch 1 valid flag data is stored in address locations
A000700, A000701 and A000702.
2. The following is an example of the first line of the FLASH BAY LEVEL
OFFSET table when using the FR BAY command, and a description of the
fields displayed:
Addres BR1 BR2 BR1 BR2 BL BL BL BL

s flag Cksum Cksum offse offse offse offse
t t t t
A000700 00000 000001 000595 000060 000002 000005 000002
1 000595
The remaining rows of the table contain BL offset values

3. If the bay level calibration is successful, each appropriate table location
will contain valid offsets, and not the factory default of 80.
NOTE Any value from 81 to FF and 00 to 7F except 80 is a valid
offset.
4. The value 80 indicates an unsuccessful calibration procedure or an

uncalibrated antenna port and will result in error alarm DRI 218: Invalid
Transceiver Calibration Data being reported when the unit is unlocked.
The calibration procedure will have to be repeated after checking the
configuration and RF cables.
NOTE Unused data columns in a site configuration may have
value 80. No alarm will be reported as such table locations
are inappropriate to the site.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–39
Site restoration
After the bay level calibration procedure is completed, restore the site by the
following:
1. Remove the signal generator and dummy load and refit the site RF cables.
2. Remove the 9-way to 9-way cable from the TTY interface port on the CTU.
3. Connect the 9-way to 9-way cable from the PC serial A port to a MCUF
TTY port.
CAUTION The following step must be carried out to initialize software
and so ensure the CTU is correctly brought into service.
4. Press the reset button on the front panel of the CTU.

5. Type:
unlock_device # dri A * 0

into.
number (0 to 5).
The CTU is now in the unlocked_busy state.

6. Type:
disp_act_alarm # dri A * 0

into.
number (0 to 5).
Confirm that there is no DRI 218 alarm. If there is a DRI 218 alarm, redo
the whole bay level calibration procedure
7. Remove the 9-way to 9-way cable from the MCUF TTY port.

Maint. 4–40 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Replacing a Tx block module or plate
Replacing a Tx block module or plate
Preconditions
for Tx block
replacement
CAUTION An earthing wrist strap must be worn when handling digital

modules. An ESP earthing connection point is provided
There are three slots for Tx blocks in the top panel basket of a cabinet, above
the CTUs. There are four types of Tx block; DCF, TDF, DDF and HCU.
Replacing a Tx block requires removal of RF transmitter power for the CTU(s)
that connect with the faulty Tx block; it is therefore advisable to perform this
procedure during periods of low traffic. The OMC-R should be notified of
imminent repair activity.
It is important to ensure that all unused Tx block M6 screw locations have a
screw in place and are tightened to the correct torque (3.4 Nm). This is to
ensure maximum quality of EMC and general containment.
Views of Tx
blocks
Figure 4-6 shows a typical Tx block module used in this cabinet.
7/16 CONNECTOR TO
N-TYPE CONNECTOR ANTENNA
TO SURF
SMA Tx CONNECTORS FROM

TRANSCEIVERS.
Figure 4-6 Views of typical Tx block

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–41
Replacing a Tx block module or plate GSM-208-523
Replacement
procedure for
Tx blocks
Removing a faulty Tx block

cables are disconnected. Ensure that all associated CTUs
are identified, such as inputs to an HCU which may in turn
connect to the faulty Tx block.
To remove a Tx block module proceed as follows:

1. Locate the faulty Tx module, and note the RF cable connections to it to
enable correct reconnection to the replacement module.
2. Identify the two CTUs that make the Tx connections attached underneath
the module (plus a third Tx on top of a DDF). See Table 4-13.
Table 4-13 Connectors for each type of Tx block module

Tx SMA from transceiver Tx 7/16 Rx/Tx N-type Rx to
block to antenna SURF
DCF 2 (beneath Tx block) 1 1
TDF 2 (beneath Tx block) 2 2
DDF 3 (2 beneath Tx block) 1 1
(1 on top of Tx block from HCU)
HCU 2 0 1 to next Tx block
3. Disable each CTU transmit RF power by using the shutdown_device
command at the OMC-R or from a PC connected to the MCUF.

(GSM–100–321) for information on usage and specific
device codes.
4. When each CTU has been locked, check that the Tx status LED (yellow) is
extinguished.
5. Press and release each CTU circuit breaker button on the CBM to the out
(off) position. Ensure each RADIO STATUS LED is extinguished.
6. Disconnect all coaxial RF cables by carefully unscrewing and pulling them
out of the module sockets. Note the positions for correct replacement.
7. Using a Torxdriver, unscrew and retain the two M6 Torx screws holding the
module to the top of the cabinet.
WARNING Tx blocks can weigh as much as 5 kg. Handle with care.
8. Using the handles, lift the Tx block from the basket.

Maint. 4–42 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Replacing a Tx block module or plate
Fitting a replacement Tx block

To install a replacement Tx block proceed as follows:
1. Transfer the protective caps on the RF connectors from the replacement
module to the faulty module.
2. Carefully install the replacement Tx block module into its basket location
on the top panel, adjusting alignment for retaining screws. Take care to
avoid trapping cables as the Tx block is seated.
3. Fit the two M6 Torx screws to hold the module to the top of the cabinet
and tighten to 3.4 Nm.
4. Reconnect the coaxial RF cables to the positions noted in the removal
procedure. Carefully place them into the module sockets and screw down.
Tighten to the correct torque.
5. Press each appropriate CTU circuit breaker button on the CBM. Each
RADIO STATUS LED will flash green for about two minutes, and then stay
illuminated.
6. Enable the CTU transmit RF power by using the ins_device command
at the OMC-R or from a PC connected to the MCUF. The Tx STATUS LED
(yellow) will be lit if the CTU is transmitting.
activity.
Blanking plate,
feedthrough
plate or HCU
replacement
The procedure for plates is the same as for Tx blocks, but the plates are held by
six M4 screws in the base of the Tx block basket. The two M6 Tx block screw
locations are not used for plate attachment.
It is important to ensure that all unused Tx block M6 screw locations have a
screw in place and tightened to 3.4 Nm. This is to ensure maximum quality of
EMC and general containment.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–43
Replacing a SURF module GSM-208-523
Replacing a SURF module
Preconditions
for SURF
replacement
The cabinet contains only one SURF module, either a dual band SURF or a
single band SURF. Consequently, the replacement of a SURF module can only
take place after the cabinet has been taken out of service, in agreement with the
OMC-R.
CAUTION An earthing wrist strap must be worn when handling SURF
View of the
SURF module
Figure 4-7 shows a single band SURF module (later type). Where RX-Pn
appears in Figure 4-7, the n may be 850, 900, 1800 or 1900, depending on the
frequency of the SURF module.
RX-Pn SIX N-TYPE RECEIVE ANTENNA CONNECTIONS

2B (2 PER DLNB EQUIVALENT)
RX-Pn RX-Pn
1B 0B
RX-Pn
RX-Pn
1A
2A
RX-Pn
0A
EXTENSION PORTS
TO OTHER
CABINETS
M6 MODULE HANDLE FOR

ATTACHMENT MODULE
SCREWS REMOVAL
Single Band SURF GUIDES FOR

INSERTION
3 CONNECTORS ON
UNDERSIDE TO SURF
HARNESS
Figure 4-7 View of a later type single band SURF module
NOTE The dual band SURF replacement procedure is almost

identical, with the addition of the extra two second
frequency antenna connections.

Maint. 4–44 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Replacing a SURF module
Replacement of
a SURF module
Removing a faulty SURF module

To remove a SURF module, proceed as follows:
1. Note the RF cable connections to the SURF module to enable correct
reconnection to the replacement module.
WARNING Before disconnecting RF cables, ensure that RF power is

OFF. Severe burns may result if RF power is ON when
2. Disable all CTU transmit RF power by using the shutdown_device

command at the OMC-R or from a PC connected to the MCUF.
(GSM-100-321) for information on usage and specific
device codes.
3. When each CTU has been locked, check that the Tx STATUS LED
(yellow) is extinguished.
4. Press and release the CTU circuit breaker buttons on the CBM to the out
(off) position. Ensure each RADIO STATUS LED is extinguished.
5. Press and release the SURF circuit breaker button on the CBM to the out
(off) position.
6. Disconnect the coaxial RF cables by carefully unscrewing and pulling
them out of the module sockets. Note the positions for correct
replacement.
7. Using a Torxdriver, unscrew the four M6 Torx captive screws holding the
SURF module to the top of the cabinet.
8. Using the handles, lift the SURF block from the slot.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–45
Replacing a SURF module GSM-208-523
Fitting a replacement SURF module

To install a replacement SURF module, proceed as follows.
1. Transfer the protective caps on the RF connectors from the replacement
module to the faulty module.
2. Insert the replacement SURF module firmly into place. Take care to avoid
trapping cables as the module is seated.
3. Tighten the four captive M6 Torx screws to 3.4 Nm.
4. Reconnect the coaxial RF cables to the positions noted in the removal
procedure, and screw down. Tighten to the correct torque.
5. Press the SURF circuit breaker button on the CBM.
6. Press the CTU circuit breaker buttons on the CBM. Each RADIO STATUS
LED will flash green for about two minutes, and then stay illuminated.
7. Enable the CTU transmit RF power by using the ins_device command
at the OMC-R or from a PC connected to the MCUF. The Tx STATUS LED
(yellow) will be lit if the CTU is transmitting.
activity.
The SURF module is now installed and working.

Maint. 4–46 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Digital module replacement (MCUF, NIU, FMUX, BPSM, alarm)
Digital module replacement (MCUF, NIU, FMUX, BPSM, alarm)
Introduction to
digital module
replacement
CAUTION MCUF removal during flash memory programming may
result in MCUF module boot code corruption. This is only
repairable by returning to Motorola. For this reason, the
MCUF should not be removed while the code load is
taking place, indicated by a flashing LED.
A faulty master MCUF, FMUX or BPSM will cause a redundant module (if fitted)
to take over until the faulty module is replaced. Faulty MCUF, FMUX and BPSM
modules can be hot swapped without harm to the module or effect on normal
operation, provided the equivalent redundant module has taken over.
Removal of a faulty digital module that has not had its function taken over by a
redundant module, and is still partially functional, will affect service. Inform the
OMC-R before replacing out such modules.
Diagram of
digital modules
Figure 4-8 shows the location of modules within the digital module shelf.
DIGITAL
MCUF B MODULE SHELF
FMUX
NIU B0
NIU B1
BPSM
REDUNDANT (B)
ALARM
MODULE
MASTER (A)
MCUF A
FMUX
NIU A0
NIU A1
BPSM ig.322.rh
Figure 4-8 Digital and BPSM module locations, including optional redundancy

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–47
Digital module replacement (MCUF, NIU, FMUX, BPSM, alarm) GSM-208-523
Replacement
procedures for
digital modules
Removing a faulty digital module

To remove a digital module:
WARNING There is a possibility of laser radiation when fibre optic

cables are disconnected. Do not look directly into cables
with or without the use of optical aids. Radiation can come
from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated
fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.
CAUTION An earthing wrist strap must be worn when handling digital

1. If the faulty digital module is still partially operating, due to no redundant

alternative module, inform the OMC-R before proceeding.
2. Locate the faulty module, as shown in Figure 4-8.
3. Note location of any fibre optic cable connections to the module, (MCUF or
FMUX modules only), to enable correct reconnection to the replacement
module.
4. Disconnect each fibre optic cable by gently pushing the knurled connector
in and rotating it through a quarter-turn anticlockwise to disengage, and
then carefully withdrawing the cable.
NOTE It is advisable to protect the tips of the fibre optic cables
with a protective cover, and secure the cables to one side.
5. Unseat the module by gripping the upper and lower pair of ejectors
between the thumb and first finger of each hand, then gently squeezing
and pulling on the ejectors until the module unclips at the top and bottom
of the front panel and unplugs from the rear connector.
6. Carefully slide the module from its location and place it in an anti-static
storage container.

Maint. 4–48 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Digital module replacement (MCUF, NIU, FMUX, BPSM, alarm)
Fitting a replacement digital module

To install a replacement digital module:
1. Remove the replacement module from the anti-static storage container. In
the case of the NIU, ensure it is of the correct type (E1 or T1).
2. Slide the module into the guide rails and push firmly into place. The
ejectors will audibly click into place as confirmation of correct insertion.
3. Connect any fibre optic cables by inserting the connector and rotating a
quarter-turn clockwise to engage.
NOTE Ensure fibre optic cables are correctly connected to the
locations noted during module removal.
4. Ensure the appropriate LEDs indicate correct operation.

CAUTION When the two LEDs of the MCUF, are flashing, the boot
code is downloading into non-volatile memory for software
upgrade. Power should not be removed, nor the cabinet
reset, until downloading has been completed, as this will
corrupt the non-volatile memory. If the boot code is
corrupted, contact Motorola Customer Network Resolution
Centre requesting the boot code restoration procedure
and the appropriate boot code file.
NOTE Following an NIU switch on or reboot, both red and green

LEDs are initially lit. After approximately 20 seconds, the
red LED will extinguish, indicating normal condition. This
waiting period may be extended to 50 seconds after
rebooting due to a code download.
5. When fitting a redundant MCUF refer to Redundant MCUF firmware

compatibility for details of further checks required.
activity.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–49
Redundant MCUF firmware compatibility GSM-208-523
Redundant MCUF firmware compatibility

Overview of
MCUF firmware
compatibility
In many installations a redundant MCUF is fitted and configured to assume
control in the event of a failure of the master MCUF. Under normal
circumstances, the redundant MCUF accepts code downloads from the master
MCUF and so remains updated and available for use.
If the redundant MCUF is replaced with a module containing firmware which is
incompatible with the master MCUF firmware, then the communicating link
between MCUFs will not be established. The redundant MCUF will therefore not
be updated and will not be available to take over when required.
Checking MCUF
firmware
compatibility
To check firmware compatibility between MCUFs, check the state of the base
transceiver processor (BTP) within each MCUF as follows:
1. Connect a PC to the TTY connection on the master MCUF.
2. At the CUST MMI prompt, enter:
state <site #> btp * *
Where <site #> is the site number.
The status of both BTPs will be displayed as follows:
BTP 0 0 0 B–U NO REASON
BTP 1 0 0 E–U NO REASON
or,
BTP 1 0 0 D–U No Redundant Link
If No Redundant Link is indicated then the master MCUF is not in communication
with the redundant MCUF and firmware incompatibility may be assumed. Refer
to Updating redundant MCUF firmware.
Updating
redundant
MCUF firmware
The following procedure to update firmware in the redundant MCUF requires a
PCMCIA card containing current network configuration data. The procedure
assumes that the PCMCIA card is already in the master MCUF.
NOTE No call processing can take place during the MCUF
firmware update process. The entire process should take
approximately one hour.

Maint. 4–50 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Redundant MCUF firmware compatibility
Site preparation
To prepare for the firmware update the site must first be taken out-of-service as
follows:
2. At the CUST MMI prompt, disable all CTUs in turn by typing:
shutdown_device <site #> dri * * * <seconds>
Where <site #> is the site number, * * * is the DRI identifier and
<seconds> is the time delay before shutdown occurs.
3. Confirm this action by observing each CTU Tx status LED, which should
extinguish shortly after issuing the shutdown command.
4. Disconnect the 2.048 Mbit/s link
Redundant MCUF firmware update procedure
The following procedure describes how to update redundant MCUF firmware by
placing the redundant MCUF into the master position and downloading code
from a PCMCIA card.
1. Remove the uploaded PCMCIA card from the master MCUF, and ensure
that write protect is switched to OFF.
2. Remove both MCUFs. Insert the PCMCIA card into the original redundant
MCUF then insert this MCUF into the master position.
3. Connect a PC to the TTY connection on the MCUF front panel.
4. At the MMI-ROM prompt, type:
burn
This will flash object 8, the MCUF boot object, from the PCMCIA card onto
the MCUF card. The flash download takes approximately 30 seconds,
then the MCUF will reset.
5. At the MMI ROM prompt, type:
set_site <site #>
The MCUF now carries out a system initialization using data from the
PCMCIA card. After a short wait the screen displays:
Initialization complete. All commands accepted.
The MCUF firmware update is complete and both MCUFs now hold
identical firmware. The MCUF originally removed from the master position
may now be used in the redundant position.
6. Insert the original master MCUF into the redundant position.
The redundant MCUF now requires a 15 minute sync warm up period,
followed by a further delay of four minutes while the two MCUFs achieve
phase lock. Once phase lock is achieved the master MCUF immediately
begins codeloading to the redundant MCUF. Codeloading takes a further
15 minutes.
The process is complete when the following message is displayed on
screen:
Redundant MSW is INS
<*><*><*> NEW STANDBY Switch CONFIGURED <*><*><*>

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–51
Redundant MCUF firmware compatibility GSM-208-523
7. To confirm correct MCUF status, at the CUST MMI prompt, enter:

Where B–U is busy unlocked (master) and E-U is enabled unlocked

(redundant).
8. Reconnect the 2.048 Mbit/s link.
NOTE There is no need to unlock the CTUs as these are
automatically unlocked during the initialization procedure.
NOTE If a PCMCIA card is not available then the firmware in the

redundant MCUF may be updated by removing the master
MCUF and placing the redundant MCUF in the master
position. Code download from the BSC will ensure the
newly installed MCUF is fully updated. This procedure
however is likely to take up to 30 minutes longer than the
procedure involving a PCMCIA card, resulting in a longer
out of service time for the BTS.

Maint. 4–52 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Redundant MCUF firmware compatibility
Testing MCUF
redundancy
The following procedure tests MCUF redundancy by forcing the master and
redundant MCUFs to swap roles. The commands refer to the base transceiver
processors (BTPs) within each MCUF.
2. At the CUST MMI prompt, type:
Where B–U is busy unlocked (master) and E-U is enabled unlocked
(redundant).
3. At the CUST MMI prompt type:
swap_devices <site #> btp 0 0 0 btp 1 0 0
Where <site #> is the site number, btp 0 0 0 is the master MCUF and btp
1 0 0 is the redundant MCUF.
This command will swap MCUF roles by forcing:
S the redundant MCUF into a busy state , and making it master.
S the master MCUF into an enabled state, and making it redundant.
4. At the CUST MMI prompt, confirm the swap by typing:
The status of both BTPs will now show changed roles:
5. Make test calls on the site to verify the new master MCUF.
6. At the CUST MMI prompt type, swap the MCUFs back to their original
states by typing:
swap_devices <site #> btp 1 0 0 btp 0 0 0
Where <site #> is the site number, btp 1 0 0 is the master MCUF and btp
0 0 0 is the redundant MCUF.
7. At the CUST MMI prompt, confirm the swap by typing:
Both BTPs have now reverted to their original roles:
8. Make test calls on the site to verify the new master MCUF.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–53
Calibrating the MCUF (GCLK) GSM-208-523
Calibrating the MCUF (GCLK)

Introduction to
MCUF (GLCK)
calibration
NOTE GCLK calibration can be carried out automatically using
the CINDY commissioning tool. Refer to the relevant
CINDY user documentation for details.
This procedure explains how to calibrate the Ovenized Crystal Oscillator

(OCXO) in the MCUF GCLK in the Horizonmacro product at a BSS site.
When to
calibrate the
GCLK
The calibration procedure is to be used on the following occasions:
S When more than one frame slip per hour is observed at the OMC-R
(typically more than 34/day).
S Whenever calibration is required. (Display the active alarms for a site - if
calibration is required, there will be an alarm stating this.)
CAUTION This procedure should only be carried out by by fully
trained, GSM qualified personnel. Under NO
circumstances should this procedure be undertaken,
unless all the correct test equipment is readily available.
NOTE The command gclk_cal_mode used in this procedure

should only be executed at the BTS where the calibration
is being carried out.
No call processing can occur involving the MCUF during
calibration mode.
Allow a period of 15 minutes to elapse after switching the
OCXO power on, to give sufficient time for the unit to
reach operating temperature and achieve frequency
stabilization.
Test equipment
required
The test equipment required to carry out the GCLK calibration is as follows:
S An IBM compatible personal computer (PC).
S A 9-way to 9-way TTY cable.
S A caesium or rubidium clock standard with 1 or 10 MHz output frequency.
S A Universal counter with external reference, for example, the Hewlett
Packard model HP5385A or equivalent.
S A BNC to 3-way MCUF test lead, part number 3086144E01.

Maint. 4–54 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Calibrating the MCUF (GCLK)
Preparation for
GCLK
calibration
The following procedure is used to prepare the MCUF (GCLK) for calibration:
1. Connect the serial A port of the PC to the MCUF TTY port using the 9-way
to 9-way TTY cable (see Figure 4-9).
2. Start the terminal emulator program.
3. Connect the output from the 10 MHz standard to the reference input of the
frequency counter, select external standard.
4. Set the frequency gate time to 10 seconds and the display to 10
significant digits.
5. Connect the test cable extracting the 8 kHz output signal from the front of
the MCUF to the input of the frequency counter.
Pin 3 – Earth (top pin)
Pin 1 – 8 kHz signal (bottom pin)
MCUF TTY
MCUF
8 kHz OUT
8000.000000
10 MHz REFERENCE
UNIVERSAL COUNTER
Figure 4-9 Horizonmacro GCLK calibration cable connections

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–55
GCLK
calibration
procedure
The following procedure is used to calibrate the MCUF (GCLK):
1. At the MMI-RAM 1015 prompt type:
clear_gclk_avgs <location>
Where <location> is the site number
2. A prompt for a mms id appears. Enter:
0 0
3. To start the GCLK calibration mode, enter the command:
gclk_cal_mode
The gclk_cal_mode command is used to tell the sync function and
MCUF software that a calibration is to be performed.
NOTE The gclk_cal_mode command is used to tell the sync
function and MCUF software that a calibration is to be
performed and can only be executed at Horizonmacro
sites outside sysgen mode. The command is NOT allowed
on a master MCUF when a standby MCUF is available.
When the command is executed the system will prompt for verification:
Site <Local site number> starting GCLK CALIBRATION MODE. If this is
a single MCU site, the site will be down until calibration is
complete.
Are you sure (y=yes, n=no)?
Enter:
y
The MCUF will begin calibration mode. The command is aborted if the
reply is anything other than y.
4. The following prompt will appear:
Frequency Counter Connected, Enter y when ready, or a to abort test.
Enter:
y
The command is aborted and calibration mode exited if the reply is
anything other than y.

Maint. 4–56 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Calibrating the MCUF (GCLK)
5. Adjust the OCXO control voltage using the +/– and 0 to 3 keys until the
measured frequency is exactly 8000,000000 Hz.
The values entered here, change the frequency by varying degrees. For
example:
– +0 will increase the output by a small amount.
– +1 will increase the frequency by approximately 10 times.
These are not exact values as every OCXO has a different gain. This
method gives sufficient control to correct the frequency within a short time.
A typical sequence of numbers may look as follows:
Enter a to abort. s to save, +(0..3) to inc, –(0..3) to dec >–3
(7.99999898)
Enter a to abort. s to save, +(0..3) to inc, –(0..3) to dec >+3

(8.00000020)

(8.00000019 - 8.00000020)

(8.00000004)

(8.00000020)

(8.00000018)

(8.00000002 -8.00000003)

(8.000000--)

(8.000000-)

(8.00000000)
6. A prompt will appear for saving the results:

Enter a to abort, s to save, +(0..3) to inc, –(0..3) to dec >
Enter:
s
CAL OFFSET is 23654 DAC bits.
After calibration, the MCUF applies a set of voltages to the DAC that feeds
the OCXO, requiring the user to input the corresponding output frequency.
This is necessary because the OCXO frequency/voltage characteristic is
not linear and the MCUF adjusts for this by taking readings across a range
of DAC voltages.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–57
7. To calibrate the OCXO, gain, enter the measured frequency value from the
counter after the value has settled in response to the MMI prompts.
NOTE When taking frequency measurements, ensure that a full
gate period elapses from the time the new value is set to
reading the counter. This wait may be several seconds
depending on the counter.
A typical sequence of frequency measurements may be presented as

follows:
Dac set to 1.0 volts, Enter Freq Value or a to abort > 7999.99853
Calibration Gain 3.865560e-01

SYNC>
NOTE The MCUF is reset when the calibration is complete.
8. On completion, the MCUF will automatically reject the calibration if it is

outside the threshold and the following message will be displayed:
Computed Gain > Max WILL RETRY GAIN
Calibration must be performed again. If calibration fails the second time

with the same or similar value, the OCXO may be operating outside the
Motorola specification, in which case the MCUF is deemed faulty and
should be replaced.

Maint. 4–58 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Replacing a door
Replacing a door
Introduction to
door
replacement
The door is essential to the correct operation of the air circulation system. The
door also provides protection to equipment inside. For these reasons, the
replacement procedure should be completed in one session, and the cabinet
then secured.
Views of the
door
Figure 4-10 shows an inside and outside view of the door.
INTERNAL VIEW
DOOR ALARM DOOR STOP
BRACKET BRACKET
EXTERNAL VIEW
VERTICAL AIR
BAFFLE
HONEYCOMB
VENTILATION
VENTILATION TRIGGER
GRID LATCH ig.266.rh
Figure 4-10 Inside and outside views of the door

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–59
Replacing a door GSM-208-523
Replacing a
door
Removing a faulty door

To remove a door, open and proceed as follows:
1. At the cabinet, unscrew the M6 nut, holding the door earth cable to the
cabinet. Retain the nut for re-use.
2. Unscrew the M6 holding screw on the slide arm several turns, then
unhook the slide arm from the cabinet attachment point by lifting up.
3. Open the door to about 90° and lift off its hinges.
Fitting a replacement door

CAUTION Avoid damaging the honeycomb door vent.
To install a replacement door:

1. Hold the door at about 90° to the cabinet and lift onto its hinges.
2. Attach the door earth cable to the cabinet using the M6 nut. Tighten the
nut to 3.4 Nm.
3. Place the slide arm onto the cabinet attachment holding point and turn the
M6 holding screw several times.

Maint. 4–60 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Replacing a cabinet heat sensor
Replacing a cabinet heat sensor
Overview of
heat sensors
Heat sensors plug into the backplane from the front, above the CTUs. Each one
can be detached separately and a replacement inserted. CTUs are removed to
gain access for this procedure.
There is one 70 _C sensor and two 85 _C sensors. Each sensor is marked with
the appropriate temperature.
Procedure for
heat sensor
replacement
The procedure for replacing heat sensors is as follows:
WARNING Before disconnecting RF cables, ensure that the RF

power is OFF by turning off the cabinet PSMs. Severe
burns may result if RF power is ON when cables are
disconnected.
1. Remove the CTUs (see Replacing a CTU).

2. Identify the faulty heat sensor.
3. Remove the faulty heat sensor by unplugging from the backplane.
4. Install a replacement heat sensor by pushing firmly into place.
5. Install the CTUs (see Replacing a CTU).
The heat sensors should now be operational.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 4–61
Replacing a cabinet heat sensor GSM-208-523

Maint. 4–62 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
Chapter 5
Ancillary enclosure FRU
replacement procedures

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A i
GSM-208-523

ii 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523
Chapter 5
FRU list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 5–1

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A iii
GSM-208-523

iv 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Overview of ancillary enclosure FRU replacement procedures
Overview of ancillary enclosure FRU replacement procedures
Introduction to
FRU
replacement
are connected.
on the equipment.
This part of the chapter provides information on the replacement of field

replaceable units (FRUs) in the ancillary enclosure. Only components classed
as FRUs are described here
All FRUs may be hot swapped while the BBS is operational. There is no
requirement to power down the BBS.
NOTE Customers requiring replacement of items not classed as

FRUs should contact their local Motorola office for
availability of parts, and seek Motorola advice for
replacement procedures.
Any requirement to open the enclosure door is assumed in procedures. Closing

and locking the door is assumed at the end of any procedure.
Where customers wish to perform a minor repair on a FRU to save the cost of
full replacement, they should consult Motorola for more detailed procedures or
replacement components.
FRU list
The following is a list of FRUs used in the ancillary enclosure:
S Battery strings.
S Heater unit.
S Voltage sense boards.
S Voltage sense cables.
S Fuses.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 5–1
Overview of ancillary enclosure FRU replacement procedures GSM-208-523
FRU view of the

ancillary
enclosure
Figure 5-1 shows the ancillary enclosure with all FRUs identified, except the
voltage sense cables.
3 x VOLTAGE SENSE BOARDS

(BEHIND PANEL ON BMM)
BATTERY STRING 3
BATTERY STRING 2
BATTERY STRING 1
HEATER UNIT
Figure 5-1 Ancillary enclosure FRU components, excluding voltage sense

cables

Maint. 5–2 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Replacing a battery string
Replacing a battery string
Introduction to
battery string
replacement
The ancillary enclosure may contain four, eight, or twelve 12 V monoblocs,
arranged in one, two, or three strings of four monoblocs each. The replacement
procedure given here applies to any battery string installed in the ancillary
enclosure.
WARNING There is a danger of explosion if monoblocs are incorrectly

fitted.
Replace only with the same type, or equivalent
recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used
monoblocs in accordance with manufacturers instructions
and local safety regulations.
Internal battery
replacement
procedure
are connected.
A battery string can be replaced while the equipment is in service, provided it is

isolated from the rest of the system by switching the associated battery circuit
breaker to OFF.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 5–3
Replacing a battery string GSM-208-523
Safety precautions
Observe the following safety precautions when removing monoblocs and
installing replacements:
WARNING Ensure the appropriate battery circuit breaker BATTERY

1, BATTERY 2 or BATTERY 3 is set to the OFF position.
S Use insulated tools when disconnecting/connecting monobloc terminals

together.
S Remove jewellery and watches before starting work.
S The battery cables and monobloc terminals are colour coded:
BLUE cables on the left side of the enclosure are negative (–) and
must only be connected to the blue (–) terminal of monobloc 4 on
each shelf (see Figure 5-3).
BLACK cables on the right side of the enclosure are positive (+) and
must only be connected to the red (+) terminal of monobloc 1 on
each shelf.
S Do not remove the insulated boot from each battery cable termination until
immediately before connecting the cable to the monobloc.
S Do not leave exposed cables loose in the enclosure.
S If a battery string is to be removed and not replaced, ensure that the
cables to the unused string are insulated from the enclosure and each
other by fitting the insulating boots provided.

Maint. 5–4 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
Removing the old monoblocs

The following procedure describes how to disconnect and remove the
monoblocs:
1. Switch off the circuit breaker on the front of the BMM for the battery string
to be replaced.
2. Remove the shelf retaining bracket mounted on the left side of the
enclosure by undoing the two retaining screws (see Figure 5-2). Pull the
shelf forward until it reaches the shelf stop.
3. Referring to Figure 5-3, disconnect the black 0 V cable and its voltage
sense cable and then the blue –48 V cable and its voltage sense cable
from the outer monoblocs. Fit an insulating boot over each cable
termination as soon as it is disconnected from the monobloc.
WARNING The 0 V cable must be disconnected before the –48 V

cable on each battery string.
4. Disconnect the copper links between monoblocs 1 to 2, 2 to 3 and 3 to 4.
5. Remove the plastic monobloc securing bars and then remove the inner
two monoblocs from the shelf.

objects.
6. Remove the two M8 studded bars and then remove the two outer
monoblocs.
SHELF
SHELF RETAINING BRACKET
Figure 5-2 Battery shelf detail showing retaining bracket

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 5–5
–48 V
(BLUE)
LINK BAR
0V
(BLACK)
VOLTAGE
SENSE
CABLE
THERMAL
PROBE CABLE
(IF FITTED)
VOLTAGE
SENSE CABLES
Figure 5-3 Battery string connections

Maint. 5–6 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
Installing new monoblocs

CAUTION All four monoblocs within a battery string must be of the
same type. However, each complete battery string may
contain different monobloc types from those contained in
the other battery strings.
1. If different monoblocs are to be installed, adjust the position of the

backstop bracket to the rear of the shelf accordingly (see Figure 5-4).
Secure the backstop bracket in position by tightening the three M6 bolts.
HAWKER SBS C11 GNB MARATHON HAWKER CHLORIDE YUASA INDEPENDENCE

POWERSAFE
Figure 5-4 Backstop bracket positions for different monobloc types
2. If Hawker monoblocs are being installed, fit the supplied M8 to M6

adapters on the monobloc terminals.
3. Lift monobloc 1 and then monobloc 4 into position on the outer sides of
the shelf. Locate the two supplied M8 studded bars into the shelf inserts
along the inner sides of the monoblocs and fasten securely.

objects.
4. Install and secure the remaining two monoblocs.

5. Mount the supplied plastic bars over each pair of monoblocs and secure
them to the studded bars using the nuts and washers provided.
6. Push the shelf back into position and refit the shelf retaining bracket.
7. Apply grease (supplied) to the terminals of each monobloc.
8. Connect the supplied copper link bars between the monobloc terminals.
Note that the terminals on the Yuasa monoblocs connect using the inner
screw holes on the link bars, whereas the terminals on the monoblocs
from the other manufacturers connect using the outer screw holes.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 5–7
Connecting monobloc cables

1. Refer to Figure 5-3 and connect the –48 V (blue) cable and the loose
left-hand voltage sense cable to the negative terminal of monobloc 4.
2. Connect the 0 V (black) cable and the loose right-hand voltage sense
cable to the positive terminal of monobloc 1.
3. Tighten all terminal bolts to the correct torque (see Table 5-1) and then fit
the terminal protective covers.
Table 5-1 Monobloc terminal torque settings

Monobloc Type Torque Setting
Hawker SBS C11 5 Nm
Hawker Chloride Powersafe 4 Nm
GNB Marathon 11.3 Nm
Yuasa Independence 4 Nm
4. Switch on the circuit breaker for the new battery string and press the
RESET button on the front of the BMM. Check that the green HEALTHY
LED for the new battery string is illuminated.

Maint. 5–8 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Replacing the heater unit
Replacing the heater unit
Introduction to
heater
replacement
The heater unit is mounted in the base of the ancillary enclosure. Replacement
can be carried out while the enclosure is in service, provided the ac supply is
isolated using the ac isolator switch (also mounted in the base of the enclosure).
Replacement
procedure for
the heater
To remove the heater

1. Isolate the ac supply to the ancillary enclosure by turning the ac isolator
switch 90° anticlockwise.
2. Unplug the heater power connector from the front of the ac box (see
Figure 5-5).
3. Undo the two mounting screws (one on either side) that secure the heater
to the floor of the enclosure and lift the heater out of the enclosure.
HEATER TEST BUTTON
AC ISOLATOR SWITCH
HEATER UNIT
HEATER UNIT MOUNTING SCREW
Figure 5-5 Enclosure detail showing the heater, test button and ac isolator
switch

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 5–9
Replacing the heater unit GSM-208-523
To install a replacement heater

1. Repeat the heater removal procedure in reverse order.
2. Switch on the ac supply using the isolator switch.
3. Test the heater by pressing the heater test button while holding a hand
over the grille. Release the button as soon as heat is felt coming from the
heater.

Maint. 5–10 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Replacing a voltage sense board
Replacing a voltage sense board
Introduction to
voltage sense
board
replacement
Three voltage sense boards are installed horizontally in the BMM, behind a
removable panel. Replacement of any of these boards can be carried out while
the ancillary enclosure is in service.
Replacement
procedure for a
voltage sense
board
To remove a voltage sense board

1. Switch off the circuit breaker for the battery string which has the faulty
voltage sense board.
2. Label the D-type connectors for identification and then unplug them from
the front panel of the BMM.
3. Undo the four screws that secure the voltage sense board front panel to
the BMM (see Figure 5-6) and remove the panel.
4. Carefully withdraw the faulty board from its slot in the BMM.
PANEL PANEL
RETAINING RETAINING
SCREWS SCREWS
VOLTAGE SENSE BOARD

BEHIND FRONT PANEL
Figure 5-6 Voltage sense board front panel on the BMM

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 5–11
Replacing a voltage sense board GSM-208-523
To install a replacement voltage sense board

1. Insert the new voltage sense board into its slot and push home firmly.
2. Refit the front panel cover and tighten the four screws.
3. Reconnect all the D-type connectors to the correct sockets.
4. Switch on the appropriate battery string circuit breaker.
5. Press the RESET button on the front of the BMM. Check that the green
HEALTHY LED on the new voltage sense board is illuminated.

Maint. 5–12 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Replacing a voltage sense cable set
Replacing a voltage sense cable set

Introduction to
replacing
voltage sense
cables
Three sets of voltage sense cables are installed in the ancillary enclosure – one
set for each battery string. Each cable set connects between one of the voltage
sense boards in the BMM and the monobloc terminals in one of the battery
strings. Replacement of any of these cable sets can be carried out while the
ancillary enclosure is in service.
NOTE A voltage sense cable set is supplied complete with the
terminal link bars already fitted.

present in the enclosure when the AUXILIARIES CB2/4
isolator switch in the main enclosure and the ac supply
isolator switch at the bottom of the enclosure are set to the
on position and/or batteries are connected. Remove rings,
watches and jewellery before starting this procedure, and
exercise extreme caution when working on the equipment.
Replacement
procedure
To remove a voltage sense cable set
1. Switch off the circuit breaker for the battery string which has the faulty
voltage sense cable.
2. Unplug the D-type connector for the faulty voltage sense cable set from
the front panel of the BMM.
3. Disconnect the black 0 V cable and its voltage sense cable and then the
blue –48 V cable and its voltage sense cable from the outer monoblocs.
Fit an insulating boot over each cable termination as soon as it is
disconnected from the monobloc. Remove the copper links from between
the monoblocs.
4. Remove the complete cable set (with monobloc links) from the enclosure.
To install a replacement voltage sense cable set

1. Apply grease to the monobloc terminals.
2. Repeat the removal procedure in reverse order. Remember to connect the
blue –48 V cable before the black 0 V cable.
3. Press the RESET button on the front of the BMM. Check that the green
HEALTHY LED for the affected battery string is illuminated.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 5–13
Replacing a fuse GSM-208-523
Replacing a fuse
Introduction to
fuse
replacement
Five fuses are fitted in the BMM front panel, as shown in Figure 5-7 below.
Figure 5-7 Fuse locations on the BMM

The circuits protected are described in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2 Fuses
Designation Rating Circuit protected
FS1 8A BMM internal supply
FS2 2A Fan (not used)
FS3 100 mA Smoke alarm detector
FS4 2A LVD contactor
FS5 4A Customer equipment
Fuse
replacement
procedure
A fuse can be replaced as follows:
1. Insert a suitable size blade screwdriver into the fuse holder. Turn
anticlockwise to unscrew the fuse holder.
2. Withdraw the fuse holder from the BMM.
3. Remove the fuse from the holder and replace with a new fuse of the
correct rating.
4. Refit the fuse holder into the BMM front panel and turn clockwise to
tighten.

Maint. 5–14 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
Chapter 6
Site verification procedures

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A i
GSM-208-523

ii 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523
Chapter 6

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A iii
GSM-208-523

iv 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Introduction to Horizonmacro verification procedures
Introduction to Horizonmacro verification procedures
Purpose of this
chapter
This chapter provides information required for the verification of Horizonmacro
hardware equipment.
The procedures described in this chapter are as follows:
S Checking the antenna VSWR and calibrating the transmit output power.
S Checking the database equipage.
S Checking the E1/T1 link.
S Checking the PIX connections and alarm test.
CINDY
commissioning
tool
Many of the procedures described in this chapter can be carried out
automatically using the CINDY commissioning tool. Refer to the relevant CINDY
user documentation for details.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 6–1
Test equipment, leads and plugs GSM-208-523
Test equipment, leads and plugs
Introduction to
test equipment,
leads and plugs
This section provides information on the test equipment required for the
procedures in this chapter.
CAUTION Ensure that all test equipment associated with
commissioning of Motorola Cellular Base Stations is within
calibration date.
Test equipment
required
Table 6-1 provides details of the test equipment required to perform the hardware
verification procedures provided in this chapter:
Table 6-1 Hardware verification equipment

Quantity Description Comments
1 PC To have a serial comms port for
sending or configuring
messages to the BSC and/or
BTS
1 Signal generator Up to 2 GHz
1 Commercial terminal emulator PC PLUS or similar software
software
1 Digital multimeter Hewlett Packard E2378A or
equivalent
1 30dB attenuator 100 W minimum
1 RF adapter kit RTLXQ98088 or equivalent
2 N to 7/16 inch adapter
1 N to N barrel adapter
1 RF wattmeter with 5 W, 10 W Bird model 43 or equivalent
25 W and 50 W elements
1 2 metres of N to N male coaxial Must be calibrated
cable
1 4 metres of N to N male coaxial Must be calibrated
cable
2 9-way to 9-way cable Compatible with PC to TTY port
on CTU/MCUF
1 9-way to 9-way cable (CTU EQCP/RSS cable, connecting
only) PC to CTU TTY port

Maint. 6–2 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Test equipment, leads and plugs
Test leads
required
Test lead calibration

To minimize variations in test results, ensure that all appropriate test leads used
in hardware verification procedures are calibrated.
CAUTION A recognized laboratory must calibrate all test equipment
and associated test leads annually.
Do not calibrate test equipment or test leads in the field.
9-way to 9-way CTU/MCUF cable
2 3
3 2
5 5
8
4 m SCREENED CABLE
9-WAY D-TYPE
9-WAY D-TYPE
CTU CONNECTOR
PC COMMUNICATIONS PORT
Figure 6-1 Horizonmacro 9-way to 9-way hardware verification cable

connections

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 6–3
Test equipment, leads and plugs GSM-208-523
9-way to 9-way CTU cable

2 3
EQCP PINS
3 2
8
RSS PINS
5 5
4 m SCREENED
SELECTOR CABLE
SWITCH
9-WAY D-TYPE F CONNECTOR 25-WAY D-TYPE M CONNECTOR

(PC COMMUNICATIONS PORT) (CTU TTY PORT)
Figure 6-2 Horizonmacro 9-way to 9-way CTU cable connections
NOTE TCU-B test lead 3086240N01 may alternatively be used

instead of CTU test lead 3086299N01, but adapter
(58C86540N01) is required to attach the 25-way cable
connector to the 9-way CTU port.
Connections for a PIX test lead

Table 6-2 shows pinout details to make a PIX test lead.
Table 6-2 Test plug pin connections

From Pin To Pin
1 20
2 21
3 22
4 23
5 24
6 25
7 26
8 27
9 and 10 not used n/a
11 29
NOTE When making the PIX test lead:

Normally open (N/O) PIX inputs should be connected
through a 50 ohm resistor.
Normally closed (N/C) PIX inputs should be connected
through a 50 kohm resistor.
Details of N/O and N/C site inputs can be found in the
equip_eas file in the site commissioning database.

Maint. 6–4 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 CTU VSWR and cell site offset information
CTU VSWR and cell site offset information

Introduction to
output power
calibration and
VSWR check
NOTE CTU cell site offset calibration and VSWR checks can be
carried out automatically using the CINDY commissioning
tool. Refer to the relevant CINDY user documentation for
details.
The objective of the VSWR check and output power calibration procedure is to
ensure that antenna feeders and connectors are properly terminated and then
set the pre-defined maximum transmitter output power at the top of the cabinet.
When a transceiver is manufactured, it undergoes comprehensive transmit and
receive calibration procedures. These procedures aim to produce a transceiver
that exhibits a flat frequency response over the GSM band. In the case of the
transmitter, this is performed by distributing the channels over three detector
groups (the detector being the device that maintains a steady output power
level).
In the field, the procedure for setting the transmit output power involves using a
set of commands called Cell Site Power (CSPWR). During CSPWR the user can
trim the cabinet output power to account for any abnormalities that may occur
between the CTU and the top of the cabinet. The offset is effectively subtracted
from the requested power level, such that for whatever channel is selected, a
steady output is maintained at the top of the cabinet.
Test equipment
required
The following test equipment is required during the VSWR and output power
calibration procedure:
S A Bird model 43P (Thru-line) wattmeter, or equivalent, with 5 W and 50 W
elements.
S A 9-way to 9-way cable (a diagram of this cable is provided in the Test
equipment, leads and plugs section).
S A 9-way to 9-way EQCP/RSS cable.
S A 7/16 N-type adapter.
S A 50 ohm/100 W power attenuator.
Allow test equipment to warm up for 30 minutes before use.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 6–5
CTU VSWR and cell site offset information GSM-208-523
Commands
used
Table 6-3 lists the commands for the VSWR and output power calibration
procedure.
Table 6-3 VSWR and power calibration commands

BSS MMI Command Function
ins_device Initializes the device, bringing it into service.
lock_device Prevents the device being used.
unlock_device Frees the device for further use.
clear_cal_data Clears previously stored calibration data for a
specified radio unit on a per DRI basis.
CTU Command Function
tcu_clock 0 Stops the CTU hunting between link A and link B
and forces the CTU to look only at link A.
CTU Command Emulator Function
TEST Places the CTU in test mode.
ACT C Activates the control processor.
BBH ALARM OFF Inhibits the BBH alarm.
CSPWR Cell site power. Allows the cell site power to be
set to the maximum output power.
HALT C Stops the control processor.
TS <T> CHAN XXX Timeslot set up.
and Where: <T> = Timeslot no. or A = ALL
TS <T> TXPWR <nn> XXX = ARFCN to tune timeslot to.
nn = Attenuation level from max.
U and D Used with the CSPWR command to increase (U) or
decrease (D) the power level by a factor of 0.2 dB.
ESC (key)or CTRL-Y or Used to exit the CSPWR command and store the
CTRL-C resulting offset to RAM.
WRENB Write enables the FLASH EPROM.
SAVE CAL TX Used to store the resulting offset in FLASH
EPROM.
WRPTC Write protects the FLASH EPROM.
FR TX Reads Tx offset for FLASH EPROM.
MR TX Reads Tx offset for RAM.
SNDCMB Emulates combiner control processor messaging.
NOTE 1. The symbol 0 used in the commands is a zero.

2. BSS MMI commands may be entered in upper or lower
case. All other commands must be entered in the case
shown.

Maint. 6–6 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 CTU VSWR and cell site offset information
Test stages
There are four stages to the procedure:
S Preparing for test.
S Checking the VSWR.
S Calibrating the transmit output power.
S Restoring the site.
NOTE VSWR checks ensure correct antenna matching and can
prove the serviceability of the antenna. Repeat the
procedures for all antennas on site, including receive
antennas.
Preparation for
output power
calibration and
VSWR check
The following procedure is used to prepare for the VSWR check and output
power calibration:
1. Connect the 9-way to 9-way cable from the PC serial A port to MCU TTY
port.
ins_device # dri A *
into.
number (0 to 5).
NOTE The transceiver must be brought into service as there is

no flash EPROM storage of code at the radio control
processor level.
If a connection to the BSC is not available a PCMCIA
commissioning card must be used.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 6–7
CTU VSWR and cell site offset information GSM-208-523
4. Wait for the transceiver to finish initializing, then lock the DRI using the
lock device command.
WARNING An RF hazard exists during DRI transmissions. As one

antenna may be connected to a number of DRIs, the lock
command must be repeated for all DRIs on the antenna
being worked on before connecting the wattmeter.
Type:
lock_device # dri A *

into.
number (0 to 5).
NOTE For ease of calibration, all CTUs in a cell should be

initialized and then locked. Always lock the transceiver
providing the BCCH last, as this prevents the BCCH being
switched to alternate transceivers.
5. Type:
clear_cal_data # dri A * 0

into.
number (0 to 5).
NOTE The clear_cal_data command clears all calibration

data out of the CM database. This is required to override
the preserve calibration feature, if enabled.
6. Connect port COM1 on the PC to the TTY Interface port on the transceiver
using the 9-way to 9-way RSS cable.
7. At the MMI-ROM prompt type:
tcu_clock 0
The system will respond with the following:
WARNING: TCU must be reset to get connection to MCU.
NOTE Do not reset the CTU at this time. The reset is carried out
on completion of the CTU VSWR and cell site power
calibration procedure, as described in Site restoration.
8. Remove the 9-way to 9-way RSS cable from the transceiver and replace it
with the 9-way to 9-way EQCP cable.

Maint. 6–8 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Normal CTU VSWR and cell site power calibration
Normal CTU VSWR and cell site power calibration
Introduction to
normal VSWR
and cell site
power
calibration
NOTE CTU cell site power calibration and VSWR checks can be
carried out automatically using the CINDY commissioning
tool. Refer to the relevant CINDY user documentation for
details.
Two methods available for normal VSWR checking are described in this section;
one automatic and one manual. The reason for the two methods is as follows:
VSWR method 1 (automatic)

When typing the CSPWR command at the EQCP prompt, it effectively executes
a small script containing the following commands:
TS A CHAN 31 Set all timeslots to channel 31 (CTU900).

TS A TXP 00 Set all timeslots to full power.
MDLTR UC Turn the modulation off.
Prior to executing the CSPWR command, it assumes that the synthesizers are
in normal mode (not locked), as is the case after the unit is powered up for the
first time.
VSWR method 2 (manual)

To allow a specific channel to be specified (instead of defaulting to channels 31,
196, 668 or 700) additional commands must be entered, rather than using the
CSPWR command. One command sets the appropriate channel and the other
switches the CTU output power on and off.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 6–9
Normal CTU VSWR and cell site power calibration GSM-208-523
Automatic
VSWR test
procedure
The first method for normal VSWR checking uses automatic channel selection.
The CSPWR command automatically selects a midpoint channel number,
however if required manual channel selection can be performed following the
steps detailed in method 2.
WARNING Full power is transmitted during VSWR checks. Ensure all
personnel are clear of the antenna. Do not carry out this
check unless antenna installation is complete.
CAUTION To reduce the possibility of interference with other users,

minimize the time that the CTU is powered up.
The following procedure automatically checks the VSWR of the transmission path:
1. Disconnect antenna. Connect a dummy load to the meter, ensuring the
meter is fitted with a 50 W element and connect the meter to the Tx output.
.GSMFW
TEST
ACT C
BBH ALARM OFF
CSPWR
3. Monitor and record the wattmeter reading (the forward output power).
4. Press ESC or CTRL-Y or CTRL-C
5. Replace the 50 W element in the wattmeter with a 5 W element and
reverse the direction on the power meter.
6. Remove the dummy load and connect the power meter through to the
antenna.
CSPWR
8. Monitor and record the reverse power reading indicated on the power
meter.
NOTE Readings should show reflected (reverse) power of no
more than 5% of the forward power at the point of
measurement, and less than 1 W.
If the ratio of the forward and reverse readings is
unacceptable, suspect an improper termination of the
antenna feeder and connector.
9. Press ESC or CTRL-Y or CTRL-C

HALT C
11. Remove the power meter and reconnect the antenna.

Maint. 6–10 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
Manual VSWR
test procedure
The second method for normal VSWR checking allows the manual selection of a
channel.
The following procedure is used to manually check the VSWR of the
transmission path through to the antenna:
1. Disconnect the antenna. Connect a dummy load to the meter, ensuring the
meter is fitted with a 50 W element and connect the meter to the Tx
output.
.GSMFW
TEST
ACT C
BBH ALARM OFF
3. Enter the following command:
TS A CHAN nnn
Where: A is: all timeslots (TS).

nnn the specified channel number.
4. To switch the power on, enter the following command:

TS A TXPWR 00

00 maximum output power.
5. Monitor and record the wattmeter reading (the forward output power).
6. To switch the power off, enter the following command:
TS A TXPWR FF

FF zero output power.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 6–11
VSWR reverse
power test
procedure
WARNING Full power is transmitted during VSWR checks. Ensure all
personnel are clear of the antenna. Do not carry out this
check unless antenna installation is complete.
CAUTION To reduce the possibility of interference with other users,

minimize the time that the CTU is powered up.
The following procedure is used to manually check the VSWR reverse power:
1. Replace the 50 W element in the wattmeter with a 5 W element and
reverse the direction on the power meter.
2. Remove the dummy load and connect the power meter through to the
antenna.
3. To switch the power on, enter:
TS A TXPWR 00
4. Monitor and record the reverse power reading indicated on the power
meter.
NOTE Readings should show reflected (reverse) power of no
more than 5% of the forward power at the point of
measurement, and less than 1 W.
If the ratio of the forward and reverse readings is
unacceptable, suspect an improper termination of the
antenna feeder and connector.
5. To switch the power off, enter:

TS A TXPWR FF
6. Repeat the forward and reverse power checks for the required number of
channels.
HALT C

Maint. 6–12 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
Tx output power
calibration
procedure
NOTE Calibration is not required unless the desired configuration
is different to the shipped configuration.
The following procedure is used to calibrate CTU transmit output power:
1. Disconnect the antenna. Connect a dummy load to the meter ensuring the
meter is fitted with a 50 W element and connect the meter to the Tx
output.
.GSMFW
TEST
ACT C
BBH ALARM OFF
CSPWR
The following message is displayed:
Hit U or D until desired max is measured then
hit ESC, CTRL-Y or CTRL-C
4. Enter U or D to adjust the CTU Tx power to achieve the appropriate value,
as detailed in Table 6-4:
Table 6-4 Achievable Tx RF power output
RF configuration CTU900/850 CTU1800 CTU1900
TDF 40 W (46.0 dBm) 32 W (45.1 dBm) 32 W (45.1 dBm)
DCF 20 W (43.0 dBm) 16 W (42.1 dBm) 16 W (42.1 dBm)
DDF 8.5 W (39.3 dBm) 7 W (38.5 dBm) 6 W (38 dBm)
All Or the customer-specified value at the top of the cabinet,
taking cable losses into account.
5. As U or D is typed, a message similar to the following example, indicating
the CTU output power and offset value, is displayed:
D P: 46.8 dBm Cell Site Offset: 1
When the required output level is achieved, press ESC or CTRL-Y or
CTRL-C
HALT C
WRENB
SAVE CAL TX
WRPTC
NOTE The cell site offset can be checked by reading the memory
location:
S Use FR TX to verify writes to FLASH.
S Use MR TX to verify writes to RAM.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 6–13
7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 until all transceivers have been calibrated.

9. Use the Site restoration procedure to return the site to service.
Site restoration
After all installed CTUs have been checked and calibrated, perform the following
steps to restore the site: This is done in two stages:
S RF output power check.
S Returning the CTUs to call processing mode.
RF output
power check
To check RF output power:
1. Disconnect the antenna. Connect a dummy load to the meter and ensure
the meter is fitted with a 50 W element. Connect the meter to the Tx
output.
2. Remove the 9-way to 9-way EQCP cable from the TTY port and connect
the 9-way to 9-way cable to the MCU MMI port.
CAUTION The following step must be carried out to initialize software
and so ensure the CTU is correctly brought into service.
3. Press the reset button on the front panel of the CTU.
4. Unlock the DRI under test using the following commands:
unlock_device # dri A *
state # DRI A *
into.
number (0 to 5).
This returns the CTU to the Unlocked_Busy state (confirmed by the state
command).
5. Monitor and record the wattmeter reading. This should be the same as the
maximum power set up in step 3 of Calibrating cell site power.
6. Lock the CTU by entering:
lock_device # dri A * 0
into.
number (0 to 5).
Repeat steps 4 to 6 for all CTUs.

Maint. 6–14 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
Returning the
CTUs to call
processing
mode
To return the CTUs to call processing mode:
1. Remove the wattmeter and reconnect the antenna lead to the Tx port.
2. Unlock all CTUs tested using the command detailed in step 5 of RF
output power check.
3. Remove the 9-way to 9-way cable from the MCUF MMI port.
4. Inform the OMC-R the VSWR and cell site power calibration has been
completed.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 6–15
Checking the database equipage GSM-208-523
Checking the database equipage

Introduction to
checking the
database
The database equipage checks determine what devices and functions have
been equipped in the BSC/Horizonmacro database.
There are two stages to the procedure:
S Preparing for the test.
S Checking the database equipage.
Test equipment
required
The following test equipment is required during the procedure:
S A 9-way to 9-way cable (a diagram of this cable is provided in Figure 6-1
of the Test equipment, leads and plugs section).
use.
Commands
used
The following commands are used during the procedure:
disp_site Displays the site number.

disp_equipment Displays the active equipment at a specified site.
Preparation for
database
checks
To prepare for the database equipage checks:
1. Ensure that the site is in call processing mode.
2. Connect the serial A port on the PC to a MCUF TTY port using the 9-way
to 9-way cable.
3. Start the terminal emulator program at the PC.

Maint. 6–16 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Checking the database equipage
Database
equipage check
procedure
To check the database for devices and functions:
disp_site
The following message (from the MCUF) is displayed:
current site is #
where # = the number of the site logged into.

disp_equipment #
where # = the number of the site logged into.
A complete list of the equipment and functions in the database is
displayed. For example:
GPROC 0 0 0
GPROC 1 0 0
BSP 0 0 0
DRI 0 0 0
DRI 0 1 0
MSI 0 0 0
MMS 0 0 0
MMS 0 1 0
GCLK 0 0 0
KSW 0 0 0
CAB 0 0 0
SITE 0 0 0
RTF 0 0 0
RTF 0 1 0
3. To check the MSI configuration at the CUST MMI prompt type:

disp_equipment # MSI 1 0 0
Where: # = site number.
A message similar to the following example is displayed:
MSI identifier 1
Cage number 0
Slot number 16
MSI type 0 (0 = MSI)

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 6–17
Checking the E1/T1 link GSM-208-523
Checking the E1/T1 link

Introduction to
checking the
E1/T1 link
The E1/T1 link checks verify the integrity of the links back to the BSC/MSC.
S Checking the E1/T1 link.
Test equipment
required
The E1/T1 link checks require the following test equipment:
of the Test equipment, leads and plugs section).
use.
Commands
used
The following command is used to carry out the procedure:
state Displays the status of specified devices or functions.
Preparation for
the E1/T1 link
check
The following procedure is used to set up the equipment to check the E1/T1
links:
1. Make sure the site is in call processing mode.
2. Connect the serial A port on the PC to an MCUF TTY port using the 9-way
to 9-way cable.
The system and the hardware are set up to check the E1/T1 links.

Maint. 6–18 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Checking the E1/T1 link
E1/T1 link test

procedure
The following procedure is used to check the E1/T1 link:
1. Contact the BSC/MSC of the E1/T1 link to be tested, and request a
loopback on the relevant Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) port.
NOTE Repeat for all NIUs and E1/T1 links.
S If the E1/T1 link has not been installed, perform this
test at the DDF in the site.
S If no DDF is fitted, do this test at the top of the
cabinet.
2. Ascertain the site number, equipment list and MMS configuration.

3. At the CUST MMI prompt enter:
state # MMS * * *
Where: # is: location.
* dev/func id.
* dev/func id.
* dev/func id.
For example:
state 1 MMS 1 0 0
The system displays the following message from the MCU:
STATUS INFORMATION
Device: MMS 1 0 0
Administration state : Unlocked
Operational state : Busy
Reason code is : 0
Time of last transition : Wed Jan 5 01:43:13 1994
Related Device/Function:
Assigned to:
END OF STATUS REPORT
If this display shows Unlocked and Busy, then the NIU port (MMS), T43, cabling
and the E1/T1 link are all good.
If the loop is removed and the command re-entered, the result will be Unlocked
and Disabled.
NOTE The NIU requires a minimum of 20 seconds after receiving
these commands before it registers a change in status.
If the display continues to show Unlocked and Busy, this
may be because:
1. The wrong connection is looped, if the cabling is
direct.
2. The MMS may be terminated by a device generating
an E1/T1 link.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 6–19
Checking PIX connections and alarms GSM-208-523
Checking PIX connections and alarms
Introduction to
checking the
PIX connections
and alarms
The alarm tests check the serial connections and alarm status.
S Testing the PIX connections using the database external alarm system
(EAS).
Test equipment
required
The serial and alarm tests require the following test equipment:
of the Test equipment, leads and plugs section.
Do not optimize Motorola Cellular Base Stations with test
use.
Commands
used
The following command is used to test the PIX connections:
enable_alarm Enables alarm reporting for a specified site.

Maint. 6–20 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-523 Checking PIX connections and alarms
Preparing for
the PIX
connections
and alarms test
The following procedure is used to prepare for the PIX connections and alarms
test:
1. Make sure the software download has been completed.
2. Connect the serial A port on the PC to the master MCUF using the 9-way
to 9- way cable.
The system displays the CUST MMI prompt.
4. Enter the password at the CUST MMI prompt.
The equipment is set up for the test.
PIX connection
test procedure
The following procedure is used to test the PIX connections:
1. Apply suitable test plug to PIX input on cabinet top panel.
NOTE Wait at least six seconds before continuing the testing.
The time is required to allow polling to detect the presence
of the test plug.

enable_alarm #
Where: # is: the site number.
The system displays all 8 alarms.

NOTE The display depends on the database settings, that is,
whether a fault condition is indicated by a closed loop or
an open loop.
3. Remove the test plug.

The system clears the alarm display.

29th May 02 68P02902W69-A Maint. 6–21
Checking PIX connections and alarms GSM-208-523

Maint. 6–22 68P02902W69-A 29th May 02
CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2 CHAPTER 3
ENCLOSURE PARTS LIST HORIZONMACRO INDOOR ANCILLARY ENCLOSURE
CABINET PARTS LIST PARTS LIST
Category 623
Parts Information (Parts)
Parts Information: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

29th May 02 68P02902W70-A i
GSM-208-623

ii 68P02902W70-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-623
Category 623
Parts Information (Parts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
Chapter 1
FRU items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts 1–1
Chapter 2
Chapter 3

29th May 02 68P02902W70-A iii
GSM-208-623

iv 68P02902W70-A 29th May 02
Chapter 1
Enclosure parts list

29th May 02 68P02902W70-A i
GSM-208-623

ii 68P02902W70-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-623
Chapter 1
FRU items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts 1–1

29th May 02 68P02902W70-A iii
GSM-208-623

iv 68P02902W70-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-623 Parts information introduction
Parts information introduction
Parts list
general
information
The parts lists for this manual reflect the current availability of parts for the
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor and the optional ancillary enclosure.
Each item consists of a description and an order number. This uniquely
identifies the required component. Some components are used in different
equipment in addition to the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor. Some items are
common to both Horizonmacro and M-Cell6.
Enclosure parts
list
The parts list for the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure and its
associated equipment, excluding the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet and ancillary
enclosure, is described in this chapter.
Indoor cabinet
parts list
The parts list for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet is described in Chapter 2.
Ancillary
enclosure parts
list
The parts list for the optional ancillary enclosure is described in Chapter 3.
FRU items
All items in the spares table (see Table 1-2) are Field Replaceable Units (FRUs).
It is not intended that sub-units of these parts will be supplied.
Ordering
method
Contact the local Motorola office for ordering information, including cost and
delivery.
If an item in a parts list is marked TBA, this means that the part number for the
item was not available at the time of publication of this manual.
NOTE Motorola reserves the right to change the design of the
product without notice. The information provided in these
parts lists is intended as a guide. Consult the Motorola
local office for the latest information. They will check the
web site and confirm the current situation.

29th May 02 68P02902W70-A Parts 1–1
Parts information introduction GSM-208-623
Diagram of
Horizonmacro
12 carrier
outdoor
enclosure FRUs
Figure 1-1 shows the location of the FRUs in the enclosure.
RECTIFIERS
AIM
HMS
FAN TRAY
(HIDDEN) POWER
CONTROL
BATTERIES MODULE
FAN TRAY
(HIDDEN)
HEATER
RECTIFIERS
(HIDDEN)
Figure 1-1 Location of FRUs in the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure

Parts 1–2 68P02902W70-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-623 Parts for the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure
Parts for the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure
Enclosure
standard
equipment
The available Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosures are described in
Table 1-1.
Table 1-1 Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosures

Description Order No.
12 carrier outdoor enclosure, 2-tone dark grey, SVLN1290
NCS6010/NCS4010
12 carrier outdoor enclosure, M-Cell match, RAL7044/RAL9002 SVLN1291
12 carrier outdoor enclosure, dark green, RAL6028 SVLN1292
12 carrier outdoor enclosure, dark brown, RAL8028 SVLN1293
12 carrier outdoor enclosure, brick red, RAL2001 SVLN1294
Each enclosure is supplied in standard form with the following equipment
already installed, except where stated otherwise:
S 2 HMS units.
S AC power distribution unit.
S DC power distribution unit.
S Power control module.
S 2 fan trays.
S Heater.
S Alarm Interface Module (AIM).
S –48 V dc distribution panel.
S Smoke detector.
S Lights.
S Power distribution box.
S Heat sensors.
S Backup battery pack (packed separately).
NOTE The rectifiers and Horizonmacro indoor cabinets are not
supplied as part of the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor
enclosure equipment. Two rectifiers are required to power
a partially equipped enclosure (one BTS). Four rectifiers
are required to power a fully equipped enclosure (two
BTSs). A fifth rectifier may be added to provide system
redundancy.

29th May 02 68P02902W70-A Parts 1–3
Parts for the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure GSM-208-623
Spares table
Items classed as FRUs within the Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure
are listed in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor FRUs

HMS unit SVLN1284
AIM SVLN1285
Fan tray (for left side) SVLN1286
Fan tray (for right side) SVLN1287
Fuse pack SVLN1288
Power control module SVLN1289
Heater unit SVLN1383
Battery pack (4 x 12 V monoblocs) SVPN1282
Rectifier SWPN5996
Optional
equipment
Table 1-3 lists optional equipment that can be ordered for use with the
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor enclosure.
Table 1-3 Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor optional equipment

High level feeder cable kit (per sector) SVLN1283
(Includes 1 x 7/16 to N-type cable and 2 x 7/16 to 7/16 cables)
High level hardware kit SVLN1440
Shroud kit, dark grey SVLN1442
Shroud kit, M-Cell match SVLN1443
Shroud kit, dark green SVLN1444
Shroud kit, dark brown SVLN1445
Shroud kit, brick red SVLN1446
Antenna cable termination bracket kit SVLN1483

Parts 1–4 68P02902W70-A 29th May 02
Chapter 2
Horizonmacro indoor cabinet parts
list

29th May 02 68P02902W70-A i
GSM-208-623

ii 68P02902W70-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-623
Chapter 2

29th May 02 68P02902W70-A iii
GSM-208-623

iv 68P02902W70-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-623 Parts for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet
Parts for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet
Diagram of
Horizonmacro
indoor cabinet
FRUs
Figure 2-1 shows the major FRUs in the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet. The door
has been removed for clarity.
ONE SURF (Rx)

THREE Tx BLOCKS
(DCFs SHOWN AS EXAMPLE) T43/BIB
INTERFACE
PANEL
SIX CTUs
CONNECTORS
HEAT SENSORS
LOCATED ON
BACKPLANE
THREE
PSMs
TWO 2-FAN
UNITS
ALARM
BOARD
MCUF
CIRCUIT BREAKER
MODULE (CBM) FMUX/NIU/BPSM
ONE 4-FAN ig.128.rh
UNIT
Figure 2-1 Diagram of the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet, showing major FRUs

29th May 02 68P02902W70-A Parts 2–1
Parts for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet GSM-208-623
Spares table
The FRUs for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet are listed in Table 2-1.
Table 2-1 List of Horizonmacro indoor spares

Description Order No
Indoor cabinet SW1053
1900 CTU TBA
1900 SURF TBA
1900 DCF TBA
1900 DDF TBA
1900 TDF TBA
1900 HCU TBA
1800 CTU SWRG5197
1800 SURF (single band) SWRG2880H
1800 SURF (dual band) SVRG1179H
1800 DCF SVLG1224
1800 DDF SVLG1225
1800 TDF SVLG1226
1800 HCU SVLG1227
900 CTU SWRF5193
900 SURF (single band) SWRF8352H
900 SURF (dual band) SWRF2879H
900 DCF SVLF1224
900 DDF SVLF1225
900 TDF SVLF1226
900 HCU SVLF1227
850 CTU TBA
850 SURF TBA
850 DCF TBA
850 DDF TBA
850 TDF TBA
850 HCU TBA
Dual band TDF SVLX1198
Feedthrough plate assembly SVLN1243
SMA 50 ohm load SVLN1230
MCUF SWLN5227
PCMCIA memory card SWLN5239

Parts 2–2 68P02902W70-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-623 Parts for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet
Description Order No
NIU-E1 SWLN4403
NIU-T1 SWLN4404
FMUX SWLN4406
BPSM SWPN2567
2nd (Extension) Cabinet Fibre SVKN1244
3rd (Extension) Cabinet Fibre SVKN1245
4th (Extension) Cabinet Fibre SVKN1246
BIM/BIB SWLN4024
CIM/T43 SWLN4025
Indoor –48 V PSM SVPN1221
CBM SWHN5519
2-Fan tray SWHN5289B
4-Fan tray SWHN5790B
Alarm board SWLN5228
Door for indoor cabinet SWHN5556
Indoor blanks set SVLN1219

29th May 02 68P02902W70-A Parts 2–3
Parts for the Horizonmacro indoor cabinet GSM-208-623

Parts 2–4 68P02902W70-A 29th May 02
Chapter 3
Ancillary enclosure parts list

29th May 02 68P02902W70-A i
GSM-208-623

ii 68P02902W70-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-623
Chapter 3

29th May 02 68P02902W70-A iii
GSM-208-623

iv 68P02902W70-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-623 Parts for the ancillary enclosure
Parts for the ancillary enclosure
Diagram of the
ancillary
enclosure FRUs
Figure 3-1 shows the location of the FRUs in the optional ancillary enclosure.
The voltage sense cables are not shown.
3 x VOLTAGE SENSE BOARDS

(BEHIND PANEL ON BMM)
BATTERY STRING 3
BATTERY STRING 2
BATTERY STRING 1
HEATER UNIT
Figure 3-1 Location of FRUs in the ancillary enclosure

29th May 02 68P02902W70-A Parts 3–1
Parts for the ancillary enclosure GSM-208-623
Enclosure
standard
equipment
The available ancillary enclosures are described in Table 3-1. The colours are
external only – the internal colour is dark grey (NCS6010-R70B).
Table 3-1 Ancillary enclosure options

Ancillary enclosure, dark grey, NCS4010–R70B SVLN1277
Ancillary enclosure, M-Cell match, RAL7044 SVLN1278
Ancillary enclosure, dark green, RAL6028 SVLN1279
Ancillary enclosure, dark brown, RAL8028 SVLN1280
Ancillary enclosure, brick red, RAL8023 SVLN1281
Each enclosure is supplied in standard form with the following equipment
already installed, except where stated otherwise:
S Battery Management Module (BMM), including 3 x voltage sense boards.
S Heater unit.
S AC isolator switch box.
S Smoke detector.
S Voltage sense cables (x 3), with link bars attached.
S Flexible cable conduits (ac, dc and alarm/control cables preinstalled).
S Light.
Spares table
Items classed as FRUs within the ancillary enclosure are listed in Table 3-2.
Table 3-2 Ancillary enclosure FRUs

Voltage sense cable (x 1) SVKN1488
Fuse pack SVLN1288
Heater unit SVLN1383
Voltage sense board (x 1) SVLN1487
Battery string (4 x 12 V Hawker SBS–C11 monoblocs) SVPN1282

Parts 3–2 68P02902W70-A 29th May 02
Index

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A I–1
GSM-208-020

I–2 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-020
A Ancillary enclosure
ac supply requirements, Inst. 2–3
AC isolator switch, ancillary enclosure, Tech. alarm management, Tech. 10–8
10–9 battery installation, Inst. 5–20
checking normal operation, Maint. 2–16
AC power, system insulation check, Inst. 7–10 circuit diagram, Tech. 10–3
AC power distribution, Tech. 3–1 door opening and closing, Maint. 2–15
enclosure, Tech. 3–3 FRU identification, Parts 3–1
installation, Inst. 5–11
AC power up, main enclosure, Inst. 7–11 internal layout, Inst. 5–2
AC supply maintenance schedule, Maint. 2–15
cable identification, Inst. 3–31 mechanical design, Tech. 10–1
requirements, Tech. 1–10 packaging, Inst. 5–6
site plan, Inst. 2–8
AC supply connection, ancillary enclosure, Inst. structural requirements, Tech. 1–19
5–16 template, Inst. 5–8
AC terminal box, Tech. 2–15 wiring to main enclosure, Inst. 5–15
Acronyms
enclosure, Tech. 1–2 B
indoor cabinet, Tech. 1–4
Backup batteries
AIM, DIP switch settings when ancillary replacement, Maint. 3–5
enclosure used, Inst. 5–19 terminal connections, Maint. 3–5
Alarm interface module Batteries
connector pinouts, Tech. 2–5 float charge adjustment, Maint. 3–9
default DIP switch settings, Inst. 3–36 float charge voltage, Tech. 3–8
DIP switch settings, Tech. 2–13 partial discharge test, Maint. 2–17
interconnection diagram, Tech. 2–3
Battery backup
replacement procedure, Maint. 3–16
circuit breaker, Tech. 3–19
Alarm module, out of service alarm, Tech. 9–24 internal, Tech. 3–19
power duration, Tech. 1–12
Alarms
power duration using ancillary enclosure,
AC 1 fail, Tech. 3–11 Tech. 1–18
ANC smoke, Tech. 3–11 thermal probe, Tech. 3–20
BTS disable, Tech. 3–11
CTU front panel, Tech. 8–8 Battery backup (external), power duration, Inst.
door open, Tech. 2–19 2–5
HMS, Tech. 4–1, Tech. 4–2 Battery backup (internal), power duration, Inst.
hood open, Tech. 2–20 2–5
indoor cabinet pinouts, Inst. 4–41 Battery installation, ancillary enclosure, Inst.
low voltage, Tech. 3–11 5–20
overtemperature, Tech. 3–10
power system, Tech. 3–10 Battery installation procedure, ancillary
enclosure, Inst. 5–22
PSM, Tech. 7–2
rectifier, Tech. 3–15 Battery management module, ancillary
rectifier 1 fail, Tech. 3–11 enclosure, Tech. 10–4
rectifier 2 fail, Tech. 3–11 Battery string replacement, ancillary enclosure,
rectifier fail, Tech. 2–16 Maint. 5–3
smoke, Tech. 2–17, Tech. 3–11
Battery types and specifications, ancillary
Anchor bolts, Inst. 3–14 enclosure, Tech. 1–17

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A I–3
GSM-208-020
Bay level offset calibration, CTU, Maint. 4–24 Combining arrangement, Horizonmacro and
BIB connections, Inst. 4–37 M–Cell6, Inst. 6–9
Commissioning, test equipment, Inst. 7–2
BMM, connector pinouts, Tech. 10–6
Component identification
Bolt anchor installation, Inst. 3–13 ancillary enclosure, Tech. 1–7
BPSM, dc outputs, Tech. 7–3 enclosure, Tech. 1–3
indoor cabinet, Tech. 1–5
BTS architectures, Horizonmacro and M–Cell6,
Inst. 6–2 Condensation, within the enclosure, Inst. 3–7
CSFP, code loading, Tech. 9–9
CTU
C automatic gain control, Tech. 8–12
block diagram, Tech. 8–11
Cabinet fans, reset button, Tech. 6–2 calibration procedure, Maint. 4–20
Cable entry calibration requirements, Inst. 4–8
beneath the enclosure, Inst. 3–24 CCCP processor, Tech. 8–17
high level, Inst. 3–25 configuration at the OMC–R, Tech. 8–29
high level using cable termination bracket, EQCP processor, Tech. 8–16
Inst. 3–28 FMUX fibre optic links, Tech. 8–15
high level using shroud, Inst. 3–27 front panel connectors, Tech. 8–10
low level, Inst. 3–22 front panel LEDs, Tech. 8–8
IF and exciter stages, Tech. 8–13
Cable entry plates IQ modulator, Tech. 8–13
high level, Tech. 2–23 power amplifier, Tech. 8–14
low level, Tech. 2–21 preserve calibration data procedure, Maint.
Cable shroud 4–19
colours, Tech. 1–14 preserving calibration, Maint. 4–13
installation, Inst. 3–27 recalibration procedure, Maint. 4–22
replacement, Maint. 4–10
Cable shroud kit, Tech. 2–24 RSS processor, Tech. 8–16
Cable termination bracket kit, Tech. 2–25 Rx function, Tech. 8–2
installation, Inst. 3–28 shutdown response to overheating, Tech.
6–1
Cables, routeing, Inst. 3–20
traffic data flow, Tech. 8–18
Calibration Tx function, Tech. 8–2
preserving on a CTU, Maint. 4–13 Customer communications equipment, Inst.
Tx output power, Maint. 6–13 7–12
CBIA, Tech. 5–7
CBM, Inst. 7–19 D
fuse ratings, Tech. 7–5 DC connector panel, Tech. 3–18
replacement procedure, Maint. 4–5 DC power distribution, Tech. 3–2
Cell site power (CSPWR), Maint. 4–13 enclosure, Tech. 3–5
calibration, Maint. 6–9 DC power up, main enclosure, Inst. 7–12
checking, E1/T1 link, M–Cell2/6, Maint. 6–18 DC supply connection, ancillary enclosure, Inst.
5–17
CINDY tool, Maint. 6–1
Digital module shelf, equipment locations, Tech.
Circuit breakers 9–1
AC power distribution, Tech. 3–4 Digital modules
DC power distribution, Tech. 3–6 hot pull replacement, Maint. 4–47
CM database, viewing calibration data, Maint. location diagram, Maint. 4–47
4–16 replacement procedures, Maint. 4–48

I–4 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-020
Dimensions, Inst. 2–2 Enclosure temperature

ancillary enclosure, Tech. 1–18 ancillary enclosure, Tech. 1–19
enclosure, Tech. 1–12 environmental limits, Tech. 1–9
indoor cabinet, Tech. 1–12 Environmental requirements, Inst. 2–6
Diversity, Inst. 4–17 Extension cabinet, alarm processing, Tech. 9–24
Door, indoor cabinet, Tech. 5–12 Eyebolts, Inst. 3–8
Door (indoor cabinet), replacement procedure,
Maint. 4–60
F
Duplexers, Inst. 4–16
Fan tray, Tech. 2–16
Duplexing, Tech. 8–2 replacement procedure, Maint. 3–13
Fan unit (indoor cabinet), replacement
procedure, Maint. 4–9
E Fans
HMS, Tech. 4–1
E1/T1 link, checking, M–Cell2/6, Maint. 6–18 indoor cabinet, Tech. 6–2
Earthing Fibre optic cables, Inst. 4–31
main and ancillary enclosures, Inst. 2–14
Fibre optic extension, top panel routeing hole,
main enclosure, Inst. 3–21 Tech. 5–6
Electricity supply FMUX, BTS cabinet extensions, Tech. 9–21
Completion and inspection, Inst. 7–7
Foundation, preparation, Inst. 2–17
Request for connection, Inst. 7–4, Inst. 7–5
Frequency band characteristics, Tech. 1–13
Enclosure
ac supply requirements, Inst. 2–3 Frequency hopping, Tech. 1–13
cable entry options, Inst. 3–21 FRU list
colours, Tech. 1–14 ancillary enclosure, Maint. 5–1
decommissioning checklist, Inst. 8–7 indoor cabinet, Maint. 4–1
earthing, Inst. 3–15 main enclosure, Maint. 3–1
FRU identification, Maint. 3–2, Parts 1–2 Fuses
functional areas, Tech. 2–1 ancillary enclosure, Tech. 1–18
internal view, Tech. 2–2 dc supply, Tech. 3–7
isolation procedure, Maint. 3–1 replacement, Maint. 3–3
lifting, Inst. 3–10
mechanical inspection, Maint. 2–5 Fuses (ancillary enclosure), replacement
normal LED conditions, Maint. 2–3 procedure, Maint. 5–14
separately packed equipment, Inst. 3–3
shipping packaging, Inst. 3–4
site plan, Inst. 2–7
H
structural requirements, Tech. 1–15 Heat management system, Tech. 4–1
template, Inst. 3–10 airflow, Tech. 4–3
template dimensions, Inst. 3–11
Heat sensor, replacement procedure, Maint.
Enclosure door, opening and closing, Inst. 3–9, 4–61
Maint. 2–2 Heat sensors, indoor cabinet, Tech. 6–1
Enclosure doors, locks, Tech. 2–19 Heater, replacement procedure, Maint. 3–11
Enclosure hood, opening and closing, Inst. 3–9, Heater replacement, ancillary enclosure, Maint.
Maint. 2–2 5–9

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A I–5
GSM-208-020
Heater thermostat, Tech. 4–3 Internal batteries

connections, Tech. 3–20
Heater unit, ancillary enclosure, Tech. 10–9
installation diagram, Inst. 3–19
HMS installation procedure, Inst. 3–18
fan temperature setpoints, Tech. 4–5
replacement, Maint. 3–14
specifications, Tech. 4–4 L
HMS testing, Inst. 7–13 Laptop support bracket, Tech. 4–1
HMS unit Lighting
replacement procedure, Maint. 3–15 ancillary enclosure, Tech. 10–10
test adapter, Inst. 7–13 enclosure, Tech. 2–18
Hood, indoor cabinet, Inst. 4–6 Lightning protection, Inst. 4–4

E1/T1 lines, Inst. 3–15
Hood operation, Tech. 2–20
Horizonmacro, combining arrangement, Inst.
6–8 M
M–Cell6
cable gland for connection to Horizonmacro,
I Inst. 6–14
combining arrangement, Inst. 6–7
Indoor cabinet Horizonmacro hardware equivalents, Inst.
alarm module LEDs, Tech. 9–25 6–10
backplane connectors, Tech. 5–8 Maintenance cover, Inst. 3–6
CBIA cage functional areas, Tech. 5–9 MCUF
component identification, Inst. 4–3 code loading, Tech. 9–9
dc power connections, Inst. 4–43 connections between BTS0 and BTS1, Tech.
decommissioning checklist, Inst. 8–4 9–4
door opening and closing, Maint. 2–7 fibre optic links, Tech. 9–3, Inst. 4–31
fan locations, Maint. 2–10, Maint. 4–9 firmware compatibility, Tech. 9–2, Maint.
FRU identification, Maint. 4–2, Parts 2–1 4–50
heat sensor ratings, Maint. 4–61 M–Cell2/6 functionality, Tech. 9–4
identification, Inst. 4–2 PCMCIA interface, Tech. 9–8
interface panel connections, Inst. 4–35 reset and boot code corruption, Tech. 9–8
interface panel connectors, Tech. 5–11
MCUF (GCLK), calibration, Maint. 4–54
lifting, Inst. 4–10
main components, Tech. 5–3 Mixed product configurations, Horizonmacro and
maintenance schedule, Maint. 2–7 M–Cell6, Inst. 6–11
module locations, Maint. 2–11 MSC, E1/T1 line testing, Inst. 3–1
normal LED conditions, Maint. 2–12
power and earth cabling, Inst. 4–42
removal from the enclosure, Inst. 8–3 N
RF connector types, Inst. 4–15
securing bracket and plate locations, Inst. NIU
4–12 database identity, Tech. 9–14, Tech. 9–19
shipping crate, Inst. 4–6 E1/T1 links, Tech. 9–14, Tech. 9–15
front panel LEDs, Tech. 9–15
Interface panel cabling, Inst. 4–34 setting link type at OMC–R, Tech. 9–18
Interface panel connectors, indoor cabinet, Non–diversity, RF configuration diagram, Inst.
Tech. 5–11 4–18

I–6 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02
GSM-208-020
O Rectifier module, Tech. 3–12

pinout connections, Tech. 3–17
OMC–R RF
loopback test, Tech. 8–4 loopback test modes, Tech. 8–6
reporting faulty devices, Maint. 1–1 loopback/VSWR test functions, Tech. 8–5
main components, Tech. 8–3
output power, Tech. 1–11, Inst. 2–4
P RF configurations, Inst. 4–17
Phase lock loop, operating modes, Tech. 9–12 RF functional diagram, Tech. 8–5
PIX, test lead connections, Maint. 6–4 RF link cable kits, Inst. 3–25
PIX alarms, checking, Maint. 6–20 RF plates, replacement procedure, Maint. 4–43
PIX inputs and outputs, Inst. 4–39
Plinth, indoor cabinet, Inst. 4–6 S
Power, consumption, Tech. 1–10 Safety
Power control module, Tech. 3–8 during maintenance, Maint. 1–1
bypass switch, Maint. 3–9 lifting the enclosure, Inst. 3–8
controls and indicators, Tech. 3–9 on site, Inst. 2–11
replacement procedure, Maint. 3–9 pre–power up checks, Inst. 7–3
using eyebolts, Inst. 3–8
Power specifications, ancillary enclosure, Tech.
1–17 Safety precautions
battery installation, Inst. 5–21
Power supply module (indoor cabinet), types of, battery string replacement, ancillary
Tech. 7–1 enclosure, Maint. 5–4
Power up procedure, ancillary enclosure, Inst. Sensitivity, Tech. 1–11, Inst. 2–5
7–20
Sensors, indoor cabinet shutdown, Tech. 6–1
Power up procedures, indoor cabinet, Inst. 7–14
Site plan, Tech. 1–16
Preserve CTU calibration data feature, Maint. ancillary enclosure with main enclosure,
4–18 Tech. 1–20
Principal ground bar (PGB), Tech. 2–15 SMA inputs, unused, Tech. 8–32
PSM Smoke alarm
LED functions, Tech. 7–2 power source, Tech. 3–8
module options, Tech. 7–1 reset, Tech. 2–17
replacement procedure, Maint. 4–7
Smoke detector, ancillary enclosure, Tech. 10–9
replacement type, Maint. 4–6
Software requirements, Tech. 1–10
Specifications
R ancillary enclosure, Tech. 1–17
Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor, Tech. 1–9
Rectifier
configurations, Inst. 3–16 Structural requirements
external monitoring, Tech. 3–15 ancillary enclosure, Inst. 2–7
front panel LEDs, Tech. 3–13 main enclosure, Inst. 2–6
identification, Inst. 3–17 SURF
internal monitoring, Tech. 3–14 module variants, Tech. 8–23
redundancy, Inst. 3–16 receive path, Inst. 4–16
replacement procedure, Maint. 3–7 replacement procedure, Maint. 4–45

29th May 02 68P02902W66-A I–7
GSM-208-020
SURF harness, Tech. 5–4 U

SURF module, dual band description, Tech.
8–29 Unpacking
enclosure, Inst. 3–10
SURF/Tx block, connecting cable types, Inst.
indoor cabinet, Inst. 4–7
4–15
T V
T43, connection to NIU, Tech. 9–20 Verification, Maint. 6–1
T43 connections, Inst. 4–38 Voltage sense board, replacement procedure,
Template Maint. 5–11
ancillary enclosure, Inst. 5–3, Inst. 5–8 Voltage sense cables, replacement procedure,
installation, Inst. 3–11 Maint. 5–13
Test leads, verification, Maint. 6–3 VSWR, checking, Maint. 6–9
Thermal dissipation, Tech. 1–11, Inst. 2–4
Thermal probe, Inst. 3–18
Timeslots, Tech. 8–19, Tech. 8–21
W
Tools, list, Inst. 1–3 Weather, conditions for maintenance, Maint. 1–2
Torque settings, screws, bolts, connectors, Tech. Weather conditions for installation, Inst. 3–5
1–12, Inst. 2–3, Maint. 1–1
Weight
Tx block ancillary enclosure, Tech. 1–18, Inst. 2–2
connector types, Maint. 4–42 enclosure, Tech. 1–12, Inst. 2–2
replacement procedure, Maint. 4–42 indoor cabinet, Tech. 1–12, Inst. 2–2
types, Tech. 8–31
Wiring diagram
Tx block connectors, Tech. 8–33 230 V ac 3–phase (star), Inst. 3–33
Type approval, enclosure, Tech. 1–9 230 V ac single phase, Inst. 3–35

I–8 68P02902W66-A 29th May 02

68p02902w66 A Uk

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Deskripsi Asli:

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

68p02902w66 A Uk

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

CATEGORY 323 CATEGORY 423 CATEGORY 523 CATEGORY 623 INDEX

TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE PARTS INFORMATION

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Copyrights, notices and trademarks

and MOTOROLA are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc.

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Issue status of this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Specifications – ancillary enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 1–17

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Indoor fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 6–2

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

CTU frequency hopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–19

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

DDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 8–44

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Alarm module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tech. 9–23

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Site requirements and considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 2–2

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Equipment delivery and packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–4

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Checking default settings on the AIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 3–36

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Dual cabinet configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 4–24

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Fitting the ancillary enclosure onto its base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 5–11

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Testing the HMS units and the heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inst. 7–13

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Weather conditions affecting access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 1–2

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Ancillary enclosure 24-monthly maintenance procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 2–18

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Additional replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–3

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Calibrating CTU bay level offset tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 4–24

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Replacing a battery string . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 5–3

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Checking the E1/T1 link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maint. 6–18

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Issue status of this manual

Manual Date of Remarks

Service GMR Remarks

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

WARNING Failure to comply with Motorola’s operation, installation

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Special key sequences

CTRL–c Press the Control and c keys at the same time.

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

First aid in case of electric shock

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Reporting safety issues

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Warnings and cautions

Example and format

Example and format

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor

Service Manual: Horizonmacro 12 carrier outdoor